Tutorial - Reference Manual PDF

Chief Architect
Home Designer Suite 2012
Reference Manual
Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur dAlene, Idaho 83815
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com
Copyright 2011 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect,
Inc.
Chief Architect and Home Designer are registered trademarks of Chief Architect, Inc.
This software uses the FreeImage open This software uses the Ruby open source
source image library. See library. See http://www.ruby-lang.org/ for
http://freeimage.sourceforge.net for details. details.
FreeImage is used under the FIPL license,
version 1.0.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective
owners.
Created in the United States of America.

Contents
Chapter 1: Program Overview

Startup Options.......................................................................20
The Home Designer Suite Environment ...............................21
Toolbars...................................................................................23
Menus.......................................................................................25
Dialogs .....................................................................................25
The Status Bar.........................................................................26
Message Boxes .......................................................................26
Default Settings.......................................................................27
Drawing a Plan ........................................................................28
Viewing Your Plan...................................................................29
Getting Help.............................................................................30
About Home Designer Suite ..................................................30
Upgrade to Chief Architect ....................................................31
Chapter 2: File Management

Compatibility with Other Programs.......................................34
Organizing Your Files.............................................................34
Home Designer Suite Data .....................................................35
Creating a New Plan ...............................................................35
Saving a Plan File ...................................................................36
Auto Archive............................................................................38
Undo Files................................................................................39
3
Home Designer Suite 2012 Reference Manual
Opening a Plan File ................................................................39

Searching for Plans ................................................................40
Closing Views and Files.........................................................44
Exiting Home Designer Suite.................................................44
Chapter 3: Default Settings

Default Settings ......................................................................46
Dynamic Defaults ...................................................................46
General Plan Defaults Dialog.................................................47
Set Background Color............................................................48
Angle Style Dialog ..................................................................48
Chapter 4: Toolbars & Hotkeys

Toolbar Arrangement .............................................................52
Hotkeys....................................................................................52
Chapter 5: Layers
Displaying Objects .................................................................54
Layer Sets ...............................................................................54
Display Options Dialog ..........................................................55
Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Architectural vs CAD Objects................................................58
Snap Behaviors ......................................................................58
Object Snaps...........................................................................58
Angle Snaps ............................................................................59
Grid Snaps ..............................................................................59
Creating Objects .....................................................................60
4
Copying and Pasting Objects ................................................61
Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Selecting Objects....................................................................66
Editing Line Based Objects ...................................................68
Editing Arc Based Objects.....................................................70
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects...................................73
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects................................76
Editing Box-Based Objects....................................................78
Editing Spline Based Objects ................................................80
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses .......................................82
Displaying Objects..................................................................84
Moving Objects .......................................................................86
Aligning Objects .....................................................................87
Resizing Objects .....................................................................88
Reshaping Objects .................................................................89
Rotating Objects .....................................................................90
Deleting Objects......................................................................91
Undo and Redo .......................................................................92
Chapter 8: Walls, Railings & Fencing

Wall Defaults ...........................................................................96
The Wall Tools.........................................................................96
The Deck Tools .......................................................................97
The Fencing Tools ..................................................................98
Exterior and Interior Walls .....................................................98
Foundation Walls ....................................................................99
Railings ....................................................................................99
Invisible Walls .......................................................................100
Polygon Shaped Decks ........................................................101
5
Hatch Wall .............................................................................101

Break Wall .............................................................................102
Drawing Walls .......................................................................102
Connecting Walls..................................................................103
Displaying Walls ...................................................................104
Measuring Walls ...................................................................105
Editing Walls .........................................................................106
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ......................108
Aligning Walls .......................................................................109
Roof Directives in Walls.......................................................110
Attic Walls .............................................................................111
Wall Type Definitions ...........................................................112
Wall Specification Dialog .....................................................113
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ..........................................118
Chapter 9: Rooms
Floor and Room Defaults .....................................................120
Room Definition ....................................................................120
Selecting Rooms ..................................................................121
Displaying Rooms ................................................................122
Editing Rooms ......................................................................122
Room Types ..........................................................................123
Room Labels .........................................................................125
Decks .....................................................................................126
Floor & Ceiling Heights ........................................................127
Special Ceilings ....................................................................128
Room Specification Dialog ..................................................130
Chapter 10: Doors

Door Defaults ........................................................................137
6
The Door Tools......................................................................138
Displaying Doors ..................................................................140
Editing Doors ........................................................................141
Changing Door Swings ........................................................142
Special Doors ........................................................................144
Door Specification Dialog ....................................................146
Chapter 11: Windows

Window Defaults ...................................................................154
The Window Tools ................................................................154
Special Windows...................................................................156
Grouped Windows ................................................................157
Displaying Windows .............................................................158
Editing Windows ...................................................................159
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows...............................................160
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs .......................................162
Window Specification Dialog...............................................163
Bay/Box/Bow Window Specification Dialog.......................170
Chapter 12: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults Dialog............................................................172
Floor Tools ............................................................................173
Adding Floors........................................................................173
Displaying Floors..................................................................174
Deleting Floors......................................................................174
Stepped Floor & Ceiling Platforms......................................175
Split Levels ............................................................................175
The Current Floor..................................................................176
The Attic Floor.......................................................................177
The Reference Floor .............................................................177
7
Chapter 13: Foundations

Foundation Defaults .............................................................180
Building a Foundation..........................................................181
Displaying Foundations .......................................................181
Editing Foundations .............................................................182
Deleting Foundations ...........................................................183
Foundations and Rooms......................................................183
Foundations and the Terrain ...............................................184
Chapter 14: Roofs

Roof Defaults ........................................................................188
The Roof Tools......................................................................188
Automatic Roofs ...................................................................189
Build Roof Dialog..................................................................189
Editing Roofs ........................................................................191
Skylights................................................................................192
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ............................192
Dormers .................................................................................193
Editing Auto Dormers...........................................................194
Dormer Specification Dialog................................................195
Roof Returns and Other Details ..........................................197
Roof Pitches in Degrees ......................................................199
Chapter 15: Stairs & Landings

Stair Defaults ........................................................................202
The Stair Tools......................................................................202
Anatomy of a Staircase ........................................................203
Drawing Stairs ......................................................................204
Displaying Stairs and Landings ..........................................205
8
Editing Stairs.........................................................................206
Merging Stair Sections .........................................................206
Landings ................................................................................208
Maintaining Tread Depth ......................................................209
Starter Treads........................................................................210
Wrapped Stairs......................................................................211
Other Special Railings & Stairs ...........................................212
Creating a Stairwell...............................................................212
Rooms Below Staircases .....................................................214
Staircase Specification Dialog.............................................215
Stair Landing Specification Dialog......................................218
Chapter 16: Electrical

The Electrical Tools ..............................................................222
Creating Wiring Schematics ................................................223
Auto Place Outlets ................................................................223
Electrical Library...................................................................224
Displaying Electrical Objects...............................................224
Editing Electrical Objects.....................................................224
Electrical Service Specification Dialog...............................226
Chapter 17: Trim Tools

Trim and Molding Defaults...................................................230
Corner Boards.......................................................................230
Corner Board Specification Dialog .....................................230
Quoins....................................................................................231
Quoin Specification Dialog ..................................................231
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins.....................................232
Millwork..................................................................................233
9
Chapter 18: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ...................................................................235
The Cabinet Tools.................................................................236
Cabinet Fillers .......................................................................238
Placing Cabinets...................................................................238
Displaying Cabinets .............................................................240
Editing Cabinets ...................................................................240
Editing Cabinet Styles..........................................................241
Special Cabinets ...................................................................242
Cabinet Specification Dialog ...............................................244
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog ....................................249
Chapter 19: Terrain

Terrain Perimeter ..................................................................251
Elevation Data Tools ............................................................253
Terrain Modifier Tools ..........................................................256
Terrain Feature Tools ...........................................................257
Garden Bed Tools.................................................................258
Water Feature Tools .............................................................259
Stepping Stone Tools...........................................................260
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools................................................260
Terrain Objects in the Library..............................................261
Displaying Terrain ................................................................262
Editing Terrain Objects ........................................................263
Terrain Object Specification Dialogs ..................................263
Terrain Specification Dialog ................................................263
Elevation Point Specification Dialog ..................................265
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog.......................266
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog .........................................267
10
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog..................268
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ..................................268
Garden Bed Specification Dialog ........................................272
Terrain Path Specification Dialog........................................272
Importing Elevation Data......................................................273
Import Terrain Wizard...........................................................273
Import GPS Data Wizard.......................................................275
Plant Tools.............................................................................278
Plant Image Specification Dialog ........................................279
Plant Chooser Dialog............................................................281
Plant Schedules ....................................................................283
Hardiness Zones ...................................................................283
Chapter 20: Roads, Driveways & Sidewalks

Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools...................................286
Displaying Road Objects......................................................287
Editing Road Objects............................................................287
Road Specification Dialog....................................................288
Chapter 21: Other Objects

General Shapes.....................................................................291
Soffits.....................................................................................291
Special Applications for Soffits...........................................292
Calculating Materials on Soffits ..........................................293
Soffit Specification Dialog ...................................................294
Fireplaces ..............................................................................295
Fireplace Specification Dialog.............................................296
Library Fireplaces .................................................................298
Chimneys...............................................................................299
11
Chapter 22: Architectural Blocks

Displaying Architectural Blocks..........................................302
Editing Architectural Blocks................................................302
Architectural Blocks and Sub-Objects ...............................302
Chapter 23: The Library

The Library Browser.............................................................306
Searching the Library...........................................................309
Library Content .....................................................................310
Downloading Library Content .............................................311
Importing Library Catalogs..................................................312
Adding Library Content........................................................313
Organizing the Library .........................................................315
Exporting Library Catalogs..................................................317
Placing Library Objects .......................................................318
Select Library Object Dialog................................................319
Displaying Library Objects ..................................................320
Editing Library Objects ........................................................321
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs .................................322
Chapter 24: Materials

About Materials.....................................................................325
The Material Painter ............................................................326
Materials Tab.........................................................................328
Editing Materials ...................................................................329
Creating Materials ................................................................330
Define Material Dialog ..........................................................331
Material Defaults ...................................................................333
Color Chooser Dialog...........................................................334
12
Chapter 25: Zoom & View Tools
Zoom Tools............................................................................336
Undo Zoom ............................................................................336
Fill Window ............................................................................337
Panning the Display..............................................................337
Swapping Views....................................................................338
Window Menu Tools .............................................................338
Cascade .................................................................................339
Tiling Views ...........................................................................341
Arrange Icons........................................................................342
Closing Views........................................................................342
Chapter 26: 3D Views

OpenGL and Hardware .........................................................344
3D Backdrop Dialog..............................................................344
Render Quality ......................................................................345
3D View Tools........................................................................346
Creating Camera Views ........................................................346
Creating Overviews ..............................................................347
Cross Section/Elevation Views............................................348
Displaying 3D Views .............................................................349
Editing 3D Views ...................................................................351
Cross Section Slider.............................................................355
Working in 3D .......................................................................356
Saving & Printing 3D Views .................................................357
Camera Specification Dialog ...............................................358
Chapter 27: 3D Rendering

Rendering Tips......................................................................361
13
Lighting .................................................................................362
Displaying Lights..................................................................363
Default Sun Light Specification Dialog...............................364
Glass House View.................................................................364
Speeding up 3D View Generation .......................................365
Chapter 28: Dimensions

Dimension Unit Defaults ......................................................367
Dimension Defaults Dialog ..................................................367
The Dimension Tools ...........................................................370
Displaying Dimension Lines................................................372
Editing Dimension Lines......................................................372
Editing Extension Lines .......................................................374
Moving Objects Using Dimensions.....................................376
Dimension Line Specification Dialog..................................377
Chapter 29: Text

Text Defaults .........................................................................379
Fonts and Alphabets ............................................................380
The Text Tools ......................................................................380
Creating Text.........................................................................381
Displaying Text .....................................................................381
Rich Text Specification Dialog ............................................381
Text Specification Dialog .....................................................384
Editing Text ..........................................................................384
Copying & Pasting Text .......................................................386
Text Arrows ...........................................................................387
Text Styles.............................................................................388
14
Chapter 30: CAD Objects
The CAD Drawing Tools .......................................................391
Line Specification Dialog .....................................................394
Arc Specification Dialog.......................................................396
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog ....................398
Polylines ................................................................................399
Polyline Specification Dialog...............................................399
CAD Box Specification Dialog .............................................401
Displaying CAD Objects.......................................................402
Chapter 31: Project Planning

House Wizard ........................................................................403
Plan Check.............................................................................405
Loan Calculator.....................................................................406
Chapter 32: Pictures, Images, & Walkthroughs

Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects .....................410
Images....................................................................................410
Displaying Images ................................................................411
Editing Images ......................................................................412
Image Specification Dialog ..................................................413
Pictures..................................................................................414
Editing Pictures.....................................................................415
Picture File Box Specification Dialog .................................415
Metafiles.................................................................................416
Editing Metafiles ...................................................................416
Metafile Specification Dialog ...............................................417
Copy Region as Picture........................................................417
Walkthroughs ........................................................................418
15
Chapter 33: Importing & Exporting

DXF File Format ....................................................................421
Exporting 2D DXF Files ........................................................422
Additional 2D Export Information .......................................423
3D Data Import Requirements .............................................424
Importing 3D Symbols..........................................................425
Chapter 34: Printing

Introduction to Printing........................................................430
Printers ..................................................................................430
The Printing Tools ................................................................431
Display Options and Printing ..............................................432
Printing Directly from a View...............................................432
Printing to Scale ...................................................................433
Printing Across Multiple Pages...........................................433
Printing to a PDF File ...........................................................434
Page Setup Dialog ................................................................435
Print Dialog ...........................................................................436
Print Image Dialog ................................................................437
Print Model ............................................................................437
Chapter 35: Materials Lists

The Materials List Tools.......................................................442
Creating an Accurate Materials List....................................443
Organizing Materials Lists ...................................................443
Materials List Display Options Dialog ................................444
Editing Materials Lists..........................................................445
Exporting the Materials List.................................................446
Conditioned Area Totals ......................................................446
16
Structural Member Reporting ..............................................447
Appendix A: Additional Resources

Reference Manual .................................................................449
Users Guide..........................................................................449
Online Help Videos ...............................................................450
Home Designer Web Site .....................................................450
Home Talk Online User Forum ............................................450
Technical Support.................................................................450
Upgrade to Chief Architect ..................................................451
Appendix B: Technical Support Services

Reference and Training Resources.....................................453
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues .....................454
Troubleshooting Printing Problems....................................454
Error Messages .....................................................................456
Contacting Technical Support.............................................457
17
18
Chapter 1:
Program Overview
Home Designer Suite is designed to help Chapter Contents

home enthusiasts visualize, develop and Startup Options
share their design ideas. Home Designer The Home Designer Suite Environment
Suite uses parametric design technology, Toolbars
which means that as you draw, a 3D model is Menus
created and is updated as you make changes. Dialogs
You can tile a floor plan view next to a 3D The Status Bar
view and watch one update automatically as Message Boxes
you draw in the other. Default Settings
Drawing a Plan
Viewing Your Plan
Getting Help
About Home Designer Suite
19
Startup Options
When Home Designer Suite opens, The Startup Options dialog can be opened at
the Startup Options dialog displays, any time by selecting File> Startup
allowing you to choose how you want to Options .
begin working in the program or access
useful resources.
1 3
4 5
1 Getting Started- Click to launch your Click New Plan to open a new, blank
default internet browser to the Getting plan. See Creating a New Plan on page
Started page on our web site, 35.
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. There,
you will find links to a variety of online Choose Open Plan to work on an
resources to help you begin using the existing plan file. See Opening a Plan
program. File on page 39.
2 Select a File command to open a .plan

file.
20
The Home Designer Suite Environment
3 Recent Files lists the names of the most To have the Startup Options dialog display
recently opened files. Click on a name at startup again, select File> Startup
to open the file. Options and place a check mark at Show
Options on Startup.
34 Remove the check from Show Options
on Startup if you do not want this
dialog to display when you launch Home 35 The Build number of the program
version you are using and the first five
Designer Suite. Instead, a new blank plan the characters of your software license Product
Create New Plan dialog opens.
Key display here.
The Home Designer Suite Environment

Object-Based Design Architectural objects take up space in all
three dimensions and their height, width and
Home Designer Suites parametric, object- depth can be specified in Imperial or metric
based design technology means you place units. In addition, the location of objects can
and edit objects, rather than work with the be precisely defined using coordinates, again
many individual lines or surfaces used to specified in Imperial or metric units.
represent them.
CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up
You can quickly select and edit the location, space in two dimensions in the current view.
size, shape, style and other properties of Their dimensions can also be specified in
objects as well as change the materials Imperial or metric units and their locations
applied to their surfaces. precisely defined using coordinates.
Use Home Designer Suites editing
capabilities to make the objects you place in Easy Access to Tools
a plan match the objects they represent in
You can access Home Designer Suites
real life. For example, you can set up your
features in various ways using the mouse and
windows and doors to match those available
keyboard.
from your supplier.
Menus provide access to most tools.
3D Drafting Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast
access to tools and let you customize the
In Home Designer Suite, the entire drawing
interface.
area is laid out on a Cartesian grid, a three
dimensional coordinate system described Keyboard shortcuts are available for most
using the X, Y and Z axes. The current tools.
position of your mouse pointer displays in Contextual menus display with a right-
the Status Bar at the bottom of the program click of the mouse.
window.
21
The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen

provides tool descriptions and other
information about the current task.
Title
Bar
Menus
Parent
Tools Library
Browser
Edit
Toolbar
Temporary
Library
Dimension
Preview
Panes
Selected
Object
Reference Pointer Crosshair Status Bar

Grid Lines Lines
Using the Mouse

Note: If you are left-handed and have re-pro-
Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are grammed your mouse, reverse the instruc-
created by clicking the left mouse button. tions for left and right buttons in this manual.
Others, such as walls, stairs and dimension
lines, are created by dragging the pointer The Right button has several uses.
from one end of the object to the other. Right-click to select any object.
The left button is the primary
button used in Home Designer
Suite. Unless specified otherwise, If, for example, the Straight Exterior
Home Designer Suite Wall tool is active, the left mouse button
documentation refers to the left mouse allows you to select only walls. You can
button. select other object types such as cabinets
with the right mouse button.
22
Toolbars
You can also use the right mouse button to

open a context sensitive menu with
additional editing commands.
The Middle button can be used to The Move handle at the objects center lets
pan in floor plan view you move the object. See Moving Objects
You can also program it to work as a on page 86.
double-click.
The Mouse Wheel can be used to
zoom in and out in most views.
The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate

Using the Edit Handles the object. See Rotating Objects on page
When you select an object, its edit handles 90.
display.
When you pass the mouse over the edit
handles, the pointer changes to show how
you can use that handle.
You can cancel any edit handle operation
A two-headed arrow indicates that the before it is completed by pressing the Esc
object, corner or edge can be moved in key on your keyboard or by pressing any two
the direction of the arrows. mouse buttons at the same time.
A four-headed arrow indicates that the The edit handles that display depend on the
selected object or edge may be moved in type of object selected, the current view, and
multiple directions. how far you are zoomed out.
A circular arrow indicates that the
Edit handles do not resize as you zoom in or
selected object can be rotated.
out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some
Resize handles display along the edges of the edit handles may be hidden so that they do
object are used to change the size. See not stack over one another. As you zoom in,
Resizing Objects on page 88. these handles become visible again.
Toolbars
Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest, toolbars that control camera position display
easiest way to access many program features. in 3D views but not in floor plan view.
The toolbars that display in a given view When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
depend on the view type. For example, button, a tool tip displays the name of the
23
tool. When you see one of these tool tips, When you click the Window Tools
press F1 to get more information about that parent button, for example, its child buttons
item. A more detailed description displays in display to the right.
the Status Bar at the bottom of the window.
You can use either of two styles of toolbar
interface: drop-down tools or parent-child
buttons. You can select either Parent - Child or Drop-
Down tools by selecting Tools> Toolbars>
Drop-Down Tools from the menu..
Click on the arrow to the right of a button to The Edit Toolbar

display a drop-down list of related tools. For
example, click the arrow to the right of the When you select an object, the edit toolbar
appears. By default, it is located at the upper
Window button to display a drop-down
left side of the program window. The toolbar
list of the other Window Tools.
buttons that display can be used to edit the
selected object(s). Which buttons display
depends on the type of object selected, the
current view, and how you selected the
object.
The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the

options in the contextual menu when you
right-click on an object.
The most recently selected tool displays in Hotkeys

the toolbar.
Many commands can be invoked from the
keyboard. Press Alt on your keyboard and
Parent and Child Tools press the underlined letter in a menu name to
An alternative to the Drop-Down toolbar access that menu, as well as items in the
interface are Parent and Child tools. Parent menus and submenus.
toolbar buttons have a blue triangle in the Other keys or key combinations will invoke a
lower right corner. When you select a parent variety of program commands. If a Home
button, child tools display on the right side of Designer Suite menu item has a keyboard
the toolbar. shortcut, or hotkey, associated with it, that
hotkey will display to the right of its name in
the menu.
24
Menus
Menus
Home Designer Suite uses a standard item has a hotkey, it will display to the right
Windows menu format. The menus are of the items name. See Hotkeys on page
located below the title bar in the program 52.
window and can be used to access nearly all
tools in the program. Click on a menu name
to expand it, then click on a menu item to
either activate that tool or access the items
submenu. Items with a submenu have an
Edit menu items with button icons
arrow to the right of the name. to the left and hotkeys to the right
Menu items with an icon to their left have a
In the Home Designer Suite documentation,
toolbar button associated with them.
menu paths are written in this format: Build>
The menus can be accessed using the
Window> Box Window . An icon image
keyboard. Press the Alt key once to enable
after the menu path indicates that a toolbar
this functionality - one letter in each menu
button is also available.
will become underlined. Press the key
associated with one of these underlined
letters to expand its menu - one letter in each
Contextual Menus
menu items name will be underlined. Press Contextual menus are context sensitive
the key associated with one of these letters to menus that display tools relevant to a
activate that tool or access the items selected object or view.
submenu. Press the Esc key to undo your last
selection, or click with the mouse to exit out To access contextual menus, right-click on an
of this functionality. object, in an empty space in a view window
or in a text field in any dialog box.
Many tools in Home Designer Suite also
have hotkeys associated with them. If a menu
Dialogs
Default settings, object specifications, Press the Tab key proceed from one set-
display settings, and many other functions ting to the next, or Shift + Tab to go in the
are accessed through dialog boxes. reverse direction.
Dialog tabs and settings can be accessed Line items in tree lists can be browsed
using the mouse. You can also navigate the using the arrow keys. Up and Down navi-
settings on a given dialog tab using the gate the list, while Left and Right expand
keyboard: and contract categories.
25
Some dialog boxes are resizable. Resizable

Settings with spin control arrows can
dialogs have a size grip at the lower right
be adjusted by typing in the text field,
corner of the box which you can click and
using the up and down arrow keys, or the
drag.
mouse scroll wheel.
Settings with slider bars can be Specification Dialogs

adjusted by typing in the text field, using
Each object in Home Designer Suite
the left and right arrow keys, or the
has a unique specification dialog where
mouse scroll wheel.
you can enter size, style and other
Press Enter on your keyboard to close information specific to the selected object.
any dialog and apply your changes. To access it, select the object and click the
Many dialogs have a preview that shows how Open Object edit button. You can also
the changes affect the object. This preview double-click on an object with the Select
updates when you click in a different field or Objects tool active to open its
press the Tab key on your keyboard. specification dialog. See Selecting Objects
on page 66.
The Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the main A description of the selected object.
program window displays information about The total number of objects currently
the current state of the program. group-selected.
This information depends on a variety of Basic information about a selected library
conditions such as the type of object object, folder, or catalog.
selected, and the current position of the
The current floor.
pointer. The information may include the
following: The screen redraw time.
A brief description of the toolbar button The length and/or angle of an object as it
or menu item highlighted by the mouse. is being drawn.
Message Boxes
As you work in Home Designer Suite, the problem, or if the program encounters a
program will alert you if you command it to problem that needs your attention.
do something that could potentially cause a
26
Default Settings
Press the Tab key proceed from one set-

ting to the next, or Shift + Tab to go in the
reverse direction.
When a checkbox is the active setting,
press the Spacebar to check or to clear it.
Buttons have hotkeys associated with
them. Press the Alt key on the keyboard
Situations where such message boxes may to underline the hotkeys in the current
display include: message box.
Closing a file without saving; Press Enter on your keyboard to close the
A file referenced outside the program, message box and perform the action asso-
such as an image or texture, is missing; ciated with the highlighted button.
Creating an object in a space too small to Some message boxes include a Remember
contain it. my choice or a Do not show this again
checkbox. Check this box to prevent
You can access the settings in a message box
messages of this specific type from
using the mouse, or navigate them using the
displaying in the future.
keyboard:
To allow all message boxes to display again,
select Help> Reset Message Boxes.
Default Settings
Default settings control many aspects of the Door gets its initial values from the Door
user interface and tool behavior in Home Defaults dialog.
Designer Suite. You can use these settings to
customize the program to suit your personal Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial
work style. properties can be overridden, but setting up
your defaults before you begin drawing can
For more information about defaults, see save you considerable time as you build a
Default Settings on page 45. model in the program.
Defaults Dynamic Defaults

Most objects in Home Designer Suite derive Dynamic defaults are values that affect
their intial properties from their respective existing objects in a plan.
default dialogs.
In specification dialogs, dynamic default
For example, a newly placed Window values have a Default checkbox beside them
gets its initial values from the Window or a [D] in their text fields. As long as this
Defaults dialog and a newly placed Hinged
27
checkbox is checked or the [D] is present, specification dialog. Objects you edit in this
changes made to the default affect the object. way do not update if you change the default.
To edit an individual object, you must delete To restore a value to the default, click to
the [D] or uncheck the box in the place a check in the Default checkbox or
type a d into an edit box.
Drawing a Plan
When you draw a plan in Home Designer 3. Adjust the perimeter shape and size as
Suite, you are placing 3D objects that required. See Using the Edit Handles
represent building components. Home on page 106.
Designer Suite comes with predefined 4. Place any first floor bearing walls.
default settings so you can start drawing
plans immediately. You should review these 5. Define types for special rooms such as
default settings to be sure they match your garages and decks in the plan. See
drawing and building methods. See Default Room Types on page 123.
Settings on page 45. 6. Place perimeter doors and windows. See
Doors on page 137 and Windows on
Set the Defaults page 153.
Default Wall Types. Specify the defaults for 7. Build additional floors. See Adding
walls. See Wall Defaults on page 96. Floors on page 173.
8. Specify the default ceiling height for
Set material defaults for roof, walls, and
each floor as soon as it is created. See
rooms.
Floor Defaults Dialog on page 172.
Set style defaults for doors, windows, mold- 9. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional
ing, cabinets and other objects. floors as needed. See Editing Walls on
page 106.
Draw the Floors
10. Align edited or moved walls with those
above or below where appropriate. See
1. While the size of the drawing area in
Aligning Walls on page 109.
Home Designer Suite is limited only by
the resources on your computer, it is
best to begin your drawing near the ori- Entering Dimensions
gin, 0,0,0. See 3D Drafting on page When using Imperial units, enter distances as
21. inches or feet and inches, in fractional or
2. Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1. See decimal form. Millimeters are the default
Drawing Walls on page 102. unit for all metric distances. See Dimen-
sions on page 367.
28
Viewing Your Plan
To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or 4. Place any other foundation walls
the program assumes inches. required.
In most cases, the program allows 5. Align with Above as needed. See
precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractions Aligning Walls on page 109.
with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are
allowed. Add Structure and Details
The program usually converts decimals
to fractions. 1. Build non-structural interior walls.
Begin on floor one and work up in mul-
Build the Foundation tiple story structures.
2. Add walls where needed to create fea-
1. Derive the foundation plan from the first tures such as chimney chases, plumbing
floor. See Building a Foundation on walls, or Open Below areas.
page 181. 3. Finish the relevant interior structure
2. Adjust the foundation perimeter shape including interior doors, doorways, cabi-
as needed. nets, fixtures, and fireplaces.
3. Place interior foundation walls as 4. Build the terrain and landscaping. See
needed for the first floor bearing walls. Terrain on page 251.
Viewing Your Plan

You can see your model in a variety of objects in 3D views and can control which
different 2D and 3D views. You can display objects are visible. See 3D Views on page
more than one view at a time and in any 343.
view, you can pan or zoom in or out. See You can also create Doll House Views that
Zoom & View Tools on page 335. show only the current floor. Ceilings are
Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model and omitted so you can see the interior, visualize
is most commonly used for drawing and the relationships between spaces, and plan
editing. In floor plan view, each floor displays traffic flow.
separately and you can only edit one floor at a Framing Overviews display framing in 3D.
time; however, you have extensive control You can customize 3D views to serve special
over which objects display at any given time, purposes such as this.
can easily switch between floors, and can also
display items on a second floor for reference. All views can be exported as a graphic
image. See To export a picture on page
You can create interior and exterior 3D views
414.
of your model from any perspective. As in
floor plan view, you can select and edit many
29
Getting Help
There are many forms of help Home Designer Suite. Select Help>
available in Home Designer Suite Contents & Index to open the online
including: Tool Tips, the Status Bar, and the Help and explore the table of contents,
online Help menu. browse the Index, or search for keywords.
All these forms of help assume you have a
basic working knowledge of the Windows Current Mode Help
operating system, including how to use a
Online Help can also be used to provide
mouse, open, close and save files, copy,
instant information about toolbar buttons,
paste, and right-click to access contextual
menu items, and objects in your plan.
menus. Help also assumes you are familiar
with Windows terms. When you move the cursor over a toolbar
button or menu item, a brief summary of
More information is available in the product that tool displays in the Status Bar. Press
documentation in electronic format and on the F1 key to open online Help to a page
Home Designers official web site, with more information about the tool.
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. See
Additional Resources on page 449. When an object is selected, edit handles
display. Place the cursor over an edit han-
Tool Tips dle and press F1 to open online Help to a
page with information about that handle.
When you move the pointer over a toolbar Press the Help button in any dialog box
button or menu item, a Tool Tipdisplays, to open online Help to a page describing
offering a brief description of the tool. More the options in that dialog.
information displays in the Status Bar at the
bottom of the window.
Chief Architect strives to make our docu-
Online Help Menu mentation as helpful as possible for all of
our customers. Please send any questions,
Online Help is a searchable menu that comments, or feedback to
provides information about all of the tools in documentation@chiefarchitect.com.
About Home Designer Suite

Select Help> About Home Designer Suite Contact information for Chief Architect, Inc.
to view information about your software is available on the More Information tab.
license, the programs version number, and
its release date.
30
Upgrade to Chief Architect

Select Help> Upgrade to Chief Architect to Chief Architect can open plans originally
launch your default web browser to the Chief created in Home Designer, and offers an
Architect web page, www.chiefarchi- extensive set of drawing, editing and
tect.com, where you can learn about this rendering tools that allows you to produce
powerful home design software for building complete, professional working drawings.
professionals.
31
32
Chapter 2:
File Management
Home Designer Suite saves the complete 3D Chapter Contents

model of a structure and surrounding terrain Compatibility with Other Programs
as well as any CAD data associated with the Organizing Your Files
model in .plan files. Home Designer Suite Data
All commands related to opening, saving and Creating a New Plan
closing plans are located in the File menu. Saving a Plan File
You can also open plans from the Startup Auto Archive
Options dialog. See Startup Options on Undo Files
page 20. Opening a Plan File
Searching for Plans
Just as with files created in other software Closing Views and Files
applications, you should back up your plan Exiting Home Designer Suite
files externally on a regular basis to avoid
accidental loss of work.
33
Compatibility with Other Programs

Plans produced in the following programs Trading Spaces Design Companion
can all be read by Home Designer Suite
2012.
Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not devel-
Chief Architect 5.0 through 10.08 (read oped by Chief Architect, Inc. Plans written
only) using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot
be read by Home Designer Suite.
Chief Architect X1, X2 and X3 (limited
editability if enabled) Files that have been opened and saved in

3D Home Architect 3.0 and 4.0 Home Designer Suite 2012 cannot be read by
the programs listed above. To continue to
Chief Architect Home Edition 5.0 read files in the program in which they were
All Better Homes and Gardens Home created, be sure to create copies of your files
before opening them in Home Designer Suite
Designer products, Interior Designer,
2012.
and Landscaping and Deck Designer, Ver-
sions 6 through 8. Plans created in Chief Architect, build 11.4
and later, can be opened in Home Designer
All Chief Architect Home Designer
programs for viewing and annotating only.
products, Interior Designer, and Land-
Limited editability in Home Designer
scaping and Deck Designer, Version 9.
programs is an option that can be enabled
when the file is opened in Chief Architect.
Organizing Your Files

You should keep your plan files separate Create a folder in your Documents direc-
from the support files needed to run Home tory (My Documents in Windows XP)
Designer Suite. To keep files organized, you called Home Designer Suite Plans or
may find it helpful to create a new folder for another name you prefer. See Microsoft
each project. Windows Help to learn how to create
folders.
Home Designer Suite files may use imported
images, textures and other custom content Inside this folder, make a new folder for
saved in their own external data files. each project. Save all the files for that
Consider storing copies of all external files in project inside this folder, including plan
the same folder as the plan files that use them files and referenced external files. See
so that they are easily found. Saving a Plan File on page 36.
Here is one way to organize your files: Bear in mind, though, that path names
exceeding 260 characters cannot be opened
by Home Designer Suite. As a result, it is a
34
Home Designer Suite Data
good idea to limit the number of embedded Once you understand the file management of
folders you use in your file organization Home Designer Suite, you can decide on a
method. naming convention that suits your needs.
Home Designer Suite Data

When Home Designer Suite 2012 is Templates - A folder of plan template
installed, the program automatically creates a files. See Creating a New Plan on page
folder in the user Documents directory called 35.
Home Designer Suite 2012 Data. This Textures - A folder of texture files,
folder contains important user-specific including textures referenced by installed
information saved in the following folders template files, that can be used to create
and files and should not be moved, renamed custom materials. See Creating Materi-
or deleted: als on page 330.
Archives - A folder of automatically Toolbars - A folder of toolbar files. See
archived plan files. See Auto Archive Toolbar Arrangement on page 52.
on page 38.
Backdrops - A folder of custom back-
If the Home Designer Suite 2012 Data
drop images. See 3D Backdrops on
folder is renamed, moved or deleted,
page 350. the program will automatically replace it
Images - A folder of custom images. See using default information from the Home
Adding Materials and Images on page Designer Suite installation folder. When this
occurs, customized user settings and cus-
314.
tom user library content will not be available.
Database Libraries - A folder of user
library data. See Library Content on Because the Home Designer Suite 2012 Data
page 310. contains custom user data, it is not deleted
Scripts - A folder for custom Ruby when the program is uninstalled. See
scripts associated with Chief Architect Uninstalling Home Designer Suite on page
plans. 22 of the Users Guide.
Creating a New Plan

To open the Create New Plan dialog, Template Plans
select File> New Plan.
When you select File> New Plan in
You can also choose New Plan in the Home Designer Suite, the Create New
Startup Options dialog. See Startup Plan dialog opens, letting you select a
Options on page 20. template for your new plan. The resulting
new plan uses either metric or Imperial units
35
of measurement and predefined default

settings, layer settings, wall definitions, and
page setup information.
Home Designer Suite includes a selection of Default, as you cannot change the plan style
plan templates, each with different default template once a plan has been created.
settings that allow you to begin working in a
Select either U.S. Units or Metric Units of
particular plan style quickly. See Default
measurement, and click OK. The floor plan
Settings on page 46.
view window opens, ready for you to begin
Choose a category from the drop-down list, drawing.
then select a style template from the
New, blank plans are called Untitled.plan.
scrollable list beneath it. If you are uncertain
Unless these files are named and saved, they
as to the right style for your plan, choose
will be lost when closed.
Saving a Plan File

When you first save a new,
untitled file, you must select a Although the program warns you if you
location for it on your computer and give it a try to exit without saving, you should get
name. There are two options for saving plan in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
files: File> Save and File> Save As. the program.
36
Saving a Plan File
Both Save and Save As can be used Initially, all Open and Save As
to save your plan files; however, they operations go to the My Documents folder
accomplish this in two different ways. of your computer. After that, the location last
visited is remembered and subsequent
File> Save saves the current state of
your plan file without changing its name Open or Save As commands default
and should normally be used for saving to the directory last used for that operation.
your work. This path is saved when the program exits.
The next time Home Designer Suite is
File> Save As opens the Save Plan launched, these defaults are used.
File dialog, allowing you to save the plan
file using a different name or location on Exporting Files
your computer.
Home Designer Suite has a number of
To save an untitled plan file options for exporting and importing
information out of and your drawings. Often,
file export dialogs are nearly identical to the
1. Select File> Save to open the Save Save Plan File dialog. See Pictures,
Plan File dialog. Images, & Walkthroughs on page 409.
Similarly, file import dialogs are often
similar to the Open Plan File dialog. See
Importing Files on page 40.
Backing Up Your Files

It is always a good idea to create backup
copies of all your important files on your
computer.
2. In the Save in drop-down, browse to the It is strongly recommended, however, that
location on your computer where you you never save directly onto removable
would like to save the file. See Orga- media such as a USB thumb drive, CD, or
nizing Your Files on page 34. DVD. Instead, copy your files to such
3. In the File name text field, type a name locations in Windows Explorer only after
for the file. you have saved them on your computers
hard drive and exited the program.
4. Home Designer Suite automatically
assigns the File of type and file exten- Archive folders are used by Home Designer
sion .plan. Suite to manage prior versions of your files.
5. When both the Save in location and File You should not view these files as a
name are correct, click Save. substitute for your own backup routine, and
should never save a file in an archive folder.
See Auto Archive on page 38.
37
When backing up your Home Designer Suite up. See Home Designer Suite Data on page
files, consider backing up not only your 35.
.plan files, but your custom user data, as well
You can, if you wish, create a folder inside
- including library content, toolbar
the Data folder for your .plan files, as well.
configurations, and textures. This custom
See Organizing Your Files on page 34.
data is all located in the Home Designer
Suite Data folder, so it can be easily backed
Auto Archive
The first time a plan is saved, Home Creating a New Plan on page 35. As soon
Designer Suite creates an Archive folder in as the file is open, use Save As to save
the Home Designer Suite Data folder. The this file to another location.
Archive folder contains Auto Save and
Archive files.
Auto Save Files
The program does not create Auto Save and
As you work, Home Designer Suite
Archive files for untitled plans. In order for
automatically creates Auto Save files at
these to be created, a file must have been
regular intervals when changes are made to a
previously saved and given a name and save
file but not saved by selecting File>
location on your computer.
Save .
Auto Save and Archive files should not be
viewed as a substitute for regularly saving These Auto Save files are appended
_auto_save.plan and are saved in the
your work by selecting File> Save or
Archive folder.
pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard, nor should
they be considered an alternative to your own When you close a file normally, its Auto
file backup routine. Save file is retained until the next time the
file is opened - at which time the Auto Save
Archive Files file is overwritten.
Every time a drawing is saved, Archive files
that keep a historical archive of your plan are
automatically created. Auto Save file after normal shut-down
Plan files from previous versions of the Auto save files created as a result of an
program are automatically moved to the improper program shutdown are appended
archive folder when the plan is opened and _auto_save_bak.plan.
saved in Home Designer Suite.
Archive files are meant to be for emergency
use only. If you must access an archive file, Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down
open it as you would any other file. See
38
Undo Files
If your computer shuts down accidentally,

you can recover some of your work by
opening the _auto_save_bak file.
A file is auto saved only if you have

saved it previously. Auto Save does not Even with Auto Save, you should save your
work for unnamed files. work manually on a regular basis using any
of the following methods:
When you reopen a file after a computer shut
down or system crash, the following dialog Click the Save button.
displays if an Auto Save file newer than the Select File> Save .
original file is found.
Press Ctrl + S on the keyboard.
Undo Files
Home Designer Suite stores a set number of Undo files are stored in the Windows
copies of all open plan file changes, known Temporary Directory. When you use
as undo files. Undo files are referenced Windows system cleanup features, these files
whenever you select Edit> Undo or can be deleted. Because of this, you should
only use these type of utilities when Home
Edit> Redo . See Undo and Redo on Designer Suite is not running.
page 92.
When Home Designer Suite is closed
normally, any current Undo files are deleted.
Opening a Plan File

Select File> Open Plan to open an
existing .plan file located on your Never open a file located on a server or
computer. Home Designer Suite other computer on a network, or on a
automatically browses to the directory last removable storage device. Copy such files to
your local machines hard drive first, and then
used. open the copy.
The Open Plan File dialog can be resized by

clicking and dragging the lower right corner.
39
In the Look in drop-down, browse to the Importing Files

location on your computer where the file
you wish to open is saved. Home Designer Suite has a number of
options for exporting and importing
Any folders and .plan files in the current information out of and into your drawings.
location display in the field below. The Often, file import dialogs are nearly identical
file type that displays depends on the to the Open Plan File dialog. See Pictures,
Files of Type selection. Images, & Walkthroughs on page 409.
Click on the file you wish to open. Its
Similarly, file export dialogs are often similar
name will display in the File name text
to the Save Plan File dialog. See Exporting
field.
Files on page 37.
The only file type available in the Files of
type list is .plan. Recently Opened Files
When the desired file is selected, click
The names of the plan files you most recently
Open.
opened or saved display at the bottom of the
Plan files open to the floor that was active File menu. Click on a recent file to open that
when the file was last saved and closed. file without using the Open Plan File dialog.
The names of recently open files also display
in the Startup Options dialog. Click on the
name of a file to open it. See Startup
Options on page 20.
Searching for Plans

Select Tools> Plan Database> existing, fully-editable sample plan or search
Search for Plans to locate an a selection of non-editable plans by popular
40
Searching for Plans
home designers. This command opens the for plans based on parameters that you
Find Plan Wizard, which helps you search define.
Find Plan Wizard

The Find Plan Wizard can be used to search plan, such as the square footage and the
for plans using stored information about each number of bedrooms and other room types.
Begin by selecting either a database of plan drawings by popular home plan

editable sample plans or a collection of house companies, then click Next to continue.
41
House Style
At the bottom of each page, the number of On any page, click the Back button to
plans that match your current search modify any previously selected parameters.
parameters displays. As you modify the
Select the number of floors in the house and
parameters, this number increases or
the number of bedrooms, then click Next to
decreases as matching plans are found.
continue.
42
Searching for Plans
House Size
Select the number of bathrooms and square

footage of the house, then click Next to
continue.
43
Plan Details
Click on the name of a plan in the list to see a Click Next, then click the Finish button to
preview of the plan open the selected plan.
Closing Views and Files

Choose File> Close to close the active Select File> Close All to close all currently
window. If it is the last open view for a plan open windows.
and you have not saved it, the program
prompts you to save before closing.
Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting.
Exiting Home Designer Suite

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you When you exit from the program using File>
have not saved any open plans, you are Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
reminded to do so. It is better to save your automatically deleted.
work before exiting than to save on exit.
44
Chapter 3:
Default Settings
In Home Designer Suite, default settings Chapter Contents

determine what objects look like when they Default Settings
are initially created. You can save time by Dynamic Defaults
becoming familiar with the defaults in the General Plan Defaults Dialog
program and setting them up before you start Set Background Color
drawing in a new plan. Angle Style Dialog
45
Default Settings
Default settings determine the initial
characteristics of objects when they
are first drawn. For example, when you place
a base cabinet in a plan, its size, materials,
front items, and hardware are determined by
settings in the Base Cabinet Defaults
dialog.
Defaults are file-specific, which means that
any changes that you make to the default
settings in one plan file will have no effect on
other plans
You can access a complete list of the various
default settings by selecting Edit> Default
Settings from the menu while floor plan
view is active.
Default settings is also available in other

view windows; however, the items in the
list may not include tools that cannot be
used in the current view.
Click the + beside a category to expand it
and access the defaults for items related to
that category.
To open the defaults dialog associated
with an item in the list, double-click on
the line item, or click on the item and then
click the Edit button.
Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be that are set to use the default will update
changed globally throughout a model. automatically to use the new value.
If you change a dynamic default value in Any objects of that type that are not using
a defaults dialog, all objects of that type the default value because of editing will
not be affected if you change the default.
46
General Plan Defaults Dialog
Dynamic defaults are found in the default

dialogs of a variety of objects, including
dimension lines, walls, doors, cabinets and
rooms.
Materials are another example of an attribute
that uses Dynamic Defaults. See Material
Defaults on page 333.
To edit a dynamic default, delete the (D) or
In object specification dialogs, dynamic remove the check from Default box and type
defaults are followed by either a (D) in the the desired value.
value field or a Default check box.
To reset a value back to the dynamic default,
type the letter D in the field or click the
Default checkbox.
General Plan Defaults Dialog

The settings in the General Plan Defaults resize them. Clear this option to display
dialog control basic features of the Home only Move and Rotate edit handles. See
Designer Suite environment. To open this Editing Box-Based Objects on page 78.
dialog, select Edit> Default Settings ,
select Plan, and click the Edit button. Changes made to fixture/furniture sizes
are not reflected in the Materials List
because the Materials List refers to
objects by their labels, not by their physi-
cal dimensions. If you resize a fixture or
furniture object, the correlation between
its label and its actual physical dimen-
sions is no longer accurate.
Casing is the trim that surrounds a door or
window. When you resize a door or win-
dow, its sides are kept away from inter-
secting walls by the width of the casing.
Check Window/Door Casing Ignored
Check Fixtures and Furniture May be When Resizing to ignore the casing so
Resized to display side edit handles on that doors and windows can be moved or
selected fixtures and furniture so you can resized flush against an intersecting wall.
47
Inches Scrolled by Hotkeys determines Check Use Snap Grid/Units to enable

how far your plan will scroll when you Grid Snaps, which snaps objects to a grid
press an arrow key. The initial default is as you draw or edit them. See Grid
12 inches (300 mm). Snaps on page 59.
Check Show Reference Grid to display Specify the Snap Unit: the increments at
the Reference Grid, the virtual graph which you want snapping to occur. The
paper used to create a sense of scale in initial default is 1 inch (10 mm).
floor plan view.
Set Background Color

Select Tools> Display Settings> Set Click the color bar to open the Color
Background Color to open the Set Chooser dialog and select a color to use as
Background Color dialog. the background color in floor plan and Cross
Section/Elevation views for the current plan.
See Color Chooser Dialog on page 334.
Angle Style Dialog

At the bottom of the Terrain Specification These settings control the format of values
dialog, you can click the Angle Style button used in dialogs but do not limit how you can
to open the Angle Style dialog. See Terrain enter these values. For example, if you set
Specification Dialog on page 263. your Number Style to use Inches, values will
display using fractional inches. You can,
The settings in this dialog are global and
however, enter values using decimal inches,
control the format of distances, coordinates
inches and feet, or even decimal feet. When
and angles of angles in dialog boxes as well
the dialog youre typing in updates, the value
as in the Status Bar. See The Status Bar on
will be converted to fractional inches.
page 26.
48
Angle Style Dialog
Angles can be displayed using one of five Bearings - Measured from a vertical line
methods: representing North/ South, Quadrant
Degrees/Minutes/Bearings - Measured Bearings use directional bearings in their
counterclockwise from a line drawn hori- measurements. Useful for site drawings.
zontally to the right of the angles vertex. Pitch - Defined as a ratio of vertical rise
Useful for most drawing tasks. Select the to horizontal run. In Imperial units, the
level of accuracy that you require. run is always 12; in metric units it is
1000 mm.
49
50
Chapter 4:
Toolbars &
Hotkeys
Two of the most efficient ways to access Chapter Contents

Home Designer Suites tools are the toolbars Toolbar Arrangement
and keyboard shortcuts, also referred to as Hotkeys
hotkeys.
Toolbars are organized into configurations,
which are basically collections of multiple
toolbars arranged for use during specific
drawing tasks. Within a given toolbar
configuration, buttons are arranged so that
similar tools are located near one another.
51
Toolbar Arrangement
Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or button to display its child buttons to the
Parent - Child arrangement. Drop - Down right.
toolbar buttons have an arrow to the right of
To switch between these two toolbar
the button that accesses additional, related
arrangements, select Tools> Toolbars and
tools.
click on either option in the submenu.
Moving Toolbars
You can, if you wish, move any toolbar to a
different location. Toolbars can be docked to
any side of the program window, or they can
be undocked and left floating. Undocked
toolbars can also be moved outside of the
program window.
Alternatively, you can use Home Designer
Suites Parent - Child toolbar arrangement. The location of moved toolbars is not saved
In this arrangement, you select a parent between program sessions. The next time
you use Home Designer Suite, the toolbars
will be back in their original locations.
Hotkeys
Many Home Designer Suite tools have a To use a hotkey, simply press the appropriate
keyboard shortcut, or hotkey, associated with key or combination of keys on your keyboard
them. If such a hotkey exists, it will display instead of selecting the menu item or clicking
to the right of the tools name in the menu. the toolbar button. For example, press the
Ctrl and Z keys at the same time to perform
an Undo .
Edit menu items with button icons

to the left and hotkeys to the right
52
Chapter 5:
Layers
Layers are used to organize and manage the Chapter Contents

display of all objects in all views . A layer Displaying Objects
can be thought of as a transparency sheet Layer Sets
with objects placed on it for viewing. Nearly Display Options Dialog
all views use multiple layers, like a stack of
transparencies put together to show different
types of objects.
You can customize how each layer displays
in a particular view in the Display Options
dialog.
Multiple layers are organized into Layer
Sets, which allow you to control which
objects display in different views.
53
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in different views is or selected. If you try to place or draw an
controlled by layer sets and layers in the object on a layer that is hidden, the program
Display Options dialog. See Display asks if you want to turn the layer on.
Options Dialog on page 55.
Primary and Secondary Layers

Every object is placed on a layer which
controls whether it displays in a given view.
This layer is referred to as the objects
primary layer.
In addition, some objects have secondary Some objects cannot stand alone in a
layers which may alter the appearance of drawing: they can only be inserted into
objects on the primary layer, but do not another object. If the display of an object that
control whether the objects display or not. contains an inserted object is turned off, the
For example, the primary layer for base display of the inserted object will be turned
cabinets is Cabinets, Base. In addition, off, as well For example, if the display of a
base cabinets have a number of secondary wall is turned off, any doors and windows in
layers that control the display of the that wall will not display either. See
countertop, face indicators, door opening Inserted Objects on page 319.
indicators, module lines and labels.
The Color attribute assigned to a layer
determines how the lines representing
Note: If an objects primary layer is turned off, objects on that layer appear in floor plan and
information on its secondary layers will not Cross Section/Elevation views.
display - even if those layers are turned on.
Many objects, including CAD and text
All layers with a check in the Disp. column objects, allow you to override the line color
display when the current layer set is active. without changing the layers color attribute.
Objects that are not displayed cannot be seen
Layer Sets
Layer Sets are used to control the layer display settings for each layer as set for a
settings for different views in a plan file. particular type of view. These display
settings can be modified, and can be different
A layer set consists of a complete list of the for each type of view. See Display Options
layers in the current plan along with the Dialog on page 55.
54
Display Options Dialog
Layer sets are file specific, which means that Print Model. See Print Model on page
changes made in one plan file have no effect 437.
on the settings in other files.
While any view is active, select Tools>
Home Designer Suite uses a different layer Display Settings> Display Options to
set for the each type of view of your plan: make changes to the layer set used for that
Floor plan view. view type.
Camera views and Overviews. See 3D Any changes made to settings in the Display
View Tools on page 346. Options dialog for one particular view will
Cross Section/Elevations. See Cross affect all views using that same layer set. For
Section/Elevation Views on page 348. example, if you make changes for a camera
view, all camera views and overviews in the
Framing Overviews. See Framing Over-
current plan will be affected. See Display
view on page 348.
Reference Display. See The Reference
Floor on page 177. Unlike other layer sets, the Print Model layer
set cannot be modified.
Display Options Dialog

The display of objects in all views is automatically ask you if the layer should be
controlled in the Display Options turned on so that the new object will be
dialog. To make changes to the display visible. After you make your choice, the
settings for a particular type of view, open a object will be created - even if you select
view of that type and select Tools> Display No.
Settings> Display Options.
Only displayed objects are included when
If the display of a particular layer is turned DXF and EMF files are exported, and only
off and an object assigned to that layer is displayed objects print.
placed in the plan, the program will
55
Remove the check from the Disp. col- Click the size grip at the lower right cor-
umn to turn off the display of a category ner and drag to resize the dialog box.
of objects.
Click a color bar to open the Color Note: Not all objects display in all views. For
Chooser dialog and set the display color instance, door labels do not appear in 3D
for objects on that layer in floor plan and views.
Cross Section/Elevation views. See
Color Chooser Dialog on page 334.
Click on a column header to sort all lay-
ers by that column. Click again to sort in
reverse order.
56
Chapter 6:
Creating Objects
There are a wide variety of objects in Home Chapter Contents

Designer Suite that you can use to create 3D Architectural vs CAD Objects
models and plan drawings. Although these Snap Behaviors
objects are sometimes very different from Angle Snaps
one another, the methods used to create them Grid Snaps
are similar. Creating Objects
Once an object is created, it can be selected Copying and Pasting Objects
and edited to meet the requirements of your
project. The editing characteristics common
to most objects are described elsewhere. See
Editing Objects on page 65.
57
Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in In contrast, architectural objects such as
Home Designer Suite: architectural objects walls, cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs
and CAD objects. display in 2D and 3D views.
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, text, and Some architectural objects, such as terrain
dimensions are 2D objects that can be features, have some behaviors in common
created and edited in floor plan view and with CAD objects and are referred to as
cross section/elevation views but do not CAD-based.
display in 3D camera views and overviews.
See The CAD Drawing Tools on page 391.
Snap Behaviors
There are three categories of snap behavior Grid Snaps , which snap objects
in Home Designer Suite that affect how to points on a grid.
objects are created and how they can be
edited: You can select Edit> Snap Settings to
quickly turn Object, Angle and Grid Snaps
Object Snaps, which snap CAD and
on or off.
architectural objects to other objects.
To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors and
Angle Snaps , which snap objects other move restrictions, press the Ctrl key
at specific angles. while dragging an edit handle. See Moving
Objects on page 86.
Object Snaps
Object Snaps allow you to position objects Object center points
precisly relative to each other; for example, Intersection points where an object drawn
to position lines so that their endpoints meet. at an allowed angle meets another object.
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by In addition, On Object snapping occurs
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Object anywhere on an objects edges and is most
Snaps. noticeable when Angle and Grid Snaps are
There are many locations on an object that turned off.
other objects can snap to. When multiple objects are selected the
Object endpoints and corners selection sets only snap point is its midpoint.
The midpoints of object edges
58
Angle Snaps
Extension Snaps Extension snaps function when you are

drawing or editing walls and create a sticky
Extension snaps allow you to snap to a point point where the wall being drawn reaches a
that is not actually on an object. Instead, point that is either colinear or orthogonal to
these snaps locate points that are either another walls end point. See Drawing
colinear to the end of a wall or orthogonal (at Walls on page 102.
a 90 angle) to it.
Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be objects rotate, the radius of arcs, and a
drawn at exact angles. This can be variety of other operations.
accomplished using Angle Snaps.
Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by
Angle Snaps allow you to draw lines, walls, selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
and other objects at angles in 7.5 Snaps .
increments. Angle Snaps also affect the way
Grid Snaps
Grid Snaps allow you to snap objects When Grid snaps and Angle Snaps are both
to points on an on-screen grid. The enabled, objects are drawn and edited using
display and size of this Snap Grid can be Polar Coordinates. For example, if the grid
controlled in the Plan Defaults dialog. See Snap Unit is set to 12" (1 foot), drawing a
General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 47. new wall at an Allowed Angle snaps the wall
length to 0", 12", 24", and so on.
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting
Edit> Snap Settings>Grid Snaps or in
To draw a line or wall at an Allowed
the Plan Defaults dialog. Angle but with unrestricted length, dis-
In addition to the Snap Grid, the Reference able Grid Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.
Grid is provided to give you a visual sense
of scale. The Reference Grid is composed of
12 x 12 squares and is useful for zooming
in and out, or for general layout guidelines,
but is not used for snapping.
Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps

Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have
the lowest priority and are overridden by
Angle Snaps and Object Snaps.
59
Creating Objects
In Home Designer Suite, there are three ways indicating the size and shape of the object to
to create objects: by clicking to place an be created. If your pointer is positioned at a
object, by clicking and dragging to draw an location where the object cannot be placed,
object, or by importing custom symbols, this preview outline will not display.
pictures or metafiles.
As you move the mouse pointer, the center
While the size of the drawing area in Home point of the objects back edge will snap to
Designer Suite is limited only by the active snap points when Grid Snaps or
resources on your computer, it is best to Object Snaps are enabled. See Snap
begin your drawing near the origin, 0,0,0. Behaviors on page 58.
The current position of your mouse pointer
displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the Many architectural objects can be created in
program window. See 3D Drafting on page floor plan view or any 3D view. In order to
21. place a stand-alone, click-to-create object in
3D, it is necessary to click near a wall or
Click-to-Create within the Terrain Perimeter as these objects
help orient the new object within the 3D
Many objects, including doors and windows, space.
cabinets, library symbols, terrain objects,
text, pictures and images are created by Clicking and Dragging
clicking. Select a or library object, then click
in the drawing area to place the object at that Other objects, including walls and railings,
location. straight stairs, and CAD and CAD-based
objects are created by clicking and dragging
Continue clicking to place the selected object to define either a path or an enclosed area.
until another tool is selected. Select a tool, then click and drag in the
If you click at a location where there is not drawing area to draw an object between your
enough room for the object to be placed, one start and end points.
of two things may happen: Continue drawing the selected object until
Some objects, notably cabinets, doors, another tool is selected.
and windows, will resize smaller to fit
You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing
into the space.
operation before it is completed by pressing
Most objects cannot resize in this man- the Esc key on your keyboard, or by pressing
ner, so the program will present a warn- any two mouse buttons at the same time.
ing message indicating that there is not
sufficient space at the current location. Importing Objects
When most drawing tools are active or Custom symbols, pictures and metafiles can
library symbols selected for placement, a be imported into the program and placed in
preview outline follows your mouse pointer,
60
Copying and Pasting Objects
the drawing area with a click. See Pictures, If you try to create an object on a layer that is
Images, & Walkthroughs on page 409. not set to display in the current view, the
program will ask if you want to turn that
Object Creation and Layers layer on. See Message Boxes on page 26.
When it is created, every object is placed on

Note: If you choose to leave the layer off, the
a layer, which controls whether and how the
object will be created but you will not be able
object displays. See Displaying Objects on to see it until its layer is turned on.
page 54.

New objects can also be created by cutting, Clipboard. To paste the selection in Home
copying, and pasting existing objects, either Designer Suite or another application, select
individually or in groups. Objects can be Edit> Paste or press Ctrl + V while in that
copied from one floor to another, one view application to enable the Paste function.
window to another, and one file to another.
Because copying uses the Windows Paste
Clipboard, some objects can be pasted into
other applications, as well. Select Edit> Paste to enable Paste
mode, then left- or right-click in the
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that current view to paste the selected object(s)
they cannot be created in normally. For previously copied to the Windows Clipboard
example, CAD objects cannot be pasted into at that location.
a 3D camera view or overview.
Once pasted, these object(s) are selected.
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters Objects pasted in 3D views are selected on
and camera symbols, cannot be copied. their top surfaces.
If the selection being pasted consists of text,
Cut
it is placed in a Text object.
Select Edit> Cut to remove the
selected object(s) from the file and Copy/Paste
save them in the Windows Clipboard. To
paste the selection in Home Designer Suite Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
or another application, select Edit> Paste or copy the selected object(s) to the
press Ctrl + V while in that application to Windows Clipboard and immediately enable
enable the Paste function. the Paste function in Home Designer
Suite.
Copy
The Copy/Paste edit button activates
Select Edit> Copy to copy the Paste mode in which each available edit tool
selected object(s) to the Windows
61
and handle makes a copy in addition to its 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,
primary function and four new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar. select Edit> Copy from the menu or
press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
Click the Sticky Mode edit button Copy/Paste icon.
remain in the current mode and place 3. Drag an edit handle:
multiple copies of the selected object(s).
Drag the Move edit handle to position
Click the Main Edit Mode edit but- the copy at a new location.
ton or press the Esc key to return to the 4. You can position the copy accurately
selected objectss main edit toolbar. with respect to the original by watching
If you paste a selection in a file other than its the moved distance in the Status Bar at
original source file, when you return to the the bottom of the screen.
original, Paste mode is still enabled.
Sticky Mode
The Copy/Paste edit button can be used
Normally, after an action is performed
with the edit handles in either of two ways:
using the edit tools or handles while in
by clicking or by dragging an edit handle.
an edit mode such as Paste mode, you return
to the Main Edit Mode. Click the Sticky
To Copy/Paste by clicking
Mode edit button to remain in Paste mode
1. Select an object or objects to copy. and continue pasting copies of the selected
object(s).
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,
To exit Paste mode and return to the main
select Edit> Copy from the menu or edit toolbar for the selected object, click the
press Ctrl + C to copy and then Ctrl +
Main Edit Mode edit button or press the
V to activate the Paste functionality. The
Esc key on your keyboard. If you have not
cursor displays the Copy/Paste icon.
pasted a copy of the selected object and
3. If you wish to paste the copy in a differ-
ent view or program window, open that immediately click Copy/Paste after
window. returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky
4. If your cursor does not display the Copy/ Mode is still enabled.
Paste icon, select Edit> Paste from the
menu or press Ctrl + V. Copy and Paste in Place
5. Left- or right-click once to paste a copy Click the Copy and Paste in Place
of the object at that location. edit button to create a copy of the
selected object(s) at the same location as the
To Copy/Paste by dragging original. The copy remains selected so you
can perform additional operations.
1. Select an object or objects to copy.
62
Because multiple walls, railing and fencing Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See
cannot share the same space, the Copy and Importing Pictures on page 414.
Paste in Place edit button is not avail- Unformatted non-unicode text (TXT).
able for these objects. File Name (a path to a file). Depending
on the file type, it will be either opened or
Paste Hold Position imported (if supported).
When copying between different Unformatted text (HTML). Pastes as text.
floors or view windows, you can paste Model Objects - Home Designer Suite
a copy at the same absolute position as the format, not compatible with other pro-
original selection using Paste Hold Position. grams.
To use Paste Hold Position To use Paste Special

1. Select the object(s) to be copied. 1. Select an object, image, text or file on
your computer and copy it.
2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button.
2. Switch to the desired Home Designer
3. Switch to the desired floor or plan file
Suite view window and select Edit>
and select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold
Paste> Paste Special .
Position .
3. In the Paste Special dialog, select the
4. A copy is placed at the same X, Y coor-
desired representation for the selection
dinates on the new floor or in the new
and click OK.
plan as the originals position.
4. Click in the drawing area to place the
Paste Special copy at that location.
The Paste Special tool allows you to Copy Region as Picture

choose a representation for the
selection to be pasted. The Copy Region as Picture tool
allows you to copy any portion of the
Selections can be pasted as: screen and save it as a picture. See Copy
Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF). Region as Picture on page 417.
See Metafiles on page 416.
63
64
Chapter 7:
Editing Objects
Just as the methods used to create different Chapter Contents

objects in Home Designer Suite are similar, Selecting Objects
the options for moving, rotating, resizing, Editing Line Based Objects
and otherwise editing them are also alike. Editing Arc Based Objects
Edit handles allow objects to be resized, Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
relocated, or rotated using the mouse. Edit Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
toolbar buttons and the contextual menus Editing Box-Based Objects
access edit tools relevant to the selected Editing Spline Based Objects
object(s). Most objects have a specification Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that Displaying Objects
are specific to that type of object. Moving Objects
Aligning Objects
The editing characteristics common to most Resizing Objects
objects are described in this chapter. Unique, Reshaping Objects
object-specific editing behaviors and the Rotating Objects
specification dialogs are covered in their Deleting Objects
respective chapters. Undo and Redo
65
Selecting Objects
Select refers to selecting an object for You can also select objects or open context
editing. An object must be selected before it sensitive menus using the right mouse button
can be edited. when any tool is active.
In order for an object to be selected, it must
be visible in the current view. See Layers Selecting Similar Objects
on page 53.
If a tool other than Select Objects is
When an object is selected, it displays edit active, you can only select objects of that
handles and a grey selection fill color. In 3D type using the left mouse button. For
views, a selected object will also display
example, if the Straight Exterior Wall
lines representing the selected edge or
tool is active, you can only select walls using
surface. The size of the edit handles does not
the left mouse button.
change as you zoom in or out. To prevent
them from stacking on one another, some This can be useful for selecting an object
edit handles may not display as you zoom when many objects of a different type
away from the selected object. occupy the same space in floor plan view.
When an object is selected, its edit toolbar Objects can be selected using the right mouse
also displays, typically on the upper left side button, regardless of which tool is active.
of the Home Designer Suite program
window. See The Edit Toolbar on page 24. Right-Clicking
Information about the selected object or Regardless of which tool is active, you can
objects may also display in the Status Bar. select an eligible object by right-clicking on
See The Status Bar on page 26. it once. When you right-click to select an
A selected object remains selected until object a contextual menu also appears,
another object is selected, a different tool is displaying the objects edit tools. See
activated, the Esc key on the keyboard is Contextual Menus on page 25.
pressed, or any two mouse buttons are If a drawing tool is active and you right-click
pressed at the same time. to select an object, you can unselect it by
left-clicking in an empty space in the
Select Objects drawing area. Although a drawing tool is
active, it is not used. If you then left-click a
Any object created using Home
second time, the active tool will be used.
Designer Suite can be selected using
the Select Objects tool. Select Edit> Select
Objects, click the toolbar button or press the
Selected Edge
Space bar on your keyboard to activate this When you click on a polyline- or box-based
tool, then click on an object to select it. object, the edge that you click nearest
becomes the selected edge and displays an
66
Selecting Objects
edit handle larger than those on other edges. If an object is currently selected and a
The handle on this edge may also display at selection marquee is drawn around it, that
the point where you clicked to select it. object becomes de-selected. If an object is
currently selected and a marquee is drawn
around other objects, the original object
remains selected and the other objects are
added to the selection set.
When using the marquee-select method, both
CAD and architectural objects included in
the marquee are selected. To remove an
object from the selection set, hold down the
Shift key and click it.
The marquee-select method can also be used
This edge can be edited on the Selected Line to group-select similar object types. For
or Selected Arc tab of the objects example, click the Hinged Door child
specification dialog. See Moving Objects button, hold down either the Shift key, drag a
Using Dimensions on page 376, Line Tab marquee, release the mouse button, and only
on page 394 and Arc Tab on page 397. door objects within the marquee are selected.
Select Next Object

To make marquee selection easier, you
If there is more than one object in a can turn off the display of objects you
particular space, it may be difficult to do not want to include in your selection set.
select the desired object. When a nearby See Displaying Objects on page 54.
object is selected, click the Select Next
Object edit button or press the Tab key until Shift Select
the desired object becomes selected. This You can select a group of objects by adding
function cannot be applied to groups of them to the selection set one by one. Select
selected objects. an object, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl
key, and click additional objects to select
Marquee Select them.
Groups of objects can be selected by holding More than one type of object can be selected
down either the Shift or Ctrl key when the using this method, but the ability to edit the
Select Objects tool is active and then group-selected items is limited to attributes
dragging a marquee around the objects to be that all selected objects have in common.
selected. An object does not need to be To remove an object from a selection set,
completely enclosed by the marquee to be click it once more - again, with either the
selected: it will be selected if the marquee Shift or Ctrl key pressed.
includes only a small portion of it.
67
Edit Area Unlike other selection methods, the Edit

Area tool cuts walls, railings and fencing
The Edit Area tool allows you to where the selection marquee intersects them,
quickly define an area of your plan allowing you to edit only the selected portion
and select the objects in that area. Once of these objects.
selected, they can then be repositioned,
rotated, or deleted. Select Edit> Edit Area, Some objects, such as cabinets, are included
then click and drag a rectangular marquee in the selection only if more than half of the
around the area that you would like to move. object is contained within the marquee.
Editing Line Based Objects

Objects are considered line-based when they page 141 and Editing Windows on page
can be edited similar to CAD lines using 159.
their edit handles.
CAD lines, straight walls and railings,
straight stairs and straight roads are examples
of line-based objects.
Most line-based objects can be connected to
other like objects to form polylines or
polyline-based objects provided that they are
on the same layer. Line-based objects will
only form a polyline with other objects if
they share identical arrow specifications, as
well. See Editing Open Polyline Based
Objects on page 73 and Editing Closed-
Polyline Based Objects on page 76. Other objects, such as stairs and roads, have
additional edit handles that allow you to
Some objects, notably walls, have line-based concentrically adjust the objects width.
editing behavior only when selected on
certain surfaces. See Editing Walls on page
106.
Using the Edit Handles
When selected, a typical line-based object
Wall openings such as doors and windows
displays four edit handles.
have line-based editing behavior in floor plan
view only but cannot be rotated, reversed or Any action performed using the edit handles
converted to an arc. See Editing Doors on can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time.
68
Editing Line Based Objects
objects width. By default, objects are

Extend/Change Angle resized in 1" increments. This Snap Unit
is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
See General Plan Defaults Dialog on
page 47.
Move Rotate
Move
Using Dimensions
Movement may be limited or stopped by Dimensions can be used to position
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move line-based objects relative to other
restrictions can be overridden by holding objects. See Moving Objects Using
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See Dimensions on page 376.
Unrestricted Movement on page 86. Dimensions cannot, however, be used to
Rotate adjust the length of line-based objects, or the
width of line-based objects such as stairs.
The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object about its center. See Rotating
Objects on page 90. Using the
Specification Dialog
Extend/Change Angle
Drag an end handle parallel to the Line-based objects can be edited using
selected line to change its length. their specification dialogs. See Line
Specification Dialog on page 394.
Drag an end handle at an angle to the
selected line to change its angle. When Using the Edit Toolbar
Angle Snaps are on, the line snaps to
A selected line-based object can be edited in
Allowed Angles. See Angle Snaps on
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
page 59.
edit toolbar.
Adjust Width
The following toolbar buttons may display
Some line-based objects, such as stairs and on the edit toolbar for a selected line-based
roads, have additional handles that allow the object:
width of the object to be adjusted.
Click the Select Next Object edit
button to select nearby objects instead of
the selected object. See Selecting
Objects on page 66.
Click the Open Object edit button to

open the specification dialog for the
Adjust Width selected object(s). See Specification
Dialogs on page 26.
Click and drag a small, round Expand
handle to increase or decrease the
69
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to Click the Center Object edit button
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- to center an object along along a wall
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted within a room or relative to a cabinet
elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting fixture. See Using Center Object on
Objects on page 61. page 88.
Click the Copy and Paste in Place Click the Move to Front of Group
edit button to create a copy of the edit button to display the selected object
selected object(s) at the same location as in front of other objects in the same
the original. See Copy and Paste in drawing group. See Move to Front of
Place on page 62. Group on page 85.
Click the Delete edit button to delete Click the Break Line edit button to
the selected object(s). See Deleting add a new corner or pivot point to the
Objects on page 91. selected object. See Break Line on
page 90.
Click the Accurate Move edit button
to slow down the mouse speed when Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
using the edit handles. See Accurate ton to change a line-based object to an
Move on page 87. arc, or vice versa. See Change Line/
Arc on page 90.
Editing Arc Based Objects

Objects are considered arc-based when they
can be edited similar to CAD arcs using their
edit handles.
CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved
stairs, and curved roads are examples of arc-
based objects.
Most arc-based objects can be connected to
other like objects to form polylines or
polyline-based objects provided that they are
on the same layer. Arc-based objects will
only form a polyline with other objects if
they share identical arrow specifications, as
well. See Editing Open Polyline Based Some objects, notably curved walls, have
Objects on page 73 and Editing Closed- arc-based editing behavior only when
Polyline Based Objects on page 76. selected on certain surfaces. See Editing
Walls on page 106.
70
Editing Arc Based Objects
Other objects, such as curved stairs and

roads, have additional edit handles that allow
you to concentrically adjust the objects
width.

When selected, a typical arc-based object Move edit handle
displays seven edit handles.
Rotate
Any action performed using the edit handles
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
any two mouse buttons at the same time. arc about its center. See Rotating
Objects on page 90.
Resize Reshape Extend
(changes radius) (moves center) The end edit handles expand or contract
the arc when moved along the arc radius
or chord.
Move If you follow the path of the arc, the end
Chord
Rotate edit handles allow you to adjust the arc
length.
The angle formed by the center point of
Extend Move Arc the arc and its two endpoints is referred to
(along arc or chord) Center as the Included Angle. If Angle
Move Snaps are on, the Included Angle of
the arc can be rotated at Allowed Angles.
Two Move edit handles allow the arc to
See Angle Snaps on page 59.
be relocated without changing its shape.
One is located at the center of the chord
and the other, at the arc center.
Movement may be limited or stopped by
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
Unrestricted Movement on page 86.
Extend edit handles
Resize
Drag the small, round Resize edit handle
to change the radius and included angle
of the arc while maintaining its center.
71
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to position
arc-based objects. Dimension lines
typically locate tangent extension lines and
any extension lines that may be parallel to
Resize edit handle those lines rather than the arc itself. See
Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
Reshape
page 376.
Drag the small triangular Reshape
handle to change the length and location Using the
of the center without moving the
endpoints.
Arc-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See Arc
Using the Edit Toolbar

A selected arc-based object can be edited in a
Reshape edit handle variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar.
Adjust Width
Some arc-based objects, such as stairs, have
on the edit toolbar for a selected arc-based
additional handles that allow the width of the
object:
object to be adjusted.
Objects on page 66.

selected object(s). See Specification
Dialogs on page 26.
Adjust Width
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
Click and drag a small, round edit handle
copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
to increase or decrease the objects width.
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
By default, objects are resized according
elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting
to the Snap Unit defined in the Plan
Objects on page 61.
Defaults dialog. See General Plan
Defaults Dialog on page 47.
72
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
Click the Copy and Paste in Place fixture. See Using Center Object on
edit button to create a copy of the page 88.
selected object(s) at the same location as Click the Move to Front of Group
the original. See Copy and Paste in edit button to display the selected object
Place on page 62. in front of other objects in the same
Click the Delete edit button to delete drawing group. See Move to Front of
the selected object(s). See Deleting Group on page 85.
Objects on page 91. Click the Break Line edit button to
Click the Accurate Move edit button add a new corner or pivot point to the
to slow down the mouse speed when selected object. See Break Line on
using the edit handles. See Accurate page 90.
Move on page 87. Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
Click the Center Object edit button ton to change an arc-based object to a
to center an object along along a wall line, or vice versa. See Change Line/
within a room or relative to a cabinet Arc on page 90.

Open polyline-based objects are composed
of individual line- and arc-based objects that
are connected at their end points but do not
form an enclosed area.
Objects are considered open polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to open CAD
polylines using their edit handles.
Open CAD polylines, connected walls,
stairs, and roads are examples of open
polyline-based objects.
Other objects, such as connected stair and

road segments, have additional edit handles
that allow you to concentrically adjust the
width of all segments of the object.
73
Using the Edit Handles Move
A polyline can be composed of many Click and drag the Move handle to move
segments. See Polylines on page 399. the object.
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
handle, a Reshape handle at the intersection
of each segment, and an Extend handle at
each end.
Rotate
Each straight, line-based segment also has a
Move edit handle along its length. The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object about its center. Its position varies
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own depending on which edge is currently
Move handle at the center of its chord, a selected. See Rotating Objects on page
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked 90.
center, a Reshape handle. See Editing Arc
Based Objects on page 70. Extend
Click and drag an Extend handle to
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
lengthen or shorten the unconnected end
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
of the selected line or arc segment, or to
and certain operations affect only this edge.
change the radius of the selected arc. See
The Move handle of the selected edge is
Editing Arc Based Objects on page 70.
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the Reshape
center of the chord on an arc segment. See Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Selected Edge on page 66. change the angle and/or length of the seg-
Any action performed using the edit handles ments on either side of it, or the size of
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or the object.
any two mouse buttons at the same time. Move Line Segment
Move arc The Move Line Segment edit handle is
Move
segment Resize found on straight segments of open
polyline
arc polylines and moves the straight section-
Move line perpendicular to itself. Adjacent seg-
segment ments may extend or contract in their
Reshape
arc original directions to maintain their con-
nections.
Extend Move Arc
Reshape Rotate
polyline Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
to change the radius and/or chord length
or position. Adjacent segments may
74
extend, contract, or change angle to Using the Specification

maintain their connections. Dialog
Resize Arc
Open polyline-based objects can be
Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle edited using their specification
to change the radius, chord length and dialogs. See Polyline Specification Dialog
chord position of the arc segment. Adja- on page 399.
cent segments may extend, contract, or
change angle to maintain their connec- Using the Edit Toolbar
tions.
A selected open polyline-based object can be
Reshape Arc edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han- on the edit toolbar.
dle to change the radius of the arc without
moving its end points.
on the edit toolbar for a selected open
Adjust Width polyline-based object:
Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and Click the Select Next Object edit
roads, have additional handles that allow the button to select nearby objects instead of
width of the object to be adjusted. the selected object. See Selecting
Objects on page 66.
Adjust
Width
Dialogs on page 26.

Click and drag a small, round edit handle copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
to increase or decrease the objects width. dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
By default, objects are resized in 1" elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting
increments. This Snap Unit is defined in Objects on page 61.
the Plan Defaults dialog. See General
Plan Defaults Dialog on page 47. Click the Copy and Paste in Place
edit button to create a copy of the
Using Dimensions selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See Copy and Paste in
Dimensions can be used to move or Place on page 62.
reshape polyline-based objects. See
Moving Objects Using Dimensions on Click the Delete edit button to delete
page 376. the selected object(s). See Deleting
Objects on page 91.
75
Click the Accurate Move edit button Click the Break Line edit button to
to slow down the mouse speed when add a new corner or pivot point to the
using the edit handles. See Accurate selected object. See Break Line on
Move on page 87. page 90.
Click the Center Object edit button Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
to center an object along along a wall ton to change a line-based polyline edge
within a room or relative to a cabinet to an arc, or vice versa. See Change
fixture. See Using Center Object on Line/Arc on page 90.
page 88. Click the Record Walkthrough Along
Click the Move to Front of Group Path edit button to record a walk-
edit button to display the selected object through movie of your model along the
in front of other objects in the same path defined by the selected polyline. See
drawing group. See Move to Front of Walkthroughs on page 418.
Group on page 85.
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects

Closed polyline-based objects are composed Using the Edit Handles
of individual line- and arc-based objects
joined end-to-end and forming an enclosed A polyline can be composed of many
area. segments. See Polylines on page 399.
Objects are considered closed polyline-based When selected, a closed polyline-based

when they can be edited similar to closed object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
CAD polylines using their edit handles. handle, and a Reshape handle at the
intersection of each segment.
Closed CAD polylines and terrain features
are examples of closed polyline-based Each straight, line-based segment has a
objects. Move edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and a Reshape handle. See
Editing Arc Based Objects on page 70.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
Some objects, such as connected road and certain operations affect only this edge.
segments, have additional edit handles that The Move handle of the selected edge is
allow you to concentrically adjust the width larger than that of other edges. It displays
of all segments of the object. along the length of a line segment, or at the
76
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
center of the chord on an arc segment. See perpendicular to itself. Adjacent seg-
Selected Edge on page 66. ments may extend or contract in their
original directions to maintain their con-
nections.
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time. Move Arc
Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
Move arc Rotate to change the radius and/or chord length
segment
Move Resize or position. Adjacent segments may
polyline arc extend, contract, or change angle to
maintain their connections.
Reshape
arc Resize Arc
Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
Reshape Move line to change the radius, chord length and
polyline segment chord position of the arc segment. Adja-
cent segments may extend, contract, or
Move
change angle to maintain their connec-
Click and drag the Move handle to move tions.
the object.
Reshape Arc
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
restrictions can be overridden by holding dle to change the radius of the arc without
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See moving its end points.
Using Dimensions
Rotate
Dimensions can be used to move or
The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
reshape closed polyline-based objects.
object about its center. Its position varies
See Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
depending on which edge is currently
page 376.
selected. See Rotating Objects on page
90.
Using the
Reshape Specification Dialog
Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
change the angle and/or length of the seg- Closed polyline-based objects can be
ments on either side of it, or the size of edited using their specification
the object. dialogs. See Polyline Specification Dialog
on page 399.
Move Line Segment
The Move Line Segment edit handle is
found on straight segments of closed
polylines and moves the straight section-
77
Using the Edit Toolbar Click the Accurate Move edit button
A selected closed polyline-based object can to slow down the mouse speed when
be edited in a variety of ways using the using the edit handles. See Accurate
buttons on the edit toolbar. Move on page 87.
The following toolbar buttons may display Click the Center Object edit button
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed to center an object along along a wall
polyline-based object: within a room or relative to a cabinet
fixture. See Using Center Object on
Click the Select Next Object edit page 88.
the selected object. See Selecting Click the Move to Front of Group
Objects on page 66. edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same
Click the Open Object edit button to drawing group. See Move to Front of
open the specification dialog for the Group on page 85.
Dialogs on page 26. Click the Break Line edit button to
add a new corner or pivot point to the
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to selected object. See Break Line on
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- page 90.
elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
Objects on page 61. ton to change a line-based polyline edge
to an arc, or vice versa. See Change
Click the Copy and Paste in Place Line/Arc on page 90.
Click the Record Walkthrough Along
selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See Copy and Paste in Path edit button to record a walk-
Place on page 62. through movie of your model along the
path defined by the selected polyline. See
Click the Delete edit button to delete Walkthroughs on page 418.
the selected object(s). See Deleting
Objects on page 91.
Editing Box-Based Objects

Objects are considered box-based when they Box-based objects are similar to closed
can be edited similar to CAD boxes using polyline-based objects, but must always have
their edit handles. four sides with right-angled corners.
78
Editing Box-Based Objects
In addition to the CAD Box tools, Text

objects, many library symbols, pictures and
images are examples of box-based objects.

When selected, a box-based object displays
ten edit handles. Unlike polylines, boxes
must always have four sides with right- The four Extend handles display along
angled corners. each edge. If you select an object on an
edge, the Extend handle displays at the
Any action performed using the edit handles point where you clicked; otherwise, it
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or displays at the center of the edge.
Extend Move
Resize
The triangular Rotate handle located
near the selected edge of the object is
Rotate used to rotate it about its center. The
pointer changes to a circular arrow
Click and drag the Move handle to move when moved over this handle. See
the object. Rotating Objects on page 90.
Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape box-based objects. See
The four Resize handles located at each Moving Objects Using Dimensions on
corner are used to increase or decrease page 376.
the size of the object.
79
Using the elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting

Specification Dialog Objects on page 61.
Box-based objects can be edited using Click the Copy and Paste in Place
their specification dialogs. See CAD edit button to create a copy of the
Box Specification Dialog on page 401. selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See Copy and Paste in
Using the Edit Toolbar Place on page 62.
A selected closed polyline-based object can Click the Delete edit button to delete
be edited in a variety of ways using the the selected object(s). See Deleting
buttons on the edit toolbar. Objects on page 91.
The following toolbar buttons may display Click the Accurate Move edit button
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed to slow down the mouse speed when
polyline-based object: using the edit handles. See Accurate
Move on page 87.
button to select nearby objects instead of Click the Center Object edit button
the selected object. See Selecting to center an object along along a wall
Objects on page 66. within a room or relative to a cabinet
fixture. See Using Center Object on
page 88.
selected object(s). See Specification Click the Move to Front of Group
Dialogs on page 26. edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same
drawing group. See Move to Front of
Group on page 85.
Editing Spline Based Objects

Objects are considered spline-based when Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline
they can be edited similar to CAD splines terrain walls and both round and kidney-
using their edit handles. See Splines on shaped terrain features are spline-based
page 393. objects. See Terrain on page 251.
80
Editing Spline Based Objects
Reshape
The Reshape edit handles display along
the spline at each vertex. Click and drag a
Reshape edit handle to change the length,
angle and curve of adjacent segments
without affecting other reshape handles.

When a spline is selected, several different
types of handles display.
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time. Resize
The Resize edit handles display along the
Reshape spline, between each vertex. Click and
drag a Resize edit handle to move the
Move adjacent vertices and lengthen or shorten
adjacent segments.
Resize
Rotate
Move
Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object.
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move Using the
restrictions can be overridden by holding Specification Dialog
Unrestricted Movement on page 86. Spline-based objects can be edited
using their specification dialogs. See
Rotate Polyline Specification Dialog on page 399.
Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to
rotate the entire spline.
81
Using the Edit Toolbar Click the Delete edit button to delete
A selected spline-based object can be edited the selected object(s). See Deleting
in a variety of ways using the buttons on the Objects on page 91.
edit toolbar.
The following toolbar buttons may display to slow down the mouse speed when
on the edit toolbar for a selected spline-based using the edit handles. See Accurate
object: Move on page 87.
Click the Select Next Object edit Click the Center Object edit button
button to select nearby objects instead of to center an object along along a wall
the selected object. See Selecting within a room or relative to a cabinet
Objects on page 66. fixture. See Using Center Object on
page 88.
open the specification dialog for the Click the Move to Front of Group
selected object(s). See Polyline edit button to display the selected object
Specification Dialog on page 399. in front of other objects in the same
drawing group. See Move to Front of
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to Group on page 85.
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted Click the Break Line edit button to
elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting add a new corner or pivot point to the
Objects on page 61. selected object. See Break Line on
page 90.
Click the Copy and Paste in Place
Click the Record Walkthrough Along
selected object(s) at the same location as Path edit button to record a walk-
the original. See Copy and Paste in through movie of your model along the
Place on page 62. path defined by the selected polyline. See
Walkthroughs on page 418.
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

Objects created using the Circle, Oval and Using the Edit Handles
Ellipse Tools are unusual in that no
architectural objects share their When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses
functionalities. display eleven edit handles.
Unlike Ovals and Ellipses , a Circle

cannot be edited into any other shapes; it
can only be a circle
82
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
Any action performed using the edit handles in or out to resize and reshape an oval or
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or ellipse.
Reshape
Move
Concentric
Resize
Rotate
Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot
be reshaped. When a Reshape handle is
Move dragged on a circle, it is only resized.
Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object.
Rotate
Click and drag the Rotate handle of an Concentric Resize
oval or ellipse to change its orientation. The Concentric Resize edit handle dis-
plays on the perimeter of a circle between
a corner Reshape handle and the center.
Click and drag this handle to resize the
circle without moving its center point.
Reshape
The eight edit handles beyond the perim-
eter are Reshape edit handles. Move them
83
Using Dimensions Click the Copy/Paste edit button to

Dimensions can be used to move or copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
resize circle-based objects. See dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
Moving Objects Using Dimensions on elsewhere. See Copying and Pasting
page 376. Objects on page 61.
Click the Copy and Paste in Place

Using the edit button to create a copy of the
Specification Dialog selected object(s) at the same location as
Circles, ovals and ellipses can be the original. See Copy and Paste in
edited using their specification Place on page 62.
dialogs. See CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Click the Delete edit button to delete
Specification Dialog on page 398. the selected object(s). See Deleting
Objects on page 91.
Using the Edit Toolbar
A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be
to slow down the mouse speed when
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
using the edit handles. See Accurate
on the edit toolbar.
Move on page 87.
on the edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval Click the Center Object edit button
or ellipse: to center an object along along a wall
within a room or relative to a cabinet
Click the Select Next Object edit fixture. See Using Center Object on
button to select nearby objects instead of page 88.
Objects on page 66. Click the Move to Front of Group
edit button to display the selected object
Click the Open Object edit button to in front of other objects in the same
open the specification dialog for the drawing group. See Move to Front of
selected object(s). See Specification Group on page 85.
Dialogs on page 26.
Displaying Objects
The display of objects in 2D and 3D views Line and Fill Styles
can be controlled by layer. See Displaying
Objects on page 54. Line style and color can be controlled by
layer or overridden in the specification
dialogs for many objects. See Line Style
Tab on page 395.
84
Displaying Objects
In addition, some objects have a fill style that specification dialog. See Line Style Tab on
can be specified in the objects specification page 395.
dialogs. See Fill Style Tab on page 400.
You can check Move to Front of Group to
display the object in front of other objects in
Color On/Off its drawing group, but not necessarily in
The display of color on-screen can be front of objects in other groups.
toggled on and off in 3D by selecting
Tools> Display Settings> Color On/Off. Move to Front of Group
The display of colors may or may not make a Click the Move to Front of Group
view easier to understand. Experiment to see edit button to move the selected
what works for you. object(s) so that it displays in front of other
objects in the same drawing group. Move to
You can also print in color or gray scale. See
Front of Group functions like the checkbox
Print Dialog on page 436.
of the same name in the objects specification
dialog.
Drawing Groups
Each object in a plan file belongs to one of
three drawing groups, which influences
whether it displays in front of or behind other
objects.
The Default Group is where most
objects are placed when first created.
Objects on the Back Group display
behind those in the other two drawing
groups.
Objects on the Front Group display in
Textures
front of those in the other two drawing The appearance of architectural objects in 3D
groups. views is affected by the materials applied to
With the exception of imported pictures, the objects surfaces. See Materials on
when an object is first created, it is placed in page 325.
the Default Group. Objects in this group In 3D views, you can turn on or off the
display in front of or behind one another display of textures by selecting 3D> Toggle
according to program-defined rules that
Textures .
cannot be modified.
Once a CAD or CAD-based object is created, Delete Surface
though, you can control how it displays
relative to other objects using its In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Surface, then click a surface in the
view to temporarily remove the surface from
85
the current view. See Delete 3D Surface on items, and correct random on-screen effects
page 350. caused by changes to a model. Select Tools>
Display Settings> Refresh Display or press
Refresh Display the F5 key to refresh the on-screen display.
Refresh Display redraws the current

window to clean up extra lines, show missing
Moving Objects
Objects can be moved individually and in Bumping/Pushing
groups using the edit handles, as well as a
variety of edit tools. When an object bumps into another similar
object while it is being moved, it stops.
Continue dragging and the selected item
resumes movement through the obstructing
Select an object, then click the Move edit object.
handle and drag it to a new location. When
Walls, wall openings, cabinets, furnishings
your pointer is over the Move handle, it
and fixtures, and CAD and CAD-based
displays a four-headed arrow.
objects are examples of objects that can push
other objects of these same types once they
have bumped into them. Instead of dragging
through the obstructing object(s), release the
mouse button and then click and drag the
Move edit handle a second time in the same
direction to push.
When moved, the selected object moves

Unrestricted Movement
orthogonal, or at a right angle to, any of its Many objects have restrictions placed on
edges. their movement by their own properties or
specification settings. Architectural objects,
As an object is moved, it jumps at set
for example, bump into other 3D objects as
increments when Grid Snaps are they are being moved.
enabled. See Grid Snaps on page 59.
Other move restrictions are activated by the
If an selected object passes over its original Snap Settings. See Snap Behaviors on
location as it is being moved, it will snap to page 58.
that location.
These restrictions can be overridden when
necessary by holding down the Ctrl key
while dragging to move an object.
86
Aligning Objects
To move an object freely the next edit. The next time you want to use
this edit tool, you need to click it again.
1. Select the object.
You can also slow down the movement speed
2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
of a selection after you have started moving
3. Click the Move edit handle and drag it it by pressing the Shift key. Release the Shift
to the new location. key to resume movement at normal speed.
You can also press the Ctrl key while
dragging an objects Move handle to override Center Object
move restrictions. The Center Object edit button allows
you to move walls, cabinets and other
Accurate Move objects so that they are centered along a wall
Click the Accurate Move edit button, within a room or relative to a window or
then move the selected object(s) at a cabinet.
slower speed than normal for greater
precision. Accurate Move can also be used Using Dimensions
to resize, reshape or rotate objects. Objects or the selected edges of some
objects can be moved using
Accurate Move is not a toggle button: it
dimensions. See Moving Objects Using
only affects the speed of the mouse during
Dimensions on page 376.
Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as Using Snap Settings
text boxes or walls, or to align objects on
different floors. There are several methods to With Object Snaps, you can snap the edge
choose from. of a selected object to that of another. Select
an edge of an object. Drag it to the edge of
another object, then release the mouse.
Using the Mouse
Crosshairs With Grid Snaps on and Angle
Objects can be aligned by eye using the Snaps off, select the left side of the
mouse crosshairs as a reference. This method object, and drag from the center move
can help you draw, place and edit objects handle. This snaps the selected side to the
quickly and with reasonable accuracy, but is grid.
not necessarily as accurate as some of the
other approaches described here. When both Grid Snaps and Angle
The mouse crosshairs can be turned on and Snaps on, objects snap at increments
off by selecting Tools> Display Settings> equal to the Snap unit specified in the Plan
Show Crosshairs. Defaults dialog rather than onto the grid
87
itself. This does not align objects to the grid To center an object in a room
unless they were already snapped to the grid.
See Snap Behaviors on page 58. 1. Select an object such a cabinet.
2. Click the Center Object edit button.

Using Dimensions
3. Move the mouse pointer in the room that
Create a temporary or manual you would like to center the selected
dimension relative to an object such as object relative to.
a wall or line, and relocate the objects to the As you move the pointer, a centering
same dimension. See Moving Objects axis will display along the wall it is
Using Dimensions on page 376. closest to.
The selected object does not have to be
Text objects can be aligned using set- inside a room in order to be centered
tings in the Text Specification dialog. relative to that room.
See Aligning Text on page 386.
4. When a centering axis displays along the
correct wall, click once.
Using Center Object
5. The object is moved perpendicular to the
The Center Object edit button can be centering axis.
used to center a variety of objects
If you click outside an exterior wall instead
relative to another object.
of clicking inside, the selected object is
centered along the edge of the Exterior
To center an object
Room. See The Exterior Room on page
1. Select an object. 121.
2. Click the Center Object edit button. Aligning Objects on

3. Move the mouse pointer over the object Different Floors
you would like to center the selected
object relative to. Objects on different floors can be aligned
with one another using the Reference
As the pointer passes over an eligible
object, it becomes highlighted and a Display . See The Reference Floor on
dashed centering axis line displays. page 177.
4. When the desired centering axis dis-
plays, click once to center the selected
object along that axis line.
Resizing Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles
and specification dialogs.
88
Reshaping Objects
Using the Edit Handles Using the

The end, corner and/or side edit handles can Specification Dialog
be used to resize a selected object. Most objects can be accurately resized
To override any movement restrictions in their specification dialogs. See
caused by snap settings or the presence of Specification Dialogs on page 26.
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle. Using Dimensions
As an object is resized, any dimensions Many objects can be resized by
indicating its size will update to reflect yoru selecting an edge and then moving
changes. You can use dimensions as that edge using dimensions. See Moving
references to help you achieve the correct Objects Using Dimensions on page 376.
size for most objects. Walls can also be resized using dimensions;
however, it is important to understand that
the selected edges of other objects cannot be
resized using dimensions - they can only be
moved. To resize an edge, select an adjacent
edge and move that edge instead.
Reshaping Objects
There is a variety of ways to reshape objects Using the
using the edit handles, specification dialogs Specification Dialog
and edit toolbar buttons.
A variety of CAD and CAD-based
Some objects, notably circles and box-based objects can be reshaped by editing
objects, cannot be reshaped - only resized. values on either the Selected Line or Selected
See Resizing Objects on page 88. Arc tab of their specification dialogs. See
Polyline Specification Dialog on page 399.
Depending on the type of object selected, the Using Dimensions
end, corner and/or side edit handles can be Both temporary and manually drawn
used to reshape a selected object. dimensions can be used to increase or
To override any movement restrictions decrease the distance between the edge a
caused by snap settings or the presence of line- or polyline-based object and another,
other objects, press the Ctrl key while parallel edge or line.
dragging an edit handle.
89
Break Line 3. Click the edge to create a new corner

edit handle at that location and two sepa-
The Break Line edit button can be rate edges on either side of that handle.
used to break an individual line-, arc-,
or spline-based object into two segments. If you click and drag one of the edit handles
The edges of a polyline-based object can also on either side of the partial break, the edge
be broken. moves at a right angle to itself and another
edge forms, connecting the moved edge with
the one on the other side that does not move.
Note: The Break Line edit button is not avail-
able for box-based objects, objects created You can remove an edge from a polyline-
with the Circle Tools, or some architectural based object by clicking and dragging a
objects such as stairs. corner handle until it snaps to an adjacent
corner handle.
The Break Line edit tool can be used to
create two types of breaks: partial breaks and Change Line/Arc
complete breaks.
Select an individual line-based or arc-
When a partial break is created, a new corner based object or a segment of a
edit handle is placed at the location of the polyline-based object and click the Change
break. Partial breaks are also referred to as Line/Arc edit button to convert the selected
joints, nodes or pivot points. segement from a line to an arc or vice versa.
Click the Break Line edit button to

add a new corner or pivot point to the
selected object.
To create a partial break
1. Click the object or edge that you want to

break into two segments.
2. Click the Break Line edit button

once or press the 3 key.
Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated individually and in Using the Edit Handles
groups using a variety of methods.
Select an object, then click the triangular
By default, an object or group of objects Rotate edit handle and drag it in any
rotate about the center point of the selection direction. When your pointer is over the
set. Rotate handle, it displays a curved arrow.
90
Deleting Objects
The angles of line-based objects can also be edges of polylines can be specified on either
changed by dragging an end handle in a the General tab, Selected Line tab, or
direction other than parallel to the object. Selected Arc tab of that objects specification
The object rotates about the opposite end dialog. See Polyline Specification Dialog
point. See Editing Line Based Objects on on page 399.
page 68.
Objects snap to Allowed Angles as they are Reverse Plan
rotated. See Angle Snaps on page 59. The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
To override any movement restrictions to mirror a plan so that everything on
caused by snap settings or the presence of all floors of the entire plan is swapped left to
other objects, press the Ctrl key while right rather than rotated.
dragging an edit handle.
Select Tools> Reverse Plan to reflect an
entire plan right to left, as though it were
Using the reflected about a vertical line.
The exact angle of some objects such
as lines, arcs, walls and the selected
Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways: To prevent the arrow from being deleted,
Select an object or group of objects, then drag the attached end away from the object
before deleting it.
click the Delete edit button, select
Edit> Delete from the menu, or press Delete Objects Dialog
the either the Delete or Backspace key on
Use the Delete Objects dialog to
your keyboard.
delete all objects of one or more
Entire categories of objects can be specified types in one room, on the current
deleted using the Delete Objects dialog. floor, or in the entire plan.
Objects are deleted if the floor they are
placed on is deleted. See Deleting To use the Delete Objects dialog
Floors on page 174.
1. Select Edit> Delete Objects to open
If an object has a line with arrow attached to
the Delete Objects dialog.
it, the arrow is deleted if the object is deleted.
91
objects of the selected type within that

room without closing the dialog.
Continue clicking on rooms or choose a
different Delete Scope.
Click Done when all selections have
been deleted.
5. If you select All Rooms On This Floor,
you do not need to click in floor plan
view. The OK button becomes available,
and clicking it closes the dialog and
delete the specified objects.
Deleting Polyline Edges

To remove an edge from a polyline, drag a
corner handle until it overlaps an adjacent
corner handle to remove the edge between
2. Specify the Delete Scope as Single them and merge them into a single handle.
Room or All Rooms On This Floor. See Reshaping Objects on page 89.
3. In the Delete section, check the box for Delete Surface

each category of objects you want to
delete. Click Select All to check all the In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
boxes or Clear All to uncheck all boxes. Surface, then click a surface in the
4. When the scope is set to Single Room: view to temporarily remove the surface from
the current view without permanently
Move your cursor into the drawing area
affecting the object. See Delete 3D Surface
and click in a room of the plan to delete
on page 350.
Undo and Redo

The Undo and Redo commands To Undo an action, select Edit> Undo ,
allow you to both undo the last
action performed, as well as redo actions that click the Undo button, or press Ctrl + Z
were recently Undone. on your keyboard.
The ten most recent actions can be Undone The Redo command is only available
or Redone. Actions that can be Undone and immediately after Undo has been used. To
Redone include creating, editing, and Redo an Undone action, select Edit>
deleting objects. Redo , click the Redo button or press
Ctrl + Y on your keyboard.
92
Undo and Redo
It is important to note that Undo and Changes made in a dialog while the dia-
log box is open. See Dialogs on page
Redo do not affect all actions in the 25.
program. Commands that are not affected
Changes made to the display by panning
include:
the display or zooming in or out. See
Save and Save As. See Saving a Plan Undo Zoom on page 336.
File on page 36.
Changes made in the Library Browser.
See The Library Browser on page 306.
93
94
Chapter 8:
Walls, Railings &

Fencing
Walls are the single most important building Chapter Contents

component in Home Designer Suite. By Wall Defaults
creating walls and defining the rooms created The Wall Tools
by the walls, you are telling the program how The Deck Tools
you want the 3D model built. The Fencing Tools
There are several ways that walls can be Exterior and Interior Walls
created in Home Designer Suite. The most Foundation Walls
common is to simply draw them with the Railings
Wall Tools. Invisible Walls
Polygon Shaped Decks
In addition, exterior walls can be generated Hatch Wall
automatically when a new floor is built by Break Wall
using another floor as a model. For more, see Drawing Walls
Adding Floors on page 173. Connecting Walls
Another feature that can be used to generate Displaying Walls
walls automatically is the House Wizard. Measuring Walls
See House Wizard on page 403. Editing Walls
Aligning Walls
Roof Directives in Walls
Attic Walls
Wall Type Definitions
Wall Specification Dialog
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog
95
Wall Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by The settings in the wall defaults dialog
selecting Edit> Default Settings. determines what wall types are drawn when
Click on Walls and click the Edit button to the different wall tools are used. It is a good
open the Wall Defaults dialog. idea to be familiar with these settings and
how they relate to your style of building.
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Dialog

Specify which wall types are drawn using the
Exterior and Interior Wall tools in
the Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults dialog.
1 Exterior Wall Tool - From the drop- 2 Interior Wall Tool - From the drop-
down list, select the wall type drawn down list, select the wall type drawn by
with the Exterior Wall tool. the Interior Wall tool.
The Wall Tools

Select Build> Wall to access the Wall Tools. specified in its corresponding defaults
The type of wall drawn by each wall tool is dialog.
96
The Deck Tools
The Curved Wall tools are similar to their Half-Walls

corresponding Straight Wall Tools. Select
Build> Curved Wall to access these tools. The Half-Wall and Curved
Half-Wall tools create solid
railings: walls that are 36 (900 mm) high
Exterior Walls
topped with a handrail.
The Exterior Wall and Curved
Exterior Wall tools draw walls Invisible Wall
using the default wall type specified for
exterior walls in the Exterior/Interior Wall Invisible Walls are walls used to
Defaults dialog. See Exterior and Interior define separate room areas in a plan.
Walls on page 98. They can display in floor plan view but not in
3D views. You can also convert a normal
wall into an invisible wall and vice versa in
Interior Walls
the Wall Specification dialog. See Invisible
The Interior Wall and Curved Walls on page 100.
Interior Wall tools draw walls
using the wall type specified for interior Hatch Wall
walls. The interior wall type is defined in the
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Defaults The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch
dialog. pattern to a wall that displays in floor
plan views. You must click the wall that you
want to apply the hatch pattern to. You can
Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an then select the hatch and resize it if you want
exterior or interior wall by the program is
to only hatch a portion of a wall. See Hatch
determined by its position in the model, not
by the tool used to draw it. See Exterior and
Wall on page 101.
Interior Walls on page 98.
Break Wall
Railings The Break Wall tool applies a break
The Railing and Curved Railing in a wall. Once a wall is broken, the
tools create railings. See two wall segments are separate walls that can
Railings on page 99. be modified independent of each other. See
Break Wall on page 102.
The Deck Tools

Select Build> Deck to access the
Deck Tools. When a room is defined
using deck railing, its Room Type is
automatically set to Deck. See Decks on
page 126.
97
supports for the deck are also created. See

Railings on page 99.
Deck Edges
The Straight Deck Edge and
Curved Deck Edge draw decks
complete with framing, but without a railing.
No deck supports are created.
Polygon Shaped Deck

Deck Railing The Polygon Shaped Deck tool
opens the New Polygon Shaped
The Straight Deck Railing and Deck dialog, where you can specify the exact
Curved Deck Railing tools draw size and number of sides of a new polygonal
decks, complete with framing and bounded deck room and then click in floor plan view
by a railing. If a foundation level exists, to create that deck room. See Polygon
Shaped Decks on page 101.
The Fencing Tools

Select Build> Fencing or click the Fencing automatically follows the shape of
Fencing Tools to access the fencing the terrain.
tools.
The Fencing and Curved
Fencing tools are used to draw
fences, which are similar to railings but by
default do not define room areas. Fencing is
created and edited much like walls and
railings, and normally used outside of a
You can specify a fence panel style in the
building and follows the shape of the terrain.
Fencing Specification dialog. See Fence
See Terrain on page 251.
Style Tab on page 117.
Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls are drawn using either the is the wall type used. You can specify the
Exterior Wall or Interior Wall tool. default wall type for each tool in the Wall
Defaults dialog.
The only difference between these two tools
98
Foundation Walls
To draw a wall using a different wall type, Whether a wall is recognized by the program
you can change the default wall type for as an actual exterior or interior wall is based
either tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You on the model, not by which tool you use to
can also draw a wall using the default type draw the wall. Any wall that is entirely
and then change the wall type in the Wall surrounded by interior room areas is
Specification dialog. considered an interior wall. Any wall
exposed to the outside of the building is
considered an exterior wall.
Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the interior
and exterior walls but also have a footing.
Foundation walls are created automatically
when a foundation floor is created. See
Building a Foundation on page 181.
Railings
Railings are created and edited
just like walls. See Drawing
Walls on page 102.
Railings are ideal for a number of tasks:
Creating changes in floor and/or ceiling
height. See Floor & Ceiling Heights on
page 127.
Creating stairwells. See Creating a Stair-
well on page 212.
Drawing decks. See Decks on page
126. To produce a break in a railing for a stairway
or other access, use a Doorway . This
keeps the railing continuous and maintains
99
room definition. See Room Definition on Railing Types

page 120.
A variety of railing types can be specified in
When first drawn, railings are specified as the Railing and Deck Railing Specification
No Locate, which prevents Auto Exterior dialogs. See Railing Tab on page 115.
Dimensions from locating them. The No Available types include:
Room Def attribute may also be helpful if Baluster creates railings composed of
you do not want a railing to divide an area newel posts, balusters, a railing, and an
into two separate rooms. See General Tab optional shoe.
on page 113.
Solid produces a framed railing wall, or
Newels and balusters do not display in floor Half Wall. See Half-Walls on page 97.
plan view. If Panels is selected, you can choose a
Panel Type from the Library.
Invisible Walls
Invisible walls can display in floor An invisible wall can be turned into a normal
plan view but not in 3D views. They wall, or vice versa, by clicking the Invisible
are used to create or modify room definition, check box in its Wall Specification dialog.
most often by defining smaller areas within See General Tab on page 113.
larger rooms. See Room Definition on
Invisible walls are are placed on the Walls,
page 120.
Invisible layer by default. A wall placed on
Invisible walls can also be used to define a non-default layer and then specified as
areas with different floor or ceiling materials Invisible, however, will not move to the
or heights. Walls, Invisible layer.
Common uses for invisible walls include
dividing areas of an open floor plan into Important Notes on
areas with different purposes. Invisible Walls
Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calcu-
lated separately for rooms divided by
invisible and normal walls.
Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto
Place Outlets tool; it functions as
though they were not present.
Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be
Invisible walls separate this dining area moved freely through Invisible walls.
from adjacent rooms
Invisible walls can be drawn through a
cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
100

Select Build> Deck> Polygon To create a polygon shaped deck
Shaped Deck to open the New
Polygon Shaped Deck dialog and create a 1. Click the radio button beside an option
polygon shaped deck with regular sides. to specify whether you want to Define
Polygon by Side Length, Radius to
Corner or Radius to Side.
2. Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3. Specify the desired Side Length or,
4. Specify the desired Radius.
5. Uncheck Include Railing to produce a
deck platform defined by Deck Edges.
This option is not available in the New
Polygon Shaped Room dialog.
The settings in this dialog are saved between
program sessions. 6. Click OK, then click once in floor plan
view to create the specified polygon
shaped deck.
Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool can be used to Once created, wall hatching can be selected,
fill wall segments with a single hatch edited and deleted much like other line-based
pattern in floor plan view. objects. See Editing Line Based Objects on
page 68.
To apply wall hatching, select Build> Wall>
Hatch Wall , then click on a wall. The If you use the Hatch Wall tool to apply a
hatch pattern covers the entire length and hatch pattern to a wall that has been divided
width of the wall segment. into multiple segments using the Break
Wall tool, the pattern is only applied to
Note: The Hatch Wall tool cannot be used to the segment that you clicked on . See Break
apply a hatch pattern to Invisible Walls. See Wall on page 102.
Invisible Walls on page 100.
Like doors and windows, wall hatching
cannot extend across multiple wall segments.
Hatch Wall places a hatch pattern across Unlike these objects, hatching cannot be
all layers of the selected wall, covering any located by dimension lines.
fill styles specified for that wall type.
101
The wall hatch pattern can be specified in the When editing or deleting wall hatching,
Wall Hatch Specification dialog. See Wall make sure that it is selected rather than the
Hatch Specification Dialog on page 118. wall by noting that Wall Hatching displays
in the Status Bar. See The Status Bar on
page 26.
Break Wall
To divide a wall or railing, select Once a break is placed, click the Select
Build> Wall> Break Wall and click Objects tool and select the original wall.
on the wall. The wall is divided into two wall If edit handles display near the break, the
sections at the point where you click. wall was correctly broken.
The Break Wall tool remains active, so Walls separated by a break can be rejoined.
you can continue to place breaks in walls. Select one of the segments, then click on the
When you are finished, select a different end edit handle located at the break and drag
tool. it a few plan inches (mm) away from the
break. See Connecting Walls on page 103.
If a wall break is placed near the intersection
of two walls, the break is positioned at the The Break Wall tool can be used to
center of the intersection. create aligned walls on either side of a gap.
See Creating a Nook on page 109.
Drawing Walls
Walls are drawn similar to the way CAD As walls are drawn, sticky points iden-
lines are drawn and can be drawn in floor tify points that are either collinear or
plan view, camera views, and overviews. See orthogonal to the end points of other
Draw Lines on page 391. walls, making alignment easier. See
Extension Snaps on page 59.
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple
if you keep a few things in mind: When walls enclose an area to form a
room, the program will orient all exterior
Draw exterior walls first to define the
walls so that the siding material faces out-
buildings footprint, then draw the interior
ward.
walls after the perimeter is in place.
To flip the layers of a wall after it is
It is easiest to draw walls at the approxi-
drawn, select it and click the Reverse
mate location and length needed and then
move or resize them precisely using Layers edit button. See Editing
dimensions later. See Moving Objects Walls on page 106.
Using Dimensions on page 376.
102
Connecting Walls
Initial wall heights are determined by the Masonry fireplaces placed in walls are also
default floor and ceiling heights of the considered to be wall openings. See
current floor. Fireplaces on page 295.
Wall Positioning Temporary Dimensions

The recommended method of drawing walls Temporary dimensions will display along the
is to draw them at their approximate location length of a wall as it is drawn, helping you
and length, then move them into position draw walls to the desired length. Although
with accuracy using dimensions. To make dimensions display as you are drawing, you
this task quick and efficient: do not need to position walls precisely when
Notice the temporary wall that displays as you first draw them: they can be easily
you draw. Its length and angle display in moved into place at any time. See Editing
the Status Bar at the bottom of the win- Walls on page 106.
dow and adjust as you move the mouse.
Release the mouse button to draw the wall Drawing Curved Walls
at the displayed length and angle. See Drawing a curved wall, curved railing, or
The Status Bar on page 26. curved fence is similar to drawing a CAD
Use Snaps to help ensure proper wall arc. See Draw Arc on page 392.
alignment and orientation. See Snap
A straight wall can also be converted into a
Behaviors on page 58.
curved wall and vice versa using the Change
Once walls are drawn, they can be accurately Line/Arc edit button. See Change Line/
dimensioned and moved as needed. See Arc on page 90.
Measuring Walls on page 105.
Wall Openings To create a room in the shape of a cir-

cle, you must draw two curved walls.
To create a door or doorway, do not draw
wall sections with a gap between them. Walls House Wizard
should be drawn to completely enclose
rooms, and then door and window objects The House Wizard allows you to place
should be placed in the walls to create and arrange room objects that can
openings later. See Doors on page 137 and then be converted into a fully editable house
Windows on page 153. plan, including walls. See House Wizard
on page 403.
Connecting Walls
When walls are drawn sufficiently close to the walls center lines are within a distance
one another, they will snap together to form defined by the larger of the two walls widths
an intersection. This snapping occurs when
103
and will occur even when Object Snaps are Removing Wall Breaks
turned off. See Object Snaps on page 58.
The Break Wall tool allows you to break
If the two walls in question have the same
a wall into two or more separate wall
wall type and identical specifications, and
segments. See Break Wall on page 102.
are collinear, they will merge to become a
single wall. See Aligning Collinear Walls To merge two collinear walls separated by a
on page 109. break,select one of the segments, then click
on the end edit handle located at the break
When three or more walls connect to form a
and drag it a few plan inches (mm) away
completely enclosed area, that area defines a
from the break.
room. See Rooms on page 119.
If the two walls do not merge, either one or
When walls snap together to form an
both walls have been moved and they are no
intersection and Object Snaps are enabled,
longer collinear, or one or both has been
the program joins them at theirMain Layers.
edited in some way and they are no longer
See Aligning Walls on page 109.
identical. Open the Wall Specification
The wall that is being drawn or edited will dialog for each wall and determine how they
move, lengthen, or shorten slightly to differ. See Wall Hatch Specification
meet the other wall. Dialog on page 118.
The other wall will not move; however,
its length may be affected.
Displaying Walls
The display of walls in all views is whether or not various types of walls display.
controlled in the Display Options Walls are placed on layers with Walls at
dialog. See Displaying Objects on page 54. the beginning of the layer name, such as
Walls, Normal.
If a Walls layer is turned off, any doors and
windows placed in walls on that layer will
not display, either. See Displaying Doors Note: In floor plan view, railings not specified
on page 140 and Displaying Windows on as Solid display their Main Layer regardless
page 158. of whether Walls, Layers or Walls, Main
Layer Only is turned on.
In Floor Plan View
It is sometimes helpful to display the walls
There are several options for controlling how from a floor other than the current floor. To
walls are displayed in floor plan view. In the do this, select and display a reference floor.
Display Options dialog, you can specify See The Reference Floor on page 177.
104
Measuring Walls
In 3D Views dialog. If you select Use Default as the

material and the wall is used to define a
As in floor plan view, the display of walls room, the program refers to the material
can be controlled by layer in the Display specified in the Room Specification dialog.
Options dialog. See Wall Specification Dialog on page
While most architectural objects in the 113.
program can display in both floor plan and You can also change a rooms wall material
3D views, a few cannot. Invisible walls and in the Room Specification dialog. See
wall hatching are examples of objects that do Materials Tab on page 328. To restore the
not display in 3D. default Wall Type material, select Use
Default in the Select Library Object dialog.
Wall Materials See Select Library Object Dialog on page
There are several ways that materials can be 319.
assigned to walls. See Rooms on page 119.
When you draw a wall, it uses the. Note: Wall materials that are specified on the
Materials tab of either the Wall or Room
You can change the surface material of an Specification dialog are not calculated in the
individual wall in the Wall Specification Materials List.
Measuring Walls
Accurate wall measurements are an essential to meet your needs. See Dimension
aspect of any drawing, and can be achieved Defaults Dialog on page 367.
by following two basic rules:
Be aware of what part of a wall assembly Edit Dimension Lines
dimensions are locating; Once a dimension line has been drawn, its
Position walls using dimensions rather extension lines can be edited to locate a
than edit handles or edit tools. number of locations on a wall assembly:
These rules can easily be met when you keep The exterior surface
the following recommendations in mind. The Main Layers exterior
The center line of the wall assembly
Use Dimension Defaults
The Main Layers center line
Dimensions can be set to locate walls at their
The Main Layers interior
Main Layers or at surfaces. Before drawing
dimensions - and particularly, before using The interior surface
them to move your walls into position - make See Editing Extension Lines on page 374.
sure that your Dimension Defaults are set up
105
Move Walls Using Dimensions being drawn as well as when they are edited.
See Snap Behaviors on page 58.
By far, the most precise method of
positioning walls is using dimension lines. Object Snaps help to ensure consistent wall
To produce accurate measurements, connections and are particularly helpful
remember to: when aligning collinear walls.
Be aware of what part of your walls is When Grid Snaps are enabled, walls are
being located by dimensions. drawn on a regularly spaced grid, which
Avoid specifying dimension values with helps avoid inaccurate wall placement. This
greater accuracy than your dimensions are can become particularly important if you
set to display. See Format Tab on page forego positioning walls using dimensions in
369. favor of using edit handles to move them.
See Using Dimensions on page 107. Angle Snaps make it easy to accurately draw
walls at regular angles, ensuring walls that
are truly parallel or perpendicular to one
Use Object, Angle and
another and separated by consistent
Grid Snaps distances.
Object Snaps, Angle Snaps, and Grid Snaps
make it easier to align walls when they are
Editing Walls
Walls can be selected individually and as a key on your keyboard to select the wall
group in all views. When a wall is selected, it itself.
displays edit handles and an edit toolbar that In floor plan view, if wall hatching has
can be used to edit it in various ways. When been applied to a wall using the Hatch
a wall is selected, temporary dimensions will
also display. Wall tool, the hatching may be
selected first. Click Select Next
The ways in which a wall can be edited
depends on the current view and which edge Object to select the wall itself. See
is selected. See Selecting Objects on page Hatch Wall on page 101.
66.
Selecting Walls Depending on the type of view, a wall
When you try to select a wall in a Cross displays a different set of edit handles when
Section/Elevation or 3D view, the interior selected.
or exterior room that it defines may be In floor plan view, straight and curved
selected first. Click the Select Next walls can be edited like other line- and
Object edit button or press the Tab arc-based objects. See Editing Line
106
Editing Walls
Based Objects on page 68 and Editing Using the Edit Tools

Arc Based Objects on page 70.
A selected wall or walls can be edited in a
In a camera view or overview, click on the variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
top surface of a wall to display the same toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 24.
edit handles as in floor plan view, allow-
ing you to rotate, move, and extend or The characteristics of the roof directly above
shorten the length of the wall. a selected wall can also be specified in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Tab
Moving a wall in any view will move any
on page 114.
cabinets attached to that wall, as well.
In a cross section/elevation view, the side Using Dimensions
edges of straight walls can be moved to
shorten or lengthen the segment. Curved Automatic, manually-drawn, and
walls can be shortened in this manner, but temporary dimension lines can be
not lengthened. used to both resize and move walls with
accuracy. Select a wall, then click on a
In a camera view or overview, click on an
dimension line that locates it. See Moving
interior or exterior surface to display an
Objects Using Dimensions on page 376.
edit handle at the center of each side edge,
allowing you to shorten or lengthen the When a wall is resized using dimensions, the
wall. Curved walls can be shortened in inline text field used to edit the dimension
this manner, but not lengthened. will have three unique buttons: Move Start,
When a wall is connected to other walls it Move End and Move Both Ends.
can only be moved perpendicular to itself
or, in the case of curved walls, perpendic- Move Start Move End
ular to its chord using the Move edit han-
dle.
Move Both Ends
In the Specification Dialog
The appearance and structure of walls Depending on your Dimension Defaults
can be customized in the Wall settings, dimension lines may locate wall
Specification dialog. See Wall surfaces or Main Layers. See Dimension
Specification Dialog on page 113. Defaults Dialog on page 367.
The characteristics of the roof directly above Wall Thickness

a selected wall can also be specified in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Roof Tab The initial thickness of a wall is determined
on page 114. by its wall type.
You can specify a selected walls thickness in
its Wall Specification dialog. See General
Tab on page 113.
107
If a selected walls thickness is changed: The ceiling height of a single room can be
A copy of the walls wall type is created set in its Room Specification dialog. See
with the same name but appended with a General Tab on page 131.
number equal to the thickness of the
structural layer, and that new type is Wall Length
assigned to the wall. Wall length can be modified in several
The change in thickness will be applied to different ways:
new wall types structural layer. Using dimensions. See Measuring
The structural layer must be at least 1/16 Walls on page 105.
thick, and the walls thickness cannot be In the Wall Specification dialog. See
less than the original wall types total General Tab on page 113.
thickness minus the thickness of its struc-
tural layer. By dragging the end edit handles. See
Editing Line Based Objects on page 68
If a wall types thickness is modified, the and Editing Arc Based Objects on page
wall will resize about the outside edge of its 70.
Main Layer. In some instances, the wall may
appear to move as a result of changes made Bear in mind that if you try to resize a wall
to the thicknesses of its layers. by a small amount using one of its edit
handles and that wall is connected to another
wall at that end, its length will not change
Wall Heights
because its end will snap back to the existing
The height of a wall is controlled by the intersection. See Connecting Walls on
ceiling height of the room(s) it defines. If the page 103.
ceiling or floor height of a room is changed,
The most accurate way to specify wall length
the height of the walls that define it also
is using dimensions. By default, wall length
change.
is measured at the outside edge of the Main
The ceiling heights for all rooms on a Layer. You can instead specify that
floor are controlled in the Room Defaults dimension lines locate surfaces in the
dialog for that floor. See Floor and Room Dimension Defaults dialog. See Dimension
Defaults on page 120. Whenever possi- Defaults Dialog on page 367.
ble, it is best to set all ceiling heights
using the defaults.
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a wall will either lengthen or shorten as needed
curved wall with a locked center, the curved to stay connected to the curved wall.
wall extends along its curve and the straight
108
Aligning Walls
If the connection between the straight and

curved wall cannot be maintained because of
the curved walls radius, it will be broken.
Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall To align walls across a gap
segments line up with one another, either on
the same floor or on the floor above or 1. Select a wall to build a nook into and
below. Walls may need to be aligned in a click the Break Wall edit button.
variety of situations.
2. Click at a point on the wall close to one
To make alignment easier when drawing or side of the nook area. Do not worry
resizing walls, sticky points identify points about exact placement right now.
that are either collinear or orthogonal to the
3. Click again near the other side of the
end points of other walls. See Extension
nook. Two short lines at each location
Snaps on page 59.
where you clicked indicate Wall Breaks.
Aligning Collinear Walls
Collinear walls are parallel walls connected
end to end and drawn on the same floor.
When collinear walls join end-to-end, the
walls snap together. If these walls have the
same wall type and identical specifications,
and if Object Snaps are enabled, they will
merge to become a single wall segment.
Place Wall Position these
Creating a Nook Breaks here walls as needed
Walls can be aligned across an opening such 4. Right-click the middle section of the
as a nook, so that they are collinear, using the wall to select the wall section.
Break Wall tool. 5. Click the middle Move handle and drag
the wall outward.
109
6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back must click on it along that part. Select
to the rest of the house. Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
7. Move these short walls using dimen- Display On to help make sure you
sions to accurately size the nook. click on the correct part of the wall.
3. When you have selected the wall at the
Aligning Walls desired location, click either the Align
Between Floors
With Wall Above or Align With
Walls can be aligned between floors by Wall Below edit button.
clicking the Align With Wall Above and
Align With Wall Below edit buttons. Aligning Curved Walls
Between Floors
In order for these edit tools to be avail- Curved walls are aligned between floors
able, the areas of the walls in question using the same technique to align straight
must be partially aligned, or overlapping. walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
within a few inches of each other, the Align
To align walls between floors
With Wall Above and Align With Wall
1. Select a wall that you want to align with Below edit buttons are enabled for the
another wall either above or below it. selected wall. The selected curved wall will
take on the radius and center of the
2. If the wall is above or below the other
referenced wall when the walls are aligned.
wall along only part of its length, you

To automatically generate a roof plane using Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable
values other than the defaults or to not with a ridge centered above the selected
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular wall(s).
wall (as for a gable or the sides of a shed Check High Shed/Gable Wall for the
roof), you can change the settings in the Wall side walls or the wall under the high side
Specification dialog. See Roof Tab on of a shed roof.
page 114.
You can also select a wall and click the
Hip, Gable, and Shed Roofs Change to Gable Wall(s) edit button,
or change it back by clicking the Change
By default, the program will produce a roof
plane over each exterior wall to create a hip to Hip Wall(s) edit button.
roof. You can instead specify a gable or shed
roof above the selected wall.
110
Attic Walls
Pitch checked. The two short side walls are Full

Gable Walls.
The default pitch for roof planes is set in the
Build Roof dialog. However, any exterior
wall can define the pitch of the roof plane
built above it.
You can also specify a second, upper pitch
above a given wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull
wing and half-hip are examples of roof styles
that use two pitches. See Roof Tutorial on Before
page 27 of the Users Guide.
Roof Returns Full Gable

Check Auto Roof Return to generate roof Wall
returns on the selected wall. In most cases,
roof returns only generate on Full Gable
Walls. See Roof Returns on page 197.
Extend Slope
Downward
Extend Slope Downward
Check Extend Slope Downward to extend
the roof plane downward over a bumpout,
instead of creating additional roof planes.
The two connecting walls that create the
bumpout must be Full Gable walls.
After
In the following image, the bearing wall of
the bumpout has Extend Slope Downward
Attic Walls
In Home Designer Suite, walls are built Attic Walls are typically found above Full
between the floor and ceiling platforms of Gable Walls, forming a gable or closing the
the current floor. See Floor & Ceiling top portion of a side wall beneath a shed
Heights on page 127. When the program roof. They are also generated above all
detects an open space between a wall and the exterior walls when the Raise Off Plate
roof plane above it, it automatically creates value in the Build Roof dialog is 3 (175
an Attic Wall on the floor above that wall to mm) or greater. See Build Roof Dialog on
fill in the gap. page 189.
111
Attic walls are often found on the Attic floor, however, Knee Walls are used in the interior
but can be generated on other floors, as well. of a structure, typically to separate unused
See The Attic Floor on page 177. areas from rooms on the upper floor of a
story-and-a-half structure. See Room
Types on page 123.
If you do not want to keep a particular
Attic Wall in your plan, specify it as Home Designer Suite does not specify walls
Invisible. See Invisible Walls on page 100. as Knee Walls automatically. If an interior
wall is drawn in a location where the roof is
Knee Walls lower than the ceiling height, you should
specify it as a Knee Wall in the Wall
Knee Walls are a bit like Attic Walls in that
Specification dialog. See Roof Tab on
they are not meant to generate to full ceiling
page 114.
height. Instead, they build upward until they
encounter a roof plane. Unlike Attic Walls,
Wall Type Definitions

Every wall drawn in a plan is assigned a wall Walls resize about the exterior surface of
type, and its Wall Type Definition determines their Main Layer when their wall type is
its structure, its appearance in floor plan changed.
view, and its default materials. Object Snaps locate the exterior surface
You can specify the default wall types used of a walls Main Layer. See Object
when walls are first created, and can specify Snaps on page 58.
the wall type of any wall after it is drawn in By default, dimension lines locate walls at
the Wall Specification dialog. See Wall their Main Layer. See Dimension
Defaults on page 96 and General Tab on Defaults Dialog on page 367.
page 113.
The structural layer of a wall type is its Main Interior and Exterior Surfaces
Layer, which controls a number of things: Every wall has an interior and exterior
At intersections, walls join at the interior surface - including walls in a plan that are
surfaces of their Main Layers. See Con- recognized by the program as being interior
necting Walls on page 103. walls. See Exterior and Interior Walls on
page 98.
Exterior walls on different floors are
aligned by the exterior edges of their Having separate designations for a walls two
Main Layers. surfaces allows you to specify different
Roof baselines are placed at the outer materials for each in the Wall Specification
edge of the Main Layer. dialog. See Materials Tab on page 117.
In floor plan view, you can identify a
selected walls exterior surface by the
112
location of its edit handles, which display on

the exterior of the Main Layer.

To open the Wall Specification The tabs of the Wall Specification dialog are
dialog, select a wall or group of walls also found in the Railing, Deck Railing, and
and click the Open Object edit button. Fencing Specification dialogs.
General Tab
1
2 5
3
Some items on the General tab are available Wall Angle - The current absolute angle
only when they apply to the selected wall or of the wall in a floor plan view is shown.
railing. Type in a new angle to rotate the wall
about its locked point.
1 The Thickness of the selected wall Wall Length - The current length is
displays and can be changed here. If the
wall is a Post to Overhead Beam railing, this shown. Type in a new length. The part of
setting also affects the width of the beam. the wall that extends or contracts is deter-
See Wall Thickness on page 107. mined by where it is locked.
2 Specify the Wall Angle and Wall 3 Check any of the Options to modify the
Length of a straight wall. These selected wall accordingly. In most
options are not available for curved walls.
113
cases, multiple options can be selected. Not Select Beam to have the wall display as
available for fencing. two lines in floor plan view and a beam in
Select No Room Def. to display the wall 3D views.
in floor plan and/or 3D views but not cre-
ate room definition. See Room Defini- 4 The Wall Type drop-down allows you
to change the type of the wall currently
tion on page 120. selected to any of the available options. Its
Select No Locate to prevent Auto Exte- graphic representation in the upper right
rior Dimensions from locating a wall. corner will update to reflect the wall type that
Railings have No Locate selected by is currently selected. Not available for
default. See Auto Exterior Dimensions fencing.
on page 371.
5 A preview diagram of the selected wall
type displays here.
Roof Tab
Any automatically generated roof style other The Roof tab is not available for Foundation
than a hip requires roof information to be Walls or Fencing. See Foundation Walls on
defined in the exterior walls. On the Roof page 99 and The Fencing Tools on page
tab, you can specify how the selected wall 98.
interacts with the roof plan, defining the
portion of the roof plan that bears on it..
1 3
1 Roof Options - Specify the shape of Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable
the wall relative to the roof. end over the selected wall.
114
Check High Shed/Gable Wall to specify Enter the Pitch of the second, upper roof.
the selected wall as the high end of a shed Specify the Height that the Upper Pitch
roof. Starts at, or define the distance in from
Check Knee Wall to define the selected Baseline that the second pitch begins. The
interior wall as a knee wall. Only an inte- two values are dynamic. Press the Tab key
rior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A to update the relative numbers.
knee walls height is defined by the roof
above, not the ceiling height. See Knee 3 Check Auto Roof Return to generate
roof returns on the selected wall. In
Walls on page 112.
most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Check Extend Slope Downward to con- Gable Walls. See Roof Returns on page
tinue a roof down over a bumpout in an 197.
exterior wall. See Extend Slope Down-
Specify the horizontal Length of the roof
ward on page 111.
return in inches.
2 Pitch Options - Specify the pitch or Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof
pitches of the roof plane(s) above the returns from the overhang.
selected wall.
Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
Enter a value to define the Pitch of the Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return.
roof plane bearing on the selected wall.
Specify the Overhang Length, which is the
Check Upper Pitch to create a roof with
horizontal distance from the outside of the
two pitches or, if the selected wall is a
walls Main Layer to the eave.
Full Gable Wall, a half hip condition.
Railing Tab
The Railing tab is only available for Railings
and Deck Railings. See Railings on page
99 and The Deck Tools on page 97.
115
1 2
3
4
5
1 Railing Type - Select the radio button Post to Overhead Beam - Create newel
for the desired railing type. A preview posts from floor to an overhead beam
of the selected type displays to the left. placed just under the ceiling height. The
Balusters - Create balusters. beams width is based on the Thickness of
the selected railing wall.
Solid - Create a solid, wall style railing.
The wall is the type defined by the current Post to Ceiling - Extend the newel posts
wall layer definition. to the ceiling.
Open - Create a railing with only a top Shoe Options - Select the check box for the
rail. desired placement of the bottom rail, or shoe.
If neither box is checked, the shoe is placed
Middle Rail - Create a railing with a top
at floor platform level.
and a middle rail.
Raise Shoe - Raise the shoe 3 (87 mm)
No Rail - Eliminate rails, leaving only
off the floor platform.
posts (and overhead beam, if selected).
No Shoe - Eliminate the shoe altogether.
Panels - Create a solid panel.
Balusters go right to the floor.
2 Post Type - Select the check box for
the desired post type. 3 Railing Height - Specify the height of
the railing in inches. Not available if
Post to Rail - Create newel posts from Post to Rail, Post to Overhead Beam, or Post
floor to rail height. This option is selected to Ceiling is selected.
by default.
4 Baluster Spacing - Specify the
distance between balusters in inches.
116
5 Newel Height and Newel Spacing - 6 A preview of the railing displays here
Specify the height and distance and updates as options are changed.
between newels.
Fence Style Tab

The Fence Style Tab is only available when a
Fence object is selected. See The Fencing
Tools on page 98.
2
3
1 Specify the size of the fencing library. See Select Library Object Dialog
components. on page 319.
Specify the overall Fence Height, from
the ground to the top. 3 Check Large Posts/Pillars for the
selected fencing to have posts that are
Specify the Post Height, which can be 50% wider than the selected fencings
greater than, less than, or the same as the Thickness value. When unchecked, the posts
overall Fence Height. are the same width as the Thickness.
Specify the Post Spacing, which is the
distance from the center of one post to the Materials Tab
next. All walls have an Exterior Wall Surface
and an Interior Wall Surface, including
2 Click the Fencing Library button to interior walls. See Interior and Exterior
specify a style of fence panel from the
Surfaces on page 112.
117
The materials specified on the Materials tab The Materials tab is available for a variety of
affect the appearance of walls in 3D views objects. See Materials Tab on page 328.
but are not calculated in the Materials List.
See Materials Lists on page 441.
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

To open the Wall Hatch Specification you select a pattern other than None from
dialog, select a Wall Hatch and click the Fill Pattern drop-down list.
the Open Object edit button. See Hatch Define the Spacing for the selected fill
Wall on page 101. pattern. Hatch spacing set at 12" matches
grid/reference spacing set at 12".
Check Transparent Pattern Fill to make
the fill pattern transparent. When you
check this option, any objects behind the
fill pattern are visible through it.
Fill Color - Click the color bar to select a
color for the fill pattern lines or fill color
if a solid fill is specified. This overrides
the layer color. See Color Chooser Dia-
log on page 334.
Choose a Preview Width from the drop-
down list. This value controls how large
Choose a Fill Pattern from the drop- an area the preview represents. The
down list. A preview of the selected pat- selected value indicates the length of each
tern displays to the right. side of the preview in plan inches (mm).
The options that follow are disabled until
118
Chapter 9:
Rooms
When walls or railings create an enclosed Chapter Contents

area, a room is created. You can select Floor and Room Defaults
rooms defined in this manner like other Room Definition
objects in Home Designer Suite. Selecting Rooms
Rooms are assigned a Room Type. Each Displaying Rooms
Room Type has predefined characteristics. Editing Rooms
For example, a room defined as Porch is Room Types
assigned certain attributes that are different Room Labels
than a Kitchen. Decks
Floor & Ceiling Heights
Floor and ceiling heights, baseboard, chair- Special Ceilings
rail, and crown moldings and materials can Room Specification Dialog
be defined room-by-room or for the entire
floor.
119
Floor and Room Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings to open Room Defaults
the Default Settings dialog where
you can access several defaults dialogs Additional defaults for several categories of
which directly affect rooms. rooms can also be specified:
Normal Rooms
Floor Defaults Kitchens/Baths/Utility Rooms
Default values for rooms are specified in the Decks
Floor Defaults dialog for the current floor. Garage/Porches/Slabs
This dialog also controls important
information that the program uses to create These Room Defaults dialogs are accessed
3D models - particularly floor and ceiling by expanding the Rooms category in the
heights and materials. Moldings can also be Default Settings dialog. Select a room type
specified in the Floor Defaults dialog. and click the Edit button to open the defaults
dialog for that room type. The settings in
Only the defaults for the first floor of a these dialogs are limited to material
building can be set ahead of time. The assignments and apply to all rooms assigned
program uses the setting from the first floor a particular room type.
to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor
is built, its floor defaults can be changed. See If a room is assigned one of these room
Floor Defaults Dialog on page 172. types, it uses the defaults associated with that
type.
If a room type has not been assigned, the
room uses the materials specified in the
Floor Defaults dialog.
Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as
any combination of joined walls or railings, Decks. See Room Types on page 123.
visible or invisible. To be recognized as a
If a room is drawn within a larger structure
room by Home Designer Suite, a room must
and none of its walls connect to the exterior
have an unbroken perimeter.
walls, either directly or indirectly by
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate connecting to walls that do, the program will
floor and ceiling platforms automatically. connect such a room to the larger structure
Most rooms are also automatically covered with an Invisible Wall. See Invisible Walls
by the roof when one is built. There are on page 100.
120
Selecting Rooms
Room definition disappears if part or all of a dialog for that floor. If the room is then
surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea specified as a particular type, it may inherit
to finalize the position of walls before material settings from the appropriate Room
defining rooms with names and attributes Defaults dialog.
such as floor height and ceiling height.
If a new room is created by subdividing a
larger room, it inherits its characteristics
Subdividing Rooms from that larger room - including any non-
When a room area is first defined, it inherits default settings.
its characteristics from the Floor Defaults
Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room band around the plans exterior displays.
is completely enclosed by walls. You can This band represents the selection area for
confirm that a room has room definition by the Exterior Room.
using the Select Objects tool to select it.
When a fully-enclosed room is selected, the
room highlights.
The Exterior Room is selected
The room at left is selected In camera views and overviews, the Exterior
Room can be selected by clicking on the
The Exterior Room exterior surface of an exterior wall using the
You can also select the exterior of a model. Select Objects tool.
This allows you to control the buildings
exterior wall coverings and materials using In 3D Views
the Room Specification dialog.
Click on the floor of a room or on a wall
Click just outside an exterior wall using the surface inside the room in a 3D or cross
Select Objects tool to select the Exterior section view using the Select Objects
Room. When it is selected, a highlighted tool. If you select another object instead of
121
the room, click Select Next Object edit the exterior surface of an exterior wall using
button or press the Tab key until the room is the Select Objects tool.
selected. The Status Bar indicates which
object is currently selected. Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room
In camera views and overviews, the Exterior is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or
Room can be selected by clicking once on Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed.
See Floor and Room Defaults on page 120.
Displaying Rooms
Unlike most things in Home Designer Suite, set to display in floor plan view. See Room
a room is not an individual object. Rather, a Labels on page 125.
room is defined by the walls that enclose it.
In 3D Views
In Floor Plan View
Rooms can be viewed in 3D views created by
Rooms typically display a transparent fill in any of the 3D view tools. The Dollhouse
floor plan view. You can, however, specify a View tool can be used to see all rooms on the
solid color or fill pattern for individual rooms current floor without their ceilings. See
in the Room Specification dialog. See Fill Creating Overviews on page 347.
In order for room fill styles to display, the In Materials Lists
Rooms layer must be turned on. See The contents of a room, including
Displaying Objects on page 54. furnishings and floor and ceiling materials
Room labels that include the rooms name as can be calculated using the Calculate From
well as its size and other information can be Room tool. See Calculate From Room on
page 442.
Editing Rooms
Once a room is defined by walls or railings, views. Lowered ceilings cannot be edited in
its structure and appearance can be edited 3D. See 3D Views on page 343.
using the edit buttons or the Room
The default floor and ceiling heights for an
Specification dialog.
entire model can be edited by selecting the
Exterior Room. See The Exterior Room on
In 3D Views page 121.
The floor and ceiling heights for floors and
rooms can be edited using edit handles in 3D
122
Room Types
To change default ceiling heights in 3D The Status Bar says Room. See The
Status Bar on page 26.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
Two edit handles display on the top and
view of the exterior of your plan.
bottom edges of the highlighted wall.
2. Click on the exterior surface of a wall to
3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top
select the Exterior Room. The Status Bar
wall edge to adjust the room ceiling
indicates when the exterior room is
height, or the handle on the bottom edge
selected. See The Exterior Room on
to adjust its floor height. Temporary
page 121.
dimensions display.
3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top
4. As you drag a handle, notice that all
wall edge to adjust the default ceiling
walls defining that room are affected.
height, or the edit handle on the bottom
edge to adjust the default floor height. Room materials such as floor, ceiling, and
Temporary dimensions display. wall materials can be changed in 3D views
using the Material Painter . See The
Note: Any rooms that do not update when the Material Painter on page 326.
default floor or ceiling height is changed are
not using the default values. To use the In the Specification Dialog
default values for a specific room, check
Default for any of the room height values in Floor and ceiling heights, floor
its specification dialog. See General Tab on platform structure, moldings, and
page 131.
materials can all be specified in the Room
Specification dialog. See Room
To adjust room heights in 3D Specification Dialog on page 130.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation Click the Calculate Materials for
view of your plan.
Room edit button to create a materi-
2. Click on the surface of a wall that faces als list of the contents of the selected
the room to select it. When the room is room, not including walls. See Calculate
selected in 3D: From Room on page 442.
The room highlights.
Room Types
When a room is first created by enclosing an Tab on page 131. The Room Type applies
area with walls, it is assigned a generic room appropriate structural and display properties
type of Unspecified. to the room.
Once your floor plan is laid out, each room When you assign a Room Type, a label
should be assigned a Room Type in the showing the rooms Type displays in floor
Room Specification dialog. See General plan view.
123
You can edit the text of a room label in floor Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated
plan view, but the type of room originally like exterior rooms in all cases except that
assigned remains until it is changed in the they generate a ceiling and a roof above
Room Specification dialog. See Editing them.
Room Labels on page 125.
Floors and Foundations
Available Room Types Open Below is a unique type of interior

room. It has no floor platform and can be
There are three categories of room types: used for defining stairwell openings.
Interior, Exterior and Hybrid.
Walls that define the garage have a foun-
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen, dation under them with a concrete slab at
Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm, the top of stem wall or grade beam.
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, The floor in Garage and Slab rooms dis-
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, Utility and play in 3D on Floor 0, not the first floor.
Unspecified. See Garages on page 184.
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony.
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, Courts, decks and balconies do not gener-
Attic. ate foundations.
Doors and Windows
Effects of Room Types
A window placed in a wall between an
The program applies specific structural and exterior room and an interior room always
display properties to rooms depending on the faces out toward the exterior.
assigned Room Type. Windows placed between interior rooms
Living Area generate a warning message.
All interior type rooms are included in Door placed between interior and exterior
Living Area calculations; exterior and type rooms display threshold lines.
hybrid rooms are not. Interior doors do not display thresholds.
Ceilings and Roofs Open Below rooms are treated as interior
Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof rooms for window and door placement.
above them unless specified otherwise. Electrical
Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to
the outside and do not generate a roof The Auto Place Outlets tool adds
above them, or room moldings. outlets automatically to all interior rooms
except bathrooms. Only one outlet over
Attic rooms are ignored by the programs each sink is added for a bathroom.
automatic roof generator.
The Auto Place Outlets tool places
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms.
124
Room Labels
The Auto Place Outlets tool does not Baseboards and chair rails are not initially
place outlets in exterior type rooms, drawn in Open Below rooms, but crown
Porches or Open Below rooms. molding, if present, is.
Any outlet manually placed in an exterior Plan Check

room automatically becomes a waterproof
Plan Check uses the room type and
outlet designed for exterior use.
its characteristics for basic plan checking.
Trim and Molding For example, a closet does not need a
Moldings are not automatically drawn in smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
exterior or hybrid rooms. Plan Check on page 405.
Room Labels
A label can display in floor plan view for any You can specify how the area of rooms is
area defined as a room. There are two parts calculated by the program by turning on the
to each room label: display of one or more of these layers:
The Room Name, which is similar to a Rooms, Standard Area is measured from
Text object and can be selected and the center of interior walls to the exterior
edited. See The Text Tools on page 380. wall framing. It is rounded to the nearest
square foot or mm and does not include
The room area, which is not a standard the area within bay, box and bow win-
text entry and cannot be directly edited. dows.
You can assign a custom Room Name, move Rooms, Interior Area is measured from
a room label or even delete it without the inner surfaces of all the room's walls.
affecting the Room Type. See Room Types
Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also
on page 123.
measured from the inner surfaces of the
room walls.
Room labels can move or even disap-
pear when room entries are revalidated. Editing Room Labels
Displaying Room Labels Room labels are similar to simple Text
objects and can be changed, moved and
The display of room labels is controlled in resized much like any other text object. You
the Display Options dialog. Room labels are can also modify a room labels Text Style
placed on the Rooms, Labels layer and use and other attributes in the Room Label
the Text Style assigned to that layer. See Specification dialog.
Display Options Dialog on page 55.
The text of a room label cannot be modified
in its specification dialog, however: it must
125
be specified in the Room Specification The Living Area displays for an individual
dialog. See General Tab on page 131. building if half or more of that building's area
is living area. For example, a living area
If you delete a room label, the Room Type
label would not display for a detached garage
remains in the Room Specification dialog.
that contains a bathroom or small shop.
To restore the label, check the Show Room
Label check box on the General tab of that You can choose not to display this label by
dialog. turning off the display of the Room Labels
layer in the Display Options dialog.
Room Area The Living Area label can be moved or
Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area
and dimensions are not standard text entries label, select Tools> Plan Check . You
and cannot be edited or changed. The room can click the Done button immediately,
area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest without actually completing Plan Check. See
of the room label, but you can turn the area Plan Check on page 405.
and dimensions on or off separately in the
Display Options dialog. Living Area vs. Footprint
The Interior Area room area calculation The Living Area should not be mistaken for
includes the areas within bay, box or bow the footprint of the house. Only true livable
windows, while the Standard Area and areas are included in the Living Area
Interior Dimensions calculations do not. calculation. Exterior and hybrid room types
such as Garage, Deck, and Porch are not
Living Area included. Neither is any room labeled Open
The Living Area label displays the area of Below or Attic. See Available Room Types
the floor platform for living areas in a plan. It on page 124.
is found near the bottom center of the plan as Living Area is measured from the outer
soon as a room area is defined by walls and/ surface of the structural layer of exterior
or railing. walls. When walls separate the living area
from exterior or hybrid room types, it is
measured to the wall center line.
Decks
A Deck room is an exterior-type room that To draw a deck, select Build> Deck> Deck
uses deck planking and framing to create a Railing , then click and drag to draw a
floor platform rather than using a single floor railing.
surface that spans the entire room area.
To create a deck without a railing, use one
of the Deck Edge tools. See The Deck
Tools on page 97.
126
You can also create a regular, polygon- By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped want a roof over a deck, check Roof Over
Deck tool. See Polygon Shaped This Room in the Room Specification
Deck on page 98. dialog. See Structure Tab on page 131.
A room does not have to be defined by Deck To give the roof a visible means of support,
Railing to be specified as a Deck. See you can select the Post to Beam option in the
Wall Specification dialog. See Railing Tab
Room Types on page 123. You can also
define a room as a Deck in the Room on page 115.
Specification dialog. See General Tab on Openings in deck railings can be created
page 131.
using Doorways . See Openings in
Railings on page 145.

Use the Room Specification dialog to set
floor heights on a room-by-room basis. See
Room Specification Dialog on page 130.
Different rooms on the same floor can have
unique floor and ceiling heights, allowing
you to create:
Split levels and bi-levels
Sunken living rooms and garages
Cathedral and coffered ceilings.
In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor
and ceiling height for the entire floor or the All floor and ceiling heights are measured
floor and ceiling height for an individual relative to zero, which is the default floor
room. See In 3D Views on page 122. height for Floor 1. Unlike other default floor
and ceiling heights, the default floor height
for Floor 1 cannot be changed, but the floor
heights of rooms on Floor 1 can be edited
individually.
In order to raise or lower an areas floor or
ceiling height, you must give it a room
definition. To create room definition without
enclosing an area with solid walls, use
Railings .
127
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated. To ensure that steps in floor and ceiling
Changing the floor height in one room can platforms have solid sides, define their room
affect ceiling heights of the rooms below. areas using Invisible Railings.
If a rooms floor is lowered, its ceiling
height is increased while the ceiling Split Levels
below that room drops. A split level can be created by raising or
If the floor is raised, the ceiling height lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
decreases while the ceiling below that various areas of the plan.
room is raised.
In the following example, the lowest floor
If the rooms above a particular room have height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
more than one floor height, the rooms inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
ceiling is stepped. at 109 inches. See Split Levels on page
175.
In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can

be used to cover steps made by different
floor heights on the floor above. See
General Tab on page 131.
Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling using settings in the Room Specification
platform on top the wall plates of a room. dialog.
More varied and complex ceilings are made
Lowered Ceilings
You can define a lowered or dropped ceiling height of the walls by increasing the
in a room without affecting the top plate thickness of the Ceiling Finish.
128
Special Ceilings
In the following illustration, the default 2. Click the Open Object edit button
ceiling height for the entire first floor is 120", to open the Room Specification dialog.
and the room on the right has a ceiling finish
lowered to 96". 3. On the Structure tab, increase the Ceil-
ing Finish value by the amount that you
would like to lower the ceiling.
4. Notice that the preview diagram repre-
sents the Finished Ceiling height (F).
Normal ceiling Lowered ceiling
To create a lowered ceiling
1. Select the room in which you would like

to specify a lowered ceiling.
Cathedral Ceilings
A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the 2. Select the room and open the Room
roof and is created using the underside of the Specification dialog. See Room Speci-
roof above the room. fication Dialog on page 130.
3. On the Structure tab, clear the check box
To create a cathedral ceiling for Ceiling Over This Room.
1. Build a roof for your plan. See Roofs
on page 187.
Tray Ceilings
A tray ceiling is flat in the center and sloped the ceiling height, the new roof will be raised
around the perimeter. You can easily create a to match the new ceiling height.
tray ceiling using the underside of roof
planes above. To create a tray ceiling
The roof must be built before adjusting the 1. In the Room Specification dialog, make
ceiling height for a tray ceiling with a sloping sure that Ceiling Over this Room is
perimeter. If the roof is rebuilt after adjusting checked, then specify the desired height
129
of the walls as the Ceiling Height. See flat. These lines are located on the Ceiling
Structure Tab on page 131. Break Lines layer in the Display Options
2. Make sure that Auto Rebuild Roofs is dialog. See Display Options Dialog on
unchecked, then build the roof. See page 55.
Build Roof Dialog on page 189. In this example, a hip roof is based on 8
3. Change the Ceiling Height of the room ceilings. After the roof is built, the Ceiling
to the desired height of the flat ceiling Height is raised to 10. The resulting ceiling
surface in its center. follows the roof pitch for 2, then becomes a
flat ceiling.
In floor plan view, dashed lines indicate
where the ceiling changes from sloped to
Hip roof with cathedral Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling Tray ceiling from floor plan
ceiling over. height raised and ceilings view. Note dashed lines for
rebuilt. changed ceiling direction.
Cantilever Undersides
Occasionally, a room will cantilever out past the Materials tab of the Room Specification
an exterior wall. You can specify the surface dialog. See Room Specification Dialog on
material of the underside of a cantilever on page 130.
Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog Several of the tabs in the Room
controls the structural characteristics Specification dialog are also found in the
and appearance of a selected room. To open Floor and Room Defaults dialogs. See
the Room Specification dialog, select a Floor and Room Defaults on page 120.
room and click the Open Object edit button.
Some values in this dialog are dynamic. A
See Selecting Rooms on page 121.
value with Default checked is referenced
130
from the Floor Defaults dialog. To return a The settings in this dialog are similar to those
value to the default, replace the check mark. in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only
See Dynamic Defaults on page 46. the selected room See Floor Defaults
Dialog on page 172.
General Tab
Only the settings on the General tab are
enabled in the Floor Defaults dialog.
1 The settings here control the Room 2 Specify whether the selected room is
Type and the appearance of the Room included in the Living Area
Label. calculation. See Living Area on page 126.
Select the Room Type. This affects some Select Include in Total Living Area Cal-
of the rooms characteristics. See Room culation to include the room in the Living
Types on page 123. Area regardless of its Room Type.
Check Show Room Label to display the Select Exclude from Total Living Area
room label in floor plan view. This option Calculation exclude the room in the Liv-
is unchecked automatically if you select ing Area regardless of its Room Type.
Unspecified as the room type. See Select Use Default for Room Type
Room Labels on page 125. (Included/Excluded) to base the selected
If you wish to use a custom name in the rooms inclusion in the Living Area on its
room label, uncheck Use Room Type, Room Type.
then specify the desired Room Name in
the text field.
Structure Tab
The Structure tab features a cross section the various heights and platform thicknesses.
diagram that shows the relationships between
131
It is meant to represent the relationships What appears in the diagram may be affected
between heights and thicknesses rather than by the location where you clicked to select
provide a scaled drawing of the model. the room. For example, if the selected room
is located over two rooms on the floor below
Two floors can be included in the diagram:
with different structural information, the
the floor that the selected room is located on,
position of the pointer relative to these lower
and the floor below it, if one exists.
rooms determines which of them displays as
the floor below.
1 3
2 4
Check the Default box beside any height

value to restore the default setting. Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0.
It can be modified in the Room Specification
1 Absolute Elevations - Specify these dialog, but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog.
height values as measured from the See Floor and Room Defaults on page 120.
default first floor height of zero. See Floor
& Ceiling Heights on page 127. If a room is defined directly beneath the
The Floor Above height displays as a ref- selected room on the floor below, additional
erence and cannot be changed here. settings may be available.
Specify the Ceiling height of the selected Specify the Floor Below height, which is
room. Not available in the Floor Defaults the floor height of the room directly
dialog on Floor 0, or if more than one below where you clicked to select the cur-
room is defined above the selected room. rently selected room.
Specify the Floor height. If the selected room is directly above a
Garage and there is a foundation present,
132
you can specify the SWT Below height, wall footing and including a treated sill
which is the top height of the concrete plate, if one is specified. Only available if
stem walls around the perimeter of the the selected room or the room below it is
garage. defined by foundation walls.
2 Relative Heights - Specify these height 3 Specify the characteristics of the

values as measured from surfaces rooms Ceiling.
within the selected room or the room below. If Roof Over This Room is checked, a
Specify the Rough Ceiling height, as roof automatically generates over the
measured to the bottom surface of the room. If unchecked, no roof generates.
ceiling framing to the subfloor surface. If Ceiling Over This Room is checked,
Not available if there is a room over all or the room has a flat ceiling. If unchecked,
part of this room. the ceiling follows the underside of the
Specify the Finished Ceiling height, as roof.
measured from the finished floor surface Check Use Soffit Surface for Ceiling to
to the surface of the finished ceiling. Not improve the 3D appearance of the transi-
available if there is a room over all or part tion between ceiling and eaves of exterior
of this room. rooms with Ceiling Over This Room
Specify the distance from the Stem Wall unchecked.
Top to Ceiling. Only available when The thickness of the Ceiling Structure
Floor for this Room is Supplied by the displays here for reference but cannot be
Foundation Room from the Floor changed.
Below has been checked.
Specify the thickness of the Ceiling Fin-
Specify the Ceiling Below height, which ish layer.
is the height of the ceiling of the room
below, as measured from that rooms sub- 4 Specify the thickness of the Floor Fin-
floor to rough ceiling surfaces. Not avail- ish layer.
able when Auto Rebuild Foundation is The thickness of the Floor Structure dis-
enabled or if there is no room below the plays here for reference but cannot be
selected room. See Rebuilding Founda- changed.
tions on page 182.
Specify the Stem Wall height, which is 5 A cross section diagram showing the
relationship between the various height
measured from the bottom of the rooms settings displays here for reference.
floor framing to the top of the foundation
Moldings Tab
Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be surfaces of a room and continue around the
assigned to a selected room on the Moldings surface of any soffit that is attached to the
tab. Moldings are placed around the wall wall at the molding height.
133
The settings on this tab are also similar to affect only the selected room instead of all
those found in the Floor Defaults dialog, but rooms on the current floor.
1
2
3
4
1 Uncheck Default to enable the settings Click the Delete button to remove the
that follow. When checked, the room currently selected molding from the room.
uses the default moldings set in the Floor
Defaults dialog. See Floor Defaults Dialog 4 Molding Specification - Make changes
to the currently selected molding.
on page 172.
Specify the Height and Width of the
2 The Molding drop-down list includes currently selected molding.
all moldings currently applied to the
selected room(s). Select one from the list to Specify the distance of the selected mold-
edit, replace, or delete it. ing From Floor and select whether this
distance is measured To Top or To
3 Make changes to the moldings assigned Bottom of the molding profile.
to the selected room(s).
Select the currently selected moldings
Click the Add New button to open the Type from the drop-down list: crown,
Select Library Object dialog and select a chair rail, or base molding.
new molding profile to apply to the room.
See Select Library Object Dialog on Fill Style Tab
page 319.
The settings on the Fill Style tab affect the
Click the Select button to replace the
appearance of the room in floor plan view.
currently selected molding with a
This tab is also found in the Floor Defaults
different molding profile.
dialog. For more information, see Fill Style
Tab on page 400.
134
Materials Tab Default molding and ceiling and floor

covering materials can be set in the Floor or
The settings on the Materials tab affect the Room Defaults dialogs.
appearance of the selected rooms walls,
floor, ceiling and moldings in 3D views. For more information, see Materials Tab
on page 328.
135
136
Chapter 10:
Doors
Home Designer Suite comes with tools for Chapter Contents

creating a wide variety of interior and Door Defaults
exterior doors. In addition, the library offers The Door Tools
a large selection of specialty doors and Displaying Doors
doorways including hinged, sliding, pocket, Editing Doors
bifold, and garage doors. Additional name- Changing Door Swings
brand door catalogs are also available for Special Doors
download from our web site, Door Specification Dialog
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
Door Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by Door Specification Dialog on page 146.
selecting Edit> Default Settings. There are only a couple of differences:
Click the + next to Doors to show the door Since default settings are specified here,
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click Use Default is not an option for some
the Edit button to open the defaults dialog settings as it is in the Door Specification
associated with your selection: dialog.
The values in the Door Defaults dialog are The Door Type cannot be changed in the
initial values for interior or exterior doors. Defaults dialogs.
Individual doors can be edited after they are
created.
The Door Defaults dialogs look nearly the
same as the Door Specification dialog. See
137
The Door Tools

To place a door, select the type you will swing towards the side of the wall that
want from the Build> Door submenu. you click nearest.
With a Door Tool active, move your mouse The initial hinge side of a hinged door can be
pointer over a wall section. If there is room set by clicking to place the door and then
enough along the wall to fit a 12 (300 mm) holding the mouse button down rather than
wide door, a preview of the door will display. releasing it. Move the mouse toward the end
When a preview can be seen, click on a wall of the door that you would like the hinges to
to place a door in the wall at that location. be on: as the mouse pointer nears either end,
the door previews hinge side will move to
Hinged and Sliding Doors have both Interior
that end. You can also adjust the doors
and Exterior Door Defaults. If the wall is an
swing direction in this manner. When the
exterior wall or one that separates an interior
swing direction and hinge side are correct,
from an exterior room, the program places an
release the mouse button.
exterior door based on the default settings for
exterior doors. If the wall is an interior wall,
the program places an interior door based on Doorways
the default settings for interior doors. This Choose Build> Door> Doorway and
rule applies to doors copied and pasted from click a wall to place a doorway (an
one location to another just as it does to opening without a door). Doorways can be
newly placed doors. See Door Defaults on placed on interior or exterior walls, or in
page 137. railings and fences to provide an opening.
Once placed, any door may be changed into You can assign a door from the library to a
any other type of door using the Door doorway.
Specification dialog. See Door
Specification Dialog on page 146. Sliding Doors
Select Build> Door> Sliding Door
Hinged Doors and click a wall where you want to
Select Build> Door> Hinged Door place a sliding door. Sliding doors can be
and click a wall where you want to placed on interior or exterior walls. If placed
place a hinged door. Hinged doors can be in an exterior wall, the door is glass; if placed
placed on interior or exterior walls. A hinged in an interior wall, it is a solid slab.
door becomes a double door when its width The initial opening side of a sliding door can
is four feet or greater. be specified by moving the mouse pointer
The initial swing direction of a hinged door along the wall while the mouse button is still
depends on the location of the mouse pointer pressed.
relative to the wall when you click. The door
138
The Door Tools
The default sliding door dimensions are Garage Doors

5-0 x 6-8 with a 12 bottom frame and a
6 frame on the sides and top. Choose Build> Door> Garage Door
and click a wall to place a garage
door.
Pocket Doors
The default garage door is 8-0 x 7-0 high.
Select Build> Door> Pocket Door
A garage door must be at least two feet wide.
and click a wall where you want to
place a pocket door. In floor plan view, dashed lines show the size
and location of the garage door when open.
As with sliding doors, the initial opening side
of a pocket door can be specified by moving Garage doors will build into a garage stem
the mouse pointer along the wall while the wall provided the room is designated as a
mouse button is still pressed. garage before the door is inserted. See
Room Types on page 123.
The default pocket door dimensions are 2-6
x 6-8 high. A pocket door becomes a
double pocket door if its width is four feet or The Doors & Doorways
greater. Library
The Doors & Doorways library can be
Bifold Doors accessed by selecting Library>
Choose Build> Door> Bifold Door Library Browser and browsing to Home
and click a wall where you want to Designer Suite Content> Architectural. This
place a bifold door. library folder contains a variety of interior
and exterior doors, as well as special
Like a hinged door, the initial opening side of entryways and wrapped openings.
a bifold door depends on the location of the
mouse pointer relative to the wall when you Entryways and wrapped openings are
click. The door will open towards the side of examples of Doorways, which are wall
the wall that you click nearest. openings that do not have doors within them.
Similarly, the initial hinge side of a sliding

door can be specified by moving the mouse
pointer along the wall while the mouse
button is still pressed.
The default interior single bifold door is 2-
6 x 6-8. A bifold door becomes a double
bifold if its width is greater than three feet.
To add a door to the Doorway, select a Door
Bifold doors always display closed in all 3D Type other than Doorway from the drop-
views. down list in the Door Specification dialog.
See General Tab on page 147.
139
You can also select a custom door from the 3. Navigate through the Doors library cate-
library and place it into a doorway in floor gory until you find the custom door style
plan view or any 3D view. desired.
4. Select the door in the Library Browser,
To place a library door in a doorway then click on the doorway to place the
selected door within it. If a door already
1. Go to floor plan view or any 3D view. exists, it is replaced.
2. Open the Library Browser. 5. Continue clicking other doorways until
all changes have been made.
Displaying Doors
The display of doors, door sizes,
opening indicators and headers is
controlled in the Display Options dialog.
See Display Options Dialog on page 55.
Doors can only be placed in walls, so if a
walls layer is turned off, any doors placed in
that wall will not display, either. See
Displaying Walls on page 104. Threshold
Line
If the Doors layer is turned off, doors and
their casing do not display but openings in If an exterior door to a Garage room on Floor
the walls where they are located are visible. 1 extends into a Garage stem wall or curb on
Floor 0, its location will be indicated on
In Floor Plan View Floor 0. See Garages on page 184.
When the Doors layer is turned on in floor
plan view, door symbols represent the width Door Labels
of the opening and indicate its swing. If a Door labels display in floor plan view,
door is recessed, the affected wall layers will centered on the doors they represent, when
adjust to accomodate the casing. the Doors, Labels layer is turned on. Door
Doors in exterior walls and doors that open labels indicate Width and Height. For
to exterior type rooms such as a Garage, example:
Porch, or Deck have a threshold line across In Imperial plans, the label for a 3-0
the opening in floor plan view. See Room wide, 6-8 high double hung window
Types on page 123. will read 3068.
In metric plans, the label for a 900 mm
wide, 2100 mm high double hung win-
dow will read 900x2100.
140
Editing Doors
In 3D Views well as in the Door Specification dialog.

SeeGeneral Tab on page 147.
You can specify whether a selected door is
shown open or closed in 3D views by If a door is set to display open in 3D, the
angle of the open door can be changed using
clicking the Show Door Open in 3D and
the edit handles. See Using the Mouse on
Show Door Closed in 3D edit buttons as page 141.
Editing Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must be See Door Specification Dialog on page
selected. To select a door, click it when the 146.
Select Objects tool or any of the Door
Using the Mouse
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows
can also be group selected and edited. See In floor plan view, click either of the two end
Selecting Objects on page 66. handles and drag along the wall to change the
width. The label showing the size updates as
When you select a door in floor plan view, the handles are dragged. Click and drag the
the door size label indicates the width Move handle at the center to move the door
followed by the height. For example, a 3068 along the wall it is placed in. Use the
door is 3-0 wide by 6-8 high. triangular Rotate handle to adjust the doors
Blocked units are made up of individual swing. If the doors label displays, an
doors and windows that have been grouped additional handle is available to move the
together to act as one object. You can create label.
what is essentially a blocked door unit by In 3D views, a selected door has five edit
assigning a library door to a doorway from handles: the Move handle at the center and a
the library Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag
Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in any an edge handle to resize the door.
view. To select a door that is a component of A door or window moved against an
a blocked unit, click at the location of the intersecting wall temporarily stops when the
component in question, then click the Select casing meets the intersecting wall. You can
Next Object edit button. See Selecting continue to drag and it resumes movement
Objects on page 66. past the intersecting wall.
In the Specification Dialog Using the Edit Tools

The most precise method of editing a A selected door or doors can be edited in a
door is to use the Door Specification variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
dialog. Door type, size, casing, materials, toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 24.
and more can all be specified in this dialog.
141
Centering Doors 2. Click the Center Object edit button

The Center Object edit button allows then choose from one of the following
you to center a selected door along a options:
wall within a room or relative to a cabinet or Click near a wall inside a room to cen-
window. See Using Center Object on page ter the door along that wall in that
88. room.
Click outside the house (on the exterior
To center a door along a wall room) near an exterior wall to center
the door along an exterior wall.
1. Select a door or combination of win-
dows and doors in floor plan view.
Changing Door Swings

Door swing direction and hinge
side can be changed using the
Change Opening/Hinge Side and Change
Swing Side edit buttons.
The Change Opening/Hinge Side edit

button is available for all doors except
double doors and garage doors.
3. Release the mouse.
The Change Swing Side edit button is
available for all doors except pocket doors. If you drag near the closed position, the door
snaps to a closed position.
Hinged Doors
To change the swing using edit handles:
In addition to using the edit buttons, hinged
doors hinge side and swing direction can be 1. In floor plan view, select the door and
changed using the triangular Rotate edit grab the triangular edit handle.
handle.
To adjust the angle of swing:
1. In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular handle.
2. Drag to change the amount of swing.
142
Changing Door Swings
2. Drag the pointer along the path of the

new arc to change the hinge side and/or
swing direction.
3. Release the mouse. Sliding Doors

To change the side of a sliding door that is
To change the swing using edit buttons: fixed, select the sliding door then click the
1. In floor plan view, select the door. Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.
2. To change the hinge side, click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the

door, click the Change Swing Side edit
button.
3. To change the swing direction, click the

Change Swing Side edit button.
As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
sliding door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.
143
Pocket Doors To change the hinged side of the door, click
To change the direction of a pocket door, the Change Swing Side edit button.
select it and click the Change Opening/
Hinge Side edit button.
As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
bifold door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.
Note: There must be enough room for the
entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
door does not change.
Garage Doors
To change the side of a garage door that it
As with hinged doors, you can also change faces, select it and click the Change Swing
the Opening/Hinge side of a pocket door by
Side edit button.
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
handle.
Bifold Doors
To change the side of a bifold door that is
fixed, select it then click the Change
Opening/Hinge Side edit button.
As with other door types, you can also

change the Swing side of a bifold door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
handle.
Special Doors
A variety of special doors and doorways can be created in Home Designer Suite.
144
Special Doors
Wrapped Openings gate as the Door Style. A selection of gates is

available in the Fences & Railings library
Wrapped openings of various shapes are folder. See Placing Library Objects on
available in the Doors & Doorways page 318.
Library.
You can also create a wrapped opening by Transoms Above Doors
placing a doorway in the wall and checking
Transom windows above doors are created
Suppress Casing in the Door Specification
the same as other stacked windows. See
dialog. See Casing Tab on page 148. If
Grouped Windows on page 157.
base molding is present, it will wrap around
the opening.
Creating a Doorway
with a Railing
When a railing is specified as No Room Def,
it can be positioned within a Doorway .
Openings in Railings
Use the Doorway tool to open a railing
for a stairway or other access.
To create a doorway with railing
1. Place a Doorway at the desired loca-

tion in your plan.
To open a railing across an entire section, 2. Select Build> Wall> Straight
resize the doorways Width so that it is Railing , then click and drag to draw
greater than the length of the railing in the a railing parallel to the wall with the
Door Specification dialog. The opening doorway.
resizes to the maximum width possible for
that space. See General Tab on page 147. 3. Click on the railing, then use the Resize
edit handles to adjust the length of the
To add a gate, specify the doorways Door railing as needed. See Using the Edit
Type as a Door, then choose an appropriate Handles on page 68.
145
4. With the railing selected, click the Open Placing a Gable Over a Door
Object edit button. Click the Gable Over Door/Window
5. On the General tab of the Railing edit button to produce a gable roof
Specification dialog, check No Room over the selected door(s) the next time
Def and click OK. See General Tab on automatic roofs are built. See Gable Over
page 113. Door/Window on page 197.
6. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag You can manually edit or delete this gable
it into position within the doorway. See line at any time. Your changes take effect
To move an object freely on page 87. when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
can also be used with group selected doors.
Positioning a railing in a doorway
Door Specification Dialog

To open the Door Specification a door using the Select Objects or a
dialog, select a door and click the
Open Object edit button or double-click on Door tool.
146
General Tab
1
2
3 5
1 Door Style - Define the door as slab, 3 Specify the Size and Position of the
glass, panel, or louvered, or select a selected door.
door style from the library. SelectUse Specify the Width, Height, and Thick-
Default to use the default door style set in ness of the door.
the Door Defaults dialog. See Door
Defaults on page 137. Floor to Bottom - Specify the height of
the bottom of the door frame as measured
Select Library from the list or click the from the subfloor.
Library button to choose a door symbol
from the library. Once a library door is 4 3D Display Options - Specify whether
selected, that door is added to the Door the selected door is drawn closed or
Style list. See Select Library Object Dia- open in 3D and cross section/elevation
log on page 319. views.
2 Door Type - Specify doorway, hinged, 5 A preview of the door displays on the
slider, pocket, bifold, or garage door. right side of the dialog box.
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not 6 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
allowed as exterior door defaults. which side of the door displays in the
preview.
147
Casing Tab
Changes made on the Casing tab can only be
seen in 3D views.
Specify the casing for the selected door. Define the Width of the selected casing.
Check Suppress Casing to have a
Select the Interior or Exterior radio but- wrapped opening instead of casing.
ton to define the casing for that door side Check Suppress Sill to prevent a sill
and display it in the preview image. This from being generated under the door.
choice is not available for interior doors,
which use the same values for both sides.
148
Frame & Lites Tab
1 Frame - Specify the dimensions of the Normal style is the most common, with
doors rails and stiles. Only available vertical and horizontal muntin bars.
for Glass, Panel, and Louvered Doors. See Diamond style uses angled muntins to
General Tab. divide the lites.
Specify the Width of the stiles and top Prairie style is based on the normal style,
rail. but with all the central muntins removed,
Specify the height of the Bottom rail. leaving only the two outside muntins,
both horizontally and vertically. Lites
2 Specify the number of Lites, or panes Across and Vertical are typically set
of glass, as well as their configuration.
between 6 and 8.
Only available for Glass doors.
Craftsman style is based on the normal
Specify the number of horizontal Lites
style, but only the topmost horizontal
Across.
muntin is kept with all the portions of the
Specify the number of Lites Vertical. vertical muntins above it. Lites Across
Choose a Type, or style, from the drop- and Vertical are typically set between 4
down list. and 8.
149
Normal Diamond Prairie Craftsman
Arch Tab
The settings on the Arch tab are not available
if the selected door is a Sliding, Bifold or
Garage door.
Define the style and size of the Arch. Specify the Height of the arch, as mea-
sured from the base of the arch to the top
Select a Type of arch from the drop- of the door. The height can be defined for
down list. all arch types except Round Top Arches.
150
Hardware Tab
Many of the settings on the Hardware tab are dialog is used. See Dynamic Defaults on
Dynamic Defaults: if Use Default is page 46.
selected, the setting in the Door Defaults
1 Specify the Handles to be used on the Specify the location of the door locks Up
selected door. From Bottom. The locks use the same In
Select an Interior Handle and/or Exte- From Door Edge value as the handles.
rior Handle from the drop-down lists.
3 Specify the Hinges to be used on the
Specify the location of the door handles door. Two hinges are placed for interior
In From Door Edge. doors, and three for exterior doors.
Specify the location of the door handles Select a style of Hinges from the drop-
Up From Bottom. down list.
Specify the distance In From Top/Bot-
2 Specify the doors interior and exterior tom of the door to the center of the top
Locks.
and bottom hinges.
Select an Interior Lock and/or Exterior
Lock from the drop-down lists.
Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the inte-
rior, or hinge side, door casing.
151
Materials Tab
The Materials tab is available for numerous
objects. For more information, see
Materials Tab on page 328.
152
Chapter 11:
Windows
Home Designer Suite can model a wide Chapter Contents

variety of windows. Fixed glass, hung, Window Defaults
casement, sliding, awning, hopper, and The Window Tools
louver window styles can all be created with Special Windows
the standard Window tool, and even set as Grouped Windows
the default. Home Designer Suite can create Displaying Windows
bay, box, and bow windows at the click of a Editing Windows
button. In addition, the library contains many Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
mulled window combinations. Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
Window Specification Dialog
Bay/Box/Bow Window
153
Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by Specification dialog. For more information,
selecting Edit> Default Settings. see Window Specification Dialog on page
Select Window from the Default Settings 163.
dialog.
The settings in the Window Defaults dialog Dynamic Window Defaults
control the attributes of a window when it is A variety of window default values are
initially placed in a plan, so you should dynamic, including the Window Type,
define the type of window that will be placed Casing Specifications, and Sash sizes. All
most often in your model. See Default Materials are also dynamic. When a
Settings on page 46. dynamic default is changed, existing
The tabs in the Window Defaults dialog are windows using the default value are affected.
similar to those found in the Window See Dynamic Defaults on page 46.
The Window Tools

To place a window, select Build> Standard windows can be specified as any of
Window and choose the desired a variety of window types, such as double
window type. Click on a wall to place a hung, casement and awning. See Window
window of the selected type at that location. Specification Dialog on page 163.
Bay, box and bow windows can only be
placed in straight walls, while standard Bay Windows
windows can be placed in both straight and
curved walls.
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and
Bow Windows. These windows should
Standard Windows therefore be placed before the roof is built.
Select Build> Window> Window,
then click on a straight or curved wall A Bay Window is composed of three
to place a standard window at that location. wall sections, each with a single
component window. The two side walls are
A standard window is a single window that is at an angle to the main wall. Select Build>
not a bay, box, or bow window. These Window> Bay Window and click on a
special types are made up of multiple straight wall to produce a bay window.
standard windows.
When initially placed, bay windows measure
A standard window that is part of a special 2-2 across at the front, 4-2 across at the
window is called a component window. back, and are 1-0 deep. The component
windows are specified in the Window
154
The Window Tools
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit

the available space.
Box Windows
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are
A Box Window is a bay window with not included in the living area or in room stan-
side angles set at 90. Select Build> dard area calculations. They are included in
Window> Box Window and click on a room interior area calculations.
straight wall to produce a box window.
Box windows initially measure 4-2 wide Pass-Thru
with a depth of 1-6. The component Select Build> Window> Pass-Thru,
windows are specified in the Window then click on a straight or curved wall
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit to place a Pass Thru at that location.
the available space.
A Pass-Thru is simply a wall opening
without a window unit placed inside. Like a
window, it can have casing and a sill. It does
not, however, have a sash, frame, or glass. It
is one of the window Types available in the
Window Specification dialog. See General
Bow Windows Tab on page 164.
A Bow Window is a group of
identical wall segments that form a Windows Library
segmented curve. Select Build> Window>
Select Library> Library Browser,
Bow Window and click on a straight wall to
then browse to Home Designer Suite
produce a 5-section bow window.
Core Catalogs> Architectural to access a
The component windows are specified in the selection of special windows. Select the
Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust desired window, then click on a wall to place
to fit the available space. the window at that location.
The 5-section bow below has a 4-10 radius
centered 3-9 inside the wall, giving an
opening 5-10 across and a depth of 11.
155
Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created
using multiple standard windows, the edit To move a window all the way into a
tools or custom symbols. corner, check Ignore Casing for Open-
ing Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog. See
General Plan Defaults Dialog on page 47.
Creating Manual Bay, Box
and Bow Windows Once the corner window is formed, its
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, components and corner post size can be
box and bow windows manually than adjusted. Blocked units can also meet at a
to use the automatic tools. Bays created corner this way.
using walls can have more than one window
per section, which is not possible using a bay Special Window Shapes
window unit. A selection of special shaped windows is
Bear in mind that moving a manually created available in the Windows Library, including
bay, box or bow window is generally more arched windows and mulled units.
difficult than moving a unit created with one In addition, you can create a variety of
of the Window Tools since it is window shapes in the Window Specification
composed of individual walls. dialog, including:
Arched windows. See Arch Tab on
Corner Windows page 168.
Corner windows are produced when each Trapezoidal windows. See Shape Tab
window has one edge at or past the interior on page 167.
side of the adjacent wall.
Placing a Gable
Over a Window
Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to produce a gable roof
over the selected window(s) the next time
automatic roofs are built. See Gable Over
Door/Window on page 197.
You can manually edit or delete this gable
line at any time. Your changes take effect
To create a corner window, first create the when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
desired window on each side of the corner. can also be used with group selected
The header height and the sill height of both windows.
windows must be the same.
156
Grouped Windows
Vents Vents are placed in the same manner as

regular windows and can be edited in much
A selection of attic, foundation and gable the same way, as well.
vents are available in the Library Browser.
See The Library on page 305.
Grouped Windows
Windows can be grouped together to create a The sill of each window in the group must be
wide variety of custom configurations. at the same level for them to share the middle
Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D casing. The casing tops do not have to be at
views, particular Cross Section/Elevation the same level. The casings are modeled as if
views, using their edit handles. See Editing they are one unit but the windows remain
Windows on page 159. separate objects for dimensioning and the
Materials List.
Windows can be automatically mulled to
doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of
the door.
Mulled Units in the Library

A selection of mulled window units is
available in the Windows library. To place
one in your plan, select it and click on a wall
Notice how the windows and door in this in any view. See Placing Library Objects
example are separate, with a sections of wall on page 318.
showing between them. Doors and/or
windows can also be organized into a unit in Selecting Components
which the casing connects the windows and of Mulled Units
door and no wall surface shows between
them. To select a component of a mulled unit from
the library, click at the location of the com-
Automatically Mulled Openings ponent in question, then click the Select
Next Object edit button or press the Tab
To form a mulled group of windows and/or
key until that individual component is
doors, move them close enough together so
selected. Only the component clicked on is
that their casings touch. Once the casings
selectable using this method. If you need to
touch, the windows are mulled together with
select a different component, click on it and
one casing between the two of them.
repeat the process.
157
If there are multiple levels, it is easiest to Displaying Mulled Units

select the components in a 3D view. When
you have selected an individual component, As with other windows, the display of
you can change its parameters in the Window mulled window units is controlled in
Specification dialog. See Window the Display Options dialog. See Displaying
Specification Dialog on page 163. Objects on page 54.
If the selected component is not itself a Mulled units are placed on the Windows
mulled unit and has no components above it, layer by default and have a single label,
its Height and Arch parameters can be which is on the Windows, Labels layer.
changed. Changing the Height causes the Mulled units from the library are also
component top to move. The bottom remains included in the windows category of the
stationary. Materials List. If the component objects of a
mulled unit have unique moldings or
materials, they will not be noted in the
Materials List.
Displaying Windows
The display of windows in floor plan
and 3D views can be controlled in the
Double Hung
Display Options dialog. See Display
Windows can only be placed in walls, so if a Left Sliding
walls layer is turned off, any windows
placed in that wall will not display, either. Triple Casement
See Displaying Walls on page 104.
If the Windows layer is not set to display,
window casing and other components are not Window types in floor plan view
visible, but the openings in the walls where
they are located can still be seen. Bay, box,and bow windows have dimensions
lines associated with them.
In Floor Plan View You can suppress their display by turning
off the Manual Dimensions layer or on
Some window types, notably Sliding and
a unit by unit basis in the units specifica-
Double and Triple Casement windows, are
tion dialog. See Bay/Box/Bow Window
distinguishable in floor plan view.
The arrow style and fill are set in the
Dimension Defaults dialog. See
158
Editing Windows
Dimension Defaults Dialog on page on. Window labels indicate Width and
367. Height, followed by Type. For example:
In Imperial plans, the label for a 3-0
Window Labels wide, 4-0 high double hung window
Window labels display in floor plan view, will read 3040 DH.
centered on the windows they represent, In metric plans, the label for a 900 mm
when the Windows, Labels layer is turned wide, 1200 mm high double hung win-
dow will read 900x1200 DH.
Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be In 3D views, a selected window has five
selected. Click on a window when the Select edit handles: the Move handle at the cen-
Objects tool or any of the Window ter and a Resize handle on each edge.
Click and drag an edge handle to resize
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows the window.
can also be group-selected and edited. See
Selecting Objects on page 66.
Note: Using the edit handles is the only way
To select a window that is part of a blocked to resize bay, box and bow window systems.
unit, click the component window, then click
the Select Next Object edit button. See A single window or a group of windows
Selecting Components of Mulled Units on can be moved with the center edit handle.
page 157. A door or window moved against an
intersecting wall temporarily stops when
Windows can be edited using their edit
it is the casing distance from the inter-
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and the
secting wall. You can continue to drag
Window Specification dialog. See Window
and it resumes movement past or onto the
intersecting wall. Enable Ignore Casing
When you select a window in floor plan for Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults
view, the window size label displays the dialog to turn off this behavior. See Gen-
width followed by the height. For example, a eral Plan Defaults Dialog on page 47.
3036 window is 3-0 wide by 3-6 high.
Using the Mouse
The most precise method of editing a
In floor plan view, click either of the two window is to use the Window
end handles and drag along the wall to Specification dialog. The window type, size,
change the width. The label showing the casing, materials, and more can all be
size updates as the window is resized. specified in this dialog. See Window
159
Using the Edit Tools edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page
24.
A selected window or windows can be edited
in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

Bay, Box and Bow Windows Bay, box and bow windows can also be
are created much the way edited in their respective specification
regular windows are: select a tool, then click dialogs. See Bay/Box/Bow Window
a wall to place that window type. Specification Dialog on page 170.
Home Designer Suite automatically builds a
foundation under bay/box/bow windows Displaying Bay, Box
placed on floor 1 unless they are raised from and Bow Windows
their original position. That section of the The display of bay, box and bow windows is
foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but controlled in the Display Options dialog.
without windows. If the foundation was See Display Options Dialog on page 55.
generated before the window is placed, the
foundation must be rebuilt or edited Like other windows, bay, box and bow
manually. windows can display labels. See Window
Labels on page 159.
Editing Bay, Box and Bay, box and bow window width and radius
Bow Windows dimensions, which display in floor plan view,
are placed on the Dimensions, Manual
Bay, box and bow windows are edited
layer. See Displaying Objects on page 54.
similar to regular windows, with one
exception: in floor plan view, a diamond-
shaped Depth edit handle displays on the Component Windows
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to A component window within a bay, box or
increase the depth, or inward to decrease the bow window can be resized like any other
depth of the unit. See Editing Windows on standard window. To select a component
page 159. window, click at the location of the
component in question, then click the Select
Next Object edit button or press the Tab
key.
Only the bay or box window component
that was clicked on is selected using this
Depth edit handle on a bay window method. If you need to select a different
component, click on it and repeat the pro-
cess.
160
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
In a bow window, all components are

identical, so only one component can be
selected. Changing this component
changes them all.
Resizing Components
An individual component window can be
resized using the edit handles, by changing
settings in the components Window
When a bay/box/bow window is first created,

there is room for one standard trimmer on Both the top and bottom heights of these
each side of each component window. When window units can be adjusted in a 3D view
the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its using the windows edit handles to create a
components automatically resize so that a lowered ceiling and/or a bench seat or garden
standard trimmer is still accomodated. window.
If a component window is resized, it retains
its size if at all possible when the containing
bay/box/bow window is moved or resized. If
the bay is resized in such a way that the
component is too large to fit even with a
thinner trimmer, the component resumes its
default behavior, resizing as the containing
bay window is resized.
Floors and Ceilings

When originally created, the floor and
ceiling within a bay, box, or bow window are When the ceiling is lowered, the top heights
the same heights as the floor and ceiling of of the walls that define the window unit are
the room in which it is placed. also lowered. When a roof is built over the
unit, its height will be affected, as well.
When the bottom of the window is raised to
create a bench seat, the units walls will not
reach the ground. As a result, window units
with bench seats will have no foundation
beneath them when the foundation is built.
161
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs

Several different roof styles are available for
bay, box and bow window units.
Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof is built above the unit when roofs are
automatically generated.
For this roof style to work successfully, the

ceiling heights of the window unit and the
room containing it must be the same. This
does not work if you have lowered the
ceiling for the window unit.
If a header is desired over the bay, box or
bow window, first build the roof correctly,
If a different style of roof is desired, the then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
windows specification dialog can be used to window in 3D. This fills in the area between
change the style of roof that is be generated the header and the roof. Do not rebuild roof
over a bay, box or bow window. planes, if you do, a lower hip roof over the
window unit is created.
See Bay/Box/Bow Window
Specification Dialog on page 170. Use Existing Roof
Place Under Roof Slope To generate a standard roof with no
allowances made for bay, box, or bow
To have the main roof plane extend down windows below, check Use Existing Roof.
over the window unit while following the With this option the bay, box, or bow
shape of the unit, select Extend Existing windows is tucked under the roof eave.
Roof. Rebuild the roofs to see the changes.
162
Place Under Roof - Rectangular Rectangular Hip Roof

To extend the roof plane down over a bay, To create a rectangular hip roof, select only
box or bow window with a rectangular roof, Rectangular roof over, then rebuild the
ignoring the shape of the unit, select both roof.
Extend existing roof over and Rectangular
roof over in the specification dialog. The
Rectangular roof over option does not work
in combination with Use existing roof since
the existing roof does not cover the window
unit.
See the previous section for directions on
extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow windows.
Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window.
To create a gable roof over a normal

window, use the Gable Over Door/
Window edit button. See Gable Over Door/
Window on page 197.

To open the Window Specification
dialog, select a window and click the
Open Object edit button or double-click the
window using the Select Objects or a
Window tool.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
in the Window Defaults dialog. See
Window Defaults on page 154.
163
General Tab
1
2
1 Window Type - Select the type of whatever is normal for that type of win-
window from the list. The first entry in dow. Not available for Fixed Glass, Sin-
the list is the Default type set in the Window gle or Double Casement, Single Awning
Defaults dialog. or Hopper, Louvered, Pass-Thru or
mulled units.
2 Specify the Size and Position of the Louver Size - Specify the vertical height
selected window.
of the selected windows louvers. Only
Specify the Width and Height of the
available for Louvered windows.
window.
Floor to Top - Specify the height of the 3 A preview of the selected window
top of the window frame as measured displays here.
from the subfloor. Select Interior or Exterior to specify
Movable Size - Specify the dimension of which side of the window displays in the
the movable portion of the window. A preview.
value of 0 defaults the movable size to
Casing Tab
Changes made on the Casing tab can only be
seen in 3D views.
164
Specify the casing for the selected window or Check Suppress Casing to have a
mulled unit. wrapped opening instead of casing on the
Select the Interior or Exterior radio but- selected side of the window.
ton to define the casing for that window Check Sill to have a sill on the selected
side and display it in the preview image. side of the window.
Define the Width of the selected casing. Check Apron to include an apron under
the sill.
Sash & Frame Tab
1 Specify the size and position of the well as the central members of casement
Sash. Increasing the Side, Middle, Top and sliding windows. This is also the
or Bottom decreases the area of the glass. width of the top portion of the window
Specify the Side width of all vertical sash when an arch is specified.
members: those at the window sides as
165
Specify the Middle width of horizontal Specify the Top and Bottom sash widths.
components between the top and bottom The Top value is not used if the window
sash in double hung, double and triple has an arch.
awning, and double and triple hopper
windows. It does not affect casement and 2 Specify the Depth, or thickness, of the
sash stock measured from the exterior
sliding windows.
to the interior.
Lites Tab
The Lites tab allows you to add muntins to
various window styles. There are four
possible styles of muntin bars.
1 Specify the number, position and style

of Lites for the selected window.
Enter the number of horizontal Lites
Across in each sash.
Enter the number of vertical Lites Verti-
cal in each sash.
Check or uncheck Lites in Fixed and Lites in Fixed Lites in Movable
Lites in Moveable to specify either one
or both of the sashes to have divided lites. Note: Because the fixed window in a Triple
Sliding window is twice the size of the mov-
able windows, the fixed section has a vertical
muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the Lites in
fixed check box.
166
2 Select a Type, or style, of window lite Prairie style is based on the normal style,
from the drop-down list. but with all the central muntin bars
removed, leaving only the two outside
muntin bars both horizontally and verti-
cally. Typically, both Lites Across and
Lites Vertical should be set between 6
and 8. Federal or Federation windows are
an example of the Prairie style.
Craftsman style is based on the normal
style, but only the topmost horizontal
Normal style is the most common, with muntin bar is kept with all the portions of
muntins going horizontally and vertically. the vertical muntin bars above it. Typi-
Colonial windows are an example of the cally, both Lites Across and Lites Vertical
normal style. should be set between 4 and 8.
Diamond style uses angled muntin bars
to divide up the lites. French windows are
an example of the diamond style.
Shape Tab
Any type of non-symbol window may be If the selected window has an arch assigned
shaped. All shaped windows are defined as to it on the Arch tab and changes are made on
Fixed Glass on the General tab. Shape Tab, the window will lose its arch
assignment.
3
1
1 Window Width displays for reference. Note: The Left Side settings for a windows
It can be changed on the General tab.
Interior affect the Right Side settings for its
Exterior, and vice versa.
167
2 Left Side - Specify the Height of the the roof on a gable end. The window
left upper corner, as measured from the maintains the angle even when resized and
bottom of the window. Unless changed, this repositioned. Left and Right Inner Corner
matches the window height. Minimum value must both be unchecked for this to work.
is 1/4 (4 mm). This option does not work for curved roofs.
The height of the Right Side can be specified Click Revert to restore the window to its
in a similar manner. original shape, type and arch settings.
A shaped window must have two vertical
3 Click Match Roof to match the angle sides at least 1/4 high.
of the top of the window to the pitch of
Arch Tab
A window that has been modified using the
Shape tab cannot have an arched top.
Define the style and size of the Arch.

Note: The settings on the Shape tab take pre-
cedence over those on the Arch tab. If the
Select the Type of arch desired from the windows Shape has been modified, you can
drop-down list. select an Arch but it will have no effect on the
windows appearance.
Specify the Height of the arch, as mea-

sured from the base of the arch to the top
of the window. The height can be defined
Round Broken Gothic for all arch types except Round Top and
Top
Octagonal Arches.
168
Shutters Tab
The settings on the Shutters tab allow you to
specify exterior shutters for the selected
window.
1
2
1 Check Use Shutters to apply shutters position the shutters just outside the win-
to the selected windows exterior and dow frame, like functional shutters.
enable the settings below. Check Louver for louvered shutters.
Uncheck this for solid shutters. If Outside
2 Specify the Shutter Width for the Casing is checked, the louvers face out-
selected window.
ward, away from the wall; if checked,
Unheck Set Width by Window to type a
louvers face toward the wall.
width in the Specify Width field. If the
window is later resized, the shutters A preview of the selected window displays
width will not adjust in response. on the right.
When Set Width by Window is checked, Select Interior or Exterior to specify
a shutter width exactly half that of the which side of the window displays in the
window, excluding casing, is used. preview. In order to see exterior shutters
in the preview, Exterior must be selected.
3 Additional Shutter Options can be
specified here.
Materials Tab
Check Outside Casing to position shut-
ters outside the window casing, as deco- The settings on the Materials tab are the
rative shutters often are. Uncheck this to same as those found on the same tab in
dialogs throughout the program. See
169
Bay/Box/Bow Window Specification Dialog

To open the Bay/Box Window The options in this dialog can only be set for
Specification dialog, select a bay, box objects placed in a plan: bay, box, and bow
or bow window and click the Open Object windows do not have defaults dialogs.
edit button.
Specify the structure of the Roof over the Check Force Rectangular Roof to create
selected window unit. See Bay, Box, Bow a roof over the bay window that is square
Windows & Roofs on page 162. across the end instead of following the
Check Use Existing Roof if the existing profile of the roof.
roof needs no changes to accomodate the Check Suppress Dimension to suppress
bay window. the automatically-produced dimensions
Check Extend Existing Roof to extend that show the size of the window unit in
the existing roof plane to cover the bay floor plan view.
window below.
170
Chapter 12:
Multiple Floors
When a new plan file is opened in Home Chapter Contents

Designer Suite, two floor levels are present: Floor Defaults Dialog
Floor 1 and the Attic Floor. You can add Floor Tools
more floors whenever you like: up to 3 total. Adding Floors
Once created, floors can also be copied and Displaying Floors
deleted. Deleting Floors
Home Designer Suite also supports special Split Levels
floors for foundations and attics. Only one The Current Floor
foundation level and one attic can exist in a The Attic Floor
plan. Foundations are discussed in their own The Reference Floor
chapter. See Foundations on page 179.
171
Floor Defaults Dialog

There is a Floor Defaults dialog for the current Foundation Defaults. See
each floor in a plan file. The defaults Building a Foundation on page 181.
for the current floor can be accessed by
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Select
Room Specification dialog, but controls the
Floor from the category tree and click the
default settings for all rooms on the current
Edit button to open the Floor Defaults
floor. The settings here also control the
dialog for the currently active floor. See
height of individual walls as they are drawn
Default Settings on page 46.
on the floor in question. See Room
The Floor Defaults dialog also opens Specification Dialog on page 130.
whenever you add a new floor to the plan.
See Adding Floors on page 173.
Note: The default floor height for Floor 1 is 0.
The Floor Defaults dialog does not open It can be modified in the Room Specification
when you build a foundation; however, the dialog, but not in the Floor 1 Defaults dialog.
See Floor and Room Defaults on page 120.
Floor 0 Default settings are created based on
General Tab
Only one setting on the General tab is unique
to the Floor Defaults dialog.
On Floor 1 only, define the wall layer that Moldings Tab

you would like to calculate the Living Area
To. See Living Area on page 126. The settings on the Moldings tab are similar
to those in the Room Specification dialog.
See Moldings Tab on page 133.
Structure Tab
The settings on the Structure tab are similar Fill Style Tab
to those in the Room Specification dialog.
See Structure Tab on page 131. The settings on the Fill Style tab are similar
to those in the specification dialogs for many
objects throughout the program. See Fill
172
Floor Tools
Materials Tab objects throughout the program. See

The settings on the Materials tab are similar
to those in the specification dialogs for many
Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the Choose Build> Floor> Build
floor tools. Foundation to open the Foundation
Defaults dialog and build a foundation floor.
Select Build> Floor> Build New
See Building a Foundation on page 181.
Floor to build a new floor. A new
floor can be generated based upon the Select Build> Floor> Delete
perimeter of the floor below or a blank floor Foundation to remove the foundation
can be created and drawn from scratch. See from the plan. See Deleting Foundations
Adding Floors on page 173. on page 183.
Adding Floors
New floors can be added in floor plan view below. Wall types and roof directives
and 3D views. associated with the walls on the floor
below are duplicated; however, interior
To create a new floor walls are not. See Roof Tab on page
114.
1. Select Build> Floor> Build New Check Move Highest Floors Roof Up
Floor to open the New Floor dialog. to move any roof planes displaying on
the highest floor in the plan up one
floor when the new floor is created.
Roof planes displaying on floors other
than the top floor are unaffected. This
option is only available if there are roof
planes built on the top floor and is not
available when Auto Rebuild Roofs is
enabled. See Build Roof Dialog on
2. Select the options that you need and page 189.
click OK. Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
Derive new 2nd floor plan from the floor creates a new top floor that is
1st floor plan creates a new top floor blank. This option is typically selected
with exterior walls generated directly only if none of the exterior walls on the
over the exterior walls of the floor new floor will be directly above the
exterior walls on the floor below. If
173
you choose this method, it may be remains on its original floor and does
helpful to turn on the Reference Dis- not move.
play when drawing walls on the new
floor. See The Reference Floor on Note: Home Designer Suite allows only one
page 177. floor, the foundation/basement, below the first
3. The Room Defaults dialog for the floor. Keep this in mind when you begin an
newly created floor opens next. Make as-built or plan for a multi-story building.
any necessary changes to the floor struc-
ture, moldings, or materials and click Adding a Foundation
OK. See Floor Defaults Dialog on To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
page 172.
Build Foundation . See Building a
4. The new floor becomes the current floor
Foundation on page 181.
in floor plan view. If, however, the new
floor is created in a 3D view, the camera
Displaying Floors
Home Designer Suite allows you to view the In 3D Views
floors in your plan in a variety of ways.
In most 3D views, all floors in a plan are
visible, from the foundation up to the attic.
In Floor Plan View
There are three exceptions:
In floor plan view, only one floor can be
active for editing at a time. This is referred to Floor Camera views.
as the Current Floor. See The Current
Doll House View .
Floor on page 176.
In addition to the Current Floor, one other Interior Cross Section/Elevation
floor can be displayed for reference views.
purposes: the Reference Floor. Objects on Floor Cameras and Doll House Views show
the Current Floor can snap to those on the the Current Floor only, not including its ceil-
Reference Floor, helping you align objects. ing, while interior Cross Section/Elevation
See The Reference Floor on page 177. views show a wall on a single floor in a sin-
gle room. See 3D View Tools on page 346.
Deleting Floors
Select Build> Floor> Delete Current becomes the current floor; if there is no floor
Floor to remove the current floor below, the floor beneath becomes the current
from the plan. If there is a floor above, it floor.
174
Stepped Floor & Ceiling Platforms
To delete Floor 0, select Build> Auto Rebuild Foundation is turned on. See
Floor> Delete Foundation. You can Deleting Foundations on page 183.
delete the foundation without actually being
on Floor 0. Floor 0 cannot be deleted while When a floor is deleted, all objects on
that floor are deleted with it.
Stepped Floor & Ceiling Platforms

Each floor has default floor and ceiling If you require a single floor platform with a
heights. You can, however, use the Room uniform height and thickness but different
Specification dialog to specify floor and ceiling heights for the rooms below, specify a
ceiling heights on a room by room basis to lowered ceiling using the Ceiling Finish
create stepped floors and ceilings. See Specification dialog. See Lowered
Structure Tab on page 131. Ceilings on page 128.
Split Levels
Both split level floor plans and split level To create a simple split level plan
entries can be created by controlling the floor
and ceiling heights of individual rooms in a 1. Draw a simple rectangular structure
multiple story structure. divided into two separate halves by an
interior wall.
Split Level Floor Plans 2. Select one of the rooms and click the
A split level, or tri-level, structure is a Open Object edit button. See
building where the floor level in one part of Room Specification Dialog on page
the plan is located approximately half way 130.
between the floor and ceiling levels of 3. Raise the Floor Height then press the
another part of the plan. Tab key.
4. Restore the Relative Rough Ceiling to
the default value, then click OK.
5. Build a stem wall foundation. See
Foundations on page 179.
The foundation under the room with
the lower floor height will have the
specified Min Stem Wall Height.
Split Level Home
175
The foundation under the room with To create a simple split level entry
the raised floor will have taller stem
walls. 1. Create a plan file with a full basement at
Both can be edited in the Room the location of the entry door. See
Specification dialog. Basement Rooms on page 184.
6. If you add a Floor 2, note that the Ceil- 2. Go to Floor 0 and draw a stair Landing
ing Height in the room on Floor 1 will at the location of the entry. See
be reset to the default value. Landings on page 208.
To maintain a stepped condition on 3. Draw stairs upward from the basement
multiple floors, return to this room and floor to the landing.
set the Relative Rough Ceiling back to
The number of treads and risers in the
using the default.
stair section will determine the landing
height.
Split Level Entries
4. Draw a second stair section from the
A split level entry, or divided entry, is landing upward.
characterized by an entry door that opens
5. Select the stairs and click the Auto
onto a landing positioned half way between
the basement floor and first floor levels. Stairwell edit button. See Creating
a Stairwell on page 212.
Split level entries are often associated with
daylight basements. See Daylight
Basements on page 185.
For more detailed instructions, visit
Split Level Entry
The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given first. Only one of these windows can be
time. The active floor is referred to as the active at any given time.
Current Floor, and it is the only floor on
which objects can be edited. Floor Up / Floor Down
If you want to edit two different floors at the If you are working with
same time, you can open the plan again. This more than one floor, you
opens a second window on the current open can select Tools> Reference Floors> Up
plan that has the same editing abilities as the
176
The Attic Floor
One Floor or Down One Floor to switch Change Floor / Reference

from one floor to another. If there are multiple floors, select
You can change the current floor in floor plan Tools> Reference Floors> Change
and 3D views. The current floor displays on Floor/Reference to open the Change Floor/
Reference dialog, where you can select both
the Change Floor/Reference button,
the current floor and which floor is used in
which can be found between the Down One
the Reference Display, as well as control the
Floor and the Up One Floor buttons.
appearance of the Reference Display.
Floors become available once they have been
built. The Attic and foundation levels are
also accessible using these tools.
The Attic Floor

Home Designer Suite automatically you try to draw walls or other objects on this
creates a floor above the top floor.
numbered floor level of each plan. This floor
In some situations, you may find it necessary
is called the Attic floor and has only one
to draw one or more walls on this floor;
purpose: to provide a space for automatically
however, even if you enclose an area with
generated Attic walls. See Attic Walls on
walls, rooms cannot be created on the Attic
page 111.
floor.
Because the Attic floor is not meant to be a
If you wish to create an attic loft, bonus
living area, a warning message will display if
room, or storage area in your plan, you will
need do so on a numbered floor level.
The Reference Floor

When there is more than one floor in a Reference Display
model, it is often helpful to see how different
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be To display the Reference Floor, select
shown as the Reference Floor along with the Tools> Reference Floors> Reference
current floor. Display or press F9 on your keyboard.
When the Reference Display is turned on, the If the Reference Display is turned on when a
floor that you were last on prior to the current view is printed, it will be included in the
floor is used as the Reference Floor. Objects printed output. See Display Options and
on the Reference Floor cannot be selected or Printing on page 432.
edited.
177
Note: If objects on the current floor and the

Reference Floor have edges that line up, the 1
Reference Floor may be difficult to see on
screen. When lines of two different colors are 2
superimposed upon each other, discoloration
may result.
Reference Display Options

The display of objects in the 1 The Reference Floor currently used for
reference is highlighted here. You can
Reference Display is controlled by select another floor.
selecting Tools> Reference Floors>
Reference Display Options. See Display 2 The Current Floor is highlighted here.
Options Dialog on page 55. You can select another floor to make it
the current floor.
Change Floor / Reference
Swap Floor/Reference
By default, the floor below the current
floor is the Reference Floor, but any If one floor is defined as the current
floor can be referenced using the Change floor and another floor is defined as
Floor/Reference dialog. To open the dialog, the reference floor, select Tools> Reference
select Tools> Reference Floors> Change Floors> Swap Floor/Reference to switch
Floor/Reference button. the status of the two floors.
178
Chapter 13:
Foundations
There are two foundation types in Home Chapter Contents

Designer Suite: stem walls with footings and Foundation Defaults
monolithic slab. The foundation type can be Building a Foundation
specified in the Foundation Defaults dialog Displaying Foundations
when the foundation is built. Editing Foundations
There can be only one foundation level in Deleting Foundations
your plan, Level 0. Foundation walls can be Foundations and Rooms
drawn on upper floors using the Wall tool. Foundations and the Terrain
Always consult registered geotechnical

and civil engineers for information
regarding the proper foundation for your site.
179
Foundation Defaults
Foundation Defaults can be accessed Foundation dialog, which opens when
by selecting Edit> Default Settings. Build> Floor> Build Foundation is
Select Foundation and click the Edit selected. The primary difference is that when
button to open the Foundation Defaults you click OK in the Foundation Defaults
dialog. dialog, no changes are made to the model.
See Building a Foundation on page 181.
The settings in the Foundation Defaults
dialog are similar to those in the Build
1
2
3
4
1 Check Auto Rebuild Foundation to 4 Wall Height - Specify the desired

automatically rebuild the foundation height of the foundation walls.
whenever changes are made to Floor 1 that
If the wall height is at least 6 feet (1800 mm),
affect the structure of the foundation. See
a slab floor is generated above the footings
Rebuilding Foundations on page 182.
and inside the foundation walls. The Wall
2 Click the radio button beside either Height includes the thickness of this slab.
Monolithic Slab or Walls with
If you do not want this slab, specify the
Footings to specify which foundation type
rooms on Floor 0 as Open Below in the
the program should build.
Room Specification dialog. See Available
Room Types on page 124.
3 Wall Thickness - Specify the desired
thickness of the foundation wall. See
Wall Thickness on page 107.
180
Building a Foundation
Building a Foundation
Two foundation types are available: To build an automatic foundation
stem walls with footings and
monolithic slabs. The first option is created 1. Select Build> Floor> Build Founda-
using walls; the second creates concrete slabs tion .
with footings.
2. Specify the desired foundation type and
Automatically built foundations are placed other information in the Build
on Floor 0 and are based on wall positions Foundation dialog. The settings in this
and floor heights on Floor 1. Foundation dialog are similar to those in the Foun-
walls or slab footings are generated under: dation Defaults dialog. See Foundation
All exterior walls on Floor 1 that define a Defaults on page 180.
room other than a Court, Deck or Bal- 3. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive
cony room type. See Room Definition new Foundation plan from the 1st
on page 120. floor plan and click OK to build a foun-
Any interior walls on Floor 1 defining dation based on Floor 1.
rooms with different floor heights. See If you prefer, you can instead select Make
Floor & Ceiling Heights on page 127. new (blank) plan for the Foundation to
At least one room must be defined on Floor 1 create an empty foundation level where you
for a foundation to be automatically can manually draw foundation walls or slabs.
generated. If no rooms are defined on Floor In most cases, it is preferable to base Floor 0
1, a blank Floor 0 is created. off the first floor plan and then manually edit
Once a foundation is generated, you can add the foundation as needed. See Editing
interior walls to customize it. Foundations on page 182.
Displaying Foundations
The display of foundation walls, slabs, If a door on Floor 1 extends into a stem wall
curbs and footings is controlled in the or curb defining a Garage room, its location
Display Options dialog. See Display will be indicated on Floor 0.
In 3D views, all objects on Floor 0 will only
Foundation Walls, including slab footings display when the Foundation layer is
and Garage curbs, are placed on the turned on.
Walls, Foundation layer.
While the display of foundation walls and
Footings under Foundation Walls and
their footings can be controlled independent
slab footings are placed on the Foot-
of one another in floor plan view, in 3D
ings layer.
views this is not the case. If a foundation
181
wall is set to display, its footing will as well - layer. Slab footings are located on the
even if the Footings layer is turned off. The Walls, Foundation layer; but if this layer is
reverse is also true - if a foundation walls turned off, any slab footings that define a
display is turned off, so will its footings. foundation room will continue to display as
long as the Foundation layer is on.
The display of monolithic slab foundations in
3D views is controlled by the Foundation
Editing Foundations
Stem wall with footings and monolithic slab rebuilt, any manually drawn or edited walls
foundations are all created using walls which are deleted. Similarly, rooms on Floor 0
enclose room areas. cannot be edited while this option is enabled.
Foundation walls can be selected and
edited much like other walls. See Edit- Changing Foundation Types
ing Walls on page 106.
Foundation rooms can also be selected To avoid unexpected results, it is rec-
and edited like other rooms. See Foun- ommended that you not change the
dations and Rooms. Foundation Type once the foundation is built.
When a foundation is generated, the program

Rebuilding Foundations
creates Floor Defaults settings for Floor 0
By default, foundations update automatically based on the information in the Build
when changes are made to the structure on Foundation dialog. If you specify a
Floor 1. For example, if exterior walls are Monolithic Slab foundation, the default
moved or floor platforms are raised or Floor Structure on Floor 1 will also be
lowered, the foundation will be rebuilt. changed to a slab rather than a framed
platform. See Floor Defaults Dialog on
If you prefer that the foundation not rebuild
page 172.
automatically, you can uncheck Auto
Rebuild Foundation in the Foundation If you rebuild the foundation using a
Defaults dialog. See Foundation Defaults different Foundation Type, these Floor
on page 180. Defaults settings will not change, so you
should expect to adjust the structural settings
You can also rebuild an automatically
for Floor 1 and Floor 0 Defaults, particularly
generated foundation by selecting Build>
the floor heights.
Floor> Build Foundation from the
menu. Once your Floor Defaults settings are
adjusted as needed, it is advisable to check
When Auto Rebuild Foundation is enabled, the floor heights of all rooms on Floor 1 -
walls cannot be edited, manually drawn or particularly Garage and Slab rooms, as well
deleted on Floor 0. When the foundation is
182
Deleting Foundations
as any rooms that do not use the default floor To change a rooms stem wall height
height of 0.
1. Select a room on Floor 0 and click the
Stem Wall Height Open Object edit button.
When a foundation is created, all of Floor 0 2. Specify the desired Stem Wall Height
uses the stem wall height specified in the in the Room Specification dialog. See
Foundation Defaults dialog, General Tab on page 131.
This height is measured from the bottom of 3. If you wish to reduce the Stem Wall
floor platform of Floor 1 to top of the stem Height, you will first need to reduce the
walls footings. If Floor 1 has multiple floor Ceiling Height value by the same
platform heights, the foundation stem walls amount.
will be stepped. If adjacent rooms have stem wall heights that
Once a foundation is created, stem wall differ by at least 1/16 of an inch, the stem
heights can be adjusted either on a room-by- wall separating them uses the larger of these
room basis or for individual walls. two values.
Deleting Foundations
Select Build> Floor> Delete Foun- Delete edit button or pressing the Delete
dation to delete the entire foundation key. See Deleting Objects on page 91.
floor.
Deleting and rebuilding the foundation is
You can also select and delete individual often the quickest way to update the model
foundation walls and slabs by clicking the when substantial changes are made to Floor 1
after the foundation is built.
Foundations and Rooms

When a foundation plan is created, rooms They separate the area under a Slab or
included in the Living Area calculation Garage room from the rest of the plan;
generate a stem wall or slab foundation They define areas under rooms with dif-
below them. Garage rooms generate slab ferent floor heights.
foundations, but exterior rooms such as
Decks, Courts and Balconies do not generate
any foundation. Note: To remove all or part of the concrete
slab in the basement area, select a basement
Interior foundation walls are not generated room and define it as Open Below in the
unless: Room Specification dialog.
183
Garages To build a Garage slab with curbs
When a foundation is generated based on the 1. Before the foundation is generated,

floor plan of Floor 1, a room on the first floor specify the room as a Garage or Slab.
specified as either a Garage or Slab type will
receive a foundation with a slab floor and 2. Build a Monolithic Slab foundation,
stem walls. If a monolithic slab foundation is specifying the required Lower Garage
generated, the room will receive a slab floor Floor value.
with curbs.
Basement Rooms
By default, a room on Floor 1 specified as a
Garage or a Slab will be assigned a lower When a foundations type is Walls with
floor height when the foundation is built. The Footings and it is assigned a Minimum Wall
amount that it is lowered depends on the Height of 76 (1900 mm) or greater, the
foundation type: resulting basement is automatically created
with a 4 (100 mm) concrete slab floor.
The floor height will drop the default
thickness of the floor platform for Floor 1 Similarly, if a foundation is set up to have a
plus 12 (300 mm) - a total of 24 5/8 Basement Ceiling Height of 72 (1800 mm)
(618 mm) - in a Walls with Footings or greater when built, it is automatically
foundation. given a painted drywall Ceiling Finish.
The floor height will drop 3 1/2 (88 mm) Regardless of its ceiling height, however,
in a Monolithic Slab foundation. you can specify a ceiling finish for any room
in the Room Specification dialog. See
To build a Garage slab with stem walls Structure Tab on page 131.
1. Before the foundation is generated, The resulting basement can be divided into
specify the room as a Garage or Slab. separate rooms using Interior Walls or
2. Build a Wall with Footings foundation. any wall type you wish.
Foundations and the Terrain

Home Designer Suite automatically positions 6 (187 mm) below the top of the stem
the terrain a set distance below Floor 1. See walls in a Walls with Footings founda-
Terrain Height vs Floor Height on page tion.
252. 8 (200 mm) below the top of the slab in
In a plan with a foundation present, this a Monolithic Slab foundation.
distance will be:
184
Foundations and the Terrain
They feature walls that are above ground at

the lower end of the slope so that a door can
Floor platform be positioned above the terrain at that end.
To create a walkout basement, build a stem
wall foundation and modify these settings in
the Terrain Specification dialog:
Uncheck Flatten Pad.
Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.
Stem Wall Top
You will also need to create sloped terrain
Terrain and adjust the Building Pad Elevation and/
or terrain data so that the terrain is at the
appropriate height relative to the structure at
By default, the program will also create a both the high and low ends of the slope.
flattened pad under the building footprint.
Not all foundations have these requirements, Stepped Foundations
of course, so you can customize your
Stepped foundations are usually built on
foundation and terrain to suit your needs.
sloping terrain. A stepped foundation will be
produced automatically if more than one
Daylight Basements floor height is present on Floor 1 when the
Daylight basements, also referred to as look- foundation is built.
out basements, have walls that are tall As with a walkout basement, you will need
enough for basement windows to be to build a stem wall foundation and modify
positioned above the terrain. They are often these settings in the Terrain Specification
found in split level or split entry structures. dialog:
To create a daylight basement condition, Uncheck Flatten Pad.
build a stem wall foundation and modify
Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation.
these settings in the Terrain Specification
dialog: You will also need to create sloped terrain
Uncheck Auto Calculate Elevation. and adjust the Building Pad Elevation and/
or terrain data so that the terrain is at the
Increase the Building Pad Elevation, appropriate height relative to the structure at
which is the distance between the default both the high and low ends of the slope.
floor height of Floor 1 and the terrain.
You can also create a stepped foundation by
Walkout Basements editing foundation rooms. See Stem Wall
Height on page 183.
Walkout basements are a type of daylight
basement typically located on sloped terrain.
185
186
Chapter 14:
Roofs
Home Designer Suites automatic Roof Tools Chapter Contents

allow you to draw almost any roof style. Roof Defaults
Proficiency with the Roof Tools can only be The Roof Tools
attained through practice, but mastering Automatic Roofs
these tools saves you time and effort in plan Build Roof Dialog
development. For information about creating Editing Roofs
specific roof styles, see Roof Tutorial on Skylights
page 27 of the Users Guide. Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
Dormers
Editing Auto Dormers
Dormer Specification Dialog
Roof Returns and Other Details
Roof Pitches in Degrees
187
Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to
open the Default Settings dialog for a If Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
variety of drawing tools, several of which Build Roof dialog and you change floor
directly affect roof generation. or ceiling heights, wall positions or roof direc-
tives in walls, the roof rebuilds to reflect your
changes. See Rebuilding Roofs on page
Build Roof Dialog 189.
While not listed in the Default Settings
dialog, the Build Roof dialog functions as Wall Specification Dialog
the defaults dialog for roofs. Many, but not By default, when a roof is built, a roof plane
all, initial default values for automatically is generated over each exterior wall, creating
generated roofs are set in this dialog. See a hip roof.
Build Roof Dialog on page 189.
Any deviations from this default hip roof,
Floor and Ceiling Heights such as a gable or a different pitch, can be
specified in the Wall Specification dialog for
The initial heights of floors and ceilings, any exterior wall. See Roof Tab on page
which influence roof heights, are specified in 114.
the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor. See
Floor Defaults Dialog on page 172. Dormer Defaults
The floor and ceiling heights in individual The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
rooms also influence roof heights and are determine the initial settings for automatic
specified in the Room Specification dialog. dormers and are much like those in the
See Structure Tab on page 131. Dormer Specification dialog. See Dormer
The Roof Tools

Select Build> Roof to access the Roof When roofs are automatically generated, a
Tools. roof plane is created over each exterior wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof.
Build Roof To automatically generate a roof plane using
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to values other than the defaults or to not
open the Build Roof dialog, specify generate a roof plane bearing on a particular
the settings for automatically generated roof wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed
planes, and build or rebuild a roof. See roof), you can change the settings in the Wall
Build Roof Dialog on page 189. Specification dialog. See Roof Tab on
page 114.
188
Automatic Roofs
For more information about creating Dormer

different roof styles, see Roof Tutorial on
page 27 of the Users Guide. Select Build> Roof> Dormer and
click within an existing roof plane to
place an auto floating dormer. See
Skylight
Dormers on page 193.
Select Build> Roof> Skylight, then
draw a rectangle over an existing roof Delete Roof
plane to create a skylight. The skylight, sky-
light shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof to
exists) are drawn at the same time. See delete all roof planes in the plan. See
Skylights on page 192. Deleting Roof Planes on page 191.
Automatic Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a Rebuilding Roofs
roof plane is created over each exterior wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof. By default, when changes are made to the
model, the roof does not update to reflect
these changes.
When Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
To automatically generate a roof plane using
Build Roofs dialog any changes made to the
values other than the defaults or to not
position of an exterior wall or to its roof
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular
directives will prompt the roof to regenerate
wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed
to reflect these changes. See Roof Tab on
roof), you can change the settings in the Wall
page 190.
Specification dialog for that wall. See Roof
Tab on page 114. Changes made to floor or ceiling heights will
also cause the roof to be automatically
For more information about creating
rebuilt.
different roof styles, see Roof Tutorial on
page 27 of the Users Guide. You can also rebuild the roof at any time to
reflect the current state of the model by
opening the Build Roof dialog and clicking
OK.
Build Roof Dialog

The Build Roof dialog is used to planes.To open the Build Roof dialog, select
automatically build or rebuild roof Build> Roof> Build Roof .
189
Roof planes are generated based on the There are three tabs in the Build Roof dialog:
positions and roof directive settings for each Roof Tab
exterior wall in the plan. If you make
changes to any of these walls, you will need Materials Tab
to build the roof again for them to take effect. Roof Styles Tab
See Roof Tab on page 114.
Roof Tab
1
2
3
1 If you check Auto Rebuild Roofs, the see Roof Pitches in Degrees on page
program automatically rebuilds the roof 199.
if you make a change that affects the roof, Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
such as to exterior wall positions or ceiling width of an alcove (depression into an
heights. otherwise straight exterior wall). Any
alcove less than the specified width is
2 Check Ignore Top Floor to build the treated as though the exterior wall contin-
roof so that it bears on the walls of the
floor below the top living floor in the plan. ues straight across. Alcoves that measure
When unchecked, the roof builds so that it wider than this value are not roofed over;
bears on the walls on the top floor of the they cause a change in roof planes.
plan. Following is an example showing this
The options in the Specifications difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" wide
3 alcove requires a change in the roof line.
section are basic roof structure settings.
Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the
Enter a value to describe the Pitch as a
right, the alcove is less than the 36"
ratio over 12. For a conversion to degrees,
minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
190
Editing Roofs
Gable is the overhang dimension at gable

ends or rake walls.
If the roof overhang values are not suffi-

cient to extend past the outer layer of
exterior walls, the walls may not generate
correctly in 3D views..
Materials Tab
4 The Roof Overhang is measured The settings on the Materials tab allow you
horizontally from the exterior surface
of the walls framing layer to the end of the to specify materials for the roofs various
top of the rafter. It does not include gutters, components. For information about using the
sheathing or siding. Materials tab, see Materials Tab on page
328.
Normal is the overhang at the eaves and
is always the overhang for a roof plane
Roof Styles Tab
having the default Pitch specified above.
If the pitch for a particular roof plane is The Roof Styles tab provides links to tutorial
set differently, its overhang may try to information about creating different roof
maintain its fascia at the same height. styles automatically. Click on a roof style to
Overhang can be greater for a shallower launch the online Help to a page with
pitch, lesser for a greater pitch. information about the roof style you selected.
See Roof Tutorial on page 27 of the Users
Guide.
Editing Roofs
Unlike most other objects in Home Designer the Material Painter will not be retained
Suite, roof planes cannot be selected and if the roof is later rebuilt. See The Material
edited. To make changes to the roof, you Painter on page 326.
must edit the edit roof directives in walls
and/or settings in the Build Roof dialog, and
then rebuild. See Rebuilding Roofs on
Deleting Roof Planes
page 189. There are several ways to delete roof planes.
An exception to this rule is the Material Delete the entire roof quickly by
Painter tool, which you can use to selecting Build> Roof> Delete Roof.
change the materials used by individual roof You can also delete all roof planes at
planes without rebuilding the roof. Bear in once in the Delete Objects dialog.
mind, though, that any changes made using See Delete Objects Dialog on page 91.
191
Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting
Build> Roof> Skylight and drawing a
rectangular polyline within a single roof
plane. You can also simply click once within
a roof plane to place a 2 x 2 skylight.
The Skylight tool places a flat panel

skylight into a roof hole, produces a hole in
the ceiling platform below, and automatically
generates the skylight shaft between these
two holes.
To place a skylight in a vaulted ceiling,
uncheck Ceiling Over This Room in the
Room Specification dialog, draw the ceiling
planes to produce the vault and edit them as
needed, and then draw the skylight. See
Structure Tab on page 131.
Editing Skylights
Once selected, skylights can be edited using
the edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification dialog.
See Roof Hole/Skylight Specification
Dialog on page 192.
Skylights must always be contained by a
single roof plane. If the roof plane is deleted,
any skylights or holes it contains are also
deleted. Aside from this restriction, skylights
can be edited much like standard closed
polylines. See Editing Closed-Polyline
Based Objects on page 76.
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

Select a skylight and click the Open Hole/Skylight Specification dialog. See
Object edit button to open the Roof Skylights on page 192.
192
Dormers
General Tab
1 Skylight Frame Width and Height - Line Style Tab

Define the width and height of the
frame or curb of the skylight. For information about the settings on this
tab, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
2 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines
the shape of the skylight well where it Fill Style Tab
passes through the roof plane.
The settings on the Fill Style tab control the
Square Sides - The framing for the sky-
appearance of the selected skylight in floor
light is cut square to the pitch of the roof.
plan view. For information about these
Plumb Sides - The framing for the sky- settings, see Fill Style Tab on page 400.
light is plumb-cut.
Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is Materials Tab
plumb-cut, the top edge square-cut.
For information about the Materials tab, see
Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually or Automatic Dormer side walls cannot be
placed automatically using the positioned above other walls in the plan.
Dormer tool.
If you click within a roof plane to place an
Automatic Dormers can be placed only automatic dormer, but click too close to an
under certain conditions: eave or the ridge, a dormer will not be
Automatic Dormers can only be placed created; however, its outline will. Move this
entirely within a single roof plane. They outline box to a location that meets the
cannot extend past the eaves or ridge of dormers requirements and it will be created.
this roof plane.
193
Dormer above. Normally, it does not matter what

floor the dormer is on, but in some cases, it
Select Build> Roof> Dormer and click the may need to be on the floor above so that the
roof plane where you would like to place the dormer walls do not interfere with walls or
center of the dormer's front wall. railings in the room below.
The bottom edges of all dormer walls are cut Regardless of which floor it is placed on, a
off by the underlying roof plane. dormer must always fit within a single roof
The images below show both the outside and plane. When placing a dormer on the floor
inside of a typical dormer. above,you may find it helpful to turn on the
Reference Display . See Reference
Display on page 177.
The initial width, height, roof style and other
settings of Auto Dormers are set in the
Dormer Defaults dialog. See Dormer
Manually Drawn Dormers

Once you are familiar with Home Designer
Suites roof tools, drawing dormers manually
can be quite simple. There are several
different ways to draw dormers; some
methods work better in certain applications.
A variety of resources with information
about drawing dormers manually is available
A dormer can be placed in floor plan view on at www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
the same floor that its underlying roof plane See, too, Manually Drawn Dormers on
displays on, or it can be placed on the floor page 42 of the Users Guide.
Editing Auto Dormers

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that Using the Mouse
behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it
can be edited using its edit handles, edit When selected, an auto dormer displays three
tools, and specification dialog. See Dormer edit handles. The Move handle displays over
Specification Dialog on page 195. the front wall and allows you to relocate the
dormer. Two resize handles display on the
side walls and allow you to change the width
of the dormer.
194
Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond

the required knee wall.
Editing the Window

Dormer windows can be selected, edited,
deleted and replaced just like other windows.
Move Resize See Editing Windows on page 159. You
can place several windows in the front wall.
There are some things to keep in mind when
editing auto dormers and auto floating Unless the dormer's window has been edited
dormers using the mouse. or changed in the Window Specification
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its
Dormers move at 90 angles unless the
width changes automatically to fill the front
Ctrl key is pressed before moving them.
dormer wall. If the window has been edited,
The dormer must be contained within one its width stays fixed. If a change to the
underlying roof plane. dormer makes its front wall too short to hold
the window, the window reverts to auto
width.

Select a dormer and click the Open
Object edit button to open the
Dormer Specification dialog.
The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
are much like those in the Dormer
Specification dialog, but apply to all
dormers as they are created rather than to a
selected dormer.
195
General Tab
1 2
1 Specify characteristics of the selected in 12 pitch. For Gambrel and Mansard

dormers Dormer Roof. types, this applies to the lowest, or eave,
Choose a Roof Type from the drop-down roof planes.
list. You can choose from Hip, Gable, Check Pitch in Degrees to display the
Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved pitch in degrees rather than in rise and
Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow. run.
2 Specify the Wall Type of the dormer

walls here.
Select a Wall Type for the dormer walls
from the drop-down list.
Specify the Height of the dormer walls,
measured from where the top of the
underlying roof plane meets the dormer
front wall exterior to where the underside
of the dormer rafter meets the dormer side
Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, wall interior
Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave, and Eyebrow Check Set to Existing Ceiling to assign
dormer roof types the ceiling height of the room behind the
Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof dormer to the dormer.
planes. Initially, the default dormer pitch Specify the Width of the dormer, mea-
matches the roof pitch for all dormer roof sured between the outside surfaces of the
types except Shed, which has a default 3 dormer side walls.
196
3 Roof Returns can be specified only for Line Style Tab

gable dormers. See Roof Returns on
page 197. For information about the settings on this
tab, see Line Style Tab on page 395.

Home Designer Suite provides a selection of
tools to add details to your roof design.
Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper
triangular portion of the gable wall. There Full Return
are three styles of roof returns that can be
produced automatically. Roof returns are generated automatically on
a wall by wall basis using settings found in
The first two styles are called Gable and Hip the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof
returns since the return ends in a gable or hip. Tab on page 114.
These roof return settings are also found in
the Dormer Specification dialog for gable
roof dormers and function similarly. See
General Tab on page 196.
Gable Over Door/Window

Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to add a small gable
dormer over one or more selected doors or
windows the next time automatic roof planes
Hip Return Gable Return are built.
The third is called a Full return because it The Gable Line displays in floor plan view
extends under the entire gable, connecting when the Roofs, Gable Lines layer is set to
both sides. In order for a Full return to be display.
created, the roof planes on each side must
have the same height.
197
line can be moved, stretched, and edited. See

Editing Line Based Objects on page 68.
The Gable Over Door/Window edit

button is not available for doors or windows
placed in Full Gable Walls or if a bay, box or
bow window is selected. See Bay, Box,
Bow Windows & Roofs on page 162.
If you move or resize the door or window(s),
the associated Gable Line does not update
until the roof is built again.
To remove a Gable Over Door/Window,
select the door or window(s) and click the
Delete Gable Over Opening edit button.
It is located about 12 inches (300 mm)
The next time the roof is built, the gable will
outside the wall and extends a foot on either
be removed.
side of the opening. Once produced, a gable
198
199
200
Chapter 15:
Stairs &
Landings
Staircases can be composed of one or more Chapter Contents

straight or curved stair sections and landings. Stair Defaults
Stairs can be drawn, selected and edited in The Stair Tools
2D and 3D views. Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairwells can be created automatically or Drawing Stairs
manually and can be seen in 3D views. Displaying Stairs and Landings
Editing Stairs
Merging Stair Sections
Local building and fire authorities must Landings
be consulted for specific stair construc-
Maintaining Tread Depth
tion codes and access requirements.
Starter Treads
Wrapped Stairs
Other Special Railings & Stairs
Creating a Stairwell
Rooms Below Staircases
Staircase Specification Dialog
Stair Landing Specification Dialog
201
Stair Defaults
The purpose of interior stairs is to provide structure of stairs. When considering a
passage from one floor platform to another, staircases structure, bear in mind that riser
so the attributes that influence floor heights - height is directly dependent on the distance
including ceiling heights - also influence the from one floor platform to another.
The Stair Tools

Select Build> Stairs to access the If you click at a location that is not near
Stair Tools. the edge of a floor platform, a full height
staircase will be created.
Straight Stairs
Curved Stairs
To draw a straight staircase select
Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then Select Build> Stairs> Curve to
click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view. Left or Curve to Right and click
You can also click once to place a staircase once in floor plan view to place a curved
that extends from the current floor up to the staircase. See Curved Stairs on page 204.
next floor. See Drawing Stairs on page
204. Landing
Select Build> Stairs> Landing to
Click Stairs
draw a landing, which is a platform
Select Build> Stairs> Click Stairs to connecting two or more stair sections. See
create stairs between levels on the Landings on page 208.
same floor with a single click of the mouse.
There are two ways to create a landing using
Click the low side, within a few feet of where
this tool:
the floor changes height.
Click once to place a landing measuring
If you click on the low side of a floor
39 (975 mm) on each side.
platform defined by a railing, a doorway
will be created in the railing, adjacent to Click and drag from end to end to draw a
the stairs. rectangular landing sized as needed. See
Polylines on page 399.
If you click on the low side of a floor
platform defined by a wall, stairs will be
created but a doorway will not.
202
Anatomy of a Staircase
Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", and landing floor, that anchors the balusters at
the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans, landings.
rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run is about
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
250 mm.
staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Staircase Terminology Tread - The horizontal member of a stair that
the foot is placed on.
Balusters - The vertical members that run
between the handrail and the treads or shoe. Tread Overhang - The portion of a tread
extending past the front surface of the riser
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on and over the tread below. Also referred to as
the exposed side of stairs below each tread. Nosing or Nosing Extension, it is not
Landing - A platform connecting two or included in the Run or Tread Depth
more stair sections. measurements.
Newels - The end post of a stair railing Thread Thickness - The vertical depth of
located at landings and the beginnings and the tread material.
endings of new stair sections.
Stair Structure and the Model
Rise - The height of a riser, measured from
tread surface to tread surface, Also referred Stairs locate the height of the floor platform
to as Unit Rise. that they are drawn on, and seek the next
level, which may be the floor platform of the
Rise Angle - The angle of the staircase or
floor above or a landing. The stringers locate
stair section, defined by a line drawn through
the subfloor of the floor platforms and
the back surfaces of its treads.
maintain consistent riser height. If the stairs
Riser - The vertical stair member located are long enough to reach the next level at a
between the treads. Risers may be solid or reasonable rise angle, their tread depth and
open. When open, the front surfaces of the number of treads are automatically
stringers are considered the risers. calculated to create a staircase with
consistent tread and riser dimensions along
Run - The depth of a tread, measured from
its entire length.
riser surface to riser surface. Run does not
include the Tread Overhang. Also referred to
as Unit Run. Stair Sections and
Subsections
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
center of the staircase. In Home Designer Suite, staircases can be
composed of multiple sections and
subsections. See Merging Stair Sections on
page 206.
203
Stair sections are separated by landings. to one another directly rather than sepa-
Subsections are considered part of the rated by a landing.
same section because they are connected
Drawing Stairs
Stairs can be drawn in floor plan and 3D Straight Stairs
views but not in cross section/elevation
views. In 3D views, these objects can only be Straight Stairs can be created in three
drawn in the presence of a floor platform or different ways:
terrain perimeter. See Working in 3D on Click and drag in a straight line to draw
page 356. stairs that are the length that you drag.
There are a few things to keep in mind when Click once to place stairs that go from the
drawing stairs. current floor up to the height of the next
Before stairs are created, make sure that floor level.
the heights for both the lower and upper
floors are correctly defined. Click once using the Click Stairs
tool to create stairs between rooms on the
Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should same floor with different floor heights or
be drawn from the lower of the two floors between exterior rooms and the terrain.
they connect.
An individual stair section must be between
By default, stairs adjust their riser and
6 (150 mm) and 100 (30,000 mm) in
tread dimensions to connect two floor
length. If a greater length is needed, connect
heights if possible. The rise and run are
two sections using a landing.
calculated so that the steps are consistent
in size.
Curved Stairs
If you have the Reference Display Curved Stairs can be created in
turned on, stairs snap to the reference dis- floor plan view by selecting
play. Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Curve to
If a stairwell room has been defined on Right. Click to place a 90 curved stair
the floor above, the top of the stairs can section that can then be edited. You can
be dragged until it stops at the railing or continue clicking to place additional curved
wall defining the stairwell. staircases until another tool is selected.
When drawing stairs up from the terrain, In addition, you can change a straight
it is a good idea to make sure the terrain stair section into curved stairs, or vice
is up to date. See Building the Terrain versa by selecting the stairs and clicking
on page 262.
the Change Line/Arc edit button.
See Change Line/Arc on page 90.
204
Displaying Stairs and Landings
Drawing Stairs Downward 2. Hold down the Alt key or the right
mouse button.
Stairs can be drawn from the current floor
level downward; however, drawing stairs 3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
between floors in this manner is not When drawing stairs from a floor platform to
recommended. Drawing downward should the terrain, or vice versa, they will locate the
only be used to create a staircase between a height of the terrain as long as it is lower than
porch or deck and the terrain when you the floor height. You can also create room
require the direction arrow to say DN outside the structure and use it to establish
instead of UP. the bottom height of the stairs. Then, draw in
an upward direction from the lower platform
To draw stairs going downward to the upper platform.
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight
Stairs .
Displaying Stairs and Landings

The display of stairs and landings in When a staircase is selected in floor plan
all views is controlled in the Display view, the numbers associated with each of its
Options dialog. Stairs and landings are sections and subsections display. Stair
placed on the Stairs & Ramps layer. See sections are assigned a single-digit number.
Displaying Objects on page 54. Subsection numbers have two parts: a section
number and subsection number, separated by
In Floor Plan View a hyphen.
In floor plan view, stairs and landings display

on the floor they were drawn on and are only
visible from the floor above if there is a
stairwell.
Stairs have an arrow indicating the direction
Stair section Stair subsection
they run. Interior stairs have an UP arrow on
number numbers
the floor they were created on and a DN
arrow when viewed from the floor above. In 3D Views
See Drawing Stairs on page 204.
Although stairs span between two floors,
The style and size of a direction arrow can be they can only belong to one floor. As a result,
specified in the Staircase or Ramp only multi-floor views show the upper floor
Specification dialog. The color and display
with the platform opening and the lower
are controlled by the Stairs & Ramps, Up/ floor with the staircase simultaneously. In
Down Arrows layer. Floor Cameras and Doll House Views,
205
stairwells may appear as an empty spaces.

See 3D View Tools on page 346.
Editing Stairs
Staircases can be selected and edited in floor what subsection is currently selected. See
plan view and 3D views. See Selecting Merging Stair Sections on page 206.
Objects on page 66. When moving merged stair sections, all
merged sections move as one.
Using the Mouse
Additional edit handles display on the
When a staircase is selected, its edit handles first two treads of a staircase if the
display. These edit handles can be used to Starter Tread edit button is clicked.
customize the object in many ways. See See Starter Treads on page 210.
Straight stair sections are edited like In the Specification Dialog
lines. They have additional edit handles
for resizing the width of the section. See Stairs can be customized in the
Editing Line Based Objects on page Staircase Specification dialog. See
68. Staircase Specification Dialog on page
215.
Curved stair sections are edited like arcs
and also include edit handles for resizing
the stairs width. See Editing Arc Based
Using the Edit Tools
Objects on page 70. A selected staircase can be edited in a variety
When stair sections are merged, the edit of ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar.
handles display differently depending on See The Edit Toolbar on page 24.

Any combination of straight and curved stair Combinations of stairs drawn in the UP
sections using Automatic Heights can be and DOWN directions cannot be merged.
merged. The resulting staircase section is
Stair subsections merge at the center points
made up of subsections and, if there are no
of their upper and lower edges.
landings, functions as a single unit.
Stair subsections must be drawn in the same To merge stair sections
direction if they are to be merged:
1. Confirm that the stairs that you wish to
The top edge of a stair section cannot merge are using Automatic Heights.
merge with the bottom edge of another See General Tab on page 215.
section.
206
2. Position the sections so they are in the Curved Subsections

desired relationship to each other.
Stair subsections attached at both ends by
In order to merge stair sections cor-
other sections do not have a free end that can
rectly, they must be parallel to one
be dragged into a curve. In this situation,
another.
change the middle sub-section to a curve
To create merged subsections that
change direction, make one of the using the Change Line/Arc edit button.
merged sections curved. See Change Line/Arc on page 90.
3. Select either stair section so that its edit To curve an enclosed stair subsection
handles display.
4. Click the Extend handle on the end to be 1. Draw three straight stair sections and
merged and drag it to the point where the connect them end to end.
two stairs are to meet. 2. Select the middle subsection.
Merging parallel stair sections

Select the middle stair subsection
A staircase consisting of merged subsections
resembles a single stair section in floor plan
view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit
a single direction arrow. button. The center section turns into a
curved stair section.
When a subsection is selected, the entire
staircase is selected. Additional edit handles,
indicating the presence of multiple
subsections and allowing you to reposition
the line along which they join. See Using
the Mouse on page 206.
207
4. Use the triangular Change Curve edit

handle to adjust the curvature of the
middle section as needed.
After using Change Line/Arc
Landings
Stair landings are platforms between stair
sections and can be created in either of two
ways:
Using the Landing tool.

By clicking between two stair sections
using the Straight Stairs tool.
Creating a stair landing
To create a landing between stair sections:
Multiple stair sections can be connected to
1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They one landing. For example, two or three stair
can be at any angle. sections might meet at a landing with a single
2. Click between the two sections using the stair section continuing to the next level.
Straight Stairs tool to create a land- To be linked by a landing, all sections must
ing. Notice that only one direction arrow be drawn in the same UP direction and the
displays after the sections are joined by top of one section should be near the bottom
a landing. of the next.
Stair sections connected with a landing will
move together as a single unit.
A landing formed between two stair sections
having less than a 90 angle between them
208
are created with a short edge not less than 6 remove edges, convert an edge from straight
(150 mm). This is because most building to curved, or vice versa. A curved landing
codes require the shortest tread to be at least creates curved railings. See Editing Closed-
6 wide. This edge can be manually edited to Polyline Based Objects on page 76.
less than 6 if needed.
You can edit the shape of a landing into a
wide variety of shapes. So that the railings of
Editing Landings stair sections connect properly to the landing
Landings can be selected in 2D and 3D railings, make sure that each stair section end
views, both individually and in groups, and is snapped to a landing edge with the same
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar, length as the stairs width. If necessary, use
and the Landing Specification dialog. See the Break Line tool to create a break in a
Stair Landing Specification Dialog on landing edge if it is longer than the
page 218. connecting stairs are wide. See Break Line
Landings derive their initial materials and on page 90.
railing characteristics from the stairs attached
to them. You can assign a unique material to Landing Height
a landing in its specification dialog or using Landing height is controlled by the program
the Material Painter ; however, the and will adjust automatically as the stairs
railing style is always defined by the attached attached to it are modified.
stairs.
If you specify a landings height, that landing
becomes locked and will maintain that height
Custom Shaped Landings no matter how the stairs connected to it are
Landings can be edited like other closed adjusted.
polyline-based objects. You can add or

Most building codes require staircases to When the walk line is used on a curved stair
maintain a consistent tread depth. section, the number and/or width of treads in
a section or subsection changes when the
Walk Line inner edge is moved because the walk line is
measured from this inner edge. You should
By default, Home Designer Suite measures set the stair section width to its final value as
the length and tread depth of a stair section early as possible.
along a walk line. The walk line is typically
located 12" (30 cm) from the edge of the stair
section. On curved stairs, it is measured from
the inside edge of the curve.
209
Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a
staircase can be turned into starter
treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit
button. Starter treads extend to the side of the
staircase, have rounded edges and are
common on traditional staircases. 3. Drag either of the handles on the first
tread outward from the stair section. If
A starter tread can be added only to open the stair section is against a wall, only
sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair one handle displays on the side opposite
section is against a wall or wrapped (see the wall.
Wrapped Stairs on page 211), only the
4. As you drag, the ends of the tread
exposed tread end can become a starter tread.
become rounded.
5. Two additional edit handles display on

each side of the tread, along the back
edge.
6. Drag either of the two square handles
upward to increase the width of the
rounded ends of the tread.
To create starter treads 7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread
outward from the stair section to create a
1. Click on a staircase to select it.
second starter tread.
2. Click the Starter Tread edit button.
An edit handle displays on each end of
both the first and second treads.
210
Wrapped Stairs
8. To make changes to existing starter 9. When you are finished editing the starter
treads, select the stairs, click the Starter treads, click the Main Edit Mode to
Tread edit button and repeat the restore the stairs regular edit handles
above steps as needed. and toolbar buttons.
Wrapped Stairs
Stairs can be wrapped around the corner of a
deck or landing. Curved stairs and stairs with
multiple subsections cannot be wrapped. See
To wrap stairs around a deck
1. Draw a deck if you have not already

done so. See Decks on page 126.
2. Use the Click Stairs tool to draw a

stair section on each side of the corner
around which you want them to wrap.
3. Draw a second set of stairs on the other
edge of the deck the same way.
4. If necessary, move the stair sections
toward the corner of the deck. The two To wrap stairs around a landing
sections merge to form wrapped steps.
1. Draw two perpendicular Straight
You can also draw stairs down from a Stair sections.
deck by right-clicking to draw them or by
pressing the Alt key while you drag. See To
2. Click between them to create a landing.
draw stairs going downward on page 205. 3. Rotate one stair section 180.
211
4. The stairs wrap around the corner.

Notice that the Up arrow displays on the
most recently edited stair section.
Other Special Railings & Stairs

Stairs can be customized to meet a variety of
needs.
Solid Railings
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create
the Railing against, but not underneath, the
stairs and specify it as Solid. See Railing
Tab on page 115.
If any balusters show beyond the railing,

eliminate them by unchecking Left railing
Solid Railing or Right railing in the Staircase
Specification dialog. See Style Tab on
The solid railing recognizes the adjacent page 217.
stairs and climbs alongside them.
An interior staircase must be located in a stairwell is an Open Below room type on the
stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A floor above. See Room Types on page 123.
212
If you create a stairwell away from other Use the edit handles to position the rail-
walls so the Open Below is created in the ings as needed.
center of another room, connect a wall of the
Open Below room to another wall using an
invisible wall.
Automatically
To create a stairwell that matches the
perimeter of a selected staircase, click
the Auto Stairwell edit button. This button is 5. Select the railings one at a time and
only available when a living space exists move them into position.
above the staircase. It will not be available if When a railing is selected, its bounding
the space above is Open Below or on the box shows the location of the outer sur-
Attic Floor. face of the railings drywall layer. For
best results, this outer surface (which
Auto Stairwell automatically creates a does not display when the railing is not
room on the floor above enclosed by railings, selected) should meet the top edge of
defined as Open Below in the Room the stairs.
Specification dialog, and given a Stairwell If you prefer, you can also go Down
room label. This room can be selected and
One Floor and adjust the top edge
edited like any other room.
of the staircase to snap it to the surface
of the railing on the floor above.
Creating a Stairwell Manually
6. When the railings are positioned prop-
Stairwells can also be created manually.
erly, select Tools> Reference Floors>
To create a manual stairwell Reference Display to turn off the
display of the Reference Floor.
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the
7. Click inside the room using the Select
staircase on the first floor.
2. Make the second floor the Current Objects tool to select it, then click
Floor and the first floor the Reference the Open Object edit button.
Floor. See The Reference Floor on 8. On the General tab of the Room
page 177. Specification dialog, select Open
3. Select Tools> Reference Floors> Below from the Room Type list. Click
Reference Display to show the Ref- OK to close the dialog.
erence Floor, including the stairs.
4. On the upper floor, use the Railing

tool to create a room around the stairs.
213
If the doorway is specified wider than

the railing, its width maximizes to fit the
space available.
9. Place a Doorway in the railing at the

top step for an opening.
10. Select the doorway and define a large
width in the Door Specification dialog.
Rooms Below Staircases

Rooms such as closets or storage areas are 2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw
commonly located beneath staircases. the Interior Walls under them, fol-
lowing their shape.
To create a room below a staircase
3. Reposition the walls as needed, making
1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the sure that each is entirely under the stairs.
Open Object edit button to open the 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should
Staircase Specification dialog. be placed no closer to the bottom than
On the Fill Style tab, select None the second step.
(Transparent) so the walls and other 5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.
objects under the stairs can be seen.
214

Staircases can be defined with the If a staircase is composed of multiple stair
greatest accuracy using the Staircase sections, the section that you clicked on to
Specification dialog. To open the Staircase select the staircase is the Selected Section;
Specification dialog, select a stair section however, information about all the sections is
and click the Open Object edit button or available and can be edited in this dialog.
double-click a stair section using the
Straight Stairs or Select Objects It is recommended that all floor heights,
tool. ceiling heights and platform thicknesses
be established before using the Staircase
General Tab
1 4
1Staircase Information - Structural described below. If Automatic Heights

information about the selected staircase is unchecked, this comment instead says
displays here. This information cannot be Start and end heights are set manually.
edited directly, but updates as changes are The second comment, Best fit riser
made in the dialog. If you modify a value height of ___ requires ___ total risers
elsewhere, press the Tab key to update this to reach ___ to next level, describes the
information. ideal rise and run for the selected
The first comment tells whether or not staircase. The program defines the Best
the staircase reaches the next level. It also Fit Riser Height as the riser height closest
indicates whether its rise angle is either to 6 3/4 (168.75 mm) that allows the
steeper or more shallow than the Best Fit, selected staircase to meet the next level
215
precisely. This comment is only active if Uncheck Automatic Heights if you

Automatic Heights is checked, below. would like to specify the bottom and top
The total number of stair Sections, heights of each stair section, as measured
Landings, and Risers associated with the from the default floor height of Floor 1,
selected staircase also display here. 0 (mm). When checked, the program
automatically defines the top and bottom
The Rise Angle of the currently active heights by precisely locating floor plat-
stair section also displays here. forms and landings.
Click the Make Best Fit button to add or
Lock Bottom and Lock Top are actions rather
remove risers to the Selected Section.
than settings. If you make changes to the
Only available when Automatic Heights
staircase that will affect its length, first lock
is checked and the staircase does not cur-
either the bottom or top end of the Selected
rently use the Best Fit Riser Height.
Section to prevent it from moving. The
Make Best Fit will also extend stairs drawn height of the Selected Sections locked end is
in a downward direction until they reach the not affected by these settings - only its
terrain. See Terrain Perimeter on page 251. position on the X/Y axis.
The Advanced Options apply to all Select Lock Bottom to lock the position
2
sections and subsections. of the selected stair sections bottom end
to prevent it from moving. Sections and
Automatic Treads, Lock Tread Depth, and landings below the selected section do
Lock Number of Treads affect how treads are not move when you click OK, while
calculated. Only one of these options can be those above do move.
selected at a time.
Select Lock Top to lock the position of
Select Automatic Treads to have the the selected stair sections top end to pre-
program define the depth and number of vent it from moving. Sections and land-
stair treads. If the staircase has multiple ings above the selected section do not
sections, each may have different tread move when you click OK, while those
depths. below do move.
Select Lock Tread Depth to specify the
Tread Depth for each stair section, below, If you select a staircase by clicking near
and prevent them from changing. When its bottom end, Lock Top will be
Lock Tread Depth is selected and the selected; if you select it near its top end, Lock
length of the stairs is changed, the num- Bottom will be selected.
ber of treads will change.
Select Lock Number of Treads to spec- 3The specifications for each stair section
ify the number of treads in each stair sec- and subsection display and can be edited
tion and prevent it from changing. When here. A maximum of ten items can display.
Lock Number of Treads is selected and A change in one value usually affects other
the length of the stairs is changed, the values. You may need to reposition the
tread depths will change. staircase after making changes.
216
The Section # column identifies the ing edge that it connects to. See Land-
Selected Section and the number of each ings on page 208.
section of the selected staircase. The Specify the Tread Depth, or run, of each
radio button to the left indicates which stair tread in the selected section.
section or subsection is selected. See
Displaying Stairs and Landings on Define the number of Treads in a stair
page 205. section or subsection.
Define the Length, or run, of each sec- Define the Bottom Height, the height of
tion measured along the Walk Line. The the stair sections bottom edge. To lock
length is equal to the number of treads this value, click the radio button to the
multiplied by the tread depth. See Walk left of the sections number, then click the
Line on page 209. Lock Bottom radio button, above, and
click OK.
When the length of a section changes, Define the Top Height, the height of the
other sections and landings in the stair- stair sections top edge. To lock this
case unit move in response. You can value, click the radio button to the left of
specify whether the bottom or top edge of the sections number, then click the Lock
the Selected Section moves when you Top radio button, above, and click OK.
resize it by selecting either the Lock Bot- Define the Riser Height, the height of
tom or Lock Top radio button, above. the risers in each stair section.
Define the Width of each section. If a
4 A diagram of a sample staircases
section is connected to a landing, its
structure displays here for reference.
width should equal the length of the land-
Style Tab
The settings on the Style tab affect all stair
sections and subsections.
Uncheck Open Underneath to add a only a single face. Base molding does not
skirt below the staircase along the two generate along the bottom of the skirt,
sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but it has and doors cannot be placed in it.
217
In most cases, the recommended way to available when Open Risers is

enclose the area beneath stairs is to use walls. unchecked, above.
See Rooms Below Staircases on page 214.
Check Open Risers to eliminate the riser Line Style Tab
face under each tread and expose the The settings on the Line Style tab are
stringers. If Closed Sides is also selected, available for a variety of other objects in the
no central stringer is supplied. program. For information about these
Check Large Stringer Base to widen the settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
stringers at the foot of the staircase. This
is helpful when walls are created below Fill Style Tab
the stairs.
appearance of the selected staircase in floor
settings, see Fill Style Tab on page 400.
Materials Tab
The settings on the Materials tab affect the
Large Stringer Base shown at right appearance of the selected staircase in 3D
Uncheck Left Railing and/or Right Rail- views and are available for a variety of
ing to suppress the hand rail on that side objects throughout the program. For
of the staircase. Both boxes are checked information about these settings, see
by default. Materials Tab on page 328.
Specify the Railing Width, which is the The settings on this tab will also affect the
width of the hand rail. materials applied to any landings attached to
the selected staircase. See Landings on
Specify the Runner Width. The default
page 208.
value of 0 does not create a runner. Only

Select a landing and click the Open Polyline Tab
Object edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog. See The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
Landings on page 208. landings Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
its Volume.
The settings on the this tab are available for a
variety of other objects in the program. For
information about the settings on this tab, see
Polyline Tab on page 399.
218
Selected Line Tab Line Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the The settings on the Line Style tab are
selected edge is a line as opposed to an arc. available for a variety of objects throughout
See Selected Edge on page 66. the program. For information about these
settings, see Line Tab on page 394.
The settings on this tab are available for a
information about the settings on this tab, see Fill Style Tab
Line Tab on page 394. The settings on the Fill Style tab affect the
Moving the End of a line segment moves the appearance of the selected landing in floor
start of the next connected line. plan view. For information about these
Selected Arc Tab
Materials Tab
The Selected Arc tab is available only when
the selected edge has been converted to an When a landing is attached to stairs, its initial
arc. See Change Line/Arc on page 90. materials are derived from the stairs.
The settings on this tab are available for a The settings on this are available for a variety
variety of other objects in the program. For of objects throughout the program. For
information about these settings, see Arc information about these settings, see
Tab on page 397. Materials Tab on page 328.
219
220
Chapter 16:
Electrical
The electrical plan shows the location of all Chapter Contents

electrical objects such as lights, switches, The Electrical Tools
outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic Creating Wiring Schematics
wiring diagrams show which objects share Auto Place Outlets
circuits and the locations of the controlling Electrical Library
switches. Displaying Electrical Objects
Electrical objects can be displayed in 2D and Editing Electrical Objects
3D views. Some electrical light fixtures also Electrical Service Specification Dialog
add light sources to 3D views. See
Lighting on page 362.
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last
additions to a plan since the position of most
electrical objects is determined by the
location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
Building requirements vary throughout

the country and around the world. It is
your responsibility to comply with local codes.
221
The Electrical Tools

Select Build> Electrical to access the above a cabinet, the default Above Cabi-
Electrical Tools. net Default Height is used instead.
Outlets placed outside the building or in
Click in floor plan view to place an electrical
an exterior area such as a deck or porch
object. Some can only be placed against
are labeled WP, or Water Proof.
walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and
some automatically change as needed. If you To take advantage of the programs
click within 12" of the wall, the selected capabilities, define room types properly
object is placed on the wall. before placing electrical objects. See Room
Types on page 123.
Once an electrical object has been placed, it
can be edited in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See Electrical Service
Light Fixtures
Specification Dialog on page 226. Select Build> Electrical> Light to
place light fixtures. All light fixtures
Outlets placed in a plan can also serve as light
sources in 3D views. To place a light fixture
Select Build> Electrical> 110V
using the Light tool
Outlet to place 110 volt duplex
outlets in walls or on the floor. Select Build> Click near a wall to place a wall-mounted
Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220 volt fixture at that location.
outlets. Click away from a wall to place a ceiling
Certain room types and situations cause mounted light.
various types of outlets to be placed. For Some light symbols from the library can
example: be mounted under wall cabinets, as well.
In rooms defined as Kitchen, Bath or
Master Bath, Ground Fault Circuit Inter- Switches
rupt (GFCI) outlets are placed. Select Build> Electrical> Switch to
place electrical switches as specified
If standard outlets are placed in a room in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Like
prior to defining it as a Kitchen or Bath, outlets, the height of switches is measured
you should replace them with GFCI outlets. from the floor to the center of the object.
Outlets placed on the wall behind a base An electrical switch can be placed on either a
cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink wall or a cabinet, depending on the type of
are placed at the normal 12" (300 mm) switch. A selection of each type is available
above the floor. If an outlet is placed in the Library Browser. See Placing Library
Objects on page 318.
222
Creating Wiring Schematics
light fixtures is available in the Library

If you connect two or more switches in a Browser at Home Designer Suite Core
circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way Catalogs> Architectural> Lighting.
switches automatically.
Special use outlets, switches, jacks and
Lighting and Electrical numerous other electrical items can be found
at Home Designer Suite Core Catalogs>
Libraries
Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing>
A selection of free-standing and Electrical. See The Library on page 305.
ceiling-, wall- and cabinet-mounted
Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in two while using Connect Electrical tool,
ways. Using the Connect Electrical tool drag to the next object and release.
is quick and easy, but if you need detailed
Remove an electrical object from a circuit by
schematics, you can create your own wiring
diagrams using the CAD tools. selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
button. See Deleting Objects on page 91.
Connect Electrical More than one switch can control an object
Select Build> Electrical> Connect or group of objects. Two switches controlling
Electrical to illustrate circuits. Using the same objects are referred to as three-way
this tool, you can show which lights and switches. Three switches controlling the
outlets are attached to any given switch. same objects are called four-way switches.
The number of ways is one more than the
To create a new circuit or to add to an number of switches in the same circuit. This
existing circuit, click one electrical object number displays with the switch symbol in
floor plan view.
Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place It is important that the room type be defined
Outlets and click in a room tool to before using Auto Place Outlets so that
place outlets, usually 110 volt, around the outlets are placed appropriately in each room
entire room at intervals not greater than type. For example, GFCI (Ground Fault
twelve feet so that no wall position is farther Circuit Interrupter) outlets are placed over
than six feet (1800mm) from the nearest cabinets in Kitchen, Bath and Master Bath
outlet. rooms
223
Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as Electrical Library. See Room Types on

ranges, washers, and dryers each have their page 123.
required 110 volt or 220 volt outlets placed
Railings and invisible walls do not separate
automatically. Lights are always placed
above sinks. rooms for Auto Place Outlets : If Auto
Place Outlets is used in a room defined
Auto Place Outlets requires a room to by railings or invisible walls, outlets are
have a door before outlets are automatically automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
placed and does not work in any room that share these wall types with that room.
defined as an exterior room. Exterior rooms
require that the outlets be placed individually Any outlet can be moved, deleted, or merged
with other outlets or switches. See
using the 110V Outlets tool or from the
Switches on page 222.
Electrical Library
Select Library> Library Browser to lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector,
accesses a variety of electrical thermostat, and more. Select a symbol, then
symbols. See The Library on page 305. click in your plan to place it on a wall, floor,
or ceiling.
Browse for electrical objects such as bath
vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent
Displaying Electrical Objects

The display of electrical objects and Electrical labels display in floor plan view
connections is controlled in the when the Electrical, Labels layer is turned
Display Options dialog. See Displaying on.
Objects on page 54.
When displayed in 3D views, light fixtures Note: Some electrical objects are repre-
act as sources of light that help illuminate the sented in floor plan view by a symbol that
3D model. See Lighting on page 362. includes text. This text is not part of the
objects label and does not use the Default
Label Text Style.
Editing Electrical Objects

Electrical objects can be selected as a group using the edit handles and the edit toolbar .
and individually in 2D and 3D and edited
224
Editing Electrical Objects
Using the Edit Handles counter unless the cabinet contains a fixture
or appliance other than a bathroom sink. If
The edit handles for electrical objects vary the fixture requires electricity, the outlet
depending on the location of the object. Wall remains behind the cabinet at normal wall
mounted electrical objects cannot be rotated, height, where it can supply power to the
so only the Move edit handle displays. fixture or appliance.
Kitchen sinks are assumed to require
electricity since they often contain a garbage
disposal. Dishwashers are not considered to
require electricity since they are usually
plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is
needed above a cabinet containing a kitchen
Wall-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views sink, place the outlet before adding the sink,
or move the outlet up.
Electrical objects placed on floors and
ceilings can be rotated. To change the height of an electrical object in
floor plan view, open the object for
Electrical connections edit like splines. See specification and type the desired height in
Editing Spline Based Objects on page 80. the Electrical Service Specification dialog.
See Electrical Service Specification Dialog
on page 226.
Electrical objects placed in 3D views are
placed wherever you click a wall, regardless
of the height. In 3D views, the position of an
electrical object can be adjusted using its edit
handles.
Using the Edit Buttons
A selected electrical symbol can be edited in
Deleting Electrical Objects
a variety of ways using the buttons on the An electrical object can be deleted by
edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page
selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
24.
button or by pressing the Delete key.
Adjusting the Height All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or
of Electrical Objects in the entire plan can be deleted as a group
using the Delete Objects dialog. See
In floor plan view, an outlet placed where a Deleting Objects on page 91.
base cabinet meets a wall is placed above the
225
Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Select an electrical object and click The settings in this dialog vary, depending on
the Open Object edit button to open the type of object(s) you select.
the Electrical Service Specification dialog.
General Tab
The items on this tab vary, depending on the
type of electrical object selected.
1
2
1 The Name of the selected object as Specify the Height to Center of a

used in the Library Browser and switch, wall outlet or wall light.
Materials List displays here. Specify the Offset From Floor of a floor
outlet or floor lamp.
2 Specify the Position of the selected
electical symbol. The options available Specify the Distance From Wall of a
depend on the type of electrical symbol wall mounted symbol. A negative value
selected. will recess the symbol into the wall and
Specify the Offset From Ceiling of a may prevent it from being seen in 3D.
ceiling outlet or ceiling mounted light. If
the light is mounted to a cabinet, this 3 Specify the Size of the selected
electical symbol.
value is the offset from the cabinet.
226
Electrical Service Specification Dialog
Specify the Height, Width and Depth of default; switches placed from the library do
the selected symbol. not. Only available for switches.
Click the Reset button to restore the elec-
trical symbols original size Materials Tab
The Materials tab is found in the
4 Check Automatically Change Switch specification dialogs for a variety of objects.
Type When Wiring for a selected
switch to become a three- or four-way switch For more information, see Materials Tab
if your wiring plan later uses it as such. See on page 328.
Connect Electrical on page 223. Switches
placed from the toolbar use this option by
227
228
Chapter 17:
Trim Tools
The Trim Tools allow you to place corner Chapter Contents

boards and quoins at wall intersections that Trim and Molding Defaults
form corners. Corner Boards
You can also assign moldings to a variety of Corner Board Specification Dialog
objects, such as rooms and cabinets, in those Quoins
objects specification dialogs. See Quoin Specification Dialog
Specification Dialogs on page 26. Editing Corner Boards and Quoins
Millwork
229
Trim and Molding Defaults

Select Edit> Default Settings to open Click the + beside Door to access the
the Default Settings dialog where defaults for Interior and Exterior Doors.
you can access the defaults for a variety of See Door Defaults on page 137.
drawing tools, including a number that affect Select Window and click the Edit but-
trim and moldings. ton to specify the default casing for win-
Select Floor and click the Edit button dows. See Window Defaults on page
to specify the default moldings for rooms 154.
on the current floor. See Floor and
Room Defaults on page 120.
Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building Corner boards extend from the top plate
exterior in any view by selecting down to the bottom of the floor platform of
Build> Trim> Corner Boards. the floor on which it is placed, but do not
extend to other floors. You must add corner
boards to all floors of the building that you
want to have corner boards.
A selected corner board or boards can be
moved, but only to another wall corner or
corners. In 3D views, corner boards can be
lengthened or shortened using the edit
handles. Corner boards can be copied,
deleted and resized similar to other objects
Click at a wall corner where you want to add using the edit toolbar or the Corner Board
trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall Specification dialog.
surfaces meet. If you click where the inside The default material for corner boards is
surfaces meet, corner trim will be created defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the
inside the room. Material Defaults dialog. See Material
Corner Board Specification Dialog

Select a corner board and click the
Open Object edit button to open the
Corner Board Specification dialog.
230
Quoins
General Tab
Specify the Width of the selected corner Materials Tab

board(s).
The settings on the Materials tab are
available for a wide variety of objects in the
program. For information about these
settings, see Materials Tab on page 328.
Quoins
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any A selected quoin or quoins can be moved,
view and click at a wall corner where but only to another wall corner or corners. In
you want to place quoins. 3D views, quoins can be lengthened or
shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can
be copied, deleted and resized similar to
other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.
The size of quoins in floor plan view is

relative on their size in 3D.
Initially, quoins use the same material as the
default material of the wall surface they are
placed against.
Quoin Specification Dialog

Select a quoin and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Quoin
231
General Tab
1 Specify the dimensions of the quoins in Uniform - Produce quoins that are of
the selected Quoin object. equal length on both sides of the corner.
Specify the Width, which is the long Staggered - Produce quoins that have
dimension of each quoin in the selected one long side and one short side stag-
Quoin object. The dimension along the gered on opposite sides of the corner.
other wall is half this value when they are
staggered or mirrored. Materials Tab
Specify the Quoin Height for individual The settings on the Materials tab are
quoins in the selected Quoin object. available for a wide variety of objects in the
2 Specify the arrangement of quoins used settings, see Materials Tab on page 328.
by the selected Quoin object(s).
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins

Before a corner board or quoin can be edited, Using the Mouse
it must be selected. Click on a trim object
Depending on the type of view, a corner
when the Select Objects tool is active. board or quoin displays a different set of edit
Corner boards and quoins can also be group handles when selected.
selected and edited. See Selecting Objects
on page 66. In floor plan view, corner boards and
quoins display one edit handle and can be
Corner boards and quoins can be edited using moved from one eligible location at a
their edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons, wall corner to another.
and their specification dialogs.
In 3D views, corner boards and quoins
can be moved, lengthened, and shorted
much the other line-based objects are.
232
Millwork
See Editing Line Based Objects on Using the Edit Buttons

page 68.
A selected corner board or quoin can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar
on page 24.
Millwork
A selection of various types of millwork notably, newels and balusters - can be
including columns, corbels and finials is assigned to objects such as railings, stairs
available in the Library Browser. See The and ramps. See Placing Library Objects on
Library Browser on page 306. page 318.
Most millwork items can be placed in a plan
as free-standing objects. Some items -
233
234
Chapter 18:
Cabinets
With Home Designer Suites cabinet tools Chapter Contents

you can create base, wall, and full height Cabinet Defaults
cabinets as well as soffits, shelves and The Cabinet Tools
partitions. These objects are very versatile, Cabinet Fillers
allowing for a wide range of customization. Placing Cabinets
A selection of cabinet door and drawer styles Displaying Cabinets
are available in the Library Browser. Editing Cabinets
Editing Cabinet Styles
Home Designer Suite also has many Special Cabinets
customized cabinet symbols and cabinet Cabinet Specification Dialog
groups available in the library. Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
Cabinet Defaults
Access default settings for each these settings, see Cabinet Specification
cabinet tool by selecting Edit> Dialog on page 244, Shelf/Partition
Default Settings, then clicking the + beside Specification Dialog on page 249 and
Cabinets. Select a subheading and click the Soffit Specification Dialog on page 294.
Edit button to open the defaults dialog
associated with your selection:
Each type of cabinet object has default
definitions for size, style, materials and
more. In fact, the default dialog for each
cabinet type is similar to its corresponding
specification dialog. For descriptions of
235
General Cabinet Defaults

The General Cabinet Defaults dialog can be Specify the Minimum Cabinet Width. The
accessed only from the Default Settings minimum allowable width is 1/16 of an inch
dialog. (10 mm).
Specify how Cabinet Resizing takes place
when the edit handles are used.
Select Use Grid Snaps to resize cabinets
using Snap Grid increments. See Grid
Snaps on page 59.
Select Use Resize Increment to resize
cabinets using the increment specified
here.
Set the Resize Increment at which cabi-
nets resize. The minimum allowable
increment is 1/16 of an inch (10 mm).
The Cabinet Tools

Select Build> Cabinet to access the cabinets can be placed directly under wall
Cabinet Tools. cabinets and generate a countertop and toe
kick by default.
Cabinets are easily created with a single click
in any view. See Click-to-Create on page
60. Wall Cabinets
Typically, groups of cabinet objects are To place a wall cabinet, select Build>
positioned closely together and arranged to Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click in
form work spaces, and there are some special any view. Wall cabinets can be placed
behaviors and techniques to be aware of. See directly over base cabinets.
Placing Cabinets on page 238.
Full Height Cabinets
Once created, cabinets, soffits, shelves,
partitions and fillers can be selected and To place a full height cabinet, select
edited much like other box-based objects. Build> Cabinet> Full Height and
See Editing Box-Based Objects on page click in any view. Full height cabinets
78. generate a toe kick by default and cannot be
placed on top of other cabinets.
Base Cabinets
Select Build> Cabinet> Base
Cabinet and click in any view. Base
236
The Cabinet Tools
Soffits Cabinets Library

Soffits typically fill the space between In the Library Browser, browse to
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can Home Designer Suite Core Catalogs>
also be used to create any object that can be Architectural> Cabinets to access a selection
modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit, select of specialty cabinets. Select the library object
Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in any you want, then click in any view to place it in
view. the plan. Once placed, library cabinets can be
edited. See The Library on page 305.
Soffits can display in both floor plan and 3D
views. They can be assigned materials that
are calculated in the Materials List; by Cabinet Doors, Drawers,
default, they use the material assigned to & Panels Library
interior walls in the Material Defaults dialog. A selection of special cabinet doors,
Like cabinets, soffits can have molding drawers and panels is available in
profiles applied to them. Home Designer Suite Core Catalogs>
For more information about using soffits for Architectural. Select an item, then click on a
a variety of purposes, see Other Objects on cabinet in your plan to place the door or
page 291. drawer onto that cabinet. Doors, drawers and
panels can be assigned to a cabinet in its
Shelves specification dialog, as well. Cabinet doors,
drawers and panels can also be placed as
Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and stand-alone fixtures.
click in any view to create a shelf.
Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on Built-In Appliances
each wall, then moving or stretching them A variety of fixtures and appliances such as
until they touch. sinks, cooktops, and dishwashers can be
Once created, shelves can be selected and placed into cabinets. See Inserted Objects
edited. See Shelf/Partition Specification on page 319.
Dialog on page 249.
Place range tops and sinks into cabi-
Partitions nets early, so that any resizing can be
done before too many cabinets are placed.
Select Build> Cabinet> Partition
button and click in any view to create To install an appliance into a cabinet, select
a vertical partition. the appliance for placement in the selection
Like shelves, partitions can be selected and pane of the Library Browser and click on a
edited after they are placed. cabinet. There must be enough space in the
cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
Partitions can be used with shelves to create selected appliance.
complex storage systems.
237
Fixtures can be added to both the top and

front of the same cabinet. The fixture on top In the real world, some appliances can
can be selected by clicking the cabinet and share a cabinet, while others cannot. It
pressing the Tab key or clicking the Select is up to you to determine which appliances
can be effectively and safely combined.
Next Object edit button. The fixture on
the face can be deleted on the Front tab of the Electrical Switches & Outlets
Cabinet Specification dialog.
Electrical switches and outlets placed within
the backsplash area of a base cabinet will
display in front of the backsplash in 3D
views when the Electrical layer is turned.
See The Electrical Tools on page 222.
Cabinet Fillers
By default, Home Designer Suite models a cabinets from the one it meets so that
continuous countertop and generates fillers drawers and doors have room to operate.
automatically when cabinets of the same
height are either touching or placed with 3
(30 mm) of one another.
If two cabinets meeting at a corner are
separated from each other by 3(30 mm) or
less, the program will automatically generate
a filler in the angle between them. A filler is
used to separate the front of one of these Two base cabinets and the filler between them
Placing Cabinets
Cabinets are easily created with a single click are placed a set distance above the floor. See
in any view. See Click-to-Create on page Cabinet Defaults on page 235.
60.
If the ceiling height of the room does not
When used near a wall corner, the Cabinet accomodate the height of a cabinet, its Floor
Tools will produce corner cabinets and to Bottom value will be retained and its
soffits. See Corner Cabinets on page 242. Height will be reduced so that it fits under
the ceiling. When this happens, some front
When created, cabinets are positioned
items may be removed from the cabinet if
relative to the floor of the room in which they
there is not enough room for them. See
are placed. Base and full height cabinets
Front Tab on page 246.
typically rest on the floor while wall cabinets
238
Placing Cabinets
Because cabinets are typically organized into using dimensions. See Moving Objects
groups with shared attributes, they have Using Dimensions on page 376.
some special behaviors.
Cabinet Merging
Cabinet Snapping and Aligning
When cabinets of the same height and type
Cabinets have several special snapping and are placed side-by-side within 3 (30 mm) of
aligning behaviors which help you create one another they will automatically merge,
precisly aligned cabinets quickly and easily. making any shared components such as the
When Base and/or Full Height cabinets toe kick, countertop, backsplash and
are within 3 of one anothers sides, they moldings continuous. Any gap between
will snap together. Wall cabinets snap in a merged cabinets will be automatically filled.
similar manner, but only with other Wall The exposed ends of merged cabinets have
cabinets. side counter overhangs.
When Base and/or Full Height cabinets Cabinets placed at different angles will also
are within 3 of one anothers sides and merge if they face toward one another and
their front or back surfaces are within 3 meet at a front corner. Cabinets that meet at a
of aligning, they will become aligned. back corner will also merge provided that
Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner they face away from one another at an angle
with other Wall cabinets as well as Full no greater than 87. In either case, a filler is
Height cabinets. created in the angle between the two.
When a Base and/or Full Height cabinet
If the side of a cabinet is placed within 3 (30
is placed against the back of another Base
mm) of a wall, the countertop will extend to
or Full Height cabinet, its back surface
the wall and a filler will be created.
will automatically face the other cabinets
back. Wall cabinets snap in a similar
manner with other Wall as well as Full Base and Wall Cabinets
Height cabinets. Base and wall cabinets have different default
When a cabinet is placed against a wall, heights, so they can be placed directly above
its back and/or side will snap to the wall or below one another without interference.
and, if the wall is moved, the cabinet will You can use Object Snaps to center a wall
move with it. cabinets back center point above that of a
base cabinet, or vice versa. See Click-to-
When cabinets are snapped to a wall or to Create on page 60.
other cabinets, only exposed end cabinets
have side counter overhangs.
Minimum Cabinet Size
Cabinet snapping and aligning occurs even
If you try to place a cabinet into a space that
when when Object Snaps are turned off;
is too narrow for its default size, the program
however, you can override this behavior by
will place a smaller cabinet with a width that
moving a cabinet into the desired position
is a multiple of the default Resize
239
Increment. For example, if you try to place a If you try to place a cabinet into a space
24 wide cabinet in a 20 wide space and narrower than the default Minimum
your Resize Increment is 3, the program Cabinet Width, a cabinet will not be placed.
places an 18 cabinet. See General Cabinet If, for example, you have a space that is 8
Defaults on page 236. and your Minimum Cabinet Width is 9, no
cabinet is placed.
Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet By default, cabinet module lines do not
object types, labels, module lines, display when cabinet modules are merged.
door opening indicators and more is To show lines between individual cabinets in
controlled in the Display Options dialog. floor plan view, set the Cabinets, Module
See Displaying Objects on page 54. Lines layer to display. You can specify
whether module lines are full or partial.
Cabinets are drawn so that wall cabinets,
soffits and shelves are always in front of base You can also display cabinet front indicator
and full height cabinets and partitions. arrows in floor plan view by turning on the
Cabinets, Front Indicators layer.
Countertops display if the Cabinets,
Countertops layer is turned on.
Editing Cabinets
Cabinets and cabinet fillers can be selected in the center, the Rotate handle, and a Resize
2D and 3D views and edited using the edit handle on each edge and at each corner.
handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialog. See Cabinet
Using the Mouse

Cabinets can be edited like other box-based
objects. See Editing Box-Based Objects on
page 78. Depending on the view, the edit
handles a cabinet displays when selected
will vary.
When a cabinet is selected on a side in a
When a cabinet is selected in floor plan view cross section/elevation or 3D view, it has five
or on its top surface in a 3D view, ten edit edit handles: the Move handle and a Resize
handles display. They are the Move handle at handle on each edge. In 3D views, cabinets
240
can be selected on any surface: front, side, Moving Walls with

back or top. Cabinets Attached
In the Specification Dialog When a cabinet is placed or moved against a
wall, it will snap to the wall and become
A selected cabinet can be customized attached to it. When a wall is moved, all
in a variety of ways in its specification attached cabinets move with it.
dialog. See Cabinet Specification Dialog
on page 244. Moving a wall to an unattached cabinet will
not attach the cabinet to it: the cabinet must
be moved to the wall. A cabinet can also be
attached to a wall when Plan Check is
A cabinet or cabinets can be edited in a used. See Plan Check on page 405.
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 24.

A variety of settings allow you customize the Cabinet Hardware
appearance of your cabinets to create styles
ranging from traditional to contemporary. Cabinet handles, pulls, and hinges can be
assigned in the Cabinet Specification
If the desired style is known before cabinets dialog. See Door/Drawer Tab on page 248.
are placed, you can save time by specifing
that style in the Cabinet Defaults dialogs In 3D views, pulls and handles can also be
before you start drawing. See Cabinet applied directly from the Library Browser.
Defaults on page 235. Select a hardware item, then click on the
cabinet face item to apply it to that face item.
Doors, Drawers & Panels
Countertops & Backsplashes
Cabinet doors, drawers, and panels can be
applied in either of two ways: Countertop thickness, overhang, and material
for a selected base cabinet can be specified in
In the Cabinet Specification dialog. See the Base Cabinet Specification dialog. See
Door/Drawer Tab on page 248. General Tab on page 244.
Directly from the Library Browser.
Backsplashes can also be applied to base
Select a style in the library, then click on a cabinets, also on the General tab of their
cabinet to apply the selected style to that specification dialog.
cabinet. In 3D views, click on a face item to
apply the selected object to that item. See
Placing Library Objects on page 318.
241
Special Cabinets
There are a number of special cabinet shapes cabinets Width must be greater than its
that can be specified. Certain requirements Depth.
must be met before some special cabinet The Left and the Right Side Widths can
shapes can be specified. If the requirements be set independently for corner cabinets.
are not met, a warning message will explain
what is needed. See Cabinet Specification
Dialog on page 244.
Standard Cabinets
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
and click in floor plan view to place a
standard, rectangular base cabinet. Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
You can specify a Diagonal Door on cor-

ner cabinets to create an angled corner
cabinet. See Front Tab on page 246.
Standard (default) cabinet
Corner Cabinets
To create a corner cabinet, click as close to Corner cabinet with diagonal door
an inside wall corner as possible in using
End Cabinets
either the Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinet
Open a cabinet for specification and select
, or Full Height cabinet tool. A Left or Right End Cabinet from the Special
corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when drop-down list to create an end cabinet.
it is moved, edited or copied.
Turn an existing cabinet into a corner
cabinet by selecting Corner Cabinet from the
Special drop-down list in its specification
dialog. See General Tab on page 244.
Before a corner cabinet can be specified
in the Cabinet Specification dialog, the
Left End Cabinet
242
Special Cabinets
End Cabinets have an angled front and Kitchen Islands

side.
To create a kitchen island, simply place
The cabinet width must be no greater several cabinets back-to-back and/or side-to-
than its depth for an end cabinet to be side. Match the widths so that each cabinet
specified. back or side meets the back or side of only
one other cabinet. If this is not done, the lines
Radius End Cabinets separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed.
Open a cabinet for specification and select Two cabinets cannot merge with the same
Right or Left Radius End from the Special side of another cabinet. The picture shows
drop-down list to create a radius end cabinet. two instances when cabinets are placed back-
to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces
are shown.
Radius End cabinets have a 90 arch
As you face the cabinet, a right radius end Correct - Incorrect -

curves to the right, and a left radius end Widths of front and Solid line here is not
curves to the left. back cabinets match suppressed.
Peninsula Radius Cabinets Blind Cabinets

Open a cabinet for specification and select Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,
Pen. Radius from the Special drop-down list one is partially hidden by the other. This
to create peninsula radius cabinet. partially hidden cabinet is called a blind
cabinet. Home Designer Suite will resize and
offset the front items of the partially hidden
cabinet so that they are not located in the
hidden portion of the cabinet face.
Peninsula Radius Cabinet
243
Cabinet Specification Dialog

Select a cabinet and click the Open The options in the Cabinet Specification
Object edit button to open the dialogs are similar to the corresponding
Cabinet Specification dialog. Cabinet Defaults dialog. See Cabinet
General Tab
1
2
3 5
1 A number of Special cabinet types are floor can be specified here. Fractional values
available in the drop-down list. Certain are supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm).
requirements must be met before some Specify the Height (Including Counter)
special cabinet shapes can be specified. See of the cabinet box, as measured from bot-
Special Cabinets on page 242. tom to top. For base cabinets, this value
includes the countertop thickness, but not
2 Size/Position - The selected cabinets the height of the backsplash.
dimensions and position relative to the
244
backsplash only displays when the cabinet is

Note: Height refers to the height of the entire against a wall. Only available for base and
cabinet, including countertop and toe kick. If wall cabinets.
you change the Countertop Thickness or Toe
Kick Height, the cabinets total height is not Specify the backsplash Height and
altered. Instead, the cabinet face height and Thickness. Height is only available for
the heights of face items change in response. base cabinets - not wall cabinets.
Check Side to add the same height back-
Specify the Width of the cabinet box, as splash on the side of the cabinet if it is
measured across the front of the cabinet against a wall or a taller cabinet.
box from left to right. This does not
include the countertop overhang. Check Always Present to display the
backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a
Specify the Depth of the cabinet box, as backsplash is present only when the cabi-
measured from front to back. It does not net is against a wall.
include the thickness of overlay doors or
the countertop overhang. The backsplash for a base cabinet is
measured from the countertop up.
For corner cabinets, the Width and
Depth fields become Right Side Width
5 The preview of the cabinet updates as
and Left Side Width. the cabinet changes.
Specify the Floor to Bottom distance. The Cabinet Label displays below the
For base and full height cabinets, this is preview diagram.
usually 0.
3 Specify the dimensions and style of the

Countertop here. Only available for
base cabinets.
Specify the countertop Thickness.
Changing this value does not alter the
cabinet height, but it does affect the
height of face items. See Front Tab on
page 246.
Specify the countertop Overhang. The
Overhang is used for any side of a cabinet
not against a wall or another cabinet.
Check Flat Sides to eliminate the counter
overhang on the cabinets exposed ends.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the over-
hang on cabinets with an exposed back.
4 The dimensions and style of the

Backsplash are specified here. The
245
Front Tab
1
2
1 Click on a face item in the preview False Drawers assume the appearance of
diagram to select it. The selected item the drawer style and hardware assigned to
is highlighted, and the Face Items settings the cabinet.
below become active, allowing you to edit Door Panels assume the appearance of
the selected item. the cabinets door style but not the door
hardware.
2 Define the Face Items on the front of
the selected cabinet. For best results, Appliances cannot be added from the
edit face items starting at the top of the Item Type list, but are included once
cabinet and work down. they have been added from the library.
Click the Item Type drop-down list to apply See Built-In Appliances on page 237.
a type to the selected Face Item, such a door, The backsplash can be selected but its
drawers or panel. type cannot be changed.
Cabinet fronts may be composed of any Item Height - Define a value for the selected
combination of face items, but there is a item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights
limit to the number of items that can rea- are supported to 1/16th of an inch (1 mm).
sonably fit on a given cabinets front.
When the height of a cabinet is changed,
Auto Right and Auto Left Doors become or the height of a face item is changed,
double doors automatically when the cab- the height of the lowest face item is
inet width is greater than 24 (600 mm). altered to make up the difference.
Left, Right and Double Doors are as
specified regardless of the cabinet width.
246
If you modify the lowest item, the item Click Delete to remove the currently selected
directly above is adjusted. Set the coun- item.
tertop height and the toe kick height first, When a face item is deleted, the height of
and then work from the top to the bottom the lowest item is usually increased to
when adjusting face items. make up the difference.
If the height of an appliance has been When an Auto Left, Auto Right, Left,
altered, entering d restores its default Right, or Double Door is deleted, it is
height. replaced by an Opening.
Click Move Up to move the currently
Note: The program makes sure that the
heights of the front items equal the total cabi- selected item up one position, switching
net face height. When necessary, a blank places with the item directly above.
area is inserted at the bottom or the lowest
Click Move Down to move the currently
face item is deleted when there is not enough
room. This means you should start editing selected item down one position, switching
face items at the top and work down. places with the item directly below.
Check Include Shelves to include shelves in Note: The program tries to maintain a single
the selected Door or Opening face item. separation between all face items. When you
add or delete a face item, separations are
Click Add New to add a new face item usually added or deleted with them.
directly below the currently selected item.
When you click Add New, the New 3 Options -
Cabinet Face Item dialog displays.
Define the Item Type, Item Height and Uncheck Diagonal Door to create double
click OK. doors at right angles instead of a single
diagonal door. This option is only avail-
able for Corner Cabinets and is checked
by default in the Cabinet Defaults dia-
log.
Select Reverse Appliance to reverse the
fixture from left to right: for example, to
change a left hand door on a built-in
If you click Add New with no face item refrigerator to a right hand door.This
selected, the program adds the new item option is only available for cabinets with
at the bottom of the cabinet face. an inserted appliance.
When a face item is added to the cabinet

front, the program attempts to reduce the
height of the lowest item on the cabinet
front to make room for the new item.
247
Door/Drawer Tab
The settings on the Door/Drawer tab allow
you to control the appearance of the selected
cabinets doors and hardware.
1 Specify the style and hardware for any the list. See Select Library Object Dia-
Doors applied to selected cabinet(s). log on page 319.
Select a door Style from the drop-down list. Specify the characteristics of the cabinets
See Doors, Drawers & Panels on page 241. door Handles.
Select Plain Doors to apply a flat door Select a door handle Style from the drop-
front or Framed Doors to apply a door down list or choose one from the library.
with a frame and flat panel front. Specify the position of the handle In
Select Library or click the Library From Edge,as measured from the edge
button to select a cabinet door from the of the door opposite the hinges.
library. If a library door has been previ- Specify the height of the handle Down
ously selected, its name will display in From Top, as measured from the top
248
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
edge of the door. For wall cabinets, this Select a from the drop-down list or choose
value is measured Up From Bottom. one from the library. For best results, Framed
drawers should be at least 6 (150 mm) high.
Specify the characteristics of the cabinet
door Hinges. Select a drawer from the drop-down list or
Select a door hinge Style from the drop- choose one from the library.
down list or choose one from the library. The In From Drawer Edge setting cre-
Specify the location of the hinges Up/ ates two handles the specified distance
Down From Edge, as measured from the from the left and right drawer edges. A
door edge. If the cabinet door is more value of 0 creates a single handle cen-
than 35 1/4 (880 mm) high, three hinges tered horizontally on the drawer.
will be created instead of two. Specify the location of the handle Down
From Top. A value of 0 centers the han-
Glass Doors is available for cabinets with
dle vertically on the drawer.
Plain or Framed doors. Framed door panels
are created using a glass material. The entire
door is glass on Plain doors. Materials Tab
2 Specify the style and hardware for any appearance of the selected cabinet in 3D
Drawers applied to the cabinet(s).
views. For information about these settings,
see Materials Tab on page 328.
Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the The options in these specification dialogs are
Open Object edit button to open the similar to the corresponding defaults dialogs.
Shelf Specification or Partition See Cabinet Defaults on page 235.
249
General Tab
Specify the Height, Width, Depth, and the Materials Tab

distance from the Floor to Bottom of the
shelf or partition. The settings on the Materials tab affect the
appearance of the selected object in 3D
Uncheck Auto Adjust Height if you do not views. For information about these settings,
want the shelf or partition to follow the see Materials Tab on page 328.
terrain.
250
Chapter 19:
Terrain
Home Designer Suite allows you to model Chapter Contents

the terrain around a house. Begin by Terrain Perimeter
specifying elevation data that creates the Elevation Data Tools
surface contours, and then add surface Terrain Modifier Tools
features such as planting areas, water Terrain Feature Tools
features and plants. Garden Bed Tools
You can import terrain data from a variety of Water Feature Tools
sources and use this data to produce your 3D Stepping Stone Tools
model. Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
Terrain Objects in the Library
Roads and sidewalks are among the objects Displaying Terrain
that can be placed in your terrain and are Editing Terrain Objects
discussed in Roads, Driveways & Terrain Object Specification Dialogs
Sidewalks on page 285. Importing Elevation Data
Plant Tools
Plant Image Specification Dialog
Plant Chooser Dialog
Plant Schedules
Hardiness Zones
Terrain Perimeter
The Terrain Perimeter is a closed contour lines that generate in floor plan view.
polyline defining the boundary of the A Terrain Perimeter should be present in
terrain that generates in 3D views and of the your plan already, but if one is not, select
251
Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter to not create elevation data within the terrain
create one. perimeter, the terrain remains flat at an
elevation of 0' - 0". See Elevation Data
Tools on page 253 and Terrain Modifier
Tools on page 256.
Terrain Height vs Floor Height

Home Designer Suite always defines the
default height of Floor 1 at 0-0. This height
Terrain Perimeter value is the constant by which the heights of
architectural objects and structural elements
in the program, including walls, floors, and
ceilings, are measured.
The default height of Floor 1 is not, however,
If you create a terrain perimeter in floor plan
the absolute by which terrain elevation is
view but do not see it, select Window> Fill
measured. Instead, elevation data is
Window . See Zoom Tools on page measured relative to sea level. This means
336. that if you want to, you can use real-world
Once created, the terrain perimeter can be elevation data to generate a 3D terrain model
resized and edited like other polyline-based without also having to measure floor and
objects. See Editing Closed-Polyline Based ceiling heights from sea level. See
Objects on page 76. Importing Elevation Data on page 273.
When a terrain perimeter is first created, it is The program automatically positions Floor 1
completely flat and is placed at a height of a set distance above the terrain. To do this, it
0-0, or sea level. first finds the center point of the building
footprint. Then, it determines the elevation of
the terrain at that point. Finally, it adds 6
(150 mm) plus the thickness of the floor
platform to this value. The resulting value,
referred to as the Building Pad Elevation, is
how far the default height of Floor 1 is above
sea level in the current plan. See
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a 3D Foundations and the Terrain on page 184.
view
In a plan with a foundation present, the
The terrain perimeter by itself does not have Elevation distance will equal the exact
elevation data associated with it. You can use terrain elevation at the building footprint
the Elevation Data and Terrain center point, plus 6 (150 mm), plus the
thickness of the floor platform.
Modifier tools to create terrain that
slopes in a wide variety of ways. If you do
252
Elevation Data Tools
In a plan with no elevation data, the ter-

rain is assumed to be at sea level and this Note: When no foundation has been built, the
Elevation distance is 6 (150 mm) plus distance from Floor 1 to the terrain is 12 (320
the thickness of the floor platform when a mm).
foundation is present.
Build Terrain
In a plan with flat terrain at 100 (30 m)
and a foundation present, the Elevation Select Terrain> Build Terrain to
distance is 100 6 (30.468 m) plus the generate the terrain surface based on
thickness of the floor platform. the provided elevation data. Build Terrain
also updates the Building Pad Elevation
Once terrain has been built, the Elevation value in the Terrain Specification dialog.
distance is stated in the Terrain See Building the Terrain on page 262.
Specification dialog. You can specify a
custom Elevation value to produce a daylight The Terrain Perimeter has a variety of
or walkout basement. See General Tab on editable properties that affect the appearance
page 264. of the terrain in 2D and 3D views. See
Terrain Specification Dialog on page 263.

Select Terrain> Elevation Data to terrain data object is placed, the terrain will
add elevation information to your be flat regardless of the objects specified
terrain. elevation.
When terrain is generated, this data is used to To avoid unexpected results, do not
calculate the surface of your site and is draw Elevation Data objects with differ-
represented by contour lines in floor plan ent elevation information at the same loca-
view and a curved surface in 3D. See tion.
Displaying Terrain on page 262.
Elevation data can be specified using the Elevation Points
Elevation Point , Elevation Line , An Elevation Point contains the
absolute elevation data for one point
and Flat Region tools. in the terrain model. Typically, Elevation
Elevation data can also be imported. See Points are imported rather than placed
Importing Elevation Data on page 273. manually.
The elevation of each Elevation Line, Spline Home Designer Suite requires many points
and Region is specified relative to sea level. to make an accurate approximation of your
site. Even small sites may require over a
In order to create rising and/or falling terrain, hundred points to generate an accurate model
multiple terrain data objects with different of the terrain if it is sloped. For the sake of
elevation values must be used. If only one
253
illustration, the following example shows

only a few elevation points.
To place an elevation point
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-

vation Point and click in floor plan
view at the point where you would like
to place elevation data.
2. The Elevation Point Specification dia-
log opens. Enter an elevation value and
click OK. See Elevation Point Specifi- Contour lines after terrain generation
cation Dialog on page 265.
3. Click somewhere else in floor plan view
and the Elevation Point Specification Elevation Points are most effective
dialog opens again with the last eleva- when they are imported. When adding
elevation data manually, use Elevation Lines
tion value entered.
instead. See Importing Elevation Data on
page 273.
Elevation Lines
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points along a
line at a constant elevation. Elevation lines
can be connected to create a polyline with
many straight sections. For the sake of
illustration, the images in the following
example show single-section elevation lines.
Elevation Points before terrain generation
To draw an elevation line
4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 to place addi- 1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-
tional elevation points with varied eleva- vation Line , then click and drag a
tion values as needed. line inside the Terrain Perimeter in floor
5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See plan view.
Building the Terrain on page 262. 2. Click on the elevation line to select it,
then click the Open Object edit but-
ton.
3. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Line
254
Specification dialog, specify the desired

elevation and click OK. See Elevation
Line/Region Specification Dialog on
page 266.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to draw additional
elevation lines as needed.
Full Overview after terrain generation
120"
After it is drawn, an Elevation Line can be
edited much the way other line-based objects
can. See Editing Line Based Objects on
page 68.
Flat Regions
0"
A Flat Region contains absolute
elevation data for an enclosed region
Elevation Lines before terrain generation and is ideal for creating a flat surface in your
terrain.
5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See
To create an elevation region
Building the Terrain on page 262.
1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Flat
Region .
2. There are two ways to add a Terrain
Modifier to your plan:
Click once to place an 8 (0.6 m)
square feature at that location.
Click and drag from end to end to draw
a feature sized as needed. See Draw
Polyline on page 392.
3. Click on the region to select it, then click
Contour lines after terrain generation the Open Object edit button.
4. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Flat Region Specification
dialog, specify the desired elevation and
click OK. See Elevation Line/Region
255
240"
120"
Full Overview after terrain generation

0"
An Flat Region can also be created by
drawing a closed polyline using Elevation
Elevation lines create a terrain grade; an Lines .
elevation region creates a building pad.
After it is drawn, a Flat Region can be
reshaped much the way other closed
polyline-based objects can. See Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects on page 76.
Contour lines after terrain generation
Terrain Modifier Tools

Select Terrain> Modifier to access perimeter. The rest of the terrain is
tools that allow you to modify the unaffected.
existing elevation data by drawing a closed
polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain Raised and Lowered Regions
surface generated from the Elevation Data
provided in your plan. The Raised Region tool creates a
raised area with a top surface that
The elevation data associated with a Terrain is flattened like a plateau but follows the
Modifier only affects the terrain within its surface of the terrain. The Lowered Region
256
Terrain Feature Tools
tool creates a depression with a bottom that There are two ways to add a Terrain Modifier
follows the terrain and is flattened. to your plan:
Click once to place a modifier with end-
points that form a 10 (4 m) square at that
location.
Click and drag from end to end to draw a
Raised
Region feature sized as needed. See Draw Poly-
Lowered
Region line on page 392.
Terrain Modifiers can only be drawn when a
Hills and Valleys Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
The Hill and Valley tools create perimeter. See Displaying Terrain on page
raised and lowered areas in the 262.
terrain that come to a point rather than
flattening at their highest or lowest Once created, Terrain Modifiers can be
elevations. selected and edited in a variety of ways. See
Editing Spline Based Objects on page 80.
Hill
Valley
Terrain Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Feature to access In fact, Driveways , Garden Beds ,
tools for drawing bounded areas that
follow the contours of the terrain rather than Water Features and Stepping
modifying them. Stones are special Terrain Features with
Terrain Features are useful for creating material and height attributes already applied
landscaping features because they have to them, saving you time when drawing these
specified heights and materials. You can, for objects.
example, create paths and planting beds with Terrain Features can only be drawn when a
gravel or mulch materials that stand out in a Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only
grassy Terrain Perimeter. See Adding display in 3D when they are drawn within the
Terrain Features on page 93 of the Users perimeter. See Displaying Terrain on page
Guide. 262.
257
Terrain Features can be created in either of Round Feature

two ways:
The Round Feature tool can be used
Click once to place a feature with end- to create features with rounded edges
points that form a 10 (4 m) square at that and smoothly curved corners.
location.
Round Features can be edited like other
closed spline-based objects. See Editing
feature sized as needed. See Draw Poly-
Spline Based Objects on page 80.
line on page 392.
Once created, Terrain Features can be edited Kidney Shaped Features
into nearly any shape you require. See Edit-
ing Closed-Polyline Based Objects on page The Kidney Shaped Feature tool
76 and Editing Spline Based Objects on allows you to quickly create features
page 80. with curved edges, smooth corners and a
right angle bend in its shape.
Terrain Features can be drawn in 2D Kidney Shaped Features can be edited like
and 3D views. other closed spline-based objects. See Edit-
ing Spline Based Objects on page 80.
Rectangular Features
For information about adding height and
The Rectangular Feature tool can be
material information to Terrain Features, see
used to create straight-sided features
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog on
that can be edited into a wide variety of
page 268.
shapes.
Rectangular Features can also be edited like Terrain Holes
other closed polyline-based objects. See
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects on A Terrain Hole is a region that cuts a
page 76. hole in the terrain.
Terrain Holes are useful for manually

clipping the terrain around a foundation that
does not match the footprint of the first floor.
Garden Bed Tools

Select Terrain> Garden Bed to planting beds. See Terrain Feature Tools
access tools that can be used to place on page 257.
garden bed features in your terrain.
In addition, you can choose to distribute
Garden Beds are basically Terrain Features copies of a plant image within a Garden Bed.
with material and height attributes typical of See Distributed Plant Tab on page 269.
258
Water Feature Tools
Polyline Garden Bed Kidney Shaped Garden Bed

This tool draws a garden bed with You can draw a kidney shaped garden
straight sides and four right angles. bed with this tool. See Kidney
See Rectangular Features on page 258. Shaped Features on page 258.
Once drawn, Garden Beds can be selected
Round Garden Bed and edited just like other Terrain Features.
Use this tool to draw garden beds with Specify the material and set the height of
rounded edges and smoothly curved Garden Beds in the Terrain Feature
corners. See Round Feature on page 258. Specification dialog. See Terrain Feature
Water Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Water Feature to Stream
access tools for drawing ponds and
streams in your terrain. Select the Stream tool, then click and
drag to draw a stream. Streams are
Ponds are basically Terrain Features with drawn and edited the same way that splines
material and height attributes typical of are. See Splines on page 393 and Editing
bodies of water. See Terrain Feature Tools Spline Based Objects on page 80.
on page 257.
Streams follow the contours of the terrain, so
Similarly, Streams are Terrain Curbs with a they may appear to flow uphill if they are not
water material. See Terrain Wall and Curb drawn correctly in the terrain. Try to draw
Tools on page 260. them so that they follow a downward course
for their entire length.
Round Pond
Once drawn, Water Features can be selected
Use this tool to draw a pond with and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
rounded edges. See Round Feature
Specify the material and set the height of
on page 258.
Water Features in their specification dialogs.
See Terrain Object Specification Dialogs
Kidney Shaped Pond on page 263.
This tool draws a kidney shaped pond.
See Kidney Shaped Features on
page 258.
259
Stepping Stone Tools

Select Terrain> Stepping Stone to Polyline Stepping Stone
place a walkway made of individual
stepping stones. The Polyline Stepping Stone tool
draws rectangular stepping stones. See
Stepping Stones are basically Terrain Rectangular Features on page 258.
Features with material and height attributes
typical of walking paths. See Terrain Round Stepping Stone
Feature Tools on page 257.
The Round Stepping Stone tool
There are two ways to draw Stepping Stones: draws stepping stones with rounded
Click once to place a stepping stone with edges. See Round Feature on page 258.
endpoints that form a 1 (300 mm) square
Once drawn, Stepping Stones can be selected
at that location.
and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
stepping stone sized as needed. See By default, Stepping Stones have a concrete
Draw Polyline on page 392. material; however, you can specify the
material and set the height of Stepping
Stones in the Terrain Feature Specification
dialog. See Terrain Feature Specification
Dialog on page 268.
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

Select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Terrain Walls
Curb to draw landscaping walls and
curbs that follow the contours of the terrain. Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to
draw a wall that sits on top of and
Straight and curved Terrain Walls and Curbs follows the terrain.
are drawn just as other walls are. See
Drawing Walls on page 102. Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw
a curved terrain wall. This wall is
Terrain Walls and Curbs are examples of drawn the same way as a CAD Spline. See
Terrain Paths. Other examples include Splines on page 393.
Sidewalks and Streams. See Terrain Path
Specification Dialog on page 272. Once drawn, a Terrain Wall can be like other
line-based objects. See Editing Line Based
Objects on page 68 and Editing Spline
Terrain walls are 5 (1500 mm) high and con-
crete by default, but you can specify the
260
material, height and more in the Terrain Path Terrain Curbs

Specification. See Terrain Path
Specification Dialog on page 272. Terrain Curbs are useful for creating curbs
around planting beds and along paths,
driveways and roads.
Retaining Walls
Use the Straight Terrain Curb tool
Use the Straight Retaining Wall tool
to draw a straight landscaping curb.
draws a straight wall that holds back
sloped terrain. Use the Spline Terrain Curb tool to
draw a curved landscaping curb. This
Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool
curb is drawn the same way as a CAD
to draw a curved retaining wall.
Spline. See Splines on page 393.
A Retaining Walls height is determined by
Once drawn, a Terrain Curb can be like other
the elevation of the terrain on each side. By
line-based objects. See Editing Line Based
default, the height of the wall matches the
Objects on page 68 and Editing Spline
terrain on the high side of the break and the
bottom matches the low side. If you insert a
Retaining Wall into flat terrain, it looks like a You can specify the height of straight and
concrete strip in 3D views. spline terrain curbs on the General tab of the
Terrain Path Specification. See Terrain
Once drawn, a Retaining Wall can be edited
Path Specification Dialog on page 272.
much like other walls. See Editing Walls
on page 106.
You can also add Fencing to your ter-
rain, complete with gates from the
Doors Library. See The Fencing Tools on
page 98.

The Library Browser contains a lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road
variety of objects that can be placed in markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself
a plans terrain, including plants, exterior and send them to the library as one unit. This
fixtures, accessories and roadway objects. library object can then be placed into any
See The Library Browser on page 306. plan. Once placed into a plan, each object is
independent and is no longer part of the
You can also create your own objects and
group. See Adding Library Content on
save them in the library. Select any
page 313.
combination of elevation points, elevation
261
Displaying Terrain
The display of terrain objects in 2D creates a terrain surface. The program
and 3D views is controlled in the interpolates the data to produce smooth
Display Options dialog. See Display contours.
A terrain perimeter with no additional
You can customize appearance of Terrain elevation data drawn within it generates
Features, Roads and other terrain objects in terrain that is flat at the elevation 0' - 0", or
floor plan view by changing their line and fill sea level.
styles. See Terrain Object Specification
The terrain is automatically built before a 3D
Dialogs on page 263.
view is generated. This process takes a
Plant images are represented in floor plan variable amount of time, depending on the
view by 2D CAD symbols. You can select a amount of elevation data and number of
plants symbol in the Plant Image terrain features in the plan. The Building
Specification dialog. See Image Tab on Terrain progress dialog displays as terrain is
page 279. generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating
the progress.
When elevation data has been drawn or
imported into a plan, contour lines will
display in floor plan view. See Elevation
Data Tools on page 253.
In 3D Views
In order for objects such as Terrain Features
and Roads to be visible in 3D views, the
Terrain Perimeter layer must also display. In
addition, only the portions of these objects
Terrain & 3D Drawing Time
that are drawn within the Terrain Perimeter
will be seen in 3D views. See Terrain Terrain is typically large with many surfaces,
Feature Tools on page 257. which often increases the drawing time of 3D
views. The time required is affected by the
A variety of tools are available to help you
amount of elevation data and number of
adjust the perspective of your 3D views. See
terrain features present.
Editing 3D Views on page 351.
Lights and symbols can be placed outdoors
Building the Terrain and included in 3D views when the terrain is
generated. These objects can also contribute
When terrain is generated, Home to the time needed to generate 3D views. See
Designer Suite gathers all elevation Rendering Tips on page 361.
data that has been added to the model and
262
Editing Terrain Objects
Editing Terrain Objects

Before a terrain object can be edited, it must Elevation Lines are edited like other line-
be selected. All terrain objects can be based objects. See Editing Line Based
selected in floor plan view. In addition, the Objects on page 68 and Editing Closed-
Terrain Perimeter and Terrain Features can Polyline Based Objects on page 76.
be selected in 3D views. See Selecting The shape of a Raised Region, Lowered
Objects on page 66. Region, Hill, and Valley can be edited
A selected terrain object can be edited using like a spline. See Editing Spline Based
its edit handles, edit tools and specification Objects on page 80.
dialog. See Specification Dialogs on page Terrain Features are edited like other
26. spline- and polyline-based objects. See
Any time elevation data is changed, the Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
terrain must be regenerated. This occurs on page 76 and Editing Spline Based
automatically when a 3D view is created. It Objects on page 80.
can also be done manually by selecting
Terrain> Build Terrain .
A selected terrain object can be edited in a
Using the Edit Handles variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. The edit tools available for a terrain
The shape of the Terrain Perimeter can be
object depends on the type of terrain object
edited like other polyline-based objects.
selected. See The Edit Toolbar on page 24.
See Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Objects on page 76.
Note: If you copy terrain objects from one
Elevation Points can be moved in floor plan to another, you cannot view the pasted
plan view using the Move edit handle. objects in 3D unless a Terrain Perimeter
exists.
Terrain Object Specification Dialogs

Just as there are a number of different number of different specification dialogs for
types of terrain objects, there are a them.
Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog The Terrain Specification dialog can be
controls how your terrain is modeled, accessed in any of two ways:
as well as its appearance.
263
Select the Terrain Perimeter and click the Double-click the Terrain Perimeter using
Open Object edit button. the Select Objects tool.
General Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Check Flatten Pad to flatten the area 4 Check Hide Terrain Intersected by
beneath your building. Building to cut out the portion of the
terrain that is intersected by the first floor
2 Check Auto Calculate Elevation to footprint. Checking this box prevents the
automatically calculate the building pad
generation of contour lines inside the house.
elevation value during terrain rebuild. Home
Designer Suite takes the center of the
building footprint and finds the terrain Polyline Tab
elevation at this point. This elevation is The Polyline tab indicates the polylines
added to 8, 12, or 18 inches to calculate the Length/Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
building pad elevation. 8 inches is used for a its Volume.
slab foundation, 18 is used if a foundation
floor is present, and 12 is used otherwise. The settings on the this tab are available for a
3 Building Pad Elevation - Enter the information about these settings, see
value of the elevation of the floor Polyline Tab on page 399.
height of the first floor in your plan. This
value does not change elevation data and Selected Line Tab
does not alter the contours. This option is
only available when Auto Calculate The Selected Line tab is available when the
Elevation is unchecked. selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
line as opposed to an arc. See Selected
For example, if a structure is placed in the Edge on page 66.
middle of a terrain sloping evenly from a
height of 100.00 to a height of 112.00, The settings on this tab are available for a
entering a value of 106.00 for the building variety of other objects in the program. For
pad elevation will display the structure at the information about these settings, see Line
correct height in 3D views. Tab on page 394.
264
Elevation Point Specification Dialog
Selected Arc Tab program. For information about these

settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
Fill Style Tab
opposed to a line. See Change Line/Arc on
page 90. The settings on the Fill Style tab affect the
appearance of the Terrain Perimeter in floor
information about these settings, see Arc
Tab on page 397.
Materials Tab
Line Style Tab The settings on the Materials tab let you
specify the terrain surface and terrain skirt
The settings on the Line Style tab are
materials used in 3D views. These materials
available for a variety of other objects in the
are not calculated in the Materials List. See
Elevation Point Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Point using the Select Objects tool.
Specification dialog, select an eleva-
tion point and click the Open Object edit Use the Elevation Point Specification
button, or double-click on an elevation point dialog to define the selected elevation point
and control its appearance in floor plan view.
When all changes are made, click OK to
store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.
265
1 Location - Specify the exact location of 3 Enter the Marker Radius in inches (or
the elevation point. millimeters).
Elevation - Enter the height of the eleva-
tion point in inches and/or feet (mm for Line Style Tab
metric). For example entering 56 (with The settings on the Line Style tab are
the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an available for a variety of other objects in the
elevation of 66 inches. program. For information about these
X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
the elevation point.
Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordinate of Text Style Tab
the elevation point. The settings on the Text Style tab control the
appearance of the selected Elevation Points
2 Text - Enter notes, such as elevation, in text. For more information, see Text Style
this box. This text displays beside the
elevation point in floor plan view. You can Tab on page 389.
also enter a pound (#) sign to display the
elevation value in floor plan view.
Elevation Line/Region Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line or polyline composed of elevation Lines, or an
Elevation Region Specification dia- Elevation Region and click the Open Object
log, select one or more Elevation Line, or a
266
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
edit button. You can also double-click an Elevation Region, its Area will be calculated.
Elevation Line using the Select Objects Elevation Lines do not have a thickness, so
tool. they have no Volume.
The Elevation Line Specification dialog is Selected Line Tab

used to define the selected Elevation Line
and controls its appearance in floor plan The Selected Line tab is available when the
view. selected object or segment is a line as
opposed to one that has been converted to an
The settings in this dialog are the same as arc. See Selected Edge on page 66.
those in the Elevation Region Specification
dialog. See Flat Regions on page 255. The settings on this tab are available for a
Elevation Tab information about these settings, see Line
Tab on page 394.
Selected Arc Tab

selected object or segment is an arc as
opposed to a line.
Elevation - Enter the elevation of the Line/ variety of other objects in the program. For
Spline in inches and/or feet (mm for metric). information about these settings, see Arc
For example entering 56 (with the Tab on page 397.
apostrophe as foot mark) results in an
elevation of 66 inches. Line Style Tab
Polyline Tab The settings on the Line Style tab are
The Polyline tab indicates the line or program. For information about these
polylines Length/Perimeter. If multiple settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
Elevation Line segments form a closed
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

The Hill/Valley Specification defines To open the Hill/Valley Specification dialog,
the selected Hill or Valley and select a Hill or Valley and click the Open
controls its appearance in floor plan view. Object edit button, or double-click the
region(s) using the Select Objects tool.
267
Hill / Valley Tab Hills and Valleys do not have a volume

measurement.
Line Style Tab

Enter a Height for the selected Hill or Valley. settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
This height is relative to the terrain surface
that is generated from the Elevation Data in Fill Style Tab
your plan. See Terrain Modifier Tools on The settings on the Fill Style tab affect the
page 256. appearance of the selected object in floor
Polyline Tab settings, see Fill Style Tab on page 400.
The Polyline tab indicates the polylines
Length/Perimeter and its enclosed Area.
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

To open the Raised/Lowered Region The Raised / Lowered Region
Specification dialog, select a raised Specification dialog is similar to the Hill /
or lowered region and click the Open Object Valley Specification dialog. See Hill /
edit button, or double-click the region(s) Valley Specification Dialog on page 267.
using the Select Objects tool.
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature The settings in this dialog control the
Specification dialog, select a Terrain appearance, size, and shape of the selected
Feature and click the Open Object edit Terrain Feature.
button or double-click the Terrain Feature
Most of the tabs in this dialog are similar to
using the Select Objects tool. those for a variety of other objects in the
program.
268
General Tab
1 Specify the Height and Thickness of 2 Clipping - Check Clip Overlapping

the terrain feature relative to the terrain Terrain Features to suppress the 3D
surface. display of any part of the selected Terrain
Specify the top Height of the feature Feature intersected by other Terrain Features
using a positive or negative number. with a lower Height value. Clipping is useful
for creating features that contain other
Specify the features Thickness. features such as planters or swimming pools.
If a features height above the terrain is
greater than its thickness, the program will
fill in the resulting gap.
Distributed Plant Tab

This tab is only available when the selected
terrain feature is a Garden Bed. See Garden
Bed Tools on page 258.
269
1 Current Object - Specify the object Check Show Objects to display the dis-
assigned to the selected region. tributed objects in floor plan view.
Click the Select button to choose an Check Show Region to display the edges
object from the library. See Select of the distribution region in floor plan
Library Object Dialog on page 319. view.
A preview of the Current Object along
with its name display to the left. 2 Object Spacing - Specify how the
objects in the region are spaced.
Click the Delete button to unassign the Specify the Distance between the objects
Current Object from the selected region. in the region, as measured from their cen-
Click the Edit button to open the Current ter points.
Objects specification dialog. Changes Select Standard Grid to position the
made here affect all objects generated objects in rows and columns based on the
within the region. See Specification Dia- standard X/Y grid in the program.
logs on page 26.
270
Select Alternate Grid to position the ever, this can change as the region is
objects in rows and columns based on the edited.
shape of the region.
Polyline Tab
3 Object Orientation - Specify how or if
the objects in the region are rotated. The Polyline tab indicates the polylines
These settings do not affect the region itself Length/Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
or its edges. the Volume of a closed polyline.
Specify the Angle that the distributed
objects should be placed at. Selected Line Tab
Select Absolute Angle to rotate the The Selected Line tab is available when the
objects to the specified Angle as mea- selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
sured from an imaginary horizontal line line as opposed to an arc. See Selected
drawn from the origin towards the right. Edge on page 66.
Select Relative Angle to rotate the The settings on this tab are available for a
objects relative to the angle of the variety of other objects in the program. For
regions first edge or, if that edge is information about these settings, see Line
curved, to the angle of its chord. The first Tab on page 394.
edge is typically located at the top of the
region when it is first created; however,
Selected Arc Tab
this can change as the region is edited.
Select Random Angle to rotate the The Selected Arc tab is available when the
objects in the region at a variety of ran- selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
dom angles. opposed to a line. See Change Line/Arc on
page 90.
4 Object Positioning - Specify the The settings on this tab are available for a
positioning of the distributed objects
relative to a point of origin within the region. variety of other objects in the program. For
Specify the X Offset, the horizontal dis- Tab on page 397.
tance in floor plan view from the regions
specified point of origin.
Line Style Tab
Specify the Y Offset, the vertical distance
in floor plan view from the regions speci- The settings on the Line Style tab are
fied point of origin. available for a variety of other objects in the
Select From Polyline Center to measure settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
the offset from the regions center point.
Select Polyline Start to measure the off- Fill Style Tab
set from the regions start point. This start
point is typically located at the top left of The settings on the Fill Style tab affect the
the region when it is first created; how- appearance of the selected object in floor
271
plan view. For information about these Materials Tab

views. See Materials Tab on page 328.
Garden Bed Specification Dialog

To open the Garden Bed Because a Garden Bed is a type of terrain
Specification dialog, select a Garden feature, the settings in this dialog are
Bed and click the Open Object edit button essentially the same as those in the Terrain
or double-click the Garden Bed using the Feature Specification dialog. See Terrain
Select Objects tool. Feature Specification Dialog on page 268.
Terrain Path Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Path Enter the Width of the object and the
Specification dialog, select a Height. If you enter a negative number for
Sidewalk, Stream, Terrain Wall or Terrain the height, the object sinks into the terrain.
Curb and click the Open Object edit button
or double-click the terrain path using the Polyline Tab
Select Objects tool. The Polyline tab indicates the Terrain Path
Most of the tabs in this dialog are similar to polylines Length/Perimeter, its enclosed
those for a variety of other objects in the Area, and the Volume of a closed polyline.
program.
Selected Line Tab
General Tab The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
line as opposed to an arc. See Selected
Edge on page 66.
information about these settings, see Line
Tab on page 394.
272
Importing Elevation Data
Selected Arc Tab program. For information about these

settings, see Line Style Tab on page 395.
Fill Style Tab
opposed to a line. See Break Line on page
90. The settings on the Fill Style tab affect the
appearance of the selected object in floor
Tab on page 397.
Materials Tab
Line Style Tab The settings on the Materials tab affect the
views. See Materials Tab on page 328.
Importing Elevation Data

Elevation data can be added to a plan using defines the elevation for that point. Each
the tools and techniques described in this elevation point must be on a separate line in
chapter or it can be imported from a file. the text file.
Home Designer Suite can import elevation Importable text files can come from
data saved in GPS Exchange (.gpx) and a surveyors, other software programs, or you
variety of text file formats (.txt, .csv, .prn, can create your own using a GPS system.
.xyz, .auf and .nez). If your terrain data is not
Elevation data saved in text files can be
saved in one of these file formats, there are
imported using the Import Terrain Wizard.
third party programs available that can
convert to these formats.
GPS Exchange Files
Text Files Elevation data can also be imported from
.gpx files created using a GPS system using
Elevation data can be saved in text files as x,
the Import GPS Data Wizard. See Import
y, and z coordinates where x and y define the
GPS Data Wizard on page 275.
location of a point on a Cartesian grid, and z
Import Terrain Wizard

The Import Terrain Wizard allows Select File> Import> Terrain Data to
you to import elevation data saved in open the Import Terrain Wizard. Click Next.
text (.txt) file format into your model.
273
Select File
1 Select File to Import -Enter the name followed by the X coordinate, the Y
of a text file, or Browse to locate a file coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
on your computer.
#XYZ Description - Information in this
2 Select the Organization of the Data - format begins with a number that belongs to
You need to know how the data in your each data point followed by the X
text file is organized. Each data point con- coordinate, the Y coordinate, the Z
tains information about its X-axis (East to coordinate, and a description.
West location), Y-axis (North to South
YXZ - Information in this format begins with
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
the Y coordinate followed by the X
also contain a brief description.
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
Elevation information can come in one of six
#YXZ - Information in this format begins
different sequences, and is separated by
with a number that belongs to each data point
either a comma (comma delimited) or a
followed by the Y coordinate, the X
space (space delimited).
coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
XYZ - Information in this format begins with
#YXZ Description - Information in this
the X coordinate, followed by the Y
format begins with a number that belongs to
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
each data point followed by the Y
#XYZ - Information in this format begins coordinate, the X coordinate, the Z
with a number that belongs to each data point coordinate, and a description.
274
Import GPS Data Wizard
Scale Data
1 This describes the total number of data 2 Units - Select the units of measurement
points to be imported and the range of used in your data for each axis. Only
the coordinates of those points. linear units are available.

The Import GPS Data Wizard allows
you to import terrain data from .gpx Due to the lack of accuracy in some
file format. Select File> Import> GPS Data GPS systems, exact distances using
to open the Import GPS Data Wizard. the Import GPS Data Wizard are not guaran-
teed.
Click Next to continue.
275
Select File
Enter the name and directory of the file you Click Next to continue.
want to import, or click Browse to select a
.gpx file on your computer.
276
Import Data As
1 Specify which items you want to import 2 Specify what you would like each item
by checking the box to the left of the to Import As from the drop-down list.
Name. Items with unchecked boxes are not
imported.
277
Transform Coordinates
1
2
3
1 Map - Specify the point in the imported 3 Rotate - Accurately rotate the position
terrain data, defined by degrees of north in the imported terrain data
latitude and degrees longitude, that you counterclockwise around the Z axis.
would like to locate at the origin in the Home
Click Finish to close the Import GPS Data
Designer Suite plan.
Wizard and return to floor plan view.
2 Lower Elevation Data - Specify the If you do not see the imported terrain, select
amount that you would like to lower all
imported elevation data. Window> Fill Window .
Plant Tools
Select Terrain> Plant to add plants to can be selected and edited much like other
your landscaping plan. Plants can also image objects. See Editing Images on page
be placed in a plan directly from the library. 412.
See Placing Library Objects on page 318.
Select Terrain> Plant> Plant
Plant objects are actually images, which Chooser to open the Plant Chooser
provide realism while avoiding high 3D dialog. See Plant Chooser Dialog on page
surface count. Once created, plant images 281.
278
Select Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Select Terrain> Plant> Show

Image to create a plant image. Once a Hardiness Zones to access regional
plant image is created, it can be added to the climate zone maps. See Hardiness Zones
library for future use. See Adding Library on page 283.
Content on page 313.

Select a plant in a floor plan or 3D The Plant Information and Plant Description
view and click the Open Object edit tabs are also found in the Plant Information
button to open the Plant Image dialog, which can be accessed from the Plant
Specification dialog. Chooser dialog. See Plant Chooser Dialog
on page 281.
This dialog can also be accessed by selecting
Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image .
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Image File - The path and name of the computer of the image that represents the
selected image file displays here. Click plant in 3D views.
Browse to specify the saved location on your
2 2D Plant Symbol - A number of 2D
symbols are available to mark the
279
location of the image in floor plan view. When Retain Aspect Ratio of is checked,
Select one from the drop-down list. if you change either the Height or Width,
the other value changes to maintain this
3 Options ratio. If this is unchecked and you resize
the plant image, it may become distorted.
Check Reverse Image to reflect the
Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to
appearance of the image about an imagi-
reset the images original aspect ratio and
nary vertical line through its center.
remove any distortion caused by resizing.
Check Do not rotate in 3D view to pre-
vent the plant image from rotating with 5 Specify the Location of the selected
the camera. plant image.
Precisely position the selected plant
4 Specify the Size of the plant image, as image in reference to the plan coordinates
seen in 3D views.
by specifying its X Coordinate and Y
Enter a Height for the image. Coordinate.
Enter a Width for the image. Specify the selected plant images Height
Above Ground.
Plant Information Tab

The settings on the Plant Information tab
correspond to the search parameters in the
Plant Chooser. See Plant Chooser Dialog
on page 281.
280
Plant Description Tab
1 A detailed Description of the plant Fill Style Tab

displays in this text field.
The Fill Style tab controls the appearance of
2 Information in the Lighting the selected plants 2D Plant Symbol in floor
Comments fields describes the plants plan view. By default, plant images fill style
light requirements. is None (Transparent). For information about
the settings on this tab, see Fill Style Tab
3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given on page 400.
here. See Hardiness Zones on page
283. If the plants 2D Plan Symbol does not form
a closed shape, the settings on the Fill Style
tab will have no effect on the appearance of
the plant in floor plan view.

Select Terrain> Plant> Plant dialog or click the button at the bottom of the
Chooser to open the Plant Chooser Library Browser window.
281
Use the Plant Chooser to search the library The search parameters in the Plant Chooser
for plant images and symbols that meet your dialog correspond to the settings on the Plant
search parameters. You can search using any Information tab of the Plant Image
or all of the options in this dialog. Specification dialog. See Plant Information
Tab on page 280.
1 6 7 11
12
2 8
3
9
4
10
1 The Common Name, Scientific Name 4 Specify the Bloom Time to search for,
or Variety Name for the plant. A which is the season when the plant
Pronunciation field is also provided. produces flowers.
2 Specify the Flower Color to search for 5 Check one or more boxes to search for
here. plants with Special Characteristics.
3 Specify the Leaf Color to search for 6 Specify the plant Height at maturity to
here. search for.
282
Plant Schedules
An average mature height range can be

9 Check one or more boxes to specify the
entered using the From and To drop- selecte Sub-Type to search for.
down lists.
A specific Height at Maturity to search 10 Click the Search button at the bottom
of the dialog to search for plants that
for can be entered in the text field. meet your search criteria. The search results
A specific Age at Maturity, in months, display to the right.
can be entered in the text field.
11 Specify whether you want the search
A specific Starting Age, in months, can results to use the Common Name or
be entered in the text field. Scientific Name.
7 Specify the plant Needs to search for. 12 Click on the name of a plant in the list
These include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, to see its location in the Library
and Hardiness Zone range. See Hardiness Browser.
Zones on page 283. If the selected plant has been downloaded,
Check one or more boxes to indicate you can click the View Item button to see
8 more information about it in the Plant
selected plant Type to search for.
Information dialog. See Plant Image
Plant Schedules
The Plant Schedule tool allows you
to create customizable plant
schedules. See Schedules on page 35.
Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show
Hardiness Zones to view a selection
283
of regional Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the

drop-down list to select various regions.
284
Chapter 20:
Roads, Driveways
& Sidewalks
Roads and sidewalks are modeled in 3D like Chapter Contents

other terrain objects in Home Designer Suite. Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
Because they have much in common with Displaying Road Objects
terrain objects and rely upon terrain data to Editing Road Objects
be viewed in 3D, it is helpful to be familiar Road Specification Dialog
with terrain modeling before using these
tools. See Terrain on page 251.
285
Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Road objects can be drawn in floor Spline Road
plan view, camera views and
overviews, but only when a Terrain Use Terrain> Road> Spline Road to
Perimeter exists in the plan. See Terrain draw a curved road. Spline roads are
Perimeter on page 251. drawn and edited like CAD splines. See
Splines on page 393.
Road objects created with the Road Tools
have a consistent width that can be defined in Straight Sidewalk
their specification dialogs. See Road
Specification Dialog on page 288, Terrain To create a sidewalk with no curves,
Feature Specification Dialog on page 268, select Terrain> Road and Sidewalk>
and Terrain Path Specification Dialog on Straight Sidewalk, then click and drag from
page 272. end to end to draw a line. The ends of
multiple sidewalk sections can be connected
Driveways and Parking Lots are actually together.
Terrain Features. See Terrain Feature
Tools on page 257. They are drawn as Sidewalks are edited along their center line
rectangles but can be edited to any shape. like line- and polyline- based objects. See
See Editing Closed-Polyline Based Editing Line Based Objects on page 68.
Objects on page 76. Sidewalks can be edited in their specification
Roads and sidewalks are flat along their dialog. See Terrain Path Specification
widths, which makes it easy to create roads Dialog on page 272.
on sloping terrain. Driveways and Parking
Lots follow the contours of the terrain rather Spline Sidewalk
than cut into them.
Use the Spline Sidewalk tool to
Once road objects have been placed, they can create a curved sidewalk. Select
be edited individually or as a group. See Terrain> Sidewalk> Spline Sidewalk.
Editing Road Objects on page 287. Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
splines. See Splines on page 393.
Straight Road
Driveway Area
To place a road without any curves,
select Terrain> Road> Straight A Driveway Area is a terrain feature
Road and click and drag to draw a line in with a concrete material assignment.
floor plan view. The ends of multiple road To create a driveway, select Terrain> Road
sections can be connected together. and Sidewalk> Driveway Area, then click
and drag from corner to corner to draw a
Roads are edited alone their center line like
rectangle. See Draw Polyline on page 392.
CAD lines and polylines. See Editing Line
286
Displaying Road Objects
Height, thickness and material information To place a parking lot, select Terrain> Road
can be specified in a driveways specification and Sidewalk> Parking Lot , then click and
dialog. See Terrain Feature Specification drag from corner to corner to draw a
Dialog on page 268. rectangle. See Draw Polyline on page 392.
Driveways can be edited like other closed Height, thickness and material information
polylines. See Editing Closed-Polyline can be specified in a parking lots
Based Objects on page 76. specification dialog. See Terrain Feature
Parking Lot
A Parking Lot is a terrain feature
with an asphalt material assignment.
Displaying Road Objects

Roads and sidewalks display in floor roads and sidewalks will not display, either:
plan and 3D views based on the even if their layers are turned on.
settings in the Display Options dialog. See
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
Layers on page 53.
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, you can select Terrain>
In 3D Views
Build Terrain . See Terrain Perimeter
Road objects display in 3D views within the on page 251.
Terrain Perimeter. If the display of the
Terrain Perimeter is turned off in 3D views,
Editing Road Objects

Road objects can be selected in 2D and 3D Editing Line Based Objects on page
views and edited using the edit handles, the 68.
edit toolbar and their specification dialogs.
Spline Roads and Spline Sidewalks
Using the Mouse are edited along their centerline like
CAD splines. See Splines on page 393.
The edit handles available for a selected road
object depend on the type of object selected. Driveway Areas and Parking
Straight Roads and Straight Lots are edited like other closed
polyline based objects. See Editing
Sidewalks are edited along their cen-
Closed-Polyline Based Objects on page
terline like a line or open polyline. See
76.
287
In the Specification Dialog Using the Edit Tools

Road objects can be customized in A selected road object can be edited in a
their specification dialogs. See Road variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
Specification Dialog on page 288, Terrain toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page 24.
Feature Specification Dialog on page 268,
and Terrain Path Specification Dialog on
page 272.
Road Specification Dialog

To open the Road Specification Selected Line/Arc Tab
dialog, select a Straight Road or
Spline Road and click the Open Object edit The Selected Line tab is available when a
button. Straight Road is selected. For more
information, see Line Tab on page 394.
Many of the settings in this dialog are similar
to those in the Terrain Path Specification The Selected Arc tab is available when the
dialog. curved segment of a Straight Road is
selected. See Arc Tab on page 397.
General Tab
Line Style Tab
This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
many other specification dialogs. See Line
Fill Style Tab

appearance of the selected object in floor
Specify the Width and Height of the road
relative to the terrain.
Polyline Tab
Materials Tab
The Polyline tab lists the length of the roads
Perimeter, Area and Volume. For more
information, see Polyline Tab on page 399.
views. For information about these settings,
see Materials Tab on page 328.
The material selected here is not calculated
in the Materials List. See Materials Lists
on page 441.
288
Road Specification Dialog
289
290
Chapter 21:
Other Objects
Home Designer Suite has additional objects Chapter Contents

that can be used to customize your design. General Shapes
Soffits
Special Applications for Soffits
Calculating Materials on Soffits
Soffit Specification Dialog
Fireplaces
Fireplace Specification Dialog
Library Fireplaces
Chimneys
General Shapes
Items in the Home Designer Suite Content> individually or combined to create a wide
Shapes library allow you to create a variety variety of custom objects.
of custom objects using basic geometric
General Shape objects are placed and edited
shapes. These shapes can can be used
much like other library objects. See Editing
Box-Based Objects on page 78.
Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between used to create almost any other object that
the tops of wall cabinets and the can be modeled as a 3D box. Select Build>
ceiling, but they are very versatile and can be Cabinet> Soffit to activate this tool.
291
Soffit Defaults The maximum soffit width is 170 feet (52m),

and the minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).
The default settings for soffits are set in the
Soffit Defaults dialog. The settings in this Once a soffit is placed in a plan, you can
dialog are similar to those in the Soffit change its size and position to meet a variety
Specification dialog. See Soffit of needs.
Placing Soffits
For best results when placing soffits above
wall cabinets: Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D
The default soffit should be the same views by simply clicking with the Soffit
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the tool active. See Click-to-Create on page
default wall cabinet. See Cabinet 60.
They can be assigned materials that are
The default soffit Floor to Bottom value calculated in the Materials List, but by
should equal the sum of the default wall default they use the material assigned to the
cabinets Floor to Bottom value plus its default wall. See Wall Defaults on page 96.
Height. See General Tab on page 294.
When positioned against a wall in a room,
The default soffit Height should be equal soffits will display any moldings present in
to or greater than the space between the that room that are at the same height as the
ceiling and the top of the wall cabinets. soffit. See Moldings Tab on page 133.
If the sum of the default soffits Floor to To create a corner soffit, click as close to an
Bottom value and Height is larger than the inside wall corner as possible. A corner soffit
ceiling height of the room in which a soffit is retains its shape when it is moved, edited, or
placed, the Floor to Bottom value will be copied.
retained and its Height will be adjusted so
that it fits under the ceiling. When a soffit is created, it is placed on the
Cabinets, Soffits layer. See Displaying
Objects on page 54.
Special Applications for Soffits

Anything that can be represented by a three Following are some additional examples.
dimensional box of any size or angle can be
represented by a soffit. They can be resized Accent Tiles
to as small as 1/16" x 1/16" x 1/16" (1mm x
1mm x 1mm) or as large as 135 feet (32m). A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to one or more soffits applied to the
Soffits can have materials applied to them to walls above tubs or in showers.
represent simple mirrors, posts, chimneys
and so on.
292
Soffits automatically stop at the floor

platform when moved downward. To place a
soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
Section/Elevation view looking straight
at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
Masonry Veneer the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
Create a brick or stone veneer that extends middle handle, and drag it down past the
halfway up a wall using soffits placed around floor so that it covers the floor platform edge
the base of the house. Specify a depth for the as well. See Unrestricted Movement on
soffits equal to the masonry material to be page 86.
used.

The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick
or other materials applied to a soffit is gives 81.5 bricks.
calculated using the following rules: If the soffit depth is greater than both 4
If the soffit depth is less than the larger of inches (10 mm) and 1 times the mate-
4 inches (10 mm) or 1 times the material thickness, then the surface areas of
rial thickness, then only the front area of the soffit back, sides and top are used in
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is addition to the front, if these surfaces are
48"x48x4 thick, and the Dark Red not attached to a wall or other soffit.
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8 However, only those portions of the
mortar joint) the front of the soffit is sides, top and bottom remaining after
48"x48=2304 square inches. Including subtracting twice the material thickness
the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/ are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
8 x 8 3/8 = 28.26 square inches. 2304 has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bot-
tom surface areas cannot contribute to the
293
brick count unless the soffit depth is height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
greater than 8 inches. the joint width is added to the size.
If surface materials such as brick are For materials in the area category, the
applied to a large soffit, the soffit center soffit area calculation above is used, with
is assumed to be hollow, with only a sin- the material thickness treated as zero.
gle layer of the material applied to each For materials in the volume, concrete or
applicable face. earth categories, the true volume of the
For shingles and shakes, the overlap soffit is used.
amount should be subtracted from the
Soffit Specification Dialog

To customize a soffit using the Soffit The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Specification dialog, double-click on in the Soffit Defaults dialog, but affect only
the soffit using the Soffit tool or select the selected object(s).
the soffit and click the Open Object edit
button.
General Tab
1 Define the Size and Position of the selected soffit relative to the floor or terrain.
294
Fireplaces
Specify the Width of the soffit. Auto Adjust Height - If the soffit is out-
Define the vertical Height of the soffit. side a room, check this box to place it rel-
ative to the terrain height. When
Depth - Define the distance between the unchecked, the soffits Height is mea-
front and the back of the soffit. When sured from the default floor height of
selected in floor plan view, the front of a Floor 1. See Terrain Height vs Floor
soffit has a V, and the back of the soffit Height on page 252 of the Reference
has a triangular rotation handle. Manual.
If the selected soffit is a corner soffit, the
Width controls its left side width, and 2 A preview of the soffit displays on the
right side of the dialog box.
Depth controls its right side width.
Floor to Bottom - Specify the distance Materials Tab
from the bottom of the soffit to the floor.
This is sometimes more easily done by For information about the settings on this
positioning the soffit in a 3D view. tab, see Materials Tab on page 328.
Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in Built into a Wall
or away from a wall by selecting
Build> Fireplace and then clicking in the To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select
drawing area. Build> Fireplace and click on a wall. A
If created in a wall, it is considered a wall fireplace is created with the outside of the
opening and can be moved or resized like fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.
a window or door.
If created away from a wall, it moves and
resizes similar to a cabinet.
A selection of prefabricated metal fireplaces
is also available from the Fixtures (Interior)
library category. These can be framed in with Select the fireplace to display four edit
standard walls. See The Library on page handles located along the wall.
305.
The display of fireplaces is controlled in the
Fireplaces are edited, moved, resized, and
deleted similar other objects. See Editing Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and
Objects on page 65. drag toward the outside of the wall. The
295
fireplace will stop when the firebox front is

flush with the inside edge of the wall.
Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, free-

In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls standing fireplace have ten edit handles when
display five edit handles: a Resize handle selected and may be rotated, resized, or
along each edge and a Move handle at the moved in any direction, similar to the way
center. CAD boxes can. See Editing Box-Based
Objects on page 78.
Fireplaces always face the interior when
placed on an exterior wall. When placing a Fireplace Foundations
fireplace in an interior wall, click on the edge
of the wall that you want the fireplace to If a fireplace is added on the first floor before
face. The fireplace is created with the firebox building the foundation plan, a foundation
on the same side as the wall edge you clicked will be generated under the fireplace when
on to create it. the foundation is built.
The fireplace foundation is the same material
Freestanding type as the original fireplace, but will not
To place a free-standing masonry fireplace, have a firebox or a hearth. This fireplace
foundation may be edited or deleted as
select Build> Fireplace and click in an desired. A firebox and hearth can be added in
open area away from a wall. the Fireplace Specification dialog.

Select a masonry fireplace and click Dimensions in this dialog here must be
the Open Object edit button to entered in whole inches. Fractions and
display the Fireplace Specification dialog. decimals are not accepted.
296
General Tab
1 Specify the Size and Position of the Check Auto Adjust Height to make a
selected fireplace and its hearth. free-standing fireplace outside a building
Specify the Height of the fireplace. adjust its height to that of the terrain.
Only available when the selected fire-
Specify the Width of the fireplace. place is free-standing.
Specify the Depth of the fireplace.
Specify the Hearth Depth. This is mea- 2 Check Suppress Dimensions to turn
off the display of the selected
sured from the front of the fireplace out fireplaces width and firebox width
into the room. To eliminate the hearth dimensions in floor plan view.
altogether, enter a zero for this value.
Specify the Hearth Height, relative to 3 The preview image of the fireplace
updates as changes are made. Press the
the floor in that room. Tab key to update to the most recent change.
Enter the Floor to Bottom distance from
the floor to the bottom of the hearth.
297
Firebox Tab
1 Define the Size of the selected Enter offset Distance, which is how far
fireplaces firebox. the firebox is offset from the fireplace
Specify the fireboxs Height and Width. center. A value of 0 centers the fire box in
the fireplace.
Specify the Depth of the firebox.
Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset
The defaults are 25, 24, and 18 inches the firebox to the left or to the right.
respectively.
2 Define the firebox Offset, measured Materials Tab

from the center of the fireplace.
For information about the settings on this
tab, see Materials Tab on page 328.
Library Fireplaces
A variety of different fireplace symbols are
available in library. See The Library on Always check the manufacturers prod-
page 305. The fireplaces in the Library uct information for the framing and
behave just like other Library objects. clearance requirements of the fireplace unit
you plan to use, and design your plan
accordingly
298
Chimneys
Placing a Library Fireplace

A variety of fireplace symbols are available
in the library. See Placing Library Objects
on page 318.
Flush fireplaces are designed to snap to wall
surfaces.
Open Front Library fireplace

projecting through a 4" wall
Some fireplace symbols can be enclosed by
walls or positioned to project through a wall.
Chimneys
Masonry Fireplace Chimneys resize it to match, then increase its height
either in its specification dialog or in a
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace 3D view using the same method as
extending a masonry fireplace.
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. Define the chimney chase as a room area
2. Ctrl + drag the top edge of the chimney using walls, making sure these walls are
upward through all the floors and the aligned between floors. The chimney
roof until it is to the desired height. See chase room on the uppermost floor
Unrestricted Movement on page 86. should have a much higher ceiling than
the other rooms on that floor and should
3. When the chimney is approximately the
also have no ceiling or roof. See Room
correct height, select the fireplace, click
the Open Object edit button, and
type in the exact height. A selection of chimney tops is available in
the library. In addition, custom chimney
caps can be made using Geometric Shapes
Chimney Chases & Caps and/or soffits. See General Shapes on page
There are two ways to draw a chimney chase. 291 and Soffits on page 291.
Place a closed box geometric shape or
soffit in position over the chimney chase,
299
300
Chapter 22:
Architectural
Blocks
A selection of pre-arranged rooms is Chapter Contents

available in the Library Browser at Home Displaying Architectural Blocks
Designer Suite Content> Interiors> Pre- Editing Architectural Blocks
Arranged Rooms. These pre-arranged rooms Architectural Blocks and Sub-Objects
are a collection of fixtures, furnishings and
accessories that are grouped together so that
they can be placed and moved as a single
object.
3D objects that are grouped together like this
are referred to as Architectural Blocks.
Although blocked together, these objects
retain many of their own attributes, such as
materials.
Architectural blocks can also be exploded so
that the individual sub-objects become
independent of one another.
301
Displaying Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks are placed on the bounding box, is controlled in the Display
Architectural Blocks layer and can be Options dialog. See Displaying Objects on
displayed in all views. The display of page 54.
architectural blocks, including their
Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be selected and Editing Sub-Objects
edited in 2D and 3D views. See Selecting
Objects on page 66. The individual objects included in an
architectural block can also be selected and
Once selected, an architectural block can be edited. See To select a sub-object on page
edited using its edit handles and edit toolbar 303.
buttons.
Explode Architectural Block
You can break an architectural block
A selected architectural block displays a to make its objects independent.
Move handle and a Rotate handle. Select the architectural block and click the
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but Explode Architectural Block edit button.
the individual objects in the block can be.
Note: If you open a plan created in another
Using the Edit Tools version of Home Designer and an architec-
tural block includes an object that you cannot
A selected architectural block or blocks can create in your version of the software, you
be edited in a variety of ways using the cannot unblock it or edit its components.
buttons on the edit toolbar. See The Edit
Toolbar on page 24. Once exploded, an architectural block cannot
be made into a single object again.
Architectural Blocks and Sub-Objects

An architectural block is composed of a Each of the sub-objects in an architectural
group of sub-objects that have been blocked block may contain additional parts called
together. For example, a kitchen island components. The cabinets in a kitchen island,
architectural block may consist of cabinets, for example, may contain handles, hinges,
appliances, and other accessories. and drawer glide.
302
Architectural Blocks and Sub-Objects
Sub-Objects
Certain attributes of an architectural block
can be edited at the sub-object level. A sub-
object can be edited by accessing its
specification dialog in either of two ways:
Explode the architectural block, select
the sub-object, and click the Open
Object edit button.
Select the sub-object while it is part of
the architectural block and click the
Open Object edit button. Some attri-
butes may not be editable while the
object is part of a block. See Editing
Architectural Blocks on page 302.
To select a sub-object
1. Click the Select Objects button,

then click on the sub-object that you
would like to edit.
2. With the architectural block selected,
click the Select Next Object edit
button or press the Tab key.
The selection switches to the individual
object and it can be edited using its edit
handles, edit toolbar and specification
dialog.
The ability to edit an object as part of a block
may be more restricted than if the object
were independent. If more extensive editing
is required, the architectural block must be
exploded.
303
304
Chapter 23:
The Library
Home Designer Suites library offers Chapter Contents

thousands of symbols, materials, and images The Library Browser
that can enhance any plan. Searching the Library
New library catalogs and enhancements are Library Content
made available by Chief Architect on a Downloading Library Content
continuing basis and are available for Importing Library Catalogs
download for the current program version. Adding Library Content
Organizing the Library
You can also customize items from the Exporting Library Catalogs
library or import new items from outside the Placing Library Objects
program and then save them in the library for Select Library Object Dialog
future use. Displaying Library Objects
Editing Library Objects
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
305
The Library Browser

The Home Designer Suite Library
Browser allows you to manage the
contents of the library as well as add library
content to your drawings. 1
To open the Library Browser:
Select Library> Library Browser .

2
Click the Library Browser button .

Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard.
By default, the Library Browser is docked to 3
the right side of the program window, but can
be undocked or docked to another side. See
Docking the Library Browser on page 309.
The Library Browser has four sections: 4
The search options at the top.
The Directory and Search Results Pane. 5
The Selection Pane.
The library has five categories: Home
The Preview Pane.
Designer Suite Core Catalogs, Home
To adjust the height or width of a section, Designer Suite Bonus Catalogs,
place the pointer over the split bar you want Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog and
to move. When the double-headed arrow Trash. See Library Content on page 310.
displays, click and drag.
1 Search the library using keywords and
You can work on your drawing with the optional search filters. See Searching
Library Browser open. To close the Browser, the Library on page 309.
click the Close button or double-click on Begin typing in the text field to search for
an object in the Selection Pane. library items. As you type, search results
will display in the Directory Pane.
Right-click on an item in the Search
Results list and select Show in Browser
to view the items location in the Direc-
tory list.
Click the Browse button to stop
searching and restore the Directory list.
306
The Library Browser
Click the Search button to display the in the programs Status Bar. See The Status
search results for your search entry. Bar on page 26.
Click the Turn On Search Filtering 3 The Selection Pane shows a thumbnail
image of the item selected in the
button to display the search filtering
Directory Pane.
options and customize your search
parameters. When an item is selected in the Directory
Pane, a basic line-based representation of the
Click the Turn Off Search Filtering item displays in the Selection Pane.
button to display the search filtering
options and customize your search If the selected item is a single object, a
parameters. preview of that object displays in the Pre-
view Pane. You can move your cursor
2 The library Directory and Search into the drawing area to place the item.
Results display here. The basic See Placing Library Objects on page
structure of the directory tree is: 318.
Library Category If the selected item is a folder, a thumb-
nail image displays, representing each
Library Catalog 1 item inside. Move your pointer over an
Library Folder 1 item in this pane to see a Tool Tip with
the items name. Click on a folder in the
Library Object Selection Pane to display its contents
Library Folder 2 here and make it the item selected in the
Directory Pane.
Library Catalog 2 and so on. Some folders may have too many items
Library items are always placed in to display useful thumbnails for each;
alphabetical order within their heirarchy. when this is the case, they do not display.
The Library Browser includes a Trash bin, Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
where deleted items are moved until you button to toggle the Selection Pane on and
choose to Empty Trash. See Deleting off.
Library Items on page 316.
Navigate the Directory Pane using the 4 When an individual object is selected in
either the Directory or Selection Pane,
mouse. Click the beside a catalog or an image of it displays in the Preview Pane.
folder to display its contents. Once
expanded, you can click the beside it to You can click the Toggle Display button
close it again. You can also scroll the list at the bottom of the browser window to
using the arrow keys on your keyboard. switch between preview images in high and
low detail.
Click on an item to select it. Preview images
display in the Selection and Preview Panes
and basic information about it also displays
307
If the selected object is a 3D symbol, you can displaying options related to that item. See
rotate and zoom in or out on the Preview Contextual Menus.
using the mouse.
If you have rotated a view in the Preview
Pane, you can restore the default angle either
by clicking in the Selection Pane or by right-
clicking on the Preview Pane and selecting
Reset Preview.
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane

button to toggle the Preview Pane on and off.
5 The toolbar at the bottom of the

browser aids in searching, displaying The options in the contextual menu vary
panes, and managing library content. depending on the item selected, but may
Click the Plant Chooser button to include:
open the Plant Chooser dialog. See Cut/Copy/Paste
Plant Chooser Dialog on page 281.
Paste Shortcut
Click the Get Additional Online Rename
Content button to launch your default
web browser to the Home Designer Suite Delete
web site, where additional library content is Export Library
available for download. Open
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane Reset Preview
button to toggle the Selection Pane on
Expand All/Collapse All
and off.
Show in Browser
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
button to toggle the Preview Pane on
and off.
Keyboard Commands
The Library Browser can be navigated using
Click the Toggle Display button to
the arrow keys on your keyboard.
switch between high and low detail
images of a selected library object in the The right and left arrow keys expand and
Preview Pane. collapse folders.
The up and down keys change which
Using the Contextual Menus library object is currently selected.
A number of important library functions can Select an item and press F2 to rename it.
be accessed using the contextual menus. Select an item and press the Delete key to
Right-click on an item in the Library delete it.
Browser to open a contextual menu
308
Searching the Library
Expand/Collapse All vertical or horizontal orientation, depending

on its location.
When a library category or folder is selected
in the Directory Pane, Expand All and Holding down the Ctrl key prevents the
Collapse All are available in the contextual Library Browser from docking while
menu, allowing you to expand or contract its moving.
contents in the tree view. If you close the program with the Library
Browser docked, it displays in the same
Docking the Library position the next time the program is
Browser opened.
Initially, the Library Browser is docked to To return the browser window to its original
the right side of the Home Designer Suite position and size, select Library> Restore
program window. Position/Size Defaults.
To undock the browser window, double-click Closing the Library

the striped grab bar. You can also undock it
Browser
by clicking on the grab bar and dragging it
into the center of the program window. The Library Browser can be closed in either
of two ways:
Once undocked, the Library Browser can be
moved by clicking and dragging the title bar. Click the Close button at the top right
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of corner of the browser window.
your screen, it automatically docks in a Select Library> Close Library
Browser .
Searching the Library

The Library Browser filtering options let you 4. If you move your mouse pointer over the
focus your searches to meet parameters that Search field, a Tool Tip will state the
you define. number of results of your search.
5. Right-click on an item in the Search
To search the Library Browser Results list and select Show in Browser
to view the items location in the Direc-
1. Select Library> Library Browser tory list.
and click in the Search field at the top of
Substrings are not included. For example,
the Library Browser.
searching for windows will not produce
2. Begin typing a keyword to search for. window as a search result. On the other
3. As you type, the search results will pop- hand, searching for window will produce
ulate in the Directory Pane below. windows as a search result.
309
To search using custom filters Select Style, then choose a design style
to restrict the search results to objects
1. Click the Turn on search filtering of that style.
optons button. Select Manufacturer, then choose the
Check Match Keyword to match the name of a manufacturer to include in
entered search keyword with an your search. Manufacturer catalogs
objects search attributes. that were imported during the current
program session will not be listed until
Check Match Entire Word to match
you exit out of and restart Home
the entire keyword or words with the
Designer Suite.
complete name of the object.
Check Match Folders to include 4. Multiple filters can be created and used
library folders in your search. at the same time:
2. Check Filter by to enable additional fil- Click the Add button to the right of
tering options, which display below. a filter to make copy of that filter.
3. Select a filtering option from the drop- Specify a new Type, Style, and/or
down list on the left, then choose what to Manufacturer for the new filter.
include in the filter from the drop-down Click the Delete button to the right
list on the right: of a filter to remove that filter.
Select Type, then select a category of
library item to include in your search. Note: Your custom search settings are not
retained when you end the current program
session.
Library Content
The Home Designer Suite library has five When you launch the program for the first
categories: Home Designer Suite Core time, you will be asked if you want to
Catalogs, Home Designer Suite Bonus download the Core Catalogs. Click Yes to
Catalogs, Manufacturer Catalogs, User begin the download. If you click No, you can
Catalog and Trash. See Getting Started download at any time by selecting Library>
Guide, Deleting Library Items on page Download Core Content from the menu.
316.
Home Designer Bonus Cata-
Home Designer Core Catalogs logs
The Home Designer Suite Core Catalogs Chief Architect regularly posts new library
category contains a wide selection of 3D catalogs available for download.
symbols, images, and materials.
310
Downloading Library Content
Select Library> Get Additional Content Designer Suite 2012 Data folder. See Home
Online from the menu to access the Designer Suite Data on page 35.
bonus catalogs and content. The best way to back up your custom library
content is to export the items in your User
Manufacturer Catalogs Catalog, as this will ensure that the textures
used by custom materials or imported
A variety of name brand library catalogs are
symbols are not lost. See Backing Up Your
available for download on the Home
Files on page 37.
Designer web site with content ranging from
materials to fixtures. Exported libraries use the .calibz file format:
a zipped file type that can include textures
Select Library> Get Additional Content
and images along with other library data.
Online to access these manufacturer
catalogs. To back up your custom library content
The User Catalog 1. Launch Home Designer Suite and select

The User Catalog is the location for items Library> Library Browser from
that you add to the library either from a the menu.
drawing or by importing. See Adding 2. Right-click on a folder or item in the
Library Content on page 313. User Catalog.
You can create and organize custom library 3. Select Export Library fron the contex-
folders and imported items such as symbols, tual menu.
images, backdrops, and materials. See 4. The Export Library Data dialog is a typ-
Organizing the Library on page 315. ical Save dialog. See Exporting Files
on page 37.
Backing up Library Content Notice that the file type in the Save as
The Home Designer Suite User Catalog File, type field is Library File with Tex-
User_Library.calib, is located in the Home tures/Images (*.calibz).
Downloading Library Content

The Home Designer Suite Core Catalogs, Core Catalogs
Home Designer Suite Bonus Catalogs,
Manufacturer Catalogs are all available for When you launch Home Designer Suite for
internet download. the first time, you will be asked if you want
to download the Core Catalogs. Click Yes to
begin the download.
311
If you click No, you can download at any Pausing and Resuming
time by selecting Library> Install Core
Content from the menu. Library downloads can only take place while
Home Designer Suite is running. If you close
the program while a download is in progress,
Bonus and Manufacturer
a dialog will confirm whether you wish to
Catalogs stop the download.
Bonus and Manufacturer Catalogs can be Click Stop Download and Close Pro-
downloaded from our web site, gram to stop the download and close the
www.homedesignersoftware.com. Select program.
Library> Get Additional Content
Click Cancel to leave the program open
Online to launch your default internet and continue downloading.
browser to our Content Resources page.
Most catalogs are composed of a single file.
If you stop the download midway, none of
Download Progress the downloaded data will be retained.
When library content is downloading, a
The Core Catalogs, on the other hand,
green progress bar will display at the bottom
contain a large volume of data saved in
of the Library Browser. If you choose to
multiple files. If you close the program and
download the Core Catalogs while the library
stop the Core Catalogs download midway,
is not open, the Browser will open so the
only data associated with the file currently
progress indicator can display.
being downloaded will be lost. You can
Click on the progress bar to display the name resume the download beginning with that file
of the current file being downloaded, the at a later time by selecting Library>
total amount of data to be downloaded in Download Core Content.
KB, and the amount downloaded so far.
Download Errors
If any problems occur during the library
download process, a dialog box will notify
you at the end of the download. Click Retry
Download to repeat the download and
correct any errors or click Cancel to discard
the downloaded catalog.
Importing Library Catalogs

Home Designer Suite library files have two addition, .calibz files are able to save data
different file extensions: .calib and .calibz. associated with textures and images. Both
Both files can include any combination of file types can be imported into the Home
Home Designer Suite library items; in Designer Suite library.
312
Adding Library Content
There are several ways to import a .calib or Legacy Library Conversion

.calibz file into the program library:
You can import .calib and .calibz files
Double-click on the file in Windows created in Home Designer versions 10 or 9
Explorer. for use in version 2012 at any time. See
Drag the file from a Windows Explorer Exporting Library Catalogs on page 317.
window and drop it into the Home
In addition, you can convert legacy .alb files
Designer Suite program window.
created in Home Designer versions 8.0 and
Select Library> Import Library from prior for use in version 2012.
the program menu.
To convert legacy library files
To import library files into the library
1. Select Library> Convert Legacy (.alb)
1. Select Library> Import Library to dis- Library Files.
play the Import Library Data dialog.
2. In the Select a Legacy Library File
2. Browse to the .calib or .calibz file that Folder dialog, select an .alb file that
you want to import and select the file so you want to bring in to Home Designer
that its names displays in the File Name Suite 2012.
field.
3. The selected files name will display in
3. Click the Open button. the File name: field.
4. A progress bar will display, telling you 4. Click the Open button to import the
the progress of each library data file as it prior version third party .alb file into the
is imported. Once imported, each file User Catalog.
will be located in the User Catalog.
5. Organize the imported content to suit
When a .calib or .calibz file is imported into your needs. See Organizing the
the program, its contents are automatically Library on page 315.
placed in the User Catalog. Any images or
textures saved in a .calibz file will be copied
Note: Library content exported from Home
into the Home Designer Suite 2012 Designer Suite 9 will not include catalog
Data\Images and Textures folders for backup names. Any subscribed content that has not
purposes. The program will only reference been downloaded will not be included, either.
these copies if it cannot locate the files in
their original locations. See Home Designer
Suite Data on page 35.
Adding Library Content

In addition to downloading Home Designer into the library, you can also add a variety of
Suite Content and importing entire catalogs individual objects to the library.
313
Add to Library Adding New Backdrops

Nearly any object imported into a plan or Backdrops are images that display behind the
placed from the Library Browser can be model in 3D views. See 3D Backdrops on
added to the library. page 350.
Check Add to Library in the Import 3D
Symbol dialog. See Importing 3D To add a backdrop to the library
Symbols on page 425.
Select an object in your plan and click the 1. Select File> Import> Backdrop to
open the Import Backdrop File dialog,
Add to Library edit button. which is similar to the Import Picture
In addition, some Home Designer Suite File dialog. See Importing Pictures on
objects that are not symbols, such as page 414.
cabinets, terrain objects, architectural blocks, 2. Browse to an image file on your com-
windows, and doorways can be added to the puter, select it, and click Open. This
library. See Native Objects vs Symbols on backdrop can now be found in the My
page 321. Backdrops library.
An object created using a drawing tool in You can also create a new backdrop by
Home Designer Suite will automatically be copying and pasting an image into Home
added to the User Catalog using the name of Designer Suite. See Copying and Pasting
that tool, whereas a symbol imported will Objects on page 61.
automatically use the Symbol Name. These
objects can be renamed after adding them to New materials, images, and plant images can
the Library, either before or after moving be created in the User Catalog or any folder
them to their appropriate user created folder within it. Right-click on the User Catalog or
in the User Catalog. See Renaming Library a folder within it, select New> from the
Items on page 315. contextual menu, then select the type of item
you wish to create from the submenu.
Adding Materials and Images
Adding a Customized Object
Home Designer Suite can use materials and
images in a variety of file formats and You can customize an existing library object
provides several means of adding new and save your changes for future use by first
material and image files to the library. For copying the item into an unlocked library.
more information, see Creating Materials
on page 330 and Adding Images to the To customize a library object
Library on page 411.
1. Right-click on a library item and select
Copy from the contextual menu.
2. Browse to an unlocked library or library
folder and right-click on it.
314
3. Select Paste from the contextual menu 5. The items specification dialog opens,
to make a copy of the library item in this and you can make any changes that you
new location. wish to the item.
4. Right-click on the copied item and select 6. Make any needed changes to the item,
Open from the menu. then click OK. Your changes will be
saved with this item for use in any plan.

Library folders and objects can be copied, When an item is selected, preview images
pasted, moved, and deleted: allowing you to display in the Selection and Preview Panes
organize your User Catalog to best suit your and basic information about it also displays
work style and needs. in the programs Status Bar. See The Status
Bar on page 26.
Adding New Folders A selected library item can be modified in a
New folders can be added to User Catalog or number of ways to help meet your
to any folder located within the User organizational needs.
Catalog. To add a new folder, right-click on
User Catalog or one of its sub-folders and Renaming Library Items
select New> Folder from the contextual
Only folders and objects in the User Catalog
menu. The new folder is created inside the
can be renamed. There are several ways to do
library item you right-clicked on and is
this from the tree list:
initially named Untitled. Type a short,
descriptive name and press Enter. Right-click on the item, select Rename
from the contextual menu, and type a
new name.
Click once on the item, press F2 on your
keyboard and type a new name.
Click once on the item, pause for a
moment, then click a second time and
type a new name.
Library names are case-sensitive and can
contain up to 63 characters. While you can
have more than one library item that uses the
same name, it is best to use short, descriptive
Selecting Library Items and unique names.
To select a library object, folder, or category,
simply click on it.
315
Moving Library Items Library Shortcuts

Folders and objects in the User Catalog can In addition to copying and pasting to create
be moved to new locations within the User new, independent library items, you can copy
Catalog. Folders and library objects are and paste to create Library Shortcuts. Library
always organized alphabetically within each Shortcuts are not independent items - they
hierarchy. are linked to the original item and are
affected if changes are made to the original.
To move an item to a different location,
select it in the tree list, then click and drag it Library Shortcuts are advantageous because
to the new location in the list. Directories and you can place a given library item in multiple
folders able to accept new content highlight locations to suit your organizational style
as your ouse pointer moves over them. without increasing the size of the library
Release the mouse button to relocate the database and without having to maintain
selected library item in the highlighted multiple copies of the same item.
location.
To create a Library Shortcut, copy a library
item to the Windows Clipboard. Then, right-
Copying Library Items click on the location where you would like to
All library folders and library objects can be create a copy and select Paste Shortcut from
copied and pasted to new locations in the the contextual menu. Library Shortcuts use
User Catalog. the same name as their source item but use
There are two ways to copy a library item to the Library Shortcut icon.
the Windows Clipboard: To locate a Library Shortcuts source item,
Right-click on it and select Copy from right-click on it in the tree list and select
the contextual menu. Locate Shortcut Source
Click on the library item and press If you move or delete an item from the
Ctrl + C on your keyboard. library, any shortcuts to it will not be updated
To Paste the item, click on a library catalog or removed. If you try to use a hanging
or folder in the Library Browser tree view shortcut, a message about its status will
and either: display in the library preview panes.
Right-click on the new location and Deleting Library Items

select Paste from the contextual menu.
Press Ctrl + V on your keyboard. The five installed library categories: Home
Designer Suite Core Catalogs, Home
When a library item is copied and pasted, the Designer Suite Bonus Catalogs,
new item that results is independent of the Manufacturer Catalogs, User Catalog, and
original item. If you make changes to it, the Trash cannot be deleted.
original item is unaffected. Similarly,
changes to the original item do not affect the Catalog level folders in all categories can be
copy. deleted; however, individual subfolders and
316
Exporting Library Catalogs
objects can only be deleted out of the User

To empty the Trash , right-click on it and
Catalog.
select Empty Trash from the contextual
Items in the library that are eligible for menu.
deletion can be deleted in either of two ways:
Depending on how much content is in the
Right-click on it and choose Delete from Trash, emptying it can be time consuming.
the contextual menu. You can click the Cancel button to end the
Select it and press the Delete key on your process if you wish.
keyboard.
When items from the User Catalog are The Empty Trash command is both
immediate and permanent. It cannot be
deleted, they are moved to the Library
undone, so use care when using it. You
Browser Trash . Items in the Trash can be should back up all your library files regularly.
retrieved by clicking and dragging them into See Backing up Library Content on page
311.
any location in the User Catalog.
Exporting Library Catalogs

ExportingHome Designer Suite library files Choose the appropriate Save in: loca-
allows you to: tion for your exported library file.
Back up your custom library content. Type a short, descriptive name for your
library file in the File Name field.
Transfer library content between comput-
ers. Click the Save as type: drop down list
and select whether or not you want the
Exportingis often preferable to simply library to include Textures/Images.
copying library files because it allows you to
include images and textures in the exported
If any of the items being exported are
library.
images or use textures, be sure to
select the .calibz file type.
To export content from the library
Click Save.
1. Locate an object, folder, or catalog that
you want to export, right click on it, and 3. Your exported library file can now be
select Library> Export Library. copied to a storage device in Windows
Explorer.
2. In the Export Library Data dialog.
317
Placing Library Objects

Library objects are subject to placement Stand-Alone Objects
restrictions based upon typical real-life
placement. Most library objects require Most library categories contain objects that
sufficient free space at the location where can be selected in the Library Browser and
they are placed, for example, and some placed directly in a 2D or 3D view.
library objects have additional requirements. Most stand-alone objects are designed to
rest on the floor or terrain.
Library windows and doors, for example,
must be placed in a wall just like standard Some objects will rest on top of a cabinet,
windows and doors, and some fixtures are shelf, furniture or roof plane object if one
designed to be placed in cabinets. is located at the point where they are first
placed.
Library symbols have placement restrictions
that are determined when the symbol is A few objects, notably some light fix-
created but can be changed later. See Native tures, will mount on the bottom of a wall
Objects vs Symbols on page 321 and cabinet or on the ceiling.
Symbol Specification Dialog on page 43. In addition, some objects will attach to a
wall if one is nearby.
If a warning message displays when placing
a library object, it will indicate where the
To place a stand alone library object
object can be placed.
There are three main categories of items 1. Click on an object in the tree view or
available in the Library Browser: Selection Pane of the Library Browser to
Stand-alone objects that can be placed select it for placement. See The Library
directly into a plan. Examples include Browser on page 306.
cabinet modules, furnishings and images. 2. Move your cursor into the view area and
3D objects designed to be inserted into notice that it displays an icon indicating
another 3D object. Examples include the type of object selected instead of an
cabinet fixtures, windows and doors. arrow icon.
Some items, such as cabinet doors and 3. Click to place the selected object at that
fixtures and fence panels, can be inserted location.
into another object or placed as stand- 4. Continue clicking to place as many
alone objects. instances of the selected object as
Materials, which cannot stand alone and needed. When you are finished, click the
must be assigned or applied to another Select Objects button.
object.
Once a stand-alone object has been placed, it
can be edited in a variety of ways. See
Editing Library Objects on page 321.
318
Select Library Object Dialog
Inserted Objects 3. Click on the object into which you wish

to insert the selected library item. The
Some objects cannot stand alone and must be library item is inserted into the object.
placed into other objects in a plan. For
example, doors and windows must be 4. Continue clicking to place as many
inserted into a wall, while some appliances instances of the selected item as needed.
and plumbing fixtures must be placed inside When you are finished, click the Select
a base cabinet. See Doors on page 137, Objects button.
Windows on page 153 and Cabinets on
page 235. Assigned Items
An inserted object can only display in a 2D Some library items, such as materials, are not
or 3D view if the object that contains it is set objects in themselves but can be applied to
to display. This is the case even if the objects in a variety of ways.
inserted objects layer is turned on. See
Using the specification dialog of the con-
Displaying Library Objects on page 320.
taining object. See Select Library Object
Dialog on page 319.
To insert a library object
By selecting the item in the library and
1. Click on an object in the tree view or then clicking on the containing object in
Selection Pane of the Library Browser to floor plan view.
select it for placement. See The Library Materials can be assigned to objects
Browser on page 306. directly from the library in 3D views by
2. Move your cursor into the drawing area. by selecting the material and then
clicking on an objects surface. See The
Material Painter on page 326.
Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal specification. See Specification Dialogs on
version of the Library Browser that is page 26.
accessible from object specification dialogs
The Select Library Object dialog only
that display the button. Click this displays categories that are related to the
button to select and apply items from the opened object. For example, this is how the
library to the object currently opened for dialog looks when accessed from the General
tab of the Door Specification dialog:
319
using the Material Painter , two

additional options are available:
Click the Add New Material button

to open the Define Material dialog and
create a new material.
Check Use default material to apply the
default material for the selected object, if
one exists. See Material Defaults on
page 333.
See Materials Tab on page 328 or The
Material Painter on page 326.
To make your selection, highlight the desired
object and click OK, or simply double-click
on the object in the Selection Pane to close
the Select Library Object dialog.
The Select Library Object dialog and its
If the Select Library Object dialog is opened individual panes can be resized , display
by clicking the Select Material button on the the Preview and Selection Panes, and can
Materials tab of any specification dialog or includes the search and search filtering
options.
Displaying Library Objects

The display options available for library view by 2D symbols that resemble the size
objects depend on the type of object in and shape of the object when viewed from
question, as well as the view. above.
If the display of an object is turned off in a As with other architectural objects, the
2D or 3D view, any objects inserted into it display of library objects is controlled by
will not display in that view, either - even if layer in the Display Options dialog. Each
the inserted objects layer is turned on. See library category has its own layer. See
Inserted Objects on page 319. Display Options Dialog on page 55.
In Floor Plan View Object Labels

All library objects except materials, doors Fixtures, Furnishings, Geometric Shapes,
and drawers applied to cabinets, and Hardware, Millwork and Plants can display
backdrops can display in floor plan view. labels in floor plan view when the
Library objects are represented in floor plan appropriate layer is set to display in the
320
Display Options dialog. For example, By default, images rotate to face the camera
fixture labels are placed on the Fixtures, in 3D views. For information about turning
Labels layer. off image rotation, see Image Specification
Dialog on page 413.
In 3D Views
All library objects can display in 3D views.

Like native Home Designer Suite objects, Native Objects vs Symbols
library objects can be customized to suit your
design needs. There are three approaches to In Home Designer Suite, objects created
editing library objects: using the programs standard tools, such as
Select an object in the User Catalog, edit the Door Tools and Cabinet Tools ,
it using any of the options in its contex- are referred to as native objects.
tual menu, and your changes will be On the other hand, objects placed from the
reflected when you next place this library library, such as fixtures and furnishings, are
object in a drawing. symbols. Symbols are typically more limited
Place an object in a drawing and then edit than native objects in how they can be edited.
it using the various edit tools available In addition to the symbols available in the
for it. This will not affect the original library, you can import additional symbols
object still saved in the library. into the program from 3D .obj, .3ds or .skp
Place an object in a drawing, edit it using files. See Importing 3D Symbols on page
the available edit tools, and then add it 425.
back to the library for future use. This
will not replace the original object still Using Edit Handles
saved in the library. See Add to Library
on page 314. Most library symbols are box-based objects
and can be edited as such once placed in a
Library objects placed in a drawing can be drawing. See Editing Box-Based Objects
selected individually or as a group, like other on page 78. Depending on the type of view
objects in Home Designer Suite. See and the surface selected, the edit handles a
Selecting Objects on page 66. symbol displays will vary.
Once selected, library objects can be edited To resize Fixtures and Furniture, you must
in a variety of ways using the edit handles, check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enabled in
the edit toolbar buttons and the specification the Plan Defaults dialog. When this option is
dialog. See Symbol Object Specification checked, these library objects have edit
Dialogs on page 322. handles when selected and can be resized
321
like other objects. See General Plan Deleting Built-in Fixtures

Defaults Dialog on page 47. and Appliances
When a furnishing or fixture symbol is A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
selected in floor plan view or on the top becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other
display. They are the Move handle at the face items in the Cabinet Specification
center, the Rotate handle just outside the dialog. See Front Tab on page 246.
front indicator (a V) and a Resize handle on
each edge and at each corner.
When a symbol is selected on a side in a
The specification dialog for any image,
cross section/elevation or 3D view, it
material, or plant image in the library can be
displays five edit handles: the Move handle
edited from the Library Browser Directory
and a Resize handle on each edge.
Pane. See Specification Dialogs on page
Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are 26.
subject to bumping/pushing behavior when
Specification dialogs are not available for
moved. See Bumping/Pushing on page 86.
native objects saved in the library.

The Fixture, Furniture, Geometric For example, selecting a library object from
Shape, Hardware, and Millwork the Interiors folder and clicking the Open
Specification dialogs all feature the same
Object edit button opens the Furniture
options. The actual name of the dialog is Specification dialog.
determined by the type of object that is
currently selected.
322
General Tab
1
2
1 The Name of the selected object Check Auto Adjust Height if you want
displays here. the object to follow the surface of the ter-
rain when it is placed outside a building.
2 Specification - Define the size and
height above the floor of the object.
3 Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the
Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of objects appearance, so that features on
the object. its left are positioned on its right, and vice
versa. This turns a right-hand refrigerator, for
Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance example, into a left-hand refrigerator. This
from the floor to the bottom of the object. option has no effect on objects that are
A value of zero makes the object rest on symmetrical.
the floor.
If the selected symbol is ceiling mounted, 4 A preview of the library object displays
here and updates with changes.
Height Above Ceiling will be available
instead of Floor to Bottom. Specify the
selected objects height above the ceiling. Materials Tab
Enter a negative value to offset the sym- For information about the settings on this
bol below the ceiling, or uncheck Follow tab, see Materials Tab on page 328.
Ceiling if you prefer to specify the
objects Floor to Bottom height instead. Manufacturer Tab
Click Reset to reset the symbols origi-
If the selected symbol or material is from a
nal, unmodified size. The Floor to Bot-
Manufacturers catalog, the Manufactuers
tom value is not affected by this button.
323
tab lists contact information about the

manufacturer. See Manufacturer Catalogs
on page 311.
324
Chapter 24:
Materials
The objects used in Home Designer Suite a material that suits your needs, you can
have a variety of 3D properties. These customize the materials provided or create
objects - walls, windows, doors, cabinets, your own.
roof planes, lot perimeters, etc. - can have
materials assigned to them so that they look
Redefining only the visual properties of a
realistic in 3D views. These materials can
material may create unexpected results.
also be used to generate materials lists that For example, changing the image of a brick
can help with cost estimations. material to represent siding does not cause
the material to be considered as siding during
Designing with objects that look correct in
material calculations.
3D and calculate properly in the Materials
List requires that you use realistic material
definitions and apply them appropriately to
Chapter Contents
objects in your plan. About Materials
The Material Painter
Home Designer Suite comes with many Materials Tab
materials that are ready for use. From siding, Editing Materials
roofing, flooring, masonry, tile, and paneling, Creating Materials
to grass, water, and wood materials, Home Define Material Dialog
Designer Suite has materials for every Material Defaults
application, inside and out. If you cannot find Color Chooser Dialog
About Materials
The materials that are assigned to objects in roles:
Home Designer Suite perform two important
325
They determine what the surfaces of Textures

objects look like in 3D views.
In Home Designer Suite, materials have
They influence how objects are calculated textures associated with them that determine
in the Materials List. See Materials how they look in 3D views.
Lists on page 441.
Textures are created using special image files
Materials are stored in the Materials library that tile seamlessly when applied to surfaces.
in the Library Browser and can be applied to
objects in either of two ways: In 3D views, you can turn the display of
textures on and off by selecting 3D> Render
Using the Material Painter .
View Options> Toggle Textures .
In an objects specification dialog. See

Select 3D> Materials> Material The Material Painter Object Mode
Painter to access the Material Painter applies a material to all components of an
Tools, which are used to apply materials to object that share the same material assign-
object surfaces in 3D views. ment.
The Material Painter tool can also be The Material Painter Room Mode
activated by selecting a material in the applies a material to all the objects in the
library while a 3D view is active. room that currently have the same mate-
rial. For example, if you apply a material
Material Painter Modes to a dining room chair, this mode applies
the material to all other objects in the
There are five Material Painter Modes. Each
room with the same original material,
mode specifies how broadly or narrowly the
such as other chairs and the dining table.
selected material will be applied to surfaces
in your plan. The Material Painter Floor Mode
The Material Painter Component Mode applies the selected material to all sur-
faces on the floor that currently have the
is the default mode. This applies the
same material. For example, if you apply
selected material to an object component.
a material to the kitchen countertops
Using this tool is the same as opening an
using this mode, the bathroom counter-
object for specification and changing the
tops on the same floor also have the mate-
material for one of its components on the
rial applied.
Materials tab. See Materials Tab on
page 328. The Material Painter Plan Mode
applies the selected material to all sur-
326
faces in the entire plan that currently have To use the Material Painter tool
the same material. For example, if you
have the same carpet on all floors in a 1. Create a 3D view in which the patterned
plan, applying a selected material while material is visible.
this mode is active will change all carpet 2. Select 3D> Materials> Material
on all floors.
Painter> Material Painter .
When the Material Painter tool is 3. Select a solid color material from the
active, the Material Painter Mode toolbar Select Library Object dialog. See
buttons display in the edit toolbar, allowing Select Library Object Dialog on page
you to quickly change modes. 319.
Check Use Default Material at the
bottom left of the dialog to apply the
default material to any object that has a
You can also specify the active mode in the defaults dialog. See Material
3D> Materials> Material Painter Defaults on page 333.
menu. A check displays next to the active 4. Select a Material Painter Mode from the
mode in the submenu. edit toolbar, which displays on the left
side of the program window when the
Material Painter is enabled.
5. Click the Blend Colors With Textures
edit button to turn this feature on or
off depending on your needs.
6. Note that the name of the material being
painted displays on the left side of the
Status Bar at the bottom of the program
Blend Colors With Materials window. See The Status Bar on page
26.
In addition to the Material Painter
Modes, the Blend Colors With Move your pointer over a surface in the
Materials option allows you to apply a solid 3D view. The Status Bar now states
color to a surface displaying a pattern and both the material being painted and the
blend the two. current material on the target surface.
7. Click on the surface to apply the
Blend Colors With Materials works in selected material to that surface. The
all five Material Painter Modes. See material is applied to surfaces in the
Blending Materials on page 330. model based on the active Material
Painter Mode.
When both the Material Painter
and Blend Colors With Textures are
327
active, the cursor displays a paint roller If the Material Painter Room Mode
icon . is active, the selected material is applied
to the entire exterior room. If any walls
When the Material Painter is defining this room also define other exte-
active and Blend Colors With rior rooms, their entire lengths are also
Textures is not, the cursor displays affected.
a spray can icon . If the Material Painter Component

Mode is active, the entire length of
8. If either the Component or Object the individual wall is painted. Other walls
Mode is active, you can continue to defining the exterior room(s) are unaf-
click on surfaces to apply the selected fected.
material. When you are finished, select a
different tool. Material Eyedropper
The Material Eyedropper tool
Material Painter & Walls allows you to load the material
assigned to an existing object and apply that
As a general rule, the Material Painter
material to other objects.
cannot be used to apply a material to an
individual wall. Rather, it applies the In a 3D view, select 3D> Materials> Mate-
material to an entire room, to all the rooms rial Eyedropper and then move your
on the floor, or to all the rooms in the entire mouse pointer over a surface in the view. The
plan, depending on which Material Painter name of the material on that surface is stated
Mode is active. on the left side of the Status Bar. Click on the
There are a couple of exceptions to this rule surface to load its material assignment. The
that apply when the wall surface being pointer then changes to indicate that the
painted faces an exterior room such a porch material is ready to be applied to another
and/or the Exterior Room. See Room object using the Material Painter tool.
Types on page 123. Depending on the currently active Material
Painter Mode, you can continue to apply the
material to the surfaces of other objects.
Materials Tab
The specification dialogs for most objects On the Materials tab, you can specify
include a Materials tab. Select an object or a material assignments for the components that
group of similar objects and click the Open make up that object. When a new material is
Object edit button to open the assigned, the appearance of the preview
specification dialog for that selection. image on the right side of the dialog updates.
328
Editing Materials
The tree list on the left side of the tab lists the Some components contain additional sub-
components of the selected object that can be components, which display separately in the
assigned materials. Some objects may only components tree list.
have a single component while more
complex objects may have many.
1 Select a component in the tree list to 3 Click Select Material to open the
assign a new material to it. Select Library Object dialog. Select a
material and click OK to assign that material
2 The box to the right of the tree list to the selected component. See Select
displays a preview of the texture of the
Library Object Dialog on page 319.
material assigned to the selected component.
If No Texture displays in the preview Select OK to close the dialog and return to
window, either the material has no texture the active view.
assigned or the texture file could not be
found on the system.
Editing Materials
Much like objects, materials in Home changes will be used when you next use
Designer Suite can be edited so that they the material in any plan. Changes made in
better suits your design needs. There are two this manner do not affect materials
approaches to material editing: already in use in a plan.
Select a material in an unlocked library in Apply a material to an object in a plan and
the Library Browser, edit it, and your then edit that applied material using the
329
Adjust Material Definition tool. Adjust Material Definition

Changes made in this way will affect any The Adjust Material Definition tool
instances of that material in the current is useful for changing plan materials
plan only. directly from a 3D view.
Editing the material applied to an object is Select 3D> Materials> Adjust Material
not the same as applying a different material
to that object. See The Material Painter on Definition and then click any surface in
page 326. a 3D view to modify the material currently
assigned to that surface in the Define
Material dialog. See Define Material Dia-
Library Browser
log on page 331.
Right-click on a material in an unlocked
Changing a material definition with this tool
library and select Open from the contextual
affects all objects in the current plan that are
menu to open the Define Material dialog for
using that material but does not affect any
that material. See Define Material Dialog
materials saved in the library or materials
on page 331.
used in other plans. See Adding Library
Content on page 313.
Creating Materials
Home Designer Suite provides a wide variety In the directory pane of the Library Browser,
of materials - including numerous name right-click on an unlocked folder and select
brand material catalogs - that are ready to New> Material from the contextual menu.
download and use. If you cannot find a See Using the Contextual Menus on page
suitable material, you can edit an existing 308.
material or create a new one. See Editing
In the Define Material dialog, you can create
Materials on page 329.
a new material in the selected unlocked
folder. See Define Material Dialog on page
Note: Adding a material to a plan is not the 331.
same as adding it to the library. If you want a
new material to be available for use in other Blending Materials
plans, create it in the Library Browser.
In 3D views, you can create a new
In the Library Browser material by blending a solid color
such as a paint color with a textured material.
Materials can be created in the Library Select 3D> Materials> Material Painter>
Browser, making them available for use in Blend Colors With Materials to toggle this
any plan. See Adding Library Content on feature on or off. See Blend Colors With
page 313. Materials on page 327.
330
Define Material Dialog
The result is a new material that is saved in are applied to. Materials that behave this way
the current plan. are specified as Stretch to Fit in the Define
Material dialog.
Materials created using the Blend Colors
With Materials tool are given the name To display an artwork texture, first place a
of the patterned/textured material with the wall or desk frame in your plan. A selection
extension --PAINTED: followed by the of both are available in the library at
name of the solid color material. Furnishings (Interior)> Interior Accessories>
Mirrors & Frames. See Placing Library
Next, simply apply a material specified as
Stretch to Fit to the center portion of the
frame. See The Material Painter on page
Stretch to Fit 326.
Some special textures, often used for

artwork, stretch across any surfaces that they
Define Material Dialog

The Define Material dialog allows you to
adjust how materials look in 3D views and
can be accessed in a number of ways:
Select a material from the Plan Materials
dialog and click Edit, New, or Copy.
You can also right-click on an unlocked
library and select New> Material.
If you select a manufacturers material, the
options in the Define Material dialog may
change. Some options are not available and
the tabs may vary.
If you access the Define Material dialog
through a menu or specification dialog, your
edits affect that material wherever it is found
in the current plan. Other objects in that plan
that use that material are also affected, but
objects outside the current plan are not.
331
1
7
2
4 8
9
5
10
6 11
1 The Name of the material displays 4 Check Blend Color and Texture to
here. In this field, you can type a new blend the selected texture with a solid
name if you wish. Renaming the material color, then click the Select Color button to
does not create a new material: it redefines specify the color you would like to blend it
the existing material. with.
2 Solid Color - Click this radio button to When a new material is created using the
specify the material as a solid color, Blends Color With Materials tool, the
then click the Select button to open the resulting material has this box checked. See
Windows Color Chooser dialog and select a Blend Colors With Materials on page 327.
new color. See Color Chooser Dialog on
page 334. 5 Specify the Scale for the chosen texture
in inches (mm). If you specify x and y
3 Texture - Click this radio button to values of 30, the pattern repeats every 30
specify a texture for the material inches in both directions along a surface.
instead of a solid color, then click the Select
button to open the Select Texture File Check Stretch to Fit to stretch the texture
dialog, a standard Open File dialog, and image over the entirety of each surface it is
specify an image saved on your computer to applied to. This is useful when you wish to
serve as the texture. create a painting or photo material to display
in a frame. See Stretch to Fit on page 331.
332
Material Defaults
Note: Changing the scale or selecting Stretch

10 Transparency controls the opacity of
the material. A transparency value of 0
to Fit can cause textures to appear distorted if results in a completely opaque material,
they are mapped to a surface using a different while a value of 100 creates a material that is
aspect ratio than they were originally created
with.
completely invisible.
Rotate Angle - Specify how the texture

11 Emissive - Use the slider bar or text
6 field to control how bright a material
is rotated on the surface. appears independent of the lighting in the
scene. It can be used to simulate surfaces that
7 A preview of the current material are glowing with their own light, such as the
displays here.
glass on a light fixture.
8 Brightness - Controls how bright the
material appears relative to other Manufacturer Tab
materials.
If the selected material was copied from the
9 Shininess controls the sheen of the Manufacturer library category, the
material when it is rendered with a Manufacturer tab lists contact information.
point or spot light source on it. Shiny See Manufacturer Catalogs on page 311.
materials such as metal will reflect light
when viewed at the right angle.
Material Defaults
Most objects in the program have Select Edit> Default Settings from the
defaults dialogs which allow you to menu, select Materials, and click the Edit
set up a variety of attributes, including button to open the Material Defaults dialog.
materials, before the objects are created.
Default Settings are accessed by selecting
Edit> Default Settings. See Default
Material Defaults Dialog
Settings on page 45. The settings here are similar to those on the
Materials tab found in object specification
Not all objects, however, have default
dialogs throughout the program. See Mate-
settings that can be accessed prior to being
rials Tab on page 328.
placed. Garage doors, for example, do not
have a defaults dialog. Instead, you can Select a category from the scrollable list.
specify the materials for them in the Material Click the Select Material button or pre-
Defaults dialog. Once a garage door is view box to open the Select Library
created, you can change its materials. Object dialog. See Select Library Object
Dialog on page 319.
333
Color Chooser Dialog

The Color Chooser dialog is opened by
clicking on the color bar that can be found in
many dialogs throughout the program.
3
4
1
5
1 Click in any one of the Base colors 5 Drag the Color Chooser Eyedropper
boxes to select it as the new color. anywhere on your monitor and release
the mouse button to select the color
2 Click in one of the Custom colors displaying at that location.
boxes to either select it as the new color
or to specify it as the box for a new custom
color to be defined. You can select a color from any program
window. Before opening the Color
Chooser dialog, make sure the desired color
3 Click anywhere in the color palette area can be seen onscreen by tiling Home Designer
to dynamically choose a color. The
location of a selected color is identified by a Suite and the other program window.
black crosshairs.
Click anywhere in the vertical bar to 6 Click Add to Custom Colors to add
4 the color to selected Custom Colors
adjust the selected colors darkness. box.
334
Chapter 25:
Zoom & View Tools
Use the Zoom tools to position the current Chapter Contents

view. To work on a specific area, you may Zoom Tools
need to zoom in so that the entire screen is Undo Zoom
filled by only a single room. At other times Fill Window
you may need to view the entire plan. Panning the Display
There is no limit to the number of plan files Swapping Views
that can be open. The name of the file and the Window Menu Tools
type of view displays at the top of each view Cascade
window in its title bar. Tiling Views
Arrange Icons
There are a number of ways to pan across the Closing Views
screen, shifting the visible part of the plan
slightly while still maintaining the same
zoom factor.
Multiple views of one or more open files also
can be arranged and managed using the View
tools.
335
Zoom Tools
Zoom is used to magnify any given Pan Window - Move the display
area on the plan or 3D view. Select without changing the zoom factor. See
Window> Zoom, then click and drag a .
marquee around an area on screen. When
you release the mouse, the selected area Zooming With
expands to fill the screen. the Mouse Wheel
When the zoom is complete, whatever tool Use the mouse wheel to zoom in and
was active prior to selecting the Zoom out in plan and 3D views. Scrolling
tool automatically becomes active again. If the mouse wheel one click up or
down zooms in or out, centering on the
another zoom is needed, click the Zoom
location of your pointer and changing the
tool again.
zoom by about 10%.
Zoom In - Click to zoom in towards
the screen center by a factor of two.
Note: Depending on the configuration of your
Zoom Out - Click to zoom out from mouse, it may be necessary to hold down the
the screen center by a factor of two. Ctrl key while turning the mouse wheel. If
zooming in and out are not working correctly,
Undo Zoom - Reverse the last zoom contact the manufacturer of your mouse and
operation. See . mouse driver for their assistance.
Fill Window - Fits all visible items on

Zooming in 3D Views
screen. See .
Zooming in 3D views does not change the
Fill Window Building Only - Fits all
cameras location or field of view. Instead,
walls and railings on the current floor
the extents of the view are expanded or
on screen.
cropped.
Undo Zoom
Select Window> Undo Zoom to Zoom and Undo Zoom are also
reverse the last zoom operation. available through the contextual menu. See
Contextual Menus on page 25.
Note: Undo and Redo do not affect zoom.
336
Fill Window
Fill Window
In floor plan view or a cross section/ When the drawing sheet is shown, Fill
elevation view, select Window> Fill Window zooms to the sheet borders.
Window or press the F6 key to view nearly
everything on screen that is visible, including
the Reference Display. CAD Points are the
Fill Window Building Only
only objects that are not included when Fill Window> Fill Window Building
Window is used. Only is similar to Fill Window, but
zooms in or out to so that all walls and
If you are zoomed in so that only a portion of
railings in the view fill the current window.
the drawing displays on screen, selecting Fill
Other objects are ignored.
Window zooms out so that the entire
view fits on the screen. If you are zoomed In 3D Views
out so that the entire drawing is smaller than
the screen, selecting Fill Window In 3D views, Fill Window and Fill
zooms in until the drawing fills the screen. Window Building Only adjust the
cameras Field of View is adjusted so that all
surfaces in the 3D view are included.
Panning the Display

There are four ways to pan the display Click the end arrow keys on the scroll
without changing the zoom factor. bars to shift the display in 12" incre-
ments.
Using the Scroll Bars The 12" increment is defined in the Plan
One method is to use the scroll bars on the Defaults dialog under Inches Scrolled
right and bottom edges of the window. by Arrow Key. See General Plan
Defaults Dialog on page 47.
Using the Arrow Keys

In floor plan view, the arrow keys on the
keyboard work exactly like clicking the
arrow buttons on the scroll bar. They shift the
display according to the number of inches
defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
Drag the square button in the bar itself in
order to pan a larger distance.
337
Using the Mouse Using the Pan Window Tool

If you have a wheel mouse, you can pan the The Pan Window tool works much
display by pressing the middle mouse button, like the mouse wheel method.
or wheel, and moving the mouse in the
direction you would like to pan. When the Select Window> Pan Window . The
middle mouse button is held down, the
pointer changes to a hand icon. Click and
pointer changes to a hand icon. drag in floor plan view to pan the window.
The command is invoked once and the pro-
Mouse drivers sometimes have other gram reverts to the previously active tool
functions assigned to the wheel and buttons. when you release the mouse button.
These override the Home Designer Suite
setting.
Swapping Views
There are several ways to switch between Press the Ctrl + Tab (Next Window) or
open view windows. Ctrl + Shift + Tab (Previous Window)
keys to cycle through all open views.
Select Window> Next Window or
A list of all the views currently open is
Window> Previous Window to located at the bottom of the Window
cycle through all open views in the order menu. Each view is identified by its name
you prefer. and what type of view it is. Select one to
go directly to that view.
Window Menu Tools

Select Window from the menu to access the Select Window> Arrange Icons to
Window Menu tools, which help you display arrange all open views that are
multiple view windows of your model at the currently minimized. See Arrange Icons on
same time. page 342.
Select Window> Cascade to cascade Select Window> Next Window to
all open views. See Cascade on switch to the next open view. See
page 339. Swapping Views on page 338.
Select Window> Tile Select Window> Previous Window
Horizontally or Tile Vertically to switch to the previous open view.
to tile all open views. See Tiling Views on See Swapping Views on page 338.
page 341.
338
Cascade
Open View Windows The names of up to eight views can display

here. If more than eight view windows are
There is no limit to the number of plan files open, More Windows is the last item in the
that can be open. The name of the file and the menu. Select this option to open the Select
type of view displays at the top of each view Window dialog.
window in its title bar.
There is no limit to the number of 3D view
windows that you can have open at a given
time; bear in mind, though, that each window
demands use of your computers resources
and that you may see poor performance if too
many views are open. See 3D Views on
page 343.
A list of all view windows currently open
displays at the bottom of the Window menu.
Each view is identified by its name and what
type of view it is. A checkmark is beside the
view that is currently active. Select one to go Select the name of a view from the list and
directly to that view. click OK to make it the active view.
Cascade
Select Window> Cascade to cascade
all open views. Cascade is a Windows
function which allows you to organize open
339
windows in a cascading pattern. Click on any

visible edge to activate that window.
340
Tiling Views
Tiling Views
The window tiling options allow To activate a view, click on its title bar or
you to display multiple views side anywhere in the view window. Note that any
by side in the Home Designer Suite window. changes you make are reflected in other
views as well.
Select Window> Tile Horizontally to
display both views in a horizontal To end window tiling, click the
orientation. Maximize button in the upper right
corner of any open view.
Select Window> Tile Vertically or press
Shift + F6 on the keyboard to display both
views in a vertical orientation.
Tiling allows you to see the results of versa, and can also be useful for copying
changes in floor plan view in 3D or vice objects from one plan to another.
341
Arrange Icons
Arrange Icons is a Windows function bars in a row at the bottom of the working
used when several active windows desktop. You can then click the minimized
have been minimized. Select Window> title bars to reactivate them or use them for
Arrange Icons to align the minimized title swapping and closing views.
Closing Views
Select File> Close or click the at the top view is still needed, swap to a different view
right corner of a window to close it. If the without closing the current views.
342
Chapter 26:
3D Views
Little preparation is needed to create a 3D Chapter Contents

view of a model: simply click a button to OpenGL and Hardware
create an overview or click and drag to create 3D Backdrop Dialog
a camera or cross section/elevation view. Render Quality
To improve the quality of the rendering and 3D View Tools
create a custom look, you can adjust lighting Creating Camera Views
and edit the materials used in the plan. You Creating Overviews
can create Final views that are even more Cross Section/Elevation Views
realistic. See 3D Rendering on page 361. Displaying 3D Views
Editing 3D Views
Many objects can be placed and edited in 3D Cross Section Slider
views, and any camera view or overview can Working in 3D
be saved or even used to record a Saving & Printing 3D Views
walkthrough. See Pictures, Images, & Camera Specification Dialog
Walkthroughs on page 409.
343
OpenGL and Hardware

Home Designer Suite features a built in, easy hardware acceleration and has at least 256
to use rendering engine that makes use of MB of dedicated video memory is highly
OpenGL rendering technology, which has recommended. For complex models, an
good hardware support on most video cards. accelerated card generates quality renderings
in seconds that might otherwise take minutes
To take full advantage of the rendering
or even hours with a non-accelerated card or
capabilities of Home Designer Suite, a
chipset.
graphics card that supports OpenGL
3D Backdrop Dialog
Select 3D> 3D Backdrop from the solid color or picture file of your choice to
menu to open the 3D Backdrop use as a background for 3D views. See 3D
dialog. This dialog allows you to specify a Backdrops on page 350.
5
1
2
3
4
1 A preview of the selected backdrop 2 Click Select Backdrop to open the

displays. See 3D Backdrops on page Select Library Object dialog. Browse
350. the Backdrops library, select a backdrop,
and click OK.
344
Render Quality
3 Click Remove Backdrop to change the Specify which Rendering Techniques

backdrop to a solid color. The color you would like to use the selected back-
used is defined in the Background Color drop in. By default only Standard uses a
section of this dialog. backdrop. See Glass House View on
page 364.
4 Show Backdrop in - Specify where the
selected backdrop image displays.
5 Click the color bar to select the
Specify which View Types you would Background Color that displays when
like to use the selected backdrop in. By a backdrop image is not being used. See
default, only Perspective Camera Views Color Chooser Dialog on page 334.
use a backdrop.
Render Quality
Select Edit> Default Settings to open Final Views or Final Views with
the Default Settings dialog. Select
Render Quality from the list and click the Shadows .
Edit button to open the Render Quality When Synchronize Crosshair with
dialog. Cursor is checked, the mouse pointer
and crosshair always move together on
screen. If you feel that they do not keep
up with your mouse movements, try
unchecking this option.
When Use Enhanced Lighting is
checked, Standard rendered views gener-
ate lighting effects that require a video
card supporting OpenGL 2.0. Uncheck-
ing this box may speed up Standard ren-
dering times somewhat; however, the
quality of lighting effects will be reduced.
Not available if your video card does not
support OpenGL 2.0. See OpenGL and
Move the slider bar to increase or
Hardware on page 344.
decrease the render quality of 3D views.
The description below the slider bar
updates as you move it, indicating the
effects of the selected quality setting.
This setting controls the quality of cam-

era views, but does not affect
345
3D View Tools
Select 3D> Create Camera View to display Overviews
the Camera View Tools.
The Full Overview tool creates views
of the entire model including all
Camera Views
floors, ceilings, and the roof.
The Full Camera tool creates multi-
The Doll House View tool creates
floor views of the 3D model. It can be
views of the current floor without a
used to create interior and exterior
roof or ceiling.
perspectives, and is good for displaying
cathedral ceilings, roofs, lofts, stairwell TheFraming Overview tool creates
openings, and other variation in floor and views of the framing in the model. See
ceiling levels. Framing Overview on page 348.
The Floor Camera tool creates
perspective views of the current floor Cross Section/Elevation Views
only. Nothing above the ceiling surface is Cross Section/Elevation views are similar
generated, and neither is anything below the to the traditional, orthographic views often
floor. used in drafting. See Cross Section/
The Glass House Camera tool Elevation Views on page 348.
creates full camera view of the 3D A Cross Section/Elevation view
model using the Glass House Rendering displays all floors of the model except
Technique. See Glass House View on page floor 0. If the view is created outside the
364. structure looking toward it, the result is an
exterior elevation. If the view is created
inside the structure, or passes through any of
the structure, a cross section is created.
Creating Camera Views

Full and floor camera views are created using 2. Click and drag a line to define the view
the same method. direction.
Where your line begins is the cameras
To create a camera view position.
The line that you drag defines the
1. In floor plan view, select the desired direction the camera is pointed.
camera tool. The mouse pointer displays
The end of the line is the focal point of
the camera icon. the view, the point the camera rotates
around.
346
Creating Overviews
By default, the field of view is 45,

which is similar to what the human eye
sees or a 50mm camera lens.
FOV Indicators
1. Camera
(click)
2. Line of
Sight
(drag)
3. Focal
Point
(release)
3. When you release the mouse button, a 4. Return to the floor plan view. A camera
view generates in a new window. symbol now displays in floor plan view.
See Swapping Views on page 338.
Creating Overviews
Overviews generate as soon as you select the Full Overview
tool and are always created at the same
angle. The focal point is always located at Select 3D> Create Camera View>
the center of the model; however, the Full Overview to generate an exterior
position of the camera will vary depending view of the entire model.
on the size of the 3D model. The larger or
more spread out the model, the further away
the camera will be from the focal point so
that the entire model can be seen in the view.
Once generated, an overview windows title
bar indicates its view type and a camera
symbol representing the overview displays in
floor plan view, The overview camera can
be edited much like regular camera views
can. See Editing 3D Views on page 351.
347
Doll House View Down One Floor . You can also return to
Select 3D> Create Camera View> floor plan view and make another floor
Doll House View to create a drawing current before generating the Doll House
of the current floor with the ceiling removed. View.
Doll House Views are an effective tool for Framing Overview

illustrating traffic flow and the relationships
between spaces. They are also helpful for Select 3D> Create Camera View>
trouble-shooting, since they isolate a single Framing Overview to create a view
floor for review. of the entire model, displaying only framing
and the foundation.
Framing overviews include all floor, wall,
and roof framing as well as foundations.
To see a different floor, select Tools>

Reference Floors> Up One Floor or
Cross Section/Elevation Views

The Cross Section/Elevation tool produces crosshairs marking the position of the
the traditional, orthogonal views often used pointer.
in drafting. Regardless of their distance from Click in floor plan view and drag a line.
the camera, all lines and dimensions in these A Camera symbol displays where you
views are their true lengths, making it easy to click, along with a Cross Section Line
accurately see the spatial relationships of the indicating the plane of a cross sections
3D objects in the model. cut line.
To create a Cross Section/Elevation view 2. Drag in the direction of the Line of Sight
to draw a camera arrow.
Always drag the camera arrow perpen-
1. Select the Cross Section/Elevation
dicular to the wall to be viewed.
tool. The pointer changes to a with
348
Displaying 3D Views
Clip Plane Indicators
1. Camera
(click)
2.Line of
Sight
(drag)
3. Focal
Point
(release)
3. When you release the mouse button, the objects can be selected, moved, stretched, or
view generates in a new window. otherwise modified in a cross section/
elevation view. The 3D model is updated in
If the Line of Sight does not cut through a 3D
all views.
object, such as a window shown in elevation,
the object retains its 3D definition. 3D
Displaying 3D Views
The name of the current plan file and the type In Floor Plan View
of view displays at the top of each view
window in its title bar. Active 3D cameras are represented in floor
plan view using symbols that indicate the
There is no limit to the number of 3D view cameras position, field of view and focal
windows that you can have open at a given point.
time; bear in mind, though, that each window
demands use of your computers resources
and that you may see poor performance if too
many views are open. See Open View
Windows on page 339.
A variety of tools and settings allow you to
control the appearance of your 3D views.
There are also numerous ways to adjust the
position, focal point and field of view of a
3D view. See Editing 3D Views on page Active cameras can have labels indicating
351. the camera. Camera labels are located on the
Cameras, Labels layer. The camera labels
349
are numbered sequentially in the order they Textures

were created.
Select 3D> Toggle Textures in a 3D
Camera symbols are an on-screen reference: view to turn off the display of material
they do not print unless Print Image is used. textures. See About Materials on page 325.
Not available in Glass House Views.
Display Options
Which objects display in a 3D view is Delete 3D Surface
controlled in the Display Options The individual surface of an object
dialog. See Display Options Dialog on can be temporarily removed from any
page 55. 3D view by selecting 3D> Delete Surface
Different view types use different layer sets and then clicking on a surface. When the
when they are created. See Layer Sets on pointer is over a surface, that surface will
page 54. become highlighted.
Surfaces removed in one view are removed
3D Backdrops in all 3D views, but are not permanently
removed from the model. Continue clicking
Backdrop images can be used to add realism
surfaces to remove them, then select another
and a sense of perspective to 3D views. You
tool when you are finished.
can select a backdrop image for a plan file
from the library in either of two ways: Surfaces in 3D views are composed of
In any view, select 3D> 3D multiple triangles. Hold the Alt key while
clicking to delete one triangular face at a
Backdrop to open the 3D Backdrop time rather than all triangles forming a
dialog. See 3D Backdrop Dialog on surface.
page 344.
Select 3D> Delete Surface or click the
In a 3D view, open the Library Browser.
toolbar button to restore the most recently
Browse to and select a Backdrop image,
deleted surface. All surfaces can be restored
then move your cursor into the view win-
by selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/
dow. Click anywhere in the view to apply
Floors/Ceilings or by exiting the 3D view
the selected backdrop.
and reopening it.
Regardless of how it is selected, only one
backdrop can be used in a plan at any given Lighting
time. You can specify which views use the
selected backdrop in the 3D Backdrop dia- Select 3D> Lighting> Adjust Sun-
log. light to open the Default Sun Light
Specification dialog. See Default Sun Light
You can also create your own backdrop Specification Dialog on page 364.
images and import them into the library. See
Adding New Backdrops on page 314. Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sun-
light to turn on and off the light
source that represents the sun. This feature
350
Editing 3D Views
can be used to simulate day vs. night exterior regenerate the 3D view with improved
views. User defined exterior lights are turned quality and/or shadows. See Preview vs
off in day views and turned on in night Final View on page 362.
views. See Default Sun Light on page 363.
Rebuild 3D
Final Views
Select 3D> Rebuild 3D to regenerate
Select 3D> Final View or Final all 3D data asociated with the current
View with Shadows to plan. All open views will remain open.
Editing 3D Views
Once a 3D view is created, there are many
ways to manipulate the camera location, Tile a 3D view and the floor plan view
focal point, and line of site to adjust the view and use the camera movement tools to
on-screen. see how they affect the camera. See Tiling
Views on page 341.
The camera movement tools provide the
ability to pivot the camera in any direction, Using the Contextual Menu
move it perpendicular to the line of sight and
rotate the camera around its focal point. In a 3D view, right-click in an empty space in
which the backdrop or background color
Cameras can be moved in incremental steps displays to access the contextual menu. See
using either the toolbar or the keyboard. Contextual Menus on page 25.
Each time you move the camera, the view is These options are a selection of tools and
updated. If you are using either the toolbar or toggles specific to 3D views.
keyboard to move the camera, you can hold
down the Shift key, suppressing the redraw
of the view until the Shift key is released and
allowing you to move multiple increments
more quickly.

You can make adjustments to a Up One Floor/Down One Floor
camera in the Camera Specification
dialog. This dialog is particularly helpful for You can move a camera to a different floor.
making fine adjustments to the cameras While the camera view is active, select
position and other attributes. See Camera Tools> Reference Floors> Up One
Specification Dialog on page 358. Floor or Down One Floor .
351
The position and movement of a camera is to tilt the camera in any direction while
affected by its location within the model. staying in the same location.
When the camera is outside a building, its
3D Center Camera on Point -
height is relative to the terrain and follows
Allows you to focus the camera at a
the terrain as it is moved. When inside a
particular point in the scene. This also sets
building, the camera height is relative to the
the camera center so that future use of the
floor of the room it is drawn in.
Mouse-Orbit tool rotates around that
If the camera is on an upper floor and you particular point. To use the 3D Center tool,
move the camera outside of the building, the activate the tool and then click any object in
camera remains at the same height relative to the scene.
the floor it was created on.
Move Camera with Arrow Keys
Move Camera with Mouse
You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard
A cameras position can also be edited while to move the camera. The camera direction
the view is active. These tools are not and field of view do not change: only its
available in Cross Section/Elevation views. position.
Select 3D> Move Camera With Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
Mouse to access the Move Camera Keys to access these tools. These tools are
with Mouse modes. not available in Cross Section/Elevation
views.
Click Mouse-Orbit Camera (or use
the hot key Alt + O) then move the Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
mouse to rotate the camera around the Keys> Arrow-Orbit Camera to rotate the
current camera focal point. You can also camera around the current focal point. Use
click in the 3D view, move the mouse, and the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the
release the mouse button to throw the camera.
view. Click again in the view to stop the it
Select 3D> Move Camera with Arrow
from rotating.
Keys> Arrow-Pan Camera to move the
Click Mouse-Pan Camera (or use the camera up, down, right, and left using the
hot key Alt + P) then move the mouse arrow keys.
to move the camera up, down, left and right.
Click Mouse-Dolly Camera (or use Keys> Arrow-Dolly Camera to move the
the hot key Alt + D) then move the camera forward and back using the up and
mouse to move the camera forward and down arrow keys, and side to side using the
backward by moving the mouse up and left and right arrow keys.
down. It also allows you to turn the camera
left and right in the same way.
Keys> Arrow-Tilt Camera to use the arrow
Click Mouse-Tilt Camera (or use the keys to tilt the camera any direction at the
hot key Alt + T) then move the mouse same location.
352
Editing 3D Views
Move Camera Tools rotate past the focal point using this tool. You
can also use the hot key I.
Select 3D> Move Camera to access
these tools. These tools reposition the Move Camera Out - Move the
camera, while keeping the direction of the position of the camera away from the
field of view in the same place. These tools focal point along the line of sight. You can
are not available in Cross Section/Elevation also use the hot key O.
views. Orbit Camera Upward - Rotate the
Move Camera Forward - Moves the camera up about the focal point. The
camera and the focal point forward. camera does not rotate past the vertical line
You can also use the hot key F. going up from the focal point.
Move Camera Back - Moves the Orbit Camera Downward - Rotate

camera and the focal point back. You the camera down about the focal
can also use the hot key B. point. The camera does not rotate below the
vertical line going down from the focal point.
Move Camera Left - Moves the
camera and the focal point to the left Orbit Camera Left - Rotate the
in a line perpendicular to the line of sight. camera to the left about the focal
You can also use the hot key L. point.
Move Camera Right - Moves the Orbit Camera Right - Rotate the
camera and the focal point to the right camera to the right about the focal
in a line perpendicular to the line of point.
sight.You can also use the hot key R.
Tilt Camera Tools
Move Camera Up - Moves the
camera and the focal point up.You can Select 3D> Tilt Camera to access
also use the hot key U. these tools. Tilting keeps the camera
in one place and pivots the camera about its
Move Camera Down - Moves the
vertical or horizontal axis. This movement is
camera and the focal point down. You
similar to tilting your head up and down or
can also use the hot key D.
turning it side-to-side. These tools are not
available in Cross Section/Elevation views.
Orbit Camera Tools
Tilt Camera Upward - Tilts the
Select 3D> Orbit Camera to access camera up while keeping it in the
these tools. Orbiting the camera same location. The camera does not tilt
rotates the camera about the focal point. beyond the vertical position.
These tools are not available in Cross
Section/Elevation views. Tilt Camera Downward - Tilts the
camera down while keeping it in the
Move Camera In - Move the position same location. The camera does not tilt
of the camera closer to the focal point beyond the vertical position.
along the line of sight. The camera does not
353
Turn Camera Left - Turns the Zooming

camera to the left while staying in the
same location. The Zoom Tools are available in all
3D views. See Zoom Tools on page
Turn Camera Right - Turns the 336.
camera to the right while staying in
the same location. Selecting Window> Zoom In , Zoom
Out or Fill Window does not change
Keyboard Camera Movements the cameras location or field of view.
Camera movement in 3D views can be Instead, the extents of the view are expanded
controlled using the keyboard. These hotkeys or cropped.
are not available in Cross Section/Elevation
views. Field of View
F - Move forward. The Field of View refers to a cameras field
of vision. A wider field of view makes the
B - Move backward.
focal point appear further away, as more of
U - Move up. the image is included in the same view
window.
D - Move down.
In floor plan view, the angled lines of a
L - Move left.
camera symbol indicate its field of view.
R - Move right.
FOV Indicators
I - Move inward along the line of sight.
O - Move outward along the line of sight.
W - Increase camera Field of View.
N - Decrease camera Field of View.
Left or Right Arrow - The program

remembers the mode you selected under 3D>
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are
in a view that does not support the mode you A cameras field of view can be adjusted in
selected, the arrow keys move the screen the Camera Specification dialog. See
right or left. Camera Specification Dialog on page 358.
Up or Down Arrow - The program The field of view can also be adjusted while
remembers the mode you selected under 3D> in a camera view by pressing the W key to
Move Camera with Arrow Keys. If you are increase the field of view or the N key to
in a view that does not support the mode you decrease the field of view.
selected, the arrow keys move the screen up
or down.
354
Cross Section Slider
Using the Edit Handles Drag the Line of Sight handle to change
the camera angle without moving the
Return to floor plan view without closing the focal point.
3D view. See Swapping Views on page
338. Drag the Move handle to relocate the
camera while maintaining its relative
Using the Select Objects tool, select the angle.
camera object. When a camera symbol is Drag the Focal Point handle to reposition
selected it displays four edit handles. the camera, the focal point, and line of
sight.
Drag the Rotate handle to rotate the cam-
Line of Sight
eras line of sight about its center.
Drag the smaller Move Label handle to
move the label.
Move
The 3D view corresponding to the camera
symbol reflects changes made to the symbol
Focal Point in floor plan view.
Rotate Multiple camera symbols can also be

selected; however, their editing options are
limited to being moved, rotated, and deleted.
Cross Section Slider

Select 3D> Cross Section Slider Choose one of the cross section angles and
when a camera view or overview is move the Position slider to adjust the
active to open the Cross Section Slider position of the cutting plane. Select the
dialog. option at top right to turn off the cutting
plane.
355
Working in 3D
A variety of tools are available in 3D views Selecting and Editing
that allow you to edit your 3D model. Objects in 3D Views
Creating Objects in 3D Views Most objects can be selected and edited in
3D views. Select Edit> Select Objects
You can place windows, doors, and most
and click on the surface of an object to select
library objects directly into 3D views. To do
it. Once selected, objects can be edited using
this, select the appropriate tool and click in
their edit handles, buttons on the edit toolbar,
the 3D view. You can then edit the objects
and the objects specification dialog. See
size and placement.
When created in 3D, most objects must be
When you select an object, edit handles and a
placed against a wall, on a floor platform, or
handle surface display. The handle surface is
within the Terrain Perimeter.
a rectangle around the perimeter of the object
You can also click and drag to draw some that indicates the overall height and width of
objects such as terrain features and road, in the selected surface. The edit handles that
camera views and overviews views. display depend on the type of object selected.
Walls, for example, display two resize edit
handles when selected while a slab displays
ten handles, allowing you to move, resize
and reshape it.
356
Saving & Printing 3D Views
views or overviews. See Cross Section/

Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room Elevation Views on page 348.
is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed. When several 3D views are open, changes
See Floor and Room Defaults on page 120. made in the plan automatically rebuild the
model in all views. Because of this, it is
All moving or resizing is in the plane of the typically faster to make changes to your plan
handle surface. You cannot move an object with as few windows open as possible.
directly towards or away from the camera,
for example, because that surface plane Editing Materials in 3D Views
cannot be seen in the view.
Select 3D> Materials> Adjust
By default, object movement is restricted to Material Definition, then click on a
one inch or 10 mm increments. See Grid surface in the 3D view to open the Define
Snaps on page 59. Material dialog for that material. See Adjust
Unrestricted positioning can also be enabled Material Definition on page 330.
by holding down the Ctrl key while moving Select 3D> Materials> Material
or resizing an object. See Unrestricted Painter to apply materials to surfaces
Movement on page 86. in the view using the Material Painter Tools.
When Fixtures and Furniture May Be See The Material Painter on page 326.
Resized is unchecked in the Plan Defaults Select 3D> Materials> Material
dialog, only a single handle displays for Eyedropper to apply the material on
furniture and stand-alone fixtures and a surface in the view to other surfaces in the
appliances. In this case, the object can only view. See Material Eyedropper on page
be moved. See General Plan Defaults 328.
Dialog on page 47.
Temporary dimension lines display when Rebuild 3D
many objects are selected to help you resize
As changes are made to your plan, a
the object and determine its height.
3D view automatically updates to
Because cross section/elevation views are reflect any changes visible in the view. If you
orthogonal and display objects at their actual find that a view is not updating as expected,
dimensions, they are sometimes more select 3D> Rebuild 3D to rebuild the entire
suitable for editing objects than camera 3D model.
Saving & Printing 3D Views

3D camera views, overviews and cross saved outside of Home Designer Suite, as
section/elevation views can be saved with the well as printed.
plan in which they are created, exported and
357
Saving 3D Views Exporting 3D Views

Select 3D> Save Active Camera to All 3D views can be exported and
save the current camera in the plan. saved as .bmp, .jpg, .png, or .tif files.
Saved camerascan be closed and re-opened Select File> Export> Picture to save the
for later use. current screen image as an image file. See
To export a picture on page 414.
You can also save a camera view by checking
the Saved box in the Camera Specification Once saved, a picture can be opened and
dialog. See Camera Specification Dialog converted into many other formats using a
on page 358. graphics program.
When a picture is exported, it is assigned the
When a view is saved, its 2D symbol is same size as it displays on screen. You can
placed on the Cameras, Inactive layer change the size of the view window to create
in the Display Options dialog. See Display a smaller or bigger picture.
Printing 3D Views
Activating Saved Views
Since 3D views are created using
There are three ways to open a saved 3D pixels instead of lines, File> Print>
view: Print Image must be used when printing.
Select the camera symbol in floor plan Print Image is a special Home Designer
Suite function that prints the screen in picture
view and click the Open View edit
format. The entire view prints, including
button.
images such as plants and textures.
Double-click the camera symbol using
The quality of your print image is affected by
the Select Objects tool. your current window size and screen
Right-click on it and select Open View resolution. To maximize the quality of your
from the contextual menu. printed image, generate it in full screen size
and use the maximum screen resolution.
Unsaved cameras that are open in another
view window can also be activated by
clicking the Open View edit button.
Camera Specification Dialog

The Camera Specification dialog can This dialog can also be accessed while a
be accessed in floor plan view by camera view or overview is active by
selecting a camera symbol and clicking the selecting 3D> Edit Active Camera .
Open Object edit button. See In Floor Plan
View on page 349.
358
Camera Specification Dialog
The selected views specific type is indicated forwards or backwards. For interior
in the dialogs title bar: the specification views a small number is good, but for
dialog for a Full Camera , for example, exterior you may want a larger increment.
is named Full Camera Specification. The Incremental Rotate Angle defines
how many degrees the camera rotates
each time you direct it to. A setting of 90
would make one full rotation in four
moves.
The Height Above Floor defines the
height that the camera is above the floor
level for the current floor.
The Field of View defines the cameras
field of vision in angular degrees. See
Field of View on page 354.
You can increase a cameras Field of

View when the view is active by press-
ing the W key, or decrease the Field of View
Some settings only affect some types of
by pressing the N key.
views. Depending on the type of camera
view selected, not all the settings may be
The Tilt Angle determines the angle the
editable.
camera is tilted. The camera maintains its
To change a setting, first uncheck Default, focal point and position in floor plan
then type a new value in the text field. view, but if the camera is tilted, the focal
The Incremental Move Distance con- point is above or below the current cam-
trols how many inches the camera moves era height.
each time you direct it to move right, left,
359
360
Chapter 27:
3D Rendering
There are a variety of tools available to views, you can create Final views of even
create 3D views of a model: simply click a higher quality.
button to create an overview, or click and
drag to create a camera or cross section/ Chapter Contents
elevation view. See 3D Views on page 343. Rendering Tips
To improve the quality of the rendering and Lighting
create a custom look, you can adjust lighting, Displaying Lights
edit the materials used in the plan, choose Default Sun Light Specification Dialog
from several rendering techniques and fine- Glass House View
tune 3D view quality settings. From most 3D Speeding up 3D View Generation
Rendering Tips
There are a variety of factors which affect the small changes to light intensity, direction and
appearance and quality of rendered 3D color can have a large impact on image
views. You can use these tools and settings to quality. See Lighting on page 362.
achieve renderings that meet your needs.
Material Textures
Lighting
Textures are graphic files that represent
Lighting is extremely important in most 3D irregular surfaces of objects such as carpet,
renderings. Lighting controls the visibility of bricks, tile, and wood in 3D views. Textures
objects in a view, affects the appearance of are assigned to materials which in turn are
surfaces, and influences the appearances of assigned to objects. See Textures on page
colors and textures on those surfaces. Even 326.
361
The display of materials in 3D views is Backdrops and background colors are

controlled by settings in the Define Material selected in the 3D Backdrop dialog. See 3D
dialog. See Define Material Dialog on Backdrop Dialog on page 344.
page 331.
You can drag and drop a backdrop directly
Brightness, shininess and transparency into a 3D view from the Library Browser.
control how light sources affect the display Select a backdrop from the upper pane of the
of surfaces in 3D views. See Lighting on Library Browser, notice that the pointer
page 362. changes in the 3D view ( ) to indicate that
If no texture is selected for a material or if a backdrop is loaded for placement, and then
the display of textures is turned off, affected click in the view to apply the selected
surfaces are a solid color instead. backdrop.
Images Preview vs Final View

Images are very important for the appearance When a rendered 3D view is first created, it
of 3D views. Images are picture files that uses quality settings that allow the view to
represent individual objects such as trees, generate quickly but with reasonable quality.
flowers, cars, and people. See Placing
Images on page 410. Final Views produce much higher quality
images that are more suitable for printing or
saving as graphics files. Final Views often
Backdrops
take significantly longer to generate than
Backdrops are images that display in the Previews, so the 3D view reverts back to the
background of 3D views. Only one backdrop Preview settings as soon as anything is
can be used at a time. If a backdrop is not changed within the view.
applied, Home Designer Suite applies a
When you have finished making adjustments
background color.
in the 3D view, select 3D> Final View or
Final View with Shadows .
Lighting
In 3D views, lighting is calculated on a all the other exterior lights to simulate night
room-by-room basis; only the light sources time views.
in the room containing the camera are used.
The maximum number of light sources that
When the camera is outside a building, the can be turned on in a view at the same time is
program normally uses sunlight for lighting determined by your video card. If your video
calculations and turns off all other light cards maximum number of lights is eight,
sources. You can turn the sunlight off and use the program only uses the eight light sources
closest to the cameras position.
362
Displaying Lights
There are three ways to create light sources Light Fixtures

for 3Dviews:
An electric symbol that represents a Light
Default Lights Fixture has a light source associated with it.
Light Fixtures When a light is placed in a room, it will be
Sunlight used as a light source in 3D views instead of
the Default Light. In large rooms, more than
one light fixture may be needed for sufficient
Default Lights
light.
If you create an interior 3D view of a room
and no lights have been placed there, the Default Sun Light
program creates a Default Light source
within that room. The Default interior light If you create an exterior 3D view, the
acts like a central point light source. program creates a Default Sun light source.
The Default Light cannot be adjusted in any The Default Sun can be opened for
way. If you want to control the light in an specification in a 3D view by selecting 3D>
interior 3D view, you must add a light to the Lighting> Adjust Sunlight . See
room that you are rendering by placing a Default Sun Light Specification Dialog on
lighting fixture. page 364.
Select 3D> Lighting> Toggle Sunlight

turn the Default Sun on or off to simulate
either daytime or nighttime exterior lighting.
Displaying Lights
The display of light fixtures in floor To turn a light on or off
plan and 3D views is controlled in the
There are several ways to turn a light
fixtureon or off:
Select one or more fixtures and click the
In addition, they can serve as sources of light
in rendered 3D views. They can be turned on Turn Light(s) Off in 3D or Turn
and off, as well. Light(s) On in 3D edit button.
Light fixtures are placed on the Electrical
layer. See Displaying Objects on page 54.
In floor plan view, light fixtures can display
labels when the Electrical, Labelslayer is
turned on.
363
Default Sun Light Specification Dialog

The Default Sun Light Specification dialog the sun light off. An intensity of 100% is
allows you to control the intensity, direction the maximum brightness allowed.
and color of the Default Sun light source. Click the Color bar to define the color of
While in a 3D view, select 3D> Lighting> the light being modeled. Colored sun
light may be used to achieve special
Adjust Sunlight . See Default Sun
lighting effects, but may alter the appear-
Light on page 363.
ance of your material colors and textures.
Specify the Tilt Angle, which is the angle
of the sun light with respect to the hori-
zon. A value of 90 means that the light
points straight up, while a value of -90
means that the light points straight down.
0 is parallel to the horizon.
Specify the Direction Angle, which is
the direction that the sun light points
toward. Zero degrees is measured hori-
zontally on screen, pointing to the right.
Intensity - Use the slider bar or text field Positive values rotate in a counter-clock-
to control how bright the default sun light wise direction from there, while negative
appears in 3D views. values rotate clockwise.
The Default Sun light color is pure white,
An intensity of 0% is the same as turning
which has the least effect on the material
colors and textures.
Glass House View

Glass House View can be used to You can display a current camera view or
display the 3D model using semi- overview as a Glass House View by selecting
transparent surfaces. Different shades of blue 3D> Rendering Techniques> Glass
are used to represent surfaces and surface House . To switch back, select 3D>
edge lines. Lighting is not modeled, and
materials are not represented, so neither Rendering Techniques> Standard .
pattern lines nor textures are used.
Glass House View is an excellent way to
Glass House Options
illustrate the spatial relationships between You can modify the appearance of
different areas in the plan. Glass House Views by selecting 3D>
364
Speeding up 3D View Generation
Rendering Techniques> Glass House Click the Color bar to select a color for
Options. the semi-transparent surfaces and lines in
a Glass House view. See Color Chooser
Dialog on page 334.
Specify the Transparency of the surfaces
in Glass House view. For example, to cre-
ate a wireframe line drawing of your
structure, turn transparency to full and
minimize line thickness.
Specify the Line Thickness of surface
lines in Glass House view.
Click Reset to Defaults to restore the
default settings used when the Glass
House view was first created.
Speeding up 3D View Generation

Depending on the speed of your processor, display of unneeded objects in 3D views can
how many cores your processor has, and speed up 3D view generation time. See
your computers video memory, a 3D view Display Options Dialog on page 55.
may generate in a few seconds or less.
When you have a large, complex model with Halt Generation with Esc Key
a lot of detail, it may take a few minutes to Using the Esc key, you can interrupt the
generate a 3D view of everything in the modeling process at any point and display
model. During this process, progress the incomplete model as is. This is
information may display in the Status Bar particularly helpful when you just need to
and in a message window. reorient a model on the screen for a specific
There are several ways to speed up the angle or view.
generation time of views. The Esc option allows you to place the view
quickly, then press the F5 function key to
Turn Off Layers refresh the display with all 3D faces intact.
The display of objects in 3D views
can be turned on or off by layer in the
Display Options dialog. Turning off the
365
366
Chapter 28:
Dimensions
Home Designer Suite provides a variety of Chapter Contents

dimensioning tools for measuring walls, Dimension Unit Defaults
doors, windows, and many other objects. Dimension Defaults Dialog
Dimensions can be used to accurately The Dimension Tools
position objects relative to other objects. In Displaying Dimension Lines
addition, dimension lines and extensions can Editing Dimension Lines
be selected and customized. Editing Extension Lines
Moving Objects Using Dimensions
Dimension Line Specification Dialog
Dimension Unit Defaults

All plan files save measurements in either created and cannot be changed later. See
Imperial or metric units. The type of unit Creating a New Plan on page 35.
used is determined when the file is first
Dimension Defaults Dialog

In floor plan view or a cross section/ The settings in this dialog are dynamic
elevation view, select Edit> Default defaults, which means that any changes
Settings, select Dimension, and click the made here may affect existing dimension
Edit button to access the Dimension lines in the drawing that are using default
Defaults dialog. values. See Dynamic Defaults on page 46.
367
Setup Tab
1 Specify how Manual and Auto Exterior Select Centers to have exterior dimen-
Dimension lines locate both interior sions locate the centers of interior walls.
and exterior walls.
Select Surfaces to have dimensions
locate the outer surfaces of walls.
Dimensions locating an intersecting walls center
Select Both Wall Sides to have dimen-

sions locate both sides of interior walls.
Dimensions locating wall Surfaces
Either the wall Surfaces or both sides of
Select Main Wall Layer to have dimen- the Main Wall Layers will be located,
sions locate the structural layer of exte- depending on your selection above.
rior walls.
Dimensions locating an interior walls

Main Wall Layer
Dimensions locating walls Main Wall Layers
You can always change the object or surface
2 Specify how Manual and Auto Exterior that a dimension locates after it has been cre-
Dimension lines locate interior walls.
ated. See Editing Extension Lines on page
374.
368
Dimension Defaults Dialog
Format Tab
The settings on the Format tab allow you to the Status Bar. See The Status Bar on page
specify the units, degree of accuracy and 26.
position of dimension numbers.
The settings on this tab also control the
format of numbers indicating object length in
1 Specify the numbering Format for 2 Specify the Location of dimension

dimension numbers. numbers relative to the dimension line.
Select the Units of measurement to be Center primary dimension numbers on
used by dimensions from the drop-down the dimension line. If two formats are
list. used, the primary format is placed above
Check Unit Indicators to display the unit the line and the secondary format,
of measurement along with the dimen- beneath it.
sion number. Position dimension numbers Above
Check Leading Zeros to include the zero Line.
before a decimal less than 1 or to display Position dimension numbers Below Line.
0 or 0 when the ft-in or - unit formats
are used. 3 Specify the degree of Accuracy used
by dimension numbers.
Check Trailing Zeros to display trailing
Select the Decimal Places radio button
zeros at the end of decimal values.
for dimension numbers in decimal for-
369
mat. In the text field, specify the number Text StyleTab

of decimal places to use, from 0 to 20. If
0 is used, no decimal places are used. The settings on the Text Style tab control the
size, font and other attributes of automatic,
Select the Smallest Fraction radio but- manually drawn, and temporary dimension
ton for dimension numbers using whole line labels. See Dimension Labels on page
numbers and fractions. In the text field, 372.
specify the largest denominator to use,
from 1 to 128. If 1 is entered, whole num- For information about the settings on this
bers are used. tab, see Text Style Tab on page 389.
Temporary dimension labels always use the
Arrow Tab color assigned to their layer - not the color
For information about the Arrow tab, see specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
Arrow Tab on page 395.
The Dimension Tools

Select CAD>Dimension to access the Manual Dimensions
Dimension Tools. Dimensions are To display the distance between two
drawn by clicking and dragging like other objects, select CAD>Dimension>
line-based objects and can be drawn in floor Manual Dimension and drag a dimension
plan view. line near or through the objects.
The zoom factor of the current view affects Manual Dimensions locate walls as specified
whether objects drawn close together are in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
dimensioned or not. If you try to dimension Dimension Defaults Dialog on page 367.
an array of objects but the dimension line
locates only the first and last objects along its
End-to-End Dimensions
path, Zoom in on the objects and try
again. Similarly, if you want to dimension Use the End-to-End Dimension tool
between two objects but the dimension to dimension between any two defined
locates unwanted objects between them, objects in floor plan view.
Zoom out. See Zoom Tools on page Select CAD> Dimension> End-to-End
336. Dimension , then drag the dimension
Once created, both manually drawn and from the first object to the second object. The
automatically generated dimension lines can dimension line snaps to each object, ignoring
be selected and edited. See Editing any other objects located between either end.
Dimension Lines on page 372.
370
The Dimension Tools
Interior Dimensions Temporary Dimensions

Draw Interior Dimension lines Temporary Dimensions display when an
parallel to walls in floor plan view to object is selected and show the distance
create interior dimensions. between the objects selected edge and other
objects.
The Interior Dimension tool locates
interior wall surfaces only. It does not As with other dimension lines, Temporary
dimension between layer surfaces in the Dimensions only locate objects that are
same wall, and it does not locate walls unless parallel or nearly parallel to one another.
it actually intersects them. They will also locate the endpoints of CAD
lines and the corners of objects located past
the end of the selected edge, within 4 feet
Auto Exterior Dimensions (1200 mm) of the point where you click to
The Auto Exterior Dimension tool select the object.
generates dimensions around a plans
A temporary dimension will not display
exterior in floor plan view.
when an object is selected if a manually
drawn dimension line is already present that
Auto Exterior Dimensions do not gener- shows the same information.
ate properly if there is a gap in the exte-
rior walls. For example, sometimes angled
walls may not connect properly.
Tape Measure
Use the Tape Measure tool to draw a
Auto Exterior Dimension locate walls temporary dimension line between
as specified in theDimension Defaults any two points in the drawing area. The tool
dialog. See Dimension Defaults Dialog on will place temporary markers at the start and
page 367. end points of the dimension line. These
points and the line both disappear when you
If you edit an Auto Exterior Dimension release the mouse button. If an object is
line, it will be converted to a manual located by the temporary line, you can snap
dimension, so if Auto Exterior Dimensions to it.
are later regenerated, your changes will not
be lost. The Tape Measure tool can be used in
cross section/elevation views as well as in
There are a maximum of three rows of floor plan view. See Cross Section/
automatically generated dimensions per Elevation Views on page 348.
exterior wall direction. The innermost
dimension line locates exterior walls, interior
walls, and all openings in exterior walls. The
second dimension line locates exterior and
interior walls. The outermost dimension line
is the overall exterior dimension.
371
Displaying Dimension Lines

The display of dimension lines is controlled If a manual dimension line is on a layer that
in the Display Options dialog. See is turned off and you select an object located
Displaying Objects on page 54. by that dimension line, it will display for
reference in grey.
Dimension lines created by any of the
dimension tools share the same components.
Dimension Labels
Dimension Lines run parallel with the
distance being measured. Manually drawn, automatic and temporary
dimension labels use the Text Style specified
Extension Lines are perpendicular to
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. Unlike
dimension lines, indicating what they
many objects that use Text Styles, by default
locate. If a dimension line locates more
dimensions use a Text Style specified in the
than two objects, extension lines divide
defaults dialog rather than the Text Style
the dimension line into segments.
assigned to their layer. See Text Styles on
Arrowheads display at the intersections page 388 Text StyleTab on page 370.
of dimension and extension lines.
Dimension Labels display at the mid- Dimension Arrowheads
point of dimension line segments and
You can specify the style, color and size of
indicate the distance that each segment
dimension arrows in the Manual Dimension
measures.
Defaults and Dimension Line Specification
dialogs. See Arrow Tab on page 395.
Dimension Extension Lines
Labels The arrow at the end of a dimension line will
not display if it is close enough to to another
dimension arrow that the two will overlap. A
typical example of this is where two sections
of an Interior Dimension locate two sides of
an interior wall.
Arrowheads
Editing Dimension Lines

With the exception of Temporary dimension line and will not be deleted and
Dimensions, dimension lines can be selected replaced the next time the Auto Exterior
and edited using the mouse and the edit Dimensions tool is used.
toolbar buttons.
Dimension line numbers and extension lines
If an Auto Exterior Dimension line is edited, can be individually selected, moved and
it will no longer be considered an automatic
372
Editing Dimension Lines
deleted, and new extension lines can be changes to a four-headed arrow when
added. See Editing Extension Lines on moved over this handle.
page 374.
The Move handle is located where you
clicked to select the dimension line and is
Using the Mouse used to move the entire dimension line,
When a dimension line is selected, its edit including any subsections, perpendicular
handles can be seen. There are four types of to itself. Extension lines are resized as
dimension line edit handles. More than one appropriate. The pointer changes to a
of some types display, depending on how two-headed arrow when moved over
many extension lines are present. this handle.
The Rotate handle is located one plan
Rotate foot past the end of the dimension line
and is used to rotate the dimension line.
Extension Line

Dimension lines can be repositioned, copied,
and deleted using the edit toolbar buttons just
Move like other objects in the program can. See
The Edit Toolbar on page 24.
Add Extension
Line
Dimension Number Size
Extension Line The initial size of dimension numbers is
specified in the Dimension Defaults dialog.
The Extension Line handles mark the See Dimension Defaults Dialog on page
location being dimensioned and are used 367.
to move or delete extension lines. See
Moving Extension Lines on page 375. You can specify number height for individual
dimension lines in the Dimension Line
The Add Extension Line handle displays Specification dialog. See Dimension Tab
to the side of the Move handle and is used on page 377.
to add extension lines to the dimension
line. Dimension lines do not extend As with text and other objects, dimension
unless an object can be located. See number size is subject to scaling when or
Adding Extension Lines on page 374. printed.
The small, square Move Dimension
Label handle is located at the center of Copying and Pasting
the selected label. Use this handle to Dimension Lines
move the dimension number for each Dimension lines can be copied and pasted
dimension line section. The pointer into any view type that supports dimensions.
373
If a dimension line is copied independent of Individual dimension line segments located

the objects it originally locates, the pasted between extension lines can also be deleted.
dimension line will locate point markers. If a segment is located between two other
segments along the same dimension line, that
Deleting Dimension Lines dimension will be broken in two.
There are several ways to delete dimension To delete a portion of a dimension line
lines.
You can select any manual or automatic 1. Select any Dimension Tool aside from
dimension line or group of dimension lines, Auto Exterior Dimensions.
then press the Delete key or click the 2. Click and drag a manual dimension line
Delete edit button to delete it. See over the segment that you wish to
Deleting Objects on page 91. remove, dragging from extension line to
extension line.
The Delete Objects dialog allows you to
delete all dimension lines at once. See
Delete Objects Dialog on page 91.
Editing Extension Lines

Extension lines can be added, edited, and
deleted using the mouse.
Adding Extension Lines
To add an extension line
1. Select the dimension line.

2. Click the diamond-shaped Add Exten-
sion Line edit handle which displays 4. Release the mouse button to add an
near the Move edit handle. The pointer extension line.
changes to a two-headed arrow .
3. Drag the handle to the object that you
want to locate with a new extension han-
dle. This example adds an extension line
to the window edge.
374
Editing Extension Lines
Moving Extension Lines

Not all library symbols can be located
Extension lines can be moved to locate the by a dimension line as it is drawn. Once
centers, sides, or surfaces of most objects. In a dimension is drawn, however, you can
this example an extension line is moved from move or add an extension line to locate the
the windows edge to the center. library object.
To move an extension line Deleting Extension Lines

When an extension line is deleted, the
1. Select the dimension line it is connected
remaining dimensions update. If a dimension
to, not the extension line itself.
line hasonly two extension lines, they cannot
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle. be deleted.
The pointer changes to a two-headed
arrow . To remove an extension line
1. Select the dimension line it is connected

to, not the extension line itself.
2. Click the Extension Line edit handle.
3. Drag the handle to a new location. The

extension line snaps to possible marks as
the handle is moved.
4. Release the mouse button at the new
location. 3. Drag it perpendicular to the direction of
the arrows, away from any dimension-
able object, and release the button when
the extension line disappears.
375
Moving Objects Using Dimensions

Most objects can be moved by changing an If the dimension describes a selected
automatic, manual or temporary dimension walls length, the Move Start, Move
value that locates it. This technique can be End and Move Both Ends buttons dis-
applied in nearly any situation where play to the right instead.
dimensions are present. See Moving
Objects on page 86. Move Start Move End
In addition, some objects can be resized
using dimensions. See Resizing Objects on
page 88.
Move Both Ends
Your pointer indicates which dimensions can
be used to relocate the selected object by 2. Click the Move button of your choice.
changing to a pointing hand icon. 3. Enter a new value in text field.
Another way to tell is to select an object and To use a different unit, include its indi-
drag it in the desired direction. As you drag, cator after the value.To move the
note which dimensions update. These selected object past a second object, to
dimensions are the dimensions that can be its opposite side, enter a negative
used to move that object. value.
4. The selected object moves or resizes
To move an object using dimensions when you press the Enter key or click
outside of the text field.
1. Select the object and click on a dimen-
sion line that locates it. An inline text To resize an object using dimensions
field opens at the location where you
clicked. 1. Select the object along the edge that you
The actual distance displays in the text would like to move. See Selected
field. Edge on page 66.
If the dimension is locating two differ- 2. Click on a dimension line that indicates
ent objects, the Move Edge and Move its distance from the objects opposite
Entire Object buttons display to the side.
right of the text field. 3. In the inline text field, enter a value.
Move Edge (selected) 4. Click Move edge to move the selected
edge only.
5. The selected edge moves, resizing the
object, when you press the Enter key.
Move Entire Object
376
house in one direction. Relocate one wall at a

You can cancel a move or resize opera- time in succession so that you do not redefine
tion using dimensions at any time by the same dimension more than once.
pressing the Esc key.
For more information, see Adjusting Wall
Resizing a House Using Positions on page 27 of the Users Guide.
Exterior Dimensions
When resizing a house using dimensions, it
is important to work your way around the

To open the Dimension Line dimension line and click the Open Object
Specification dialog, double-click a edit button.
dimension line using the Select Objects The settings in this dialog are dynamic
or Manual Dimension tool, or select a defaults. See Dimension Defaults Dialog
on page 367.
Dimension Tab
Specify the Number Height for the selected Arrow Tab

dimension. Type d in the box to reset the
number size to the default. For information about the settings on this
tab, see Arrow Tab on page 395.
377
378
Chapter 29:
Text
Text is an ideal way to draw attention to Chapter Contents

special details in plans. Text can be added in Text Defaults
floor plan and cross section/elevation view. Fonts and Alphabets
Text lines with arrow can be attached to text The Text Tools
objects, allowing you to direct attention to Creating Text
specific plan details. Displaying Text
Rich Text Specification Dialog
Text Specification Dialog
Editing Text
Copying & Pasting Text
Text Arrows
Text Styles
Text Defaults
Text Defaults can be accessed by Text Style Defaults
selecting Edit> Default Settings in
any view in which text can be created. See Select Text Style from the list in the
Default Settings on page 46. Default Settings dialog and click the Edit
button to open the Saved Text Style
The default settings for Rich Text determine Defaults dialog.
what these objects look like when they are
first created. Text Style Defaults determine The Text Style Defaults dialog allows you to
the appearance of text associated with things specify the attributes of the various Text
like dimensions and object labels. Styles in use in the current file. See Text
Styles on page 388.
379
Rich Text Defaults drawn using the Text Line with Arrow
The Rich Text Defaults dialog is similar to and Line With Arrow tools. These
the Rich Text Specification dialog. See settings also determine the initial appearance
Rich Text Specification Dialog on page of arrows when they are added to CAD lines,
381. arcs, and polylines.
Text Lines with Arrows use the same The Arrow Defaults dialog looks almost the
default layer as Rich Text, so by default they same as the Arrow tab of the Line/Polyline
have the same color, line weight and line Specification dialog. SeeArrow Tab on
style. See Layers on page 53. page 395
Arrow Defaults Avoid typing any text in the Rich Text

Defaults dialog unless you want it to be
The settings in the Arrow Defaults dialog present in all text objects you create.
determine the initial settings for arrows
Fonts and Alphabets

Home Designer Suite allows you to use any Special characters can be added to any Rich
font found in your Windows Fonts directory. Text object by:
International Alphabets Copying and pasting the character from

another application;
The Rich Text tool supports unicode Copying and pasting the character from
alphabets and characters. In order to use a the Windows Character Map;
unicode alphabet or characters, the Typing the keystroke associated with the
appropriate language support must be character.
installed on your computer.
See Copying & Pasting Text on page 386.
The Text Tools

Select CAD> Text to display the Text The Text Line with Arrow tool is
Tools. Text objects can be created in used to connect text and another
floor plan view and cross/section elevation object with an arrow. See Text Arrows on
views. page 387.
The Rich Text tool is used to create The Text with Arrow tool places a
text objects. Rich Text object with an arrow
attached.
380
Creating Text
Creating Text
Text can be created in floor plan view and . 3. Use the options to change the font, style
and size of any portion of the text.
Once created, text can be selected and edited
in a variety of ways. See Editing Text on
page 384. Note: If you do not type anything in the Text
Field, a text object will not be created when
To create Rich Text you click outside of it.
1. Select CAD> Text> Rich Text . You can also create lines with arrows
2. Type or paste the desired text into the connecting the text that you create to items in
Text Field. the drawing. See Text Arrows on page 387.
Displaying Text
The Text Tools can be used in floor plan All Text objects, including Text Lines with
view. The display of text objects in these Arrows, are located on the Text layer.
views is controlled in the Display Options
The display attributes of each individual text
dialog. See Display Options Dialog on
object can be controlled independent of the
page 55.
layer it is placed on. See Rich Text Specifi-
cation Dialog on page 381.

The Rich Text Specification dialog The Rich Text Specification dialog is
opens if you select the Rich Text similar to the Rich Text Defaults dialog but
tool and then click once in the drawing area. affects the selected text rather than all
subsequently created text objects. See Text
You can also open this dialog by selecting a Defaults on page 379.
Rich Text object, then clicking the Open
Object edit button.
Text Tab
The settings on the Text tab allow you to type You can specify the appearance of the text
the selected Rich Text objects content and before typing, and can also select and change
control many aspects of its appearance, the attributes of all or portions of the text
including its font, size, color and style. content after it is typed. To change text that
already exists, simply highlight it using the
381
mouse and/or the Shift + arrow keys and then

make any needed changes to its attributes.
1 Use the options on the Edit Bar, which Click the Italic button to specify the
displays above the Text Entry field, to selected or subsequently typed text as
change the font, style and size of the text. italic.
Select the desired options before typing to Click the Underline button to specify the
affect the text as it is typed, or select some or selected or subsequently typed text as
all of the text and then specify which options underlined.
to apply to it. Click the Strikethrough button to
Specify the text size in drawing units. selected or specify the subsequently
When imperial Inches or Feet and Inches typed text as stricken-through.
are used, accuracy to 1/128 is possible. Click the Align Left, Align Center or
Select a font from the drop-down list. Align Right button to specify the how
the selected or subsequently typed text is
Click the Color button to specify the
aligned.
color of the selected or subsequently
typed text. See Color Chooser Dialog Click the Paragraph Options button to
on page 334. specify the selected paragraphs align-
ment, spacing and bullets or numbering
Click the Bold button to specify the
in the Paragraph Options dialog.
selected or subsequently typed text as
bold. Specify the Zoom factor of the selected
text by typing a percentage value in the
text field or clicking the up/down arrows.
382
This setting only affects the text as it

1 Specify the Alignment of the selected
appears in this dialog. paragraph(s). See Aligning Text on
page 386.
Note: Some fonts cannot be drawn at certain
zoom factors. When this is the case, the 2 Specify the Line Spacing of the
selected paragraph(s).
appearance of the text will not change.
Click the radio button beside Single, 1.5
Lines, Double or User Specified.
2 Type or paste text in the Text Entry
field. See Copy, Cut and Paste on If you select User Specified Line
page 386. Height, type the desired height for each
line of text in the selected paragraph(s).
Right-click in the Text Entry field to access a
For best results, this value should be at
contextual menu from which you can select
least as much as the largest character size
Cut, Copy, Paste and Select All. See
used in the selected paragraph(s).
Contextual Menus on page 25.
To edit text in the entry field, click and drag 3 Specify the appearance of Bullets and
numbering in the selected paragraph(s).
to highlight any portion of it and then use the
tools on the Edit Bar as needed. Select the desired bullet, numbered or let-
tered Type from the drop-down list.
Paragraph Options Dialog Select the desired punctuation Style for
the selected numbered or lettered Type.
Only available when a numbered or let-
tered Type is selected.
1
Numbering Start At - Specify the num-
ber assigned to the first numbered or let-
tered paragraph in the selected text
object. Value must be 1 or greater.
2 To adjust the size of bullets
1. Click at the end of a bulleted paragraph
to position your cursor there.
2. Hold down the Shift key and press the
3 right arrow key once to highlight the end
of the paragraph.
3. Specify the desired bullet size in the text
size field at the top of the Text tab.
383
Text Specification Dialog

The Text Specification dialog opens Settings in the Text Specification dialog can
if you select a Room Label or a simple also be found in other dialogs in the program,
Text object in a legacy plan file created in including the Room Label Specification and
Version 8 or prior and click the Open Object the Dimension Defaults dialogs.
edit button. See Compatibility with Other
Programs on page 34.
Text Tab
1 Enter text in the Text Entry field. This Text Style Tab
field is not available if the selected
object is a Room Label. See Room Labels The Text Style tab is available for a variety
on page 125. of objects in the program and control the
appearance of the selected objects text. See
2 Select an Alignment option from the Text Style Tab on page 389.
drop-down list to apply to the text.
Editing Text
Once created, Rich Text objects can be using the edit handles and the edit toolbar
selected individually or as a group and edited buttons Individual text objects can also be
edited in the Rich Text Specification dialog.
384
Editing Text
See Rich Text Specification Dialog on

page 381.
Editing Text Attributes

Most text attributes, including the font, size,
style, and the content itself, are edited in the Using the Mouse
Rich Text Specification dialog.
A selected Rich Text object has the
In order to edit the attributes of an existing same edit handles as other box-based objects.
Rich Text object, you must select some See Editing Box-Based Objects on page
or all of the text before making changes. See 78.
Text Tab on page 381.
Move
To edit Rich Text attributes Extend/
Contract
1. Select a Rich Text object and click Resize
the Open Object edit button.
2. On the Text tab of the Rich Text
Specification dialog, click and drag to Rotate
select some or all of the text typed into
the Text field. As a Rich Text box is made smaller
using an edit handle, not all of the text may
be visible.
3. With some or all of the text selected, A selected Rich Text or Text object
change any of the attributes available can be edited in a variety of ways using the
along the top of the tab, including the buttons on the edit toolbar. See The Edit
font, size, color, and style. Toolbar on page 24.
Resizing Text
The default character height of Rich Text
objects can be specified as can the
character height for individual objects, in
4. As changes are made, the selected text their specification dialogs. See Text
updates. Only the selected text is modi- Defaults on page 379.
fied.
385
Scaling Text Copy, Cut and Paste

As with the size of other objects, text size is Copy, Cut and Paste of text into and out of
subject to the current drawing scale specified the Rich Text Specification dialog can be
in the Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup accomplished using keyboard hotkeys:
Dialog on page 435. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text and
save it to the Windows clipboard.
Aligning Text
Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text
Text can be aligned in a couple of ways. and copy it to the Windows clipboard.
The text content of a text object can be Press Ctrl + V to paste your last cut or
aligned to the left, right, center or justi- copied selection in a new text object.
fied in the Rich Text Specification dia-
For more, see Copying and Pasting
log. See Text Tab on page 381.
Objects on page 61.
The text content of a text object can be
also be aligned by clicking the Align Copy, Cut and Paste use the Windows
clipboard, making it possible to to transfer
Left , Align Right , Center , text between text objects, between Home
or Justify edit button. Designer Suite files, from a plan into another
application, or vice versa.
Copying & Pasting Text

The Copy, Cut and Paste commands use the specification dialogs are open, but you can
Windows clipboard, making it possible to use the associated hotkeys.
transfer text between text objects, between
Home Designer Suite files, from a plan into To Copy, Cut and Paste text
another application such as a text editor or 1. On the Text tab of either text specifica-
spreadsheet program, or vice versa. See tion dialog or in another program alto-
Copying and Pasting Objects on page 61. gether, highlight the text you wish to cut,
All or selected portions of the Materials List copy or paste.
can also be copied and pasted into a text 2. Press Ctrl + X to Cut the selected text
object, as well as into a word processing or out of its original location and save it to
spreadsheet program. See Materials Lists the Windows clipboard.
on page 441. 3. Press Ctrl + C to Copy the selected text
Cut, Copy, and Paste can also be accessed to the Windows clipboard without
from the Edit menu of many applications, removing it from its original location.
including Home Designer Suite. These menu 4. Open the text object or a file in another
commands are not available when the text application and click to place your cur-
386
Text Arrows
sor in the Text field, writing area, or Text pasted into a Rich Text object from
spreadsheet cell. a spreadsheet program retains basic column
5. Press Ctrl + V to Paste the copied text at and row information. Column width cannot
the location of your cursor. be adjusted; however, as you add or remove
text froma cell, row height will increase or
Bear in mind that when text is copied and
decrease to accomodate your changes.
pasted, its formatting is not always retained.
The results depend on the program or type of The background colors of two or more cells
text object in which the content was created copied from a spreadsheet application will be
as well as the type of text object into which it
retained if pasted in to Rich Text ;
is pasted.
however, once pasted background color
cannot be edited.
Pasting into Rich Text
Text pasted into a Rich Text object
from another source will retain most
of its custom formatting.
Text Arrows
Text arrows, which are simply CAD lines Text with Arrow
with arrows drawn on the Text layer, can
be used to connect text objects to details of The Text with Arrow tool places a
interest in your drawing. See Draw Lines text object with an arrow already
on page 391. attached. This arrow can be selected and
edited like any other arrow.
Text arrows can be snapped together to form
open or closed polylines. If two lines with Text Line with Arrow
arrows meet within the bounding box of a
text object, however, they will not join. This Text Lines with Arrow can be
allows you to attach multiple, separate text attached to text, CAD and
arrows to a single text object. See Editing architectural objects by selecting CAD>
Line Based Objects on page 68. Text> Text Line with Arrow and then
Lines with arrows can be independent or clicking and dragging to draw a line. There is
attached to other objects. Arrows attach to no limit to the number of text lines with
closed polyline-based objects along their arrows that can be attached to an object.
edges, but can attach to an architectural The endpoints of Text Lines with
object anywhere within its 2D symbol in
floor plan view. If an arrow is attached to text Arrows can be joined to form polylines
or another object, deleting either the text or with corners that can be adjusted using the
the object will also delete the arrow. edit handles. See Polylines on page 399.
387
A Text Line with Arrow behaves like a arrow snaps to different auto position
locations on the text object, maintaining its
Line With Arrow with one exception: connection.
Text Lines with Arrow are initially placed on
the Text layer, not the CAD, Default.
See Layers on page 53.
Auto Positioning Arrows

There are four auto position locations on a
text object: one at the midpoint of each side.
The following image illustrates the behavior
of auto positioning. When the head of the
line with arrow is moved, the tail of the
Text Styles
In Home Designer Suite, a Text Style is a set Text Style Defaults
of attributes assigned to any object that
displays text, such as Dimensions and object Select Edit> Default Settings, click
labels. on Text Styles and click Edit to
open the Text Style Defaults dialog. The
Saved Text Style Defaults dialog will open,
Note: Because of its ability to use multiple allowing you to select which Saved Text
attributes in the same object, Rich Text does Style Defaults you would like to edit.
not use Text Styles. See Rich Text Specifica-
tion Dialog on page 381.
Saved Text Style Defaults
There are three Text Styles in Home Dialog
Designer Suite. You can edit these Text
Styles to suit your needs in the Text Style
Defaults dialog
The Default Label Style affects the
appearance of labels for objects such as
doors and windows;
The Default Text Style controls the
appearance of legacy Text objects, and
Select the Name of one of them from the
dimension line labels, unless specified
drop-down list. This is the currently
otherwise.
selected Text Style.
The Default Room Style controls the
appearance of room labels.
388
Text Styles
Click the Edit button to open the defaults changes that you may have made in the
dialog for the selected Text Style so that defaults dialog.
you can edit it.
The settings in the Text Style Defaults
Click OK to close the Saved Text Style dialog are similar to those on the Text Style
Defaults dialog and save any changes tab of object specification dialogs in the
you made in the defaults dialog. program but affect all objects using that style
Click Cancel to close the Saved Text rather than an individual selected object.
Style Defaults dialog without saving any
Text Style Tab
1
2
1 Check Use Default Text Style to use Select a font from the drop-down list.
the default style for the selected object The text styles Bold, Underline, Italic,
type, or uncheck this box to enable the and Strikeout are available. Check any
settings below and define a custom style. of the boxes to apply that style.
The settings that follow are only editable
when Use Default Text Style is unchecked. 3 Specify the Size of text using the
selected Text Style.
When it is checked, information about the
Text Style that is assigned to the selected Enter the Character Height in drawing
object displays for reference. units. This height is subject to the current
drawing scale. When imperial Inches or
2 Specify the attributes of the selected
Text Styles Font.
389
Feet and Inches are used, accuracy to object it is assigned to is located on. See
1/128 is possible. Displaying Objects on page 54.
Uncheck By Layer, then click the Color
4 Specify the selected Text Styles Text bar to select a different color. See Color
Color. When Use Custom Text Style is
not selected above, a Text Color does not Chooser Dialog on page 334.
display here for reference.
5 A preview of the Text Style currently
When By Layer is checked, text uses the assigned to the selected object displays
line color assigned to the layer that the here.
390
Chapter 30:
CAD Objects
The CAD Tools are used to add information Chapter Contents

to 2D views of your model. CAD objects do The CAD Drawing Tools
not affect 3D objects or display in camera Line Specification Dialog
views or overviews, but they can be used to Arc Specification Dialog
add details to floor plan view. CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification
Dialog
CAD objects are edited much like other
Polylines
objects in Home Designer Suite. See
Polyline Specification Dialog
CAD Box Specification Dialog
Displaying CAD Objects
The CAD Drawing Tools

The CAD drawing tools can be To draw a line or line with arrow
accessed by selecting CAD> CAD or
by clicking the CAD Tools button. 1. Select CAD> CAD> Draw Line or
Draw Lines Draw Line With Arrow .

2. Click and drag in the drawing area to
Select CAD> Draw Line or
draw a line.
CAD> Draw Line With Arrow
to draw lines with or without arrows. 3. Continue drawing lines as needed, then
select another tool when you are
finished.
391
Once a line is created, it can be edited. You Draw Box

can snap the ends of lines together to form
polylines. See Editing Line Based Objects Select CAD > CAD> Draw Box to
on page 68 and Line Specification Dialog draw a box.
on page 394. CAD boxes are drawn from corner to corner,
forming a rectangle that can then be edited.
Draw Arc Unlike a polyline, a box always has four 90
degree corners. See Editing Box-Based
Select CAD > CAD> Draw Arc to Objects on page 78 and CAD Box
draw an arc. Specification Dialog on page 401.
To draw an arc
Draw Circle
1. Select CAD> Arcs> Draw Arc , Select CAD > CAD> Draw Circle to
then click at the arcs start point. draw a circle.
2. Move the pointer along the desired Draw a Circle by dragging across the
curve while dragging to curve the arc. diameter, in any direction.
3. Release the mouse button at the end If a small circle is needed, draw a larger
point to complete the arc. circle and then resize it. See Editing Circles,
Once an arc is created, it can be edited. See Ovals and Ellipses on page 82 and CAD
Editing Arc Based Objects on page 70 and Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog on
Arc Specification Dialog on page 396. page 398.
You can snap the ends of arcs together with

Ovals
other arcs or with lines to form polylines. See
Polylines on page 399. Select CAD > CAD> Draw Oval to
draw an oval, which is a four-arc
Draw Polyline approximation of an ellipse.
Select CAD > CAD> Draw Polyline Draw an oval, by clicking and dragging at an
to draw a rectangular polyline in angle to define its maximum height and
either of two ways: width.
Click in the drawing area to place a 24 x Once an oval is created, it can be edited. See
24 square polyline at that location. Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses on
Click and drag from corner to corner to page 82 and CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse
draw a rectangle of any size. Specification Dialog on page 398.
Once drawn, a rectangular polyline can be Ellipses

edited into any shape. See Editing Closed-
Polyline Based Objects on page 76 and An Ellipse is a set of points with a
Polyline Specification Dialog on page 399. constant combined distance from two
392
The CAD Drawing Tools
points called foci. An ellipse looks like a

stretched circle, or a circular surface viewed
at an angle.
To draw an ellipse, select CAD> CAD>
Draw Ellipse and drag at an angle to
define its maximum height and width.
Once an ellipse is created, it can be edited.
3. Draw the second segment from the end
See Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses on
of the first at a different angle.
page 82 and CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse
As drawn
Splines
A Spline is a curve that passes
smoothly through a set of points.
Select CAD> CAD> Draw Spline to draw Result
connected line segments that form a spline.
4. As soon as two straight spline segments
Once created, a spline can be selected and connect end-to-end, the straight seg-
edited. See Editing Spline Based Objects ments become a curve that passes
on page 80 and Polyline Specification through the endpoints defined by the
Dialog on page 399. original segments. Each point is called a
vertex.
To use the Spline tool
5. Draw a few more segments, connecting
each to the free end of a previously
1. Select CAD> CAD> Spline . drawn segment.
2. Draw the first spline segment just as you 6. Notice as additional segments are drawn
would a line. A single spline segment that the curvature of the previous seg-
looks identical to a line. ment changes to create a continuous
curve between the last three points.
You may need to turn off Angle Snaps
to draw freely. See Angle Snaps As drawn
on page 59.
Result
The result is an irregular curve that flows

smoothly through each vertex.
393
You can also form a closed spline by drawing their own chapter. See Dimensions on page
a segment between its two free ends. 367.
Dimension Tools Text Tools

Select CAD> Dimension Lines to Select CAD> Text to access the Text
access the Dimension Tools. The Tools. The Text Tools are discussed in
Dimension Tools can be used with CAD and their own chapter. See Text on page 379.
architectural objects and are discussed in
Line Specification Dialog

Select a CAD Line, Line With Arrow, The settings on the Line, Line Style, and
or Text Line With Arrowand click the Arrow tabs in this dialog are found in the
Open Object edit button to open the Line specification dialogs for a variety of different
Specification dialog. objects in the program.
Line Tab
The information on the Line tab of the Line on the Selected Line tabs of various
Specification dialog is similar to that found specification dialogs in the program.
Enter a length and angle for the line. The X and Y coordinates of the starting
Enter X and Y coordinates for the end of point of the line display as a reference.
the line.
394
Line Specification Dialog
Line Style Tab

The Line Style tab is found in the CAD line(s) and/or arc(s) that make up an
specification dialogs for many different object.
objects. Here you can control the display of a
Click the Line Color box to specify a Click the Line Style drop-down list to
new line color. See Color Chooser Dia- select from a variety of available line
log on page 334. styles.
Arrow Tab
The Arrow Tab is available for any line, arc,
open polyline, or spline that can have an
arrow.
Closed polylines and Electrical connections
are examples of objects that cannot have
arrows.
395
Check Include Arrow to create an Specify the arrowheads Size.

arrowhead. Check the box beside Arrow On Both
Select an arrowhead Type from the drop- Ends to create a two-headed arrow.
down list. Place a check in any of the Default boxes
Click the Fill Color box to select a new to restore that setting to the default set-
color for the arrowhead. See Color ting.
Chooser Dialog on page 334.
Arc Specification Dialog

Select an arc and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Arc
396
Arc Specification Dialog
Arc Tab
The settings on the Arc tab are also found on
the Selected Arc tabs for many objects.
1 2
1 Arc - These settings define the arc. Arc Length - The length of the arc along
Various controls are disabled depending the curve.
on what lock option is used.
Center X - Specify the x coordinate for 2 Start - Specify information about the
starting point of the selected arc.
the center of the arc.
Start X - Specify the X coordinate for the
Center Y - Specify the y coordinate for starting point of the arc.
the center of the arc.
Start Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the
Radius - The distance between the center starting point of the arc.
of the arc and the arc surface.
Start Direction - Specify the angle of a
Start Angle - Specify the angle of a line tangent line at the start of the arc.
drawn from the arc center to the arc start.
End Angle - Specify the angle of a line 3 End - Specify information about the
end point of the selected arc.
drawn from the arc center to the arc end.
End X - Specify the X coordinate for the
Arc Angle - The angle between the cen- end of the arc.
ter of the arc and each end.
397
End Y - Specify the Y coordinate for the Chord Angle - Specify the angle of the
end of the arc. chord.
End Direction - Specify the angle of a
tangent line at the end of the arc. Line Style Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see
4 Chord - Define the selected arcs Line Style Tab on page 395.
chord, which is the line drawn between
its start and end points.
Chord Length - The straight line dis- Arrow Tab
tance between the two ends of the arc. For information about the Arrow tab, see
Arrow Tab on page 395.
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog

Select a circle, oval or ellipse and open the CAD Circle, Oval or Ellipse
click the Open Object edit button to Specification dialog.
General Tab
The General tab is available for Ellipses but
not for Circles or Ovals.
1 Specify the Position of the ellipse. 2 Specify the Length and Width of an
ellipse.
Specify the X Position and Y Position of
the center of the ellipse. Line Style Tab
Specify an ellipses Angle. Not available For information about the Line Style tab, see
for circles. Line Style Tab on page 395.
398
Polylines
Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Fill Style Tab on page 400.
Polylines
A polyline consists of two or more end of each new object to snap to the end of
line and/or arc segments that are the previous one. Line- and arc-based objects
attached at their endpoints. Select will only snap together to form a polyline if
CAD>CAD> Rectangular Polyline, then they are on the same layer and share identical
click and drag from corner to corner to create arrow specifications .If one end of the
a rectangular-shaped, closed polyline. polyline is connected to the other, it becomes
a closed polyline.
You can also create a polyline by drawing
lines and/or arcs end-to-end, allowing the
Closed Polylines Open Polylines
Polylines can be copied, moved, reshaped, or Once created, polylines can be edited in a
resized as a single unit. variety of ways. See Editing Open Polyline
Based Objects on page 73 and Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects on page 76.
Polyline Specification Dialog

Select an open polyline, closed Polyline Tab
polyline, spline or Electrical
connection and click the Open Object edit The Polyline tab is found in the specification
button to open the Polyline Specification dialog for open- and closed-polyline-based
dialog. objects throughout the program.
399
The Polyline tab indicates the polylines Moving the End of a line segment moves the
Length/Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and start of the next connected line, if there is
the Volume of a closed polyline. one.
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
Specification dialog. See Line Tab on
page 394.
Selected Arc Tab

opposed to a line. This tab is not available if
the selected object is a spline.
If the polyline is not closed, the Area and This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Volume are described as Not closed. The Specification dialog. See Arc Tab on page
Volume of a 2D polyline will always be 0, 397.
even if it is closed.
Line Style Tab
Selected Line Tab
This tab is similar to the Line Style tab in the
The Selected Line tab is available when the Line Specification dialog. See Line Style
selected edge of the polyline is a line as Tab on page 395.
opposed to an arc. This tab is not available if
the selected object is a spline. See Editing
Line Based Objects on page 68.
Fill Style Tab

The information on the Fill Style tab for The Fill Style tab is not available for
polylines is similar to that for many other Electrical Connections as this tool cannot be
objects in the program, including closed used to form closed shapes.
CAD shapes and a variety of architectural
objects.
400
1
2 5
3
4 6
1 Fill Pattern - Choose a fill pattern from 5 A preview of the selected pattern
the drop-down list. displays here. As changes are made to
the settings on this tab, the preview will
The options that follow are disabled until you
update.
select a pattern other than None from the Fill
Pattern drop-down list.
6 Choose a Preview Width from the
drop-down list. This value controls how
2 Define the Spacing of the selected fill large an area the preview represents. The
pattern. Hatch spacing set at 12"
selected value indicates the length of each
matches grid/reference spacing set at 12".
side of the preview in actual plan inches
3 Check Transparent Fill to make the (mm).
fill pattern transparent. When you
check this option, any objects behind the fill Arrow Tab
pattern are visible through it.
The Arrow tab is available for most open
Fill Color - Select a line color for the polylines and splines and is similar to the
4
fill pattern, or fill color if a solid fill is Arrow tab of the Line Specification dialog.
specified. The layer color is used by default. See Arrow Tab on page 395.
See Color Chooser Dialog on page 334.
The Arrow tab is not available for closed
polylines or Electrical Connections.

Select a CAD box and click the Open Box Specification dialog. See Draw Box
Object edit button to open the CAD on page 392.
401
Line Style Tab Fill Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see For information about the Fill Style tab, see
Line Tab on page 394. Fill Style Tab on page 400.
Displaying CAD Objects

As with architectural objects, the display of seen in any view other than the one they are
CAD objects is controlled in the Display drawn in and are never visible in camera
Options dialog. See Display Options views or overviews. See Architectural vs
Dialog on page 55. CAD Objects on page 58.
CAD objects can be drawn in floor plan view
and cross section/elevation views. They are
2D objects only, though, so they cannot be
402
Chapter 31:
Project Planning
The tools described in this chapter let you Chapter Contents

draw plans with ease and flexibility, run House Wizard
checks on plans so you can be more Plan Check
confident that they are free of code violations Loan Calculator
and common drawing errors, and consider
loan calculations for your project.
House Wizard
The House Wizard is a time-saving Finish and close the House Wizard, the
feature used to create a preliminary selected room boxes display.
room-by-room design of a home without
getting caught up in the details. Once the
shape and layout of the rooms are finalized,
the House Wizard converts them into a
working plan that can be edited and detailed
to completion.
Start House Wizard

Select Tools> House Wizard> Start
House Wizard. The House Wizard
leads you through a series of windows that
gather information about the rooms you want
to include in your house. When you click
403
Room boxes can now be arranged into a floor Select room boxes using the Select
plan. Objects tool just like other objects in
Home Designer Suite. See Selecting
Placing Room Boxes Objects on page 66.
In addition or as an alternative to the room Room boxes can be resized, rotated, and
boxes created for you by the House Wizard, rearranged. See Editing Box-Based
you can create your own room boxes. To do Objects on page 78.
so, select Tools> House Wizard , then Try to line up the rooms so that they are
choose the desired room type from the just touching. Excessive overlaps may
submenu. Click in floor plan view to place a cause your rooms to form incorrectly.
room box of the selected type at that Closets are the exception. You can over-
location. lap a room with a closet, or place in
inside another room box.
Displaying Room Boxes Rooms can be copied and pasted using
Room boxes and their labels are located on the Copy/Paste edit button and
the House Wizard Room Boxes layer.
deleted using the Delete edit button.
Room box labels use the Text Style assigned
to that layer, as well. See Displaying Select Tools> House Wizard to
Objects on page 54. access the room box tools and place addi-
tional room boxes in your plan. Select a
Editing Rooms tool and click in the plan to place a room
box of that type.
Once created, room boxes can be edited in a
variety of ways. Select Tools> House Wizard> Hide
Room Boxes to hide or show the
room boxes.
Build House
When the rooms are in place, select Tools>
House Wizard> Build House to convert
the rooms into a building model. Walls and
doors are inserted between the rooms that
you arranged.
404
Plan Check
Multiple Floors
If you specified a two-story house, follow
these steps:
1. Edit and arrange the room boxes on

Floor 1 as desired.
2. Select Tools> House Wizard> Build
House tool to create the walls on the
first floor.
3. Go Up One Floor and notice that

the positions of the walls on Floor 1 dis-
play in red as a reference.
4. Arrange the rooms on Floor 2 as desired,
When you Build House, the House Wizard using the reference display as a guide.
Room Boxes layer is automatically turned 5. On the second floor, select Tools>
off. The room boxes that you created are not House Wizard> Build House to
deleted, however. complete the second floor.
Plan Check
Plan Check checks the floor of your opposed to the item moving, are attached to
plan currently shown on screen for the wall.
anything that appears to violate common
building practices. Plan Check may not find
Disclaimer: The Plan Check feature in
all the problems in a plan, but does it point Home Designer Suite compares your
out areas that may need improvement. plan with common building practices. Plan
Check does not claim to detect all building
As your plan evolves, a number of things that
code and design requirements. Always have
may become incorrect can be fixed using your plans checked by a licensed profes-
Plan Check. For example, doors that change sional before beginning actual construction.
from exterior to interior as you add new
rooms are redrawn without the threshold line To run Plan Check, select Tools> Plan
that marks an exterior door. A cabinet,
Check .
fixture or furniture item that is against a wall
because the wall was moved into it, as
405
Plan Check Dialog Potential plan errors found are usually

highlighted in floor plan view. To ensure the
highlighted item is on-screen, make sure the
entire plan is shown in the window before
1
you run Plan Check .
2 If this dialog obscures the floor plan view,
3 drag its title bar to move it. It remembers its
new position and displays there the next time
Plan Check is run.
Room Types
1 The current error number, along with Plan Check can do a much better job of
the total number of errors found. checking for problems if it knows what the
rooms in your plan are to be used for, so you
2 A description of the current error should assign a Room Type to each room in
displays here.
your plan. See Room Types on page 123.
3 Options for navigating Plan Check are
found on the right side. The first time Plan Check runs in a plan,
Click Next to ignore the current error and it automatically assigns a room type to as
proceed to the next. many undesignated rooms as it can. Some
Click Previous to return to the previous rooms are determined by their size and
error. shape, and others by their contents. For
example, a shelf in a small room indicates a
Click Hold to suspend Plan Check so you closet; a stove or refrigerator indicates a
can fix the current error. Select Tools> kitchen; or a bed, a bedroom. If the program
Checks> Plan Check again and the
check starts where it left off. cannot assign a room type, Plan Check
highlights it and suggests that you do so
Click Done to terminate Plan Check. manually.
Loan Calculator
Select Tools> Loan Calculator to a loan for the current plan based on a variety
open the Loan Calculator dialog. This of parameters.
dialog lets you calculate different aspects of
406
Loan Calculator
3 The Required Fields are the same as

the options in the Calculate drop-down
list. The option selected under Calculate will
1 be inactive under Required Fields.
2 Specify the desired Loan Amount.
Specify the desired Term, in years.
3 Specify the desired Interest Rate.
Specify the desired Monthly Payment.
4 The Optional Fields allow you to

include additional information in your
loan calculation.
4 Specify the expected Property Taxes per
year.
Specify the expected Homeowners
Insurance cost per year.
Specify the expected Private Mortgage
Insurance (PMI) cost per year.
Specify the cost of any expected Other
Fees.
1 Specify what aspect of the loan you When Monthly Payment is calculated, each
would like to calculate from the
Calculate drop-down list: Optional value is divided by twelve (months)
and then added to the total payment.
Monthly Payment
Loan Amount When a Calculate option other than Monthly
Payment is selected, these values are divided
Term by twelve (months) and then subtracted from
Interest Rate the specified Monthly Payment value. The
result, which does not display, is then used to
2 The calculation Result, based on the determine the Loan Amount, Term or Interest
information you provide, displays here.
Rate.
If you make changes to any of the fields in
the dialog, click the = button to refresh the
Result.
407
408
Chapter 32:
Pictures, Images, &

Walkthroughs
Home Designer Suite uses picture files in a Chapter Contents

variety of ways to enhance your drawings. Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects
The Library Browser contains images of real Images
world objects like plants, vehicles, and Displaying Images
people that can display in 3D views. Editing Images
Image Specification Dialog
Picture files can also be imported into Home Pictures
Designer Suite and shown in most views. Editing Pictures
You can save any view using a variety of Picture File Box Specification Dialog
picture file formats. In addition, Home Metafiles
Designer Suite allows you to create virtual Editing Metafiles
tours that can be saved as .avi files, shared Metafile Specification Dialog
with others, and played back later. Copy Region as Picture
Walkthroughs
409
Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects

In common computer language, picture files, dimensional only and do not display in
pictures and images are more or less camera views or overviews.
synonymous. In the Home Designer Suite
An image object is also based on a picture
environment, however, there are some
file, but it does display in both 2D and 3D
notable differences between these terms.
views. Images have 3D width and height data
In Home Designer Suite, a two dimensional associated with them, as well as a 2D symbol
image file such as a .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png is which displays in floor plan view.
referred to as a picture file or an image file.
Picture files have additional uses in Home
Examples of these files are saved on most
Designer Suite, as well:
computers and can be opened in a variety of
applications. Backdrops are picture files that display
behind 3D views. See 3D Backdrops
A picture, on the other hand, is a file that has on page 350.
been imported into the program. Pictures can
be imported into floor plan view and cross Textures are picture files that realistically
section/elevation views. They are two- represent materials in 3D views. See
About Materials on page 325.
Images
Images add realistic detail to 3D views Placing Images
without adding many surfaces to the model.
For example, a tree image with a single A selection of images are available in
surface can be used instead of a tree symbol the Library Browser. Select one and
with thousands, dramatically improving click in a floor plan view, camera view or
realism without compromising drawing time. overview to place it. See Placing Library
There are two types of images in Home
Designer Suite: Creating Images
Images rotate so that they always Select Build> Image to view the
face the camera in 3D views. Image Tools, which allow you to add
images to the current plan.
Billboard Images do not rotate to
face the camera. An example of when To create an image in floor plan view
this may be useful is an image of a trellis,
which might look awkward when facing 1. In floor plan view, select Build>
a camera from a side view.
Image> Create Image or Billboard
Image to open the Image
410
Displaying Images
Specification dialog. See Image Speci- Right-click on an unlocked folder in the

fication Dialog on page 413. Library Browser. Select New> Image from
2. On the Image tab: the contextual menu. The Image
Specification dialog opens.
Click the Browse button to select a pic-
ture file on your computer or enter the Browse to the image you want to add and
path to a valid picture file in the Image select your other options. For more
File field. information in these options, see Image
Select or 2D plan symbol to represent Specification Dialog on page 413.
the image in floor plan view. Choose a
2D Plan Symbol from the list or click To create an image in the Library Browser
the Library button and select a symbol 1. In the Library Browser, right-click on an
from the library. See Image Tab on unlocked folder.
page 413.
2. Select New> Image from the contextual
Enter Height and/or Width and Loca-
menu to open the Image Specification
tion information.
dialog.
3. Enter transparency information and
3. Once created, the image is listed in the
layer information on the Transparency
library folder that you right-clicked on.
tab.
Size and other data is saved.
4. Click OK to close the Image
Specification dialog. Using Paste Image
5. Click to place the new image in floor
You can also import an image by first
plan view.
copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
then navigating to a Home Designer Suite
Adding Images to the Library window and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste
Home Designer Suite can use any image with from the menu. See Paste Special on page
a *.bmp, *.jpg, *.png, *.gif, *.tif, *.pcx, or 63.
*.tga extension.
The display of images in floor plan
Generally, .png files work best as images and 3D views is controlled in the
because this format has good compression Display Options dialog. See Displaying
and allows for the image to contain Objects on page 54.
transparency information.
Displaying Images
The display of images in floor plan Images are placed on theImages layer by
and 3D views is controlled in the default but they can be moved to other
Layer Display Options dialog. See layers. See Image Specification Dialog on
Displaying Objects on page 54. page 413.
411
In Floor Plan View according to its Width and Height

specifications. Any transparency data
In floor plan view, most images are typically
associated with the image is also applied. See
represented by an Image symbol. You Image Specification Dialog on page 413.
can specify a different symbol to represent an
Images can be set to either rotate so that they
image if you wish. See Image Specification
always face the camera or to remain
Dialog on page 413.
stationary, like billboards. See Images on
page 410.
In 3D Views
The actual picture associated with an image
object can be seen in 3D views. It is sized
Editing Images
Images can be selected in 2D and 3D views
and edited using the edit handles, edit tools
and the Image Specification dialog.
Using the Mouse

Images can be resized in floor plan view by
dragging the circular Resize handle at the top
of the 2D symbol.
Images can also be resized in 3D views by

dragging the circular Resize edit handle at When an image is resized, the aspect ratio of
the top. the image and its 2D symbol are retained, so
the image resizes proportionally.

A selected image or images can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. As with most objects, images can be
copied, replicated, moved, deleted, etc. See
The Edit Toolbar on page 24.
412

Select an image and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Image
Image Tab
1
2
3
4
1 Image File - The path and name of the Check Reverse Image to reflect the
selected image. You can click Browse appearance of the image about an imagi-
to replace the current image with a different nary vertical line through its center.
one saved on your computer. Check Do Not Rotate in Camera Views
2 2D Plan Symbol - Select a 2D symbol to prevent the image from rotating to face
from the drop-down list to mark the the camera in 3D views. This box is
location of the image in floor plan view. See checked for Billboard Images. See
Displaying Images on page 411. Images on page 410.
3 Options 4 Specify the Size of the image as it

displays in 3D views.
Enter a Height for the selected image.
413
Enter a Width for the selected image. Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to
When Retain Aspect Ratio of is reset the images original aspect ratio and
checked, if you change either the Height remove any distortion caused by resizing.
or Width, the other value changes to
maintain this ratio. If this is unchecked 5 Specify the Location of the selected
image.
and you resize the image, it may become
Position the selected image precisely by
distorted.
specifying its X and Y Coordinates.
Specify the images Height Above
Ground.
Pictures
A variety of picture file types can be needs. See Displaying 3D Views on
imported into and exported out of Home page 349.
Designer Suite. 3. Select File> Export> Picture (BMP,
Metafiles are also types of picture files that JPG, PNG) in any view to open the
can be imported and exported. See Export Picture File dialog, which is a
Metafiles on page 416. typical Save File dialog. See Exporting
Files on page 37.
Exporting Pictures
Using the Export Picture tool is Importing Pictures
similar to creating a screen capture of There are several ways to import a picture
everything in the current Home Designer into Home Designer Suite.
Suite window. Pictures can be saved in
various file formats and used in other Picture files can be imported into and
applications. displayed in floor plan view and cross
section/elevation views. Picture files do not
Export Picture is best suited for 3D display in camera views or overviews.
views. When exporting a line-based view, Using Import Picture
best results can be achieved by saving it as a
Select File> Import> Picture (BMP,
Metafile. See To export a metafile on page
JPG, PNG) to insert a picture file into
416.
a plan file. The Import Picture File dialog
opens.
To export a picture
Click Open to finish importing the picture.
1. Open the view that you would like to The picture is placed in the center of the
export to a picture file. current view, and can be selected and edited.
2. Zoom, pan or otherwise adjust the view
so that what you see on screen suits your
414
Editing Pictures
Clicking and Dragging Using Paste Image

You can import a picture directly into floor You can import a picture by first
plan view by dragging an image file from a copying it to the Windows Clipboard,
Windows Explorer window into the Home then navigating to a Home Designer Suite
Designer Suite window window and selecting Edit> Paste> Paste
from the menu, or by using the Screen
Capture tools. See Paste Special on page
63.
Editing Pictures
Pictures can be selected individually and as a edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page
group in 2D and 3D views and edited using 24.
the edit handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialog. See Picture File Box To resize a picture to scale
1. Find two items on the imported picture
Using the Mouse that are separated by a known horizontal
or vertical distance, such as two walls or
Pictures can be edited like CAD boxes. See plot lines.
Editing Box-Based Objects on page 78.
2. Draw parallel CAD lines on top of these
two items. See The CAD Drawing
Using the Edit Tools Tools on page 391.
A selected picture or pictures can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
Picture File Box Specification Dialog

Select an imported picture file and Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off
click the Open Object edit button to the display of the pictures border polyline.
open the Picture File Box Specification
dialog.
on the Line Style tab in numerous other For more information, see Line Style Tab
dialogs, with one exception. on page 395.
415
Metafiles
A metafile (.emf, .wmf) is a special picture
file format made up of vectors (lines) that
allow the image to be rescaled without loss
of quality.
High resolution pictures of line-based views
can be exported as a metafile.
Exporting Metafiles
An enhanced metafile (.emf) can be 5. Specify the desired Width or Height of
exported from floor plan view. the metafile. When one value is edited,
Only objects that display on screen are the other changes to maintain its aspect
included in an exported metafile. ratio.
To export a metafile Specify, too, the desired Dots Per Inch

(DPI) for the metafile. A larger value
1. Accurately position the view on screen. results in a higher quality metafile, but
2. Select File> Export> Metafile also a larger file size.
(EMF) . 6. Click OK to open the Export Metafile

dialog, which is a typical Save As dia-
3. Drag a marquee from corner to cor- log. See Saving a Plan File on page
ner, defining the area that will included 36.
in the metafile. 7. Enter a name and location on your com-
4. Release the mouse to open the Metafile puter for the metafile, then click Save.
Size dialog.
Importing Metafiles
Select File> Import> Metafile
(EMF,WMF) from floor plan view to
open the Import Metafile dialog, which is a
typical open file dialog. See Opening a Plan
File on page 39.
Editing Metafiles
Once imported into a plan, a metafile can be
selected and edited like other objects. See
Selecting Objects on page 66.
416
Metafile Specification Dialog
Using Dimensions Using the Edit Tools

Metafiles can be relocated relative to other A selected metfile or metafiles can be edited
objects with precision using dimensions. See in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
Moving Objects Using Dimensions on edit toolbar. See The Edit Toolbar on page
page 376. 24.
Using Edit Handles

Metafiles can be edited using their edit
handles much the way CAD boxes can. See
Editing Box-Based Objects on page 78.
Metafile Specification Dialog

Select an imported metafile and click Uncheck the Show Outline box to turn off
the Open Object edit button to open the display of the pictures border polyline.
the Metafile Specification dialog.
on the Line Style tab in numerous other
dialogs, with one exception. For more information, see Line Style Tab
on page 395.
Copy Region as Picture

You can copy any portion of the 4. The selection is copied to the Windows
screen and save it as a picture using clipboard.
the Copy Region as Picture tool. If the current view is vector-based, the
Metafile Size dialog displays because
To use Copy Region as Picture the program uses this file format to
produce vector-based pictures. See
1. Open the view that you would like to
Metafiles on page 416.
copy all or part of as a picture.
If the current view is a 3D view, the
2. Select Edit> Copy Region as region is sent directly to the Windows
Picture . Your pointer displays a clipboard.
marquee icon. 5. From there, the picture can be pasted
into another view or another program.
3. Click and drag a rectangular selection
marquee around the desired region.
417
Walkthroughs
A 3D Walkthrough is a series of
picture files saved in .avi format that
can be played like a movie by other
applications such as Windows Media Player.
There are two ways to record a walkthrough:
Draw a path in floor plan view using the
CAD tools, then direct the program to
record a walkthrough along that path.
Create a 3D view, then begin recording
and use the Move Camera tools to navi-
gate through the view.
If you resize the current view window while
recording a walkthrough, the program will
stop recording. Specify the desired number of Frames
Per Second, between 1 and 100. A
To record a walkthrough along a path higher number results in a higher qual-
ity recording but also a larger .avi file.
1. Using CAD tools such as lines and arcs
or splines, draw a path in floor plan view Specify a Duration Along Path, in
that travels through a single floor of seconds.
your plan. The Total Frames to Record displays
for reference and equals the Frames Per
2. Select the polyline or spline path.
Second times the Duration along Path.
3. Click the Record Walkthrough Along Specify a Compression percentage
Path edit button or select 3D> between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives
Walkthroughs> Record Walkthrough the highest quality images and largest
Along Path from the menu. file sizes.
4. An Information message displays, From the drop-down list, select the
reminding you that while a walkthrough Rendering Technique you would like
is being recorded along a path, you the walkthrough to use. See Glass
should avoid using your computer. House View on page 364.
5. In the Walkthrough Options dialog: Click OK.
To cancel the recording as it is being created,
press the ESC key on your keyboard.
418
Walkthroughs
To record a walkthrough frame by frame 6. To move the camera without saving a

view, select 3D> Walkthroughs> Pause
1. Create a camera view. This view is the
first frame of the walkthrough. Recording to temporarily stop
recording.
2. From the view, select 3D> Walk-
You can then select 3D> Walk-
throughs> Record Walkthrough .
throughs> Save Frame button to
3. Specify a location and name for the control what views are saved.
walkthrough in the Write Movie File You can start recording again by select-
dialog and click Save.
ing Pause Recording once more.
4. In the Walkthrough Options dialog:
7. When the walkthrough sequence is com-
plete, select 3D>Walkthroughs> Stop
Recording or close the view.
Note: Zooming in and out and using the scroll

bars does not change the viewpoint and does
not produce a frame for the walkthrough.
Select a Frame Rate between 1 and
100. The value entered is the number To play a walkthrough
of frames per second.
Select a Compression Percent 1. Select 3D> Walkthroughs> Play
between 0 and 100. A value of 0 gives Walkthrough to open the Open
the highest quality images and the larg- Movie File dialog.
est file size.
2. Browse to an .avi file on saved on your
Click OK.
computer. Your default video application
5. Use the camera movement tools to cre- plays the walkthrough.
ate additional views. Each time the
screen redraws, that view is recorded as
the next frame in sequence. See Editing
3D Views on page 351.
419
420
Chapter 33:
Importing &
Exporting
Importing is the process of opening a file that importing and exporting 2D .dxf files and a
was produced in a different program in variety of 3D file formats.
Home Designer Suite. Exporting, on the
There are numerous other options for
other hand, is the process of saving
importing objects and data in Home Designer
information in a Home Designer Suite file to
Suite. They are discussed in the chapters in
a format that can be read by another
which those objects or settings are discussed.
program.
Home Designer Suite allows you to import Chapter Contents
and export a variety of information from and DXF File Format
to other applications. This chapter focuses on Exporting 2D DXF Files
DXF File Format

Many design programs can read and write
.dxf files. The .dxf file format interprets data
as CAD objects such as lines, polylines, and
circles.
.dxf (Drawing eXchange Format) is a
standard file format created by Autodesk for
the transfer of data between other programs.
421
Exporting 2D DXF Files

Line-based 2D files can be exported from Export All Floors
Home Designer Suite in .dxf file format. You
can specify the version of AutoCAD to To export the floor plan view for all
export to. Compatibility with other software floor plans simultaneously, select
may vary. File> Export> All Floors (DXF) from any
floor of the plan. The floor plans are
There are two ways to export a 2D drawing exported to a single .dxffile.
file in Home Designer Suite: Export Current
View and Export All Floors. If you choose to export all floors, the file will
contain all floors superimposed on each
other. Upon export, each layer in your Home
Export Current View
Designer Suite drawing is divided into
To export the floor plan view or separate layers: one for each floor. For
Vector view that is currently visible, example: Electrical-2 contains objects on
select File> Export> Current View (DXF). Floor 2 that were originally on the
Electrical layer.
Export Drawing File Dialog
1 At the bottom of the dialog, specify The rest of the Export Drawing File dialog is
which version of AutoCAD you want similar to the Save Plan File dialog, but the
your .dxf file to be compatible with. file type is .dxf. See Exporting Files on
page 37.
422
Additional 2D Export Information
Additional 2D Export Information

The export process converts high level Home Home Designer Suite does not support
Designer Suite objects (doors, windows, etc) arrowhead styles or fonts.
into simple, CAD-based objects (lines, arcs, Three kinds of dimensions are generated:
etc). Home Designer Suite exports all data to Aligned, Rotated and 3 Point Angular.
AutoCADs Model Space.
Please refer to AutoCAD documentation
for more information.
Supported Entities
Block Insert - A block insert is a reference
The following entity types are currently
to a block, which is a named collection of
supported for 2D export:
entities. A block can also contain block
Line - The simplest entity. In AutoCAD, inserts.
lines are 3 dimensional with the Z coordinate
set to zero. Line Types
Arc - Arcs have a start angle, end angle and A line type, or line style, is used by layers
radius. and entities to determine how lines are
Circle - Fully Supported. drawn. Home Designer Suite line types
installed with the program are supported on
Multi Line Text - If exporting to an export.
AutoCAD release that supports multi-line
text, Home Designer Suite writes the file as Layers
multi-line text. If exporting to a version that
does not support multi-line text, the file is Layers in other systems are similar to Home
written as simple text. Designer Suite layers, but there are some
subtle differences. Layer information is
Polylines - Polylines are a collection of mapped as follows:
points with lines or arcs connecting them.
Home Designer Suite supports both lines and
Home Other Systems
arcs. Arcs are referred to as bulges in
Designer
AutoCAD. Suite
Dimensions - Each dimension has an Name Name
associated block containing a representation Color Nearest AutoCAD Color. Home
of the dimension as it is drawn in Home Designer Suite uses the default
Designer Suite. It also contains all the data to AutoCAD color table to deter-
recreate that information. mine this mapping.
When an exported dimension is modified Display On

in AutoCAD or other CAD program, its
appearance changes.
423
Size Line Weight. In AutoCAD, line

weights are determined by a
table of mm line widths. Home
Designer Suite maps to the clos-
est match in the default line
weight table based the Line
Weight Scale set in the Page
Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Dialog on page 435.
Style Line type
Lock Lock
3D Data Import Requirements

Importing a symbol that can be used by The 3D model must be composed of
Home Designer Suite is a relatively simple 3DSOLID solid entities, or face data.
process that begins with previously created Faces are typically referred to as 3D
3D data. This 3D data often comes from a faces, polygonal faces, or poly meshes.
program other than Home Designer Suite. If Other types of entities such as lines,
you use another 3D modeling program to curves, circles, polylines, and free form
create the 3D data, be aware of the following surfaces can exist in the file but are not
requirements before attempting to create imported when the symbol is created.
symbols. This is true for all ( /.obj/.3ds/.skp) file
types.
Home Designer Suite is not able to pro- The face data should be assigned to dif-
vide support for any third party soft- ferent layers so that you can map them to
ware. the correct materials when viewing them
in 3D. It is helpful to name your layers
There are a number of requirements that using a convention that identifies that
must be met before any 3D data can be used materials should be assigned to each sub-
to create a symbol in Home Designer Suite: component.
The 3D data must be stored in an, object Pay attention to the origin and orientation
(.obj), 3D Studio Mesh (.3ds) or of the 3D data when designing symbols.
SketchUp version 8 and prior (.skp) file Home Designer Suite allows some adjust-
format. If you have 3D data in another ment when creating the symbol, but it is
format, you must convert it into one these easier to build the 3D data correctly
formats first. before importing it into Home Designer
Geometry and material information stored Suite. For more information about defin-
in .3ds files are imported; cameras and ing the origin, see Symbol Origin on
lights are not. page 54.
424
Importing 3D Symbols
Home Designer Suite does not support

grouped objects in symbols imported
from .3ds files.
Surface Normals
If you use third party software to help you
create the .dxf /.obj/.3ds./skp files that will
be turned into symbols, you should be
familiar with the concept of surface normals.
A surface normal is a vector
that is perpendicular to the
plane of a surface. This
The cube on the left shows which direction
vector points in one
each face was drawn and the cube on the
direction, determined by the
right shows which direction the surface
way the face is drawn.
normal for each face points as a result.
If the face is drawn
Many objects can be drawn using only one
clockwise, the surface normals are directed
side of each face. A cube is a good example.
outward, if the face is drawn counter-
The inside of a cube is not visible when only
clockwise, the surface normals point inward.
the outside faces are drawn. When the inside
faces are not calculated, 3D views in Home
Designer Suite generate faster. Home
Designer Suite assumes that the face on the
positive side of the normal vector is the
outside face.
Home Designer Suite supports the while those imported using the Import 3D
import of 3D surface and 3D solid Symbol dialog are also saved in the library.
objects saved to .3ds, .obj, and .skp formats. See The Library on page 305.
There are two ways to import a 3D symbol
To drag and drop a 3D symbol
into Home Designer Suite:
By dragging and dropping the file from 1. Open the plan in which you would like
Windows Explorer into floor plan view. to import a 3D symbol and remain in
floor plan view.
Using the Import 3D Symbol dialog.
2. Open a Windows Explorer window in
Symbols imported by clicking and dragging front of the Home Designer Suite pro-
are imported for use in the current plan, gram window.
425
3. If the Explorer window fills your screen, The Import 3D Symbol dialog is a typical
click the Restore Down button at the top Open File dialog. See Importing Files on
right and resize the window so that the page 40
Home Designer Suite program window
Home Designer Suite supports the import of
can be seen behind it.
3D surface and 3D solid objects saved to
4. Click on the desired .3ds, .obj or .skp .3ds, .obj and .skp formats. Home Designer
file and drag it into the Home Designer Suite treats imported symbols as stand alone
Suite program window. fixtures.
5. When your cursor changes to a +, click
in the drawing area to place as many Note: SKP files are always imported using
copies of the symbol as desired. When inches, regardless of the default units used in
you are finished, select a different tool. the plan file. See Creating a New Plan on
page 35.
Import 3D Symbol Dialog
Select File> Import> 3D Symbol to
open the Import 3D Symbol dialog.
3D Symbols and Materials

When a symbol is imported into Home In order to properly import an .obj file,
Designer Suite, material definitions may be Home Designer Suite needs the .obj file, the
included with it. How material information is .mtl file, and any referenced texture files. If a
included depends on the symbols file texture file is not available, the material it is
format. See About Materials on page 325. associated with is created without a texture.
OBJ Files The material definitions associated with an
Material definitions for most .obj files are imported .obj symbol are not available for
saved in a separate file with the .mtl file use by other objects in Home Designer Suite
extension. If such a file exists, the materials until that symbol has been placed into a plan.
associated with the .obj file display in the list The associated texture files are then copied
on the left side of the Materials window. to the users Textures folder. See Home
Designer Suite Data on page 35.
If Home Designer Suite does not receive
3DS Files
material definition information in an
accompanying .mtl file, default material Material definitions for .3ds files refer to
properties are assigned. texture information in separate image files.
Material definitions for .obj files can also In order to properly import a .3ds file, Home
include texture information in the form of Designer Suite needs these referenced image
image files (.jpg, .png, etc). files. If a texture file is not available, the
material it is associated with will be created
426
without it. The associated texture files are Home Designer Suite does not support
copied to the users Textures folder. deformed textures. If a texture associated
SKP Files with a .skp file is deformed, it will be
imported without the deformations.
The textures associated with a .skp file are
saved in the file. After you import a symbol Texture Filename Conflict
and either place it in a plan or add it to the
Library, these textures are saved in the Home If a texture of the same name already exists
Designer Suite Textures folder. in the plan when an .obj, .3ds or .skp file is
imported, the Texture Filename Conflict
dialog displays.
Select Rename the imported texture, ture to either keep the existing texture or
then click the Browse button to create a replace it with the new, imported one.
copy of the textures image file with a Check Do this for all remaining textures
new name that you specify. in this object to use the same selection
Select Use the existing texture instead for all textures with filename conflicts
of the imported texture or Replace the associated with this symbol.
existing texture with the imported tex-
427
428
Chapter 34:
Printing
Home Designer Suite provides a variety of Chapter Contents

printing options, from printing plan and 3D Introduction to Printing
views to a set of templates that can be Printers
assembled into a 3D model. The Printing Tools
Home Designer Suite also allows you to save Display Options and Printing
your drawings in pdf file format that can then Printing Directly from a View
be sent to a printing service. Printing to Scale
Printing Across Multiple Pages
Printing to a PDF File
Screen captures are provided for Page Setup Dialog
illustrative purposes only and are not an
Print Dialog
endorsement of any products.
Print Image Dialog
Print Model
429
Introduction to Printing
Terminology
Always familiarize yourself with your
printer or plotter before a deadline. It There are a couple of terms that you should
takes a little time to configure the machine familiarize yourself with.
properly when you first start.
Paper Size - The dimensions of the paper to
Home Designer Suite offers printing options be printed on. Specifying a paper size that is
to suit a variety of needs. You will benefit smaller than the scaled drawing allows large
from understanding the output options drawings to be printed across multiple pages.
clearly and choosing the one that makes the Printing Scale - Drawings are often printed
most sense for the project at hand. to scale for accuracy. " = 1' and 1 m = 50 m
are examples of common scales. Home
Output Options Designer Suite prints to a scale of 1/16 = 1
by default, although this scale can be
Printing a View - You can print any view of
changed in the Page Setup dialog. See
your plan. Home Designer Suite can print to
Page Setup Dialog on page 435.
almost any printer that supports printing
graphics from Windows programs. See The When a particular scale is not important,
Printing Tools on page 431. drawings can also be sized to fill a particular
area. See Printing to Scale on page 433.
Printing to a Remote Printer - Plans can be
printed to a .pdf file and printed remotely.
See Printing to a PDF File on page 434.
Printing Problems
Print Model - If your final printed output Home Designer Suite can print to almost any
will be used to create a 3D model of your printer that supports printing graphics from
design, the Print Model feature works best. Windows programs. If you encounter
See Print Model on page 437. difficulties when trying to print, see
Troubleshooting Common Technical
Issues on page 454.
Printers
Printer Drivers updated regularly. Different drivers are used
for different versions of Windows.
Printer drivers are programs that interpret
between software programs and the printer. It is useful to keep track of the drivers for
The drivers are usually created by the each printer you use and update them
manufacturer of the printer and are typically whenever the Windows operating system is
updated or replaced.
430
The Printing Tools
Windows provides information about

Note: You should only update your printer installing printer drivers. To access Windows
driver if you are having problems printing. Help, select Start> Help. If you have
problems installing a driver, refer to your
To find the version of your printer driver, printer documentation for technical support.
select Start> Control Panel> Printers and
Faxes to view the Printers information for
Options available with one driver may
Windows. Select the printer in question, then not be available with another. Printers
choose File> Properties. supported in one version of Windows may not
be supported by the manufacturer in another.
In most Printer Properties dialogs is an
About button which you can click to find the
version and creation date of the driver Clearing Printer Information
currently in use. If you experience printing Some information specific to individual
problems and yours is not the latest driver,
printers, such as available paper sizes, is
consider replacing it with an updated driver.
saved with each plan file. You can select
Visit your printer manufacturers Web site
File> Print> Clear Printer Info to clear the
for more information.
printer-specific information stored with the
plan file.
The Printing Tools

Select File> Print to view the Print Print Image - Prints a screen view
Tools submenu. including images, textures and
backdrops. See Print Image Dialog on
Page Setup - Opens the Page Setup
page 437.
dialog, where printing options are set.
See Page Setup Dialog on page 435. Print Model - Opens the Print Model
dialog, allowing you to print templates
Scale to Fit - Automatically selects a
for making a physical model of your plan.
scale that fits your plan to the printer
See Print Model on page 437.
page. See Printing to Scale on page 433.
Clear Printer Info - Clears the printer
Center Sheet - Automatically centers
information associated with the current page
your drawing on the sheet. See Cen-
setup.
ter Sheet on page 432.
Print Preview - Shows how the
current view will appear when printed.
See Print Preview on page 432.
Print - Prints the current floor plan.
See Print Dialog on page 436.
431
Display Options and Printing

The display of objects in views can be used Print Preview
to affect the printed output. Some display
options allow you to preview the printed Select File> Print> Print Preview for
output on screen before any paper is used. an on-screen representation of how
the current view will appear when printed.
Objects must be visible in order for them to Print Preview is only available in floor plan
print; but not all items that are visible print. view. See Printing to Scale on page 433.
Camera symbols in floor plan view and The printer page displays as a solid white
the reference grid, for example, do not rectangle, and blue lines along the edges of
print. the printer page indicate the edges of the
The Reference Display does print if it is printable area, as defined by the currently
visible. See Reference Display on page selected printer. See Printers on page 430.
177.
Objects such as camera symbols that do not
print do not display in Print Preview .
To see how your printed output will
appear on paper, select File> Print>
Text and dimension objects appear on-screen
Print Preview. as they will on the printed page.
Displaying Objects Center Sheet

You can control the display of objects Select File> Print> Center Sheet to
when printing directly from a view in center the printer page on the drawing.
the Display Options dialog. See Display This moves the printer page relative to the
Options Dialog on page 55. drawing but does not affect the coordinates
of objects in the drawing. The location of the
printer page is independent for each floor of
the model.
Printing Directly from a View

To print directly from any floor plan To set up print formatting before printing,
view, choose File> Print> Print. See select File> Print> Page Setup . See
Print Dialog on page 436. Page Setup Dialog on page 435.
432
Printing to Scale
3D views can be printed using File> Print>

Print Image . See Print Image Dialog
on page 437.
Printing to Scale
Several different print scaling options are re-center the printer page so that everything
available. The type of view that you are fits on the page.
printing determines which options you may
Imperial drawing scales are typically noted
choose from.
in inches per foot. Larger scales, such as 1
inch = 50 feet or 1:200m, are often used for
Orthogonal Views property layouts.
Floor plan views are orthogonal views,
which means: Perspective Views
Your line of sight is at a right angle to all Camera views and overviews display the
objects in the view. model much the way the eye would see it and
Objects do not appear to decrease in size cannot be scaled.
as their distances from the viewer Objects in the view may be at any angle
increase. relative to your line of sight.
Orthogonal views can be printed to scale. Objects seem to decrease in size as their
distances from the viewer increase.
The scale set in the Page Setup dialog is
inherited by the Print dialog. This scale can Perspective views can only be printed using
be overridden on an individual basis in the the Print Image tool. See Print Image
Print dialog. See Print Dialog on page 436.
Dialog on page 437.
Select File> Print> Scale to Fit in an
orthogonal view to select a suitable scale and
Printing Across Multiple Pages

When printing directly from a floor plan Preview and then Window> Fill
view it is possible to print at a scale that does
not fit the drawing on one page. Window . Grey lines across the drawing
sheet indicate where the page breaks will
To see on-screen what the drawing will look occur. See Print Preview on page 432.
like when printed, select File> Print> Print
433
To print across multiple pages 4. Select File> Print> Print . In the

Print dialog, make sure To Scale is
1. Select File> Print> Print Preview selected, then click OK. See Print Dia-
to display the white rectangle represent- log on page 436.
ing the printer paper. See Print Pre-
view on page 432. 5. Select the printer paper rectangle and
move it so that the desired contents of
2. Click the Select Objects button, your second printed page are within the
then click near an edge of the printer printable area and print To Scale.
paper rectangle to select it. 6. Continue moving the printer paper and
When selected, the printer paper is printing as needed.
highlighted in pale grey and a square
When printing multiple pages, it is generally
Move edit handle displays at its center.
a good idea to leave some overlap on the
3. Click and drag the Move edit handle to edges of each page to make sure that
position the printer paper so that the por- information near those edges is not left off
tion of your drawing that you would like the printed pages by mistake.
to print on your first page is located
within the printable area of the page.
Printing to a PDF File

The .pdf, or Portable Document Format, To print to .pdf
creates viewable and printable documents
and is one of the most universally compatible 1. Select your .pdf printer driver as you
and efficient file formats. would select any other printer in the
Page Setup dialog. See Page Setup
Creating a .pdf document requires that a .pdf Dialog on page 435.
printer driver be installed on your computer.
This is not a physical print device, but a 2. Select File> Print> Print to open
software program that is recognized as a the Print dialog. Your .pdf printer driver
printer by all other programs and creates a is listed as the selected printer.
.pdf file that can be read and printed using 3. Select the needed options in the Print
Adobe Reader. dialog, then click OK.
When you print to a .pdf print driver, you 4. In the Save As dialog, select a File
will be asked for a file name and destination name and Save in location for your .pdf
automatically. file. For information about the settings
in the Save As dialog, see Saving a
Plan File on page 36.
434
Page Setup Dialog
Page Setup Dialog

Select File> Print> Page Setup to perspective view is active, Page Setup is
open the Page Setup dialog. not available.
The Page Setup dialog is only available The settings in this dialog, including the
when an orthogonal view is active. When a selected printer, are specific to the current
orthogonal view file, and are saved with the
.plan file.
1 5
1 Specify the printer paper Size and 5 A preview of the printer paper displays
Source. The options available in these on the right side of the dialog.
drop-down lists are controlled by the
Click OK to close the dialog and apply any
currently selected printers driver. See
changes.
Printer Drivers on page 430.
2 Select Portrait or Landscape paper Clearing Printer Information

orientation.
Select File> Print> Clear Printer Info to
Specify a print Scale. 1/16 inch = 1 ft clear the printer-specific information stored
3
(1m = 50 mm) is the default. in the Page Setup dialog.
4 Click the Printer button to select a

printer.
435
Print Dialog
To print directly from floor plan view
and the Materials List, select File> Note: 3D views can be printed using Print
Print> Print. The Print dialog opens. Image. See Print Image Dialog on page
437.
3 4
1 Specify Printer parameters. Note: If you are zoomed out, and Current
Screen is selected, any white space around
Choose a printer from the Name drop- the plan is calculated for printing.
down list.
Click Properties to verify that the
3 Select from the available Scaling
printers paper size, orientation and other options.
settings are configured correctly. Fit to Paper prints the plan on one page.
Specify the Print Range. The program will use whatever scale is
2 necessary to fit the plan on one page. If a
percentage less than 100 is specified,
Current Screen prints only the portion
only that portion of the printable area is
of the entire View showing on screen.
used.
Entire Sheet prints the entire sheet even
Select To Scale to print at the scale speci-
though you may be zoomed in on a por-
fied by settings in the current plan.
tion of the view.
436
Print Image Dialog
4 Select from the available Options. Check the Print in Color box to print in
color or clear the check box to print in
Specify the number of Copies to print. grey scale.
Most black and white printers will print a
grey scale approximation of the colors if
Print in Color is selected.
Print Image Dialog

Any view can be printed by selecting The Print Image dialog is similar to the Print
File> Print Image. This is the only dialog; however, the printing process is
way to print 3D views. See 3D Rendering different. Print Image prints individual
on page 361. pixels as opposed to vectors (lines).
2 3
1 Specify the Printer parameters. 2 Specify the Print Range.

Choose a printer from the Name drop-
down list. 3 Specify the number of Copies.
Click Properties to verify that the
printers paper size, orientation and other
settings are configured correctly.
Print Model
The Model Maker allows you to create printed to scale and assembled into an actual
a template of your plan that can be 3D model. Three groups of templates are
437
used in the process. Walls and roofs are automatically. What it does provide is
printed separately. These can then be placed accurate templates for wall and roof sections.
onto a floor plan view, which is printed as a Combining these with your own skills helps
layout for the entire model. you create professional quality models.
Since different people build house models in
different ways, the Model Maker focuses on Printing the Model
providing the most necessary tools. It may The best way to understand how the various
not necessarily give you everything you options affect the final product is to make a
might want in order to build house models very simple two story plan and try them out.
your way. For example, you may want to
affix tabs to certain wall or roof edges to help To print the model templates, choose File>
attach them to their neighbors. While you Print> Print Model . The Print Model
can draw some of these things onto printed dialog opens.
sheets, the system does not provide them
Print Model Dialog
2
3
4
1 Select a Printer from the drop-down 2 Specify the Scale for your model. The
list and set its Properties. default is 1/16 inch = 1 foot (1 m =
Landscape is usually the best mode for 50 m).
printing models. If it is not your default
printing mode, it can be selected via the 3 Specify the Floor Thickness, which is
the thickness of the material that you
Properties button. will use for the floor platform of the model.
Information about your printer and its
current setup displays here. 4 Check Print in Color to print in color
rather than black and white.
438
Print Model
Assembling the Model appearance of the model and how they were
printed.
Once the templates have been printed, they
are ready to be assembled. You need scissors It may be helpful to take the thickness of the
and an adhesive and a rigid material that can rigid material being used into consideration
be easily cut and glued, such as thin and override the scale thickness of the walls
cardboard or styrofoam, to provide support so that it agrees with your material thickness.
for the 3D model. If your walls were resized in the Print Model
Floor Plan View Template dialog, you may see unwanted lines between
floors that should merge together seamlessly.
Begin by laying out the floor plan view, This is usually due to walls whose exterior
which is used as a layout for the entire 3D surfaces match but overall thickness does
model. If your floor plan view template not. You can prevent this by checking Use
printed on a number of sheets, they should be Scale Wall Thickness, which prevents walls
combined into one. Exterior and interior wall from resizing. This is best if you do not want
surfaces should match throughout. to print the interior wall surfaces, or are
Adhere your complete floor plan view using a modeling material that closely
template to a sturdy and dedicated surface to matches the scale thickness of your walls.
provide support for your walls. Roofs
Walls Roof planes are joined together when
Walls should be cut and fixed to a rigid possible before printing. For each roof
backing so that they can stand on their own surface, the fascia and soffit surfaces are
and support the weight of the roof or floors attached at the eave, so that the least amount
above them. How they are cut and assembled of taping produces the roof and adjoining
varies depending on the desired final surfaces.
439
440
Chapter 35:
Materials Lists
Home Designer Suite can calculate a Chapter Contents

Materials List in three ways: From All The Materials List Tools
Floors, From Area, or From Room. Creating an Accurate Materials List
Materials Lists can be created, edited, and Organizing Materials Lists
printed directly from the program. They can Materials List Display Options Dialog
also be exported as text files for use in other Editing Materials Lists
programs. Exporting the Materials List
Conditioned Area Totals
Structural Member Reporting
The Materials List is based on certain
assumptions that may not match your
building style. Home Designer Suite makes no
representation as to the accuracy or reliability
of the Materials List generated by Home
Designer Suite. Always compare the Materials
List with a manual take-off before providing a
quote or ordering materials for a job.
441
The Materials List Tools

Select Tools> Materials List to List for the portion of a plan on a single floor
access the Materials List tools. that is included within a rectangular
Materials Polyline.
A Materials List is like a snapshot of the
current plan at the time that the list is made.
To use Calculate from Area
Any changes made to the model after a
Materials List is generated are not included
1. Select Tools> Materials List> Calcu-
in that list. Create a new Materials List if you
would like it to include these changes. late from Area .
It is not necessary to wait until the plan is 2. Click and drag a rectangle around the
complete to generate a Materials List. In fact, area of the current floor that you would
you can create a series of Materials Lists like to produce a Materials List for.
reflecting costs at various stages of a project. 3. When the mouse button is released, a
Materials List for the area within the
For comparison, generate Materials Lists rectangle will display.
with and without a proposed plan modifi- Calculate From Area rectangles are
cation.
temporary and do not display in floor plan
view after the list is created.
Calculate from All Floors
Select Tools> Materials List> Calculate From Room
Calculate From All Floors to To create the Materials List for a
generate a Materials List for the entire room, select the room, then select
model. Tools> Materials List> Calculate From
Materials lists calculated from all floors can Room.
be lengthy, and only a portion of the list may
display on your screen at one time. Use the Calculate From Room is also available
scroll bars to scroll through the complete list. on a selected rooms edit toolbar. See
Move the pointer to cells in the list and click Editing Rooms on page 122.
to make changes. A Materials List calculated from a room is
created for only the contents of that room:
Calculate From Area wall materials are not included.
Select Tools> Materials List> Calcu-
late from Area to produce a Materials
442
Creating an Accurate Materials List
Creating an Accurate Materials List

In order to take full advantage of Home Materials List. A better way would be to
Designer Suites Materials List capabilities, use a symbol or structural element.
there are several things to keep in mind. Bear in mind that using generic objects
The accuracy of your Materials List is like geometric shapes from the library to
directly related to the accuracy of your represent objects that arent available in
model. Floor and ceiling heights, wall Home Designer Suite can result in items
lengths, and structural settings all directly being calculated in the Materials List in a
affect Materials List calculations. manner that you might not expect.
It takes more than just making your draw-
ing look right to generate an accurate Framing in the Materials List
Materials List. If, for example, you use You can specify whether framing materials
CAD lines to draw an item on a floor are calculated by lineal foot, as a cut list, or
plan, that item will not be included in the as a buy list. See Structural Member
Reporting on page 447.
Organizing Materials Lists

You can control what items are calculated in
the Materials List by specifying which
categories are used.
There are some parts of a model that cannot
be excluded from the Materials List. Floor
and ceiling platforms are prime examples. If
you need to generate a Materials List for only
part of a plan, such as an addition, consider
making a copy of the plan file. In the copy,
delete the as-built portion of the plan and
then generate a Materials List.
443
Columns
Categories
Categories 2. Click in the cell in the ID column for a

line item.
The line items in the Materials List are
organized into a set of predefined categories, 3. Select the desired category from the
such as Electrical and Framing, which drop-down list that becomes available.
display in the ID column. The categories that are available cannot be
altered; however, you can specify which
To specify a line items category categories are included for individual lists in
the Materials List Display Options dialog.
1. Create a Materials List.
Materials List Display Options Dialog

When a Materials List is open, select Materials List Display Options dialog for
Tools> Display Options to open the the currently open list.
444
Editing Materials Lists
The Materials List changes automatically to

reflect any changes you make as soon as the
OK button is clicked.
Note: The information in a suppressed category

is still part of the Materials List. If the Materials
List is exported, suppressed categories are
exported, as well.
Check the box beside the name of each

category that you want to include in the
active Materials List.
These categories appear in the ID column in
the order they are presented here.
Editing Materials Lists

Materials lists can be edited in a variety of Changing Information
ways. You can adjust the width of a column
by clicking and dragging the bar on the right You can change the information in any
side of the column name. column in an individual Materials List. As
with added information, click in a cell to
select the existing text, then type in the
Adding Information
desired text.
You can enter information in the Price and
To move an item in a Materials List to a new
Comment columns for each item.
category, select the cell in the ID column and
Adding price or other information for any choose a new category from the drop-down
item is straightforward. Simply click in the list that becomes available. See Categories
cell and type the desired information. on page 444.
445
Total Cost Count and Price, which are always used in

the calculation even if they are not shown.
Total Cost is calculated using the Count,
Unit, Price, %Markup, Labor and Equipment
Copying Information
columns to calculate the cost. The formula
used is: Portions of a Materials List can be copied
(Count + Extra) * Price * (1 + (% and then pasted into a Text object or into
Markup/100)) + ((Count + Extra) * Labor) a word processing program or spreadsheet
+ ((Count + Extra) * Equipment) program using the standard Windows Copy
(Ctrl + C), Cut (Ctrl + X), and Paste
If a column does not appear, 0 is used for the (Ctrl + V) commands. See Copying &
value of that column with the exception of Pasting Text on page 386.
Exporting the Materials List

Any Materials List can be exported commercial estimating programs in whose
into a text (.txt) file that can be databases you can keep your current pricing
opened directly by most spreadsheet and generate reports based on this data.
programs. In a Materials List window, select
Before purchasing an estimating software
File> Export Materials List.
program, be sure that the program supports
The Write Materials Export File dialog will the direct import of Home Designer Suite
open. This is a typical File Save dialog. See Materials Lists.
Exporting Files on page 37.
Any questions regarding estimating software
packages and how they interact with Home
Estimating Software Designer Suite should be directed toward the
You can export a Materials List to a word company providing the estimating software.
processor or spreadsheet program to arrange Home Designer Suite is unable to provide
it in your estimating format. You can also any technical support for third party
export the Materials List to a number of programs.
Conditioned Area Totals

The Materials List calculates the total areas Materials List. See Categories on page
of walls, floors, ceilings, doors and windows 444.
that separate the conditioned space in a plan
Conditioned area totals can be entered into
from unconditioned space. This information
third party programs such as REScheck to
is listed in the General category of the
determine whether the plan meets the energy
code in use in your area.
446
Similarly, south-facing walls, doors and

Home Designer Suite does not check windows are categorized as South if they
plans for compliance with building or are oriented at 45 or less of south in the plan.
energy codes.
Walls, doors and windows oriented within
Walls, doors and windows are categorized as 45 of either east or west will be classified as
north, south, east, or west facing for the East or West, respectively.
purposes of conditioned area totals. The orientation of a curved wall is based on
If a wall is oriented at 45 or less to north in a the direction of its chord.
plan, it will be categorized as a North wall. Doors are always categorized as doors rather
Any doors and windows in this wall will also than as glass (windows). This is the case
be categorized as North. even when a door is specified as a Glass
Door or when it is part of a mulled unit.

The Structural Member Reporting dialog from the tree list and click the Edit button.
allows you to specify the method used to See Default Settings on page 46.
calculate framing members in the Materials
You can create a list of the framing member
List.
sizes that you wish to purchase, and if an
To open the Structural Member Reporting item in The Materials List is the same length
dialog, select Edit> Default Settings , as or shorter than one of these defined
then select Structural Member Reporting lengths, it will be described using the defined
length rather than its actual length.
Structural Member Reporting Dialog
2
1
1 Choose a Method for reporting subsequently created Materials Lists, but not
structural members in Materials any that may already exist.
Lists. The selected method will affect
447
Select Mixed Reporting to calculate Select Buy List to calculate the framing
framing materials using a combination of materials of the different structural com-
lineal lengths and piece counts. ponents of the plan by counting individual
Select Total Lineal Length to calculate pieces and matching them to common
the framing materials of the different board lengths.
structural components of the plan in linear
feet. 2 Specify the Length Units, from the
drop-down list. The unit or units
Select Cut List to calculate the framing selected are used in the Materials List when
materials of the different structural com- either Cut List or Buy List is selected as the
ponents of the plan by counting the indi- method of reporting.
vidual pieces present in the model.
448
Appendix A
Additional
Resources
Home Designer Suite offers a variety of Users Guide

resources to help you become familiar with Home Designer Web Site
the many features it offers. Home Talk Online User Forum
Technical Support
Reference Manual
Reference Manual
The Home Designer Suite Reference Manual Manual is presented in .pdf file format and
is a comprehensive source of information for includes a Table of Contents and Index. This
Home Designer Suite 2012. Chapters are manual is available online by selecting
organized by subject, beginning with the Help> View Reference Manual from
fundamental concepts and progressing to the the program menu.
more advanced features. The Reference
Users Guide
Written for new Home Designer Suite users, the process of creating a complete model,
but a helpful reference for users of all from the first wall to the interior design and
experience levels as well, the Users Guide landscaping.
features a series of tutorials designed to
This guide is available online by selecting
introduce the basics of using the program.
Help> View Users Guide from the program
The Home Designer Suite Users Guide is menu.
organized by topic and walks you through
449
Online Help Videos

Another resource designed to illustrate Home To view the online videos, select Help>
Designer Suites powerful tools is the set of View Online Help Videos from the program
tutorial videos available on our web site. menu or visit
video.homedesigner.chiefarchitect.com/vid-
eos.
Home Designer Web Site

If you have questions that the online Help Designer Suite is available through a
feature ha not answered, feel free to turn to searchable interface.
the our web site.
Select Help> Visit Home Designer Web
A database of common technical support Site from the menu to launch your
questions and answers related to Home default internet browser to
Home Talk Online User Forum

The Home Talk Bulletin Board offers several Experienced users share knowledge with
ongoing discussions about a variety of topics each other and beginners.
related to the use of Home Designer Suite. Home Designer Suite Staff members post
It's rich with useful tips and available free of announcements, advice and technical
charge to all registered Home Designer Suite information.
users.
To visit the Home Talk forum, select Help>
Discussions are initiated and carried out
Home Talk or go to: HomeTalk.HomeDe-
by users.
signerSoftware.com.
Technical Support
Chief Architect takes pride in offering world Before contacting Technical Support, take a
class technical support services that can be moment to see if the answer to your question
accessed by telephone or on our web site at is found in the Help resources, tutorial
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com or by videos, or in our on-line Help Database at
selecting Help> Technical Support from the www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
program menu.
450
When you contact us, Technical Support will refer to Technical Support Services on
refer you to these resources if the answer can page 453 for additional trouble-shooting
be found there. suggestions and information that will be
needed before placing your call.
So that our Technical Support specialists can
assist you as efficiently as possible, please

Chief Architect is a premium, professional Home Designer Suite can open plans created
residential drafting and 3D design program in Chief Architect for viewing, as well.
that allows builders, architects and other
To learn more, select Help> Upgrade to
professionals in the building and interior
Chief Architect. to launch your default web
design trades to produce construction
browser to www.chiefarchitect.com.
documents and high quality 3D renderings of
their plans.
Chief Architect can open and edit plans
created in Home Designer Suite. In addition,
451
452
Appendix B
Technical Support
Services
Chief Architect is committed to providing correctly and to help you quickly resolve
world-class technical support to complement problems that prevent its normal use. Our
our products. technical support professionals are eager to
work with you to make certain our software
The primary function of technical support is
is functioning as designed.
to make sure our software is functioning
Reference and Training Resources

Chief Architect offers a variety of reference convenience at
options in addition to the resources that come www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
standard with the program.
Online Help Videos
Help Database
Chief Architect has developed a collection of
The Home Designer online Help Database training videos that contain in-depth training
contains a variety of articles describing how on a wide range of topics. These videos are
to resolve common technical problems and available on our Web site,
achieve specific design goals. www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com .
The Help Database is found in the Technical
Support section of the Web site and can be User Forum
referred to again and again at your Our Home Talk User Forum is a great place
to discuss and exchange ideas with other
453
Home Designer Suite users. Here you can engineering teams monitor the forum and
post questions, read discussions from other provide input and discussion on current
users, and post suggestions to improve our topics. This resource is available free of
product. In addition to our regular users, charge at
from time to time our support and HomeTalk.HomeDesignerSoftware.com.
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues

Chief Architect strives to make certain our The DVD has fingerprints, scratches, or
software works correctly; however, from other defects. Sometimes a small finger-
time to time issues arise that prevent its print can prevent the program from
normal operation. installing. Clean the disk with soft cotton
cloth. Be sure to use soft cotton rather
Installation Issues than paper products on disks to avoid
scratching.
The following are common reasons for
installation failure of Home Designer Suite
and other software: If you see visible cracking on a CD or
DVD, do not insert it in your CD/DVD
Anti-virus software is enabled and inter- drive. Cracked disks can fly apart and cause
fering with installation. Anti-virus soft- damage to your drive.
ware is the most common cause of
installation failures for any type of soft- You do not have sufficient rights to install
ware. Refer to your anti-virus softwares the software. Verify that you have admin-
documentation for details on how to dis- istrative rights and the administrative
able the software and re-enable it once password during the installation process.
installation is complete. If you are on a corporate network, consult
The recommended minimum system your network administrator for assis-
requirements are not met. See System tance.
Requirements on page 9. Refer to the on-line Help Database for
The computer has a CD drive but not a solutions to common installation problems.
DVD drive. A standard CD drive will not If the answer to your question is not found
read DVD discs. there, contact our Technical Support
department for assistance.
Troubleshooting Printing Problems

Printing problems fall into two main printing from Home Designer Suite. To
categories: those that prevent the printer determine if the problem is specific to Home
from working in any program and problems Designer Suite, try the following:
454
Troubleshooting Printing Problems
1. Begin by clicking on the Windows Start If you can print from Home Designer Suite
button, and select Printers. but are not satisfied with the output, refer to
2. Right-click the printer that is not func- Printing on page 429 for information on
tioning properly in the Printers folder. how to set up and use the printing functions
in the program. Legacy users should bear in
3. Click Properties from the menu that mind that each release has new features and
appears. enhancements, so techniques that were used
4. On the General tab, click the Print Test in prior versions may not work in the current
Page button. version.
If the printer does not produce a test page, Make sure that you use Print Preview
the problem is not one that Chief Architect before printing. Print Preview displays the
Technical Support can solve. Follow these printed paper, or drawing sheet, as a white
suggestions: rectangle on screen, and shows how the sheet
Check the connection between the com- is scaled and positioned relative to your
puter and the printer. drawing. If the drawing is not on the drawing
Check your printer documentation for sheet on-screen, it will not be on the sheet
troubleshooting printer problems. when you print. See Print Preview on page
432.
Contact your printer's manufacturer or
check their Web site for support informa- Make sure that your scaling is correct for the
tion. paper size. If the plan is much smaller or
much larger than the drawing sheet, you may
Your printer manufacturer is the best need to change your Scale. See Printing to
resource for solving problems of this type. Scale on page 433.
Chief Architect Technical Support is not able
to help diagnose and solve problems that
prevent printing from any program.
64 Bit Versions of Windows
Some printers may not function correctly on
It is a good idea to keep the Owners 64 bit Windows operating systems. If you are
Manual for your printer close at hand. experiencing a printing problem while using
Write inside the Owners Manual the various a 64 bit version of Windows, please contact
phone numbers for technical support for that the printers manufacturer to verify that you
printer for the original manufacturer and for have the correct driver installed.
your local dealer.
Printing to a legacy parallel printer port on a
Printers vary widely in how they function. Windows 64 bit machine may not work
Sometimes a faulty cable can be a problem. correctly when using a hardware lock. USB
Often, solving a printing problem is as printers should not be affected.
simple as downloading and installing an
updated printer driver. See Printer Drivers
on page 430.
455
Clearing Printer Information settings in the Page Setup dialog are correct,
Some information specific to individual and then click OK and Save the file.
printers, such as available printer paper sizes,
is saved with each plan file. Help Database
If you are encountering problems when For answers to frequently asked questions
printing, or unexpected options in the Page regarding printing and other topics, select
Setup dialog, select File> Print> Clear Help> Visit Home Designer Suite Web
Printer Info to clear the printer-specific Site and browse the Technical Support
information stored with the plan file. section of our Web site,
After using Clear Printer Info, select File> www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. Our
Technical Support specialists post new
Print> Page Setup . Make sure the articles periodically to help resolve problems
you may encounter.
Error Messages
Most common error messages have a known
cause and simple resolution. When you Press the Print Screen key on your key-
encounter an error or warning message in board to capture a picture of the error
Home Designer Suite, you can click the message. Open a new word processing doc-
ument or e-mail message and choose Edit>
Check Help Database button in the message Paste to paste a copy of the error message
box to launch your default internet browser into the document for later reference.
to the Home Designer Help Database on our
Web site, If you encounter the error more than once,
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. If an make a note of your steps prior to receiving
article discussing the message is available it the message.
will display, providing information about the
message and how best to avoid it. Before you report an error, check the Help
Database to see if the error is already
It is important that abnormal errors be documented by typing the error message or
reported to Chief Architect Technical part of the error message into the search
Support so that we can identify and resolve form.
any problems.
Finally, check to see if there are program
The content of an error message is useful in updates available. These updates are
diagnosing its cause. If you encounter an provided free for the current version of
error message, read it carefully and write Home Designer Suite and contain
down the error number and the exact text of enhancements and other changes that allow
the error message. the program to perform at an optimum level.
Select Help> Download Program Updates
456
Contacting Technical Support
from the Home Designer Suite menu to visit No personal information is sent. When you
our Web site, click Send, your default internet browser
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com, and launches and a Web page appears on screen
follow the instructions. This message confirms that the report was
sent successfully and may give you further
Error Reporting instructions on how to proceed.
When and error occurs, you may have the

option in the message box to send the report
to Chief Architect.
Contacting Technical Support

Before contacting Technical Support, take a Before contacting Technical Support,
moment to see if the answer to your question check to see if there are program updates
is found in the Reference Manual, Help available for download. Our engineering
index, or in our on-line Help Database. When team periodically creates updates to the
you contact us, Technical Support will refer program to resolve functionality or pro-
you to these resources if the answer can be gram issues that were unknown at the
found there. time of release. These updates are pro-
vided free of charge for the current
Chief Architect's world-class technical
released version and can be accessed by
support is available Monday through Friday
selecting Help> Download Program
from 6 AM to 5 PM Pacific Standard Time
Updates from the menu.
and can be reached at (208) 292-3375 or via
our Web site, When you first encounter a problem or
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com. error message, copy the exact wording of
the message or a detailed description of
There are several things you can do to ensure the problem. This helps us isolate the
a speedy answer to your question when you problem and provide you with a solution
contact Technical Support. as quickly as possible.
Before contacting Technical Support, When placing a call to Technical Support,
select Help> About Home Designer be at the computer or work station that is
Suite and make a note of the first charac- experiencing the problem and have Home
ters of your Product Key and the exact Designer Suite running. If you do not
version of Home Designer Suite you are have access to the problem computer at
using. Technical support is available to the time of the call, the technician may be
the owners of software licenses. When unable to reproduce the issue and/or sug-
you contact Technical Support, be pre- gest a remedy that can be implemented
pared to verify that you are the owner of and verified immediately.
the software license.
457
Be prepared to reproduce the problem Online Support

when you contact us. If the problem can-
not be reproduced, there is a reduced Questions can be answered online by the
chance that we will be able to resolve the Technical Support department. To submit a
problem on your first phone call. technical inquiry online, visit the Technical
Support section of our Web site and use the
Online Support Center .
Online Information
This route ensures that your question is
Home Designer Suite has a variety of support
delivered to the first available support
resources available on our Web site. These
professional. Requesting assistance of an
include our Technical Support Help
individual specialist is not recommended,
Database, the How do I? Solution
since that person may not be available to
Finder, downloadable program updates, and
answer your question in a timely manner.
ways to contact our Technical Support
department. To access these resources, visit:
www.HomeDesignerSoftware.com . Telephone Support
Our support team is happy to assist you in Our Technical Support team is committed to
finding the best resource to answer your answering your questions as quickly as
questions, and can resolve most issues in just possible and in the order received. Your call
a few minutes. In order to allow us to quickly is important to us; however, there are times
answer your calls, we ask that you limit when we get more calls than expected and
yourself to one question per support call. you may have to wait a few minutes before
speaking to a technician.
458
Index
Numerics Angle Snaps ........................................ 59
Angle Style
3D Dialog ................................................. 48
Data Import ........................................ 424 Appliances
Delete Surface ................................... 350 Built into cabinets .............................. 237
3D Home Architect files..................... 34 Outlets, where placed ........................ 225
3D Roof Designer .............................. 191 Arc
Specification Dialog ........................... 396
3D Views
Tab ................................................... 397
Display .............................................. 349
Doll House ................................. 347 348 Architectural Blocks
Editing ............................................... 356 Displaying ......................................... 302
Framing Overview .............................. 348 Edit Sub-Objects ............................... 302
Full Overview ..................................... 347 Explode ............................................ 302
Generation, Speed up ........................ 365 Sub-objects ....................................... 303
Overviews ......................................... 346 Archive Files ....................................... 38
Render Quality ................................... 345 Area
Save ................................................. 357 Living Area calculation ....................... 124
Working in ......................................... 356 of a Polyline ...................................... 399
3D Wall Designer ............................... 102 of Rooms .......................................... 125
3DS Files Arrange
Import ................................................ 425 All ..................................................... 342
Icons ................................................ 342
Arrow
A Auto Positioning ................................ 388
Tab ................................................... 395
Adding Text Line With ................................... 387
to the Library ..................................... 313 Artwork
Adjust Creating textures ....................... 331 332
Material Definition .............................. 330 Attic
Align Floor ................................................. 177
Curved Stairs Between Floors .............. 88 Rooms .............................................. 124
Curved Walls Between Floors ............. 110 Walls ................................................ 111
Objects ............................................... 87 Auto
Walls ................................................. 109 Archive ............................................... 38
Alphabets Dormers, Edit .................................... 194
International ...................................... 380 Floating Dormer ................................ 194
Unicode ............................................. 380 Place Outlets ............................ 124 , 223
459
Roof Returns ..................................... 197 House ............................................... 404

Save Files ........................................... 38 New Floor ......................................... 173
Stairwell ............................................ 213 Roof Dialog ....................................... 189
Auto Rebuild Terrain .............................................. 262
Foundation ........................................ 182 Bumping/Pushing ............................... 86
Roofs ................................................ 189
Terrain .............................................. 262
Automatic
Exterior Dimensions .......................... 371
C
Cabinet
Defaults ............................................ 235
B Designer ........................................... 235
Modules Library ................................. 237
Backdrops ......................................... 362 Specification Dialog ........................... 244
Definition .......................................... 362 Tools ................................................ 236
Background Color Cabinets
Set ..................................................... 48 Angled front ...................................... 242
Backsplash ........................................ 245
Backup
Base ................................................. 236
Files ................................................... 37
Blind ................................................. 243
Balusters ........................................... 116 Built-in appliances ............................. 237
Definition .......................................... 203 Corner .............................................. 242
Base Delete face items ............................... 247
Cabinets ........................................... 236 Door/drawer style .............................. 237
Basements Doors, diagonal ................................. 247
Daylight ............................................ 185 Doors, glass ...................................... 249
Walkout ............................................ 185 Editing .............................................. 240
End cabinets ..................................... 242
Bay Windows..................................... 154
Fillers ................................................ 238
Bay/Box Window Front Indicators ................................. 240
Specification Dialog ........................... 170 Front Tab .......................................... 246
Blend Colors with Materials ............ 327 Full Height ........................................ 236
Blind Cabinets .................................. 243 General Defaults ............................... 236
Bonus Glass doors ....................................... 249
Library Catalogs ................................ 310 Island ................................................ 243
Rooms .............................................. 177 Minimum Width .................................. 236
Module Lines ..................................... 240
Bow Windows.................................... 155 Moving, with Wall .............................. 241
Box Normal .............................................. 242
Windows ........................................... 155 Outlet placement ............................... 225
Break Peninsula radius ................................ 242
Line .................................................... 90 Radius end ........................................ 242
Line, partial ......................................... 90 Resize Increment ............................... 236
Wall .................................................. 102 Reverse Appliance ............................. 247
Build Shaped ............................................. 242
Foundation ................................ 174 , 181 Special shapes .......................... 242 , 244
Wall .................................................. 236
460
CAD Object edit tool .................................... 88
Angle Snaps ....................................... 59 Sheet ................................................ 432
Circles ............................................... 392 Change
Drawing Tools .................................... 391 Door Swings ..................................... 142
Ellipses ............................................. 392 Floor/Reference ........................ 177 178
Move to Front of Group ....................... 85 Line to arc ......................................... 207
Ovals ................................................. 392
Chimneys ........................................... 299
Polyline, rectangular (tool) .................. 392
Polylines ............................................ 399 Circle
CAD Box
Specification Dialog ........................... 401 Circles ................................................ 392
Ovals ................................................ 392
CAD Objects
Displaying .......................................... 402 Click Stairs ........................................ 202
Calculate Close
From All Floors .................................. 442 Plans and Views .................................. 44
From Room ........................................ 442 Program .............................................. 44
Loan .................................................. 406 Views ............................................... 342
Materials on soffits ............................. 293 Color
Camera Off/On ................................................ 85
Activating .......................................... 358 Color Chooser ............................. 56 , 334
Change Settings ................................ 358 Dialog ............................................... 334
Create Views ..................................... 346 Eyedropper ....................................... 334
Field of View ...................................... 354 Compatibility
Move Tools ........................................ 353 with other programs ............................. 34
Move Up/Down One Floor ................... 351 Connect
Orbit Tools ......................................... 353 Electrical ........................................... 223
Specification Dialog ........................... 358 Walls ................................................ 103
Tilt Tools ........................................... 353
Tools ................................................. 353 Contextual Menus
In Render views ................................ 351
Cascade Views................................... 339
Copy
Casing Folders and Library Objects ............... 316
Door .................................................. 148 Region as Picture .............................. 417
Ignore for opening resize ..................... 47
Copy/Paste
Cathedral Ceilings............................. 129 Main Edit Mode ................................... 62
Ceiling Sticky Mode ........................................ 62
Break Lines ....................................... 130 Corner
Heights .............................................. 127 Boards .............................................. 230
Ceilings Windows ........................................... 156
Cathedral ........................................... 129 Corner Board
Lowered ............................................ 128 Specification Dialog ........................... 230
Over this room ................................... 133
Special .............................................. 128 Create
Tray .................................................. 129 New Plan Dialog .................................. 35
Plant Image ...................................... 279
Center
Doors ................................................ 142 Cross Section Slider ........................ 355
461
Cross Section/Elevations ................ 346 Delete

Create .............................................. 348 3D Surface ........................................ 350
Crosshairs Built-in Fixtures and Appliances ......... 322
Mouse ................................................ 87 Current Floor ............................. 174 175
Synchronize with Cursor .................... 345 Floors ............................................... 174
Toggle On/Off ..................................... 87 Foundation ........................................ 183
Gable Over Opening .......................... 197
Current
Library Content .................................. 316
Floor ................................................. 176
Objects ............................................... 91
Floor, Delete ............................. 174 175
Roof Planes .............................. 189 , 191
Curved Wall Hatching .................................... 101
Deck Edge .......................................... 98
Dimension
Deck Railing ....................................... 98
Defaults ............................................ 367
Stairs ................................................ 202
Tab ................................................... 377
Walls, Draw ...................................... 103
Tools ................................................ 370
Dimension Defaults .......................... 367
Dialog ............................................... 367
D Dimension Line
Deck
Designer ............................................. 98 Dimensions
Edges ................................................. 98 Editing .............................................. 372
Railing ................................................ 98 End to end ........................................ 370
Exterior ............................................. 371
Decks ........................................... 98 , 126
Interior .............................................. 371
Default Locate railings ................................... 114
Lights ............................................... 363 Move Objects Using ........................... 376
Default Sun Light Moving Labels ................................... 373
Specification Dialog ........................... 364 Number Height .................................. 377
Defaults Tape Measure ................................... 371
Cabinet ............................................. 235 Display
Dimension ......................................... 367 3D Views ........................................... 349
Door ................................................. 137 CAD Objects ..................................... 402
Dormer ............................................. 188 Drawing Groups ................................... 85
Dynamic ............................................. 46 Electrical ........................................... 224
Floor ......................................... 120 , 172 Foundations ...................................... 181
Foundation ........................................ 180 Images .............................................. 411
General Plan ....................................... 47 Objects ............................................... 54
Material ............................................ 333 Room labels ...................................... 125
Roofs ................................................ 188 Terrain .............................................. 262
Room ................................................ 120 Walls, Railings, and Fences ............... 104
Rooms .............................................. 120 Display Options Dialog ...................... 55
Structural Member Reporting ............. 447
Distributed Object Tab ..................... 269
Wall .................................................... 96
Window ............................................. 154 Divided Lites see Lites
Define Doll House View ........................ 347 348
Material ............................................ 331 Door
462
Defaults ............................................. 137 Curved wall ....................................... 103
Specification Dialog ........................... 146 Drawing Groups .................................. 85
Tools ................................................. 138
Drawing Sheet
Doors Center .............................................. 432
Arched .............................................. 150
Driveways .......................................... 286
Bifold Doors ............................... 139 , 144
Casing ............................................... 148 DXF
Center ............................................... 142 File Format ....................................... 421
Change Opening/Hinge Side ............... 143 Import ............................................... 425
Change Swing Side ............................ 143 Dynamic
Doorways .......................................... 138 Defaults ........................................ 27 , 46
Frame ............................................... 149 Print Preview ..................................... 432
Gables Over ...................................... 197
Garage .............................................. 139
Garage, opening direction .................. 144
Handles ............................................. 151
E
Hardware ........................................... 151 Edit
Hinged Doors ............................. 138 , 142 Handles .............................................. 23
Hinges ............................................... 151 Toolbar ............................................... 24
Labels ............................................... 140
Library ....................................... 139 , 147 Edit Area .............................................. 68
Lites .................................................. 149 Edit Handles ........................................ 23
Lites, styles ....................................... 149 Electrical
Locks ................................................ 151 Auto Place Outlets ............................. 223
Openings in railings ........................... 145 Connections ...................................... 223
Pocket Doors ............................. 139 , 144 Deleting ............................................ 225
Rough opening .................................. 147 Displaying ......................................... 224
Size ................................................... 147 Editing Objects .................................. 224
Sliding Doors ..................................... 143 General ............................................ 221
Style .................................................. 147 Labels .............................................. 224
Swing, change ................................... 142 Library .............................................. 224
Threshold lines .................................. 140 Lights ............................................... 222
Transoms .......................................... 145 Outlets .............................................. 222
Type .................................................. 147 Switches ........................................... 222
Wrapped Openings ............................ 145 Tools ................................................ 222
Doorways Wiring ............................................... 223
Adding a Door .................................... 140 Electrical Service
with Railing ........................................ 145 Specification Dialog ........................... 226
Dormer Elevation
Defaults ............................................. 188 Data Tools ........................................ 253
Specification Dialog ........................... 195 Flat Regions ...................................... 255
Dormers .............................................. 193 Points ............................................... 253
Gable Over Door/Window ................... 197 Tab ................................................... 267
Manually drawn .................................. 194 Elevation Data
Windows in ........................................ 195 Tools ................................................ 253
Draw Elevation Line
Curved Railing ................................... 103
463

Elevation Point
F
Specification Dialog ........................... 265 F6 Key
Elevation Region Fill Window ....................................... 337
Specification Dialog ........................... 266 Fence Designer ................................... 98
Elevations Fencing ................................................ 98
Create .............................................. 348
Field of View ...................................... 354
Interior .............................................. 346
File
Ellipse ................................................ 392
Backing Up Your Files ......................... 37
Management ....................................... 33
End Organization ........................................ 34
Cabinets ........................................... 242
Fill
To-End Dimensions ........................... 370
Patterns ............................................ 400
Enhanced Metafiles .......................... 416 Window ............................................. 337
Error Messages ................................. 456 Window Building Only ........................ 337
Estimating Software ......................... 446 Fill Style Tab ..................................... 400
Exit Program ....................................... 44 Filter
Expand/Collapse All ......................... 309 Library Search ................................... 310
Explode Final View .......................................... 362
Architectural Blocks ........................... 302 with Shadows .................................... 362
Export Find Plan Wizard ................................. 41
2D Drawings ..................................... 422 Fire Box Tab ...................................... 298
All Floors .......................................... 422 Fireplace
Current View ..................................... 422 Direction facing ................................. 296
Drawing File Dialog ........................... 422 Interior wall ....................................... 296
EMF ................................................. 416 Library .............................................. 298
From the Library ................................ 317 Masonry ............................................ 295
Materials List .................................... 446 Prefabricated ..................................... 298
Picture Files ...................................... 414 Specification Dialog ........................... 296
Windows Metafiles ............................ 416 Symbol .............................................. 298
Windows Metafiles Dialog .................. 416
Fireplaces .......................................... 295
WMF ................................................. 416
Chimneys .......................................... 299
Extend Foundations ...................................... 296
Slope Downward ............................... 111 Freestanding ..................................... 296
Extension Lines In walls ............................................. 295
Adding .............................................. 374 Types ................................................ 295
Deleting ............................................ 375 Fixtures
Editing .............................................. 374 Lights ................................................ 222
Extension Snaps ................................. 59 Resizing .............................................. 47
Exterior Floating Auto Dormer ....................... 194
Dimensions ....................................... 371 Floor
Room types ....................................... 124 3D Overview ...................................... 346
The Exterior Room ............................ 121 Build New Floor ................................. 173
Walls .................................................. 98 Camera ............................................. 346
464
Defaults ..................................... 120 , 172
Heights .............................................. 127 G
Overview ........................................... 346
Gable
Tools ................................................. 173
Over Door/Window ............................ 197
Floor Plan
Garage
Drawing .............................................. 28
Door Tool .......................................... 139
View ................................................... 29
View Template (Print Model) ............... 439 Garages
Foundation ........................................ 184
Floors
Adding ............................................... 173 Garden Bed
Attic .................................................. 177 Kidney Shaped .................................. 259
Change Floor/Reference ............ 177 178 Polyline .............................................259
Current Floor ..................................... 176 Round ............................................... 259
Deleting ............................................. 174 Tools ................................................258
Floor Up/ Floor Down ......................... 176 General .............................................. 172
Maximum number ............................... 171 Cabinet Defaults ................................ 236
Reference Floor ................................. 177 Getting Help ........................................ 30
Swap Floor/Reference ........................ 178
GFCI Outlet ........................................ 222
Fonts ................................................... 380
Glass House
and Alphabets .................................... 380
Options Dialog .................................. 364
Footings ............................................. 180 View ................................................. 364
Foundation GPS
Auto Rebuild ...................................... 182 Importing .......................................... 275
Defaults ............................................. 180
Grid
Walls .................................................. 99
Snap Units .......................................... 48
Foundations Snaps ........................................... 48 , 59
Build .................................................. 181
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt ........ 222
Daylight Basement ............................. 185
Delete ............................................... 183
Display .............................................. 181
Garage .............................................. 184
Room supplies floor ........................... 133
H
Stem Wall .......................................... 180 Half
Stepped ............................................. 185 Walls ................................................ 116
Walkout Basement ............................. 185 Half-Walls ............................................ 97
Framing Hardiness Zone Maps ...................... 283
3D Overview ...................................... 348 Hardware Tab
Structural Member Reporting .............. 447 for Doors ........................................... 151
Full Hatch
Height Cabinets ................................. 236 Fill Patterns ...................................... 400
Overview ................................... 346 347 Wall .................................................. 101
Furniture Help
Resizing ............................................. 47 Display ............................................... 23
Tool Tips ............................................. 30
Hill / Valley
465
Specification Dialog ........................... 267 Camera Movements ........................... 354

Hill/Valley .......................................... 257 Commands ............................ 24 , 52 , 308
Holes Kidney Shaped
In terrain ........................................... 258 Garden Bed ....................................... 259
Pond ................................................. 259
Home Designer
Terrain Features ................................ 258
Product Key ........................................ 30
Version Number .................................. 30 Kitchen Island ................................... 243
Hotkeys .......................................... 24 , 52 Knee Walls ................................. 112 , 115
House Wizard ............................ 103 , 403
Editing Rooms ................................... 404
Multiple Floors .................................. 405
Placing Rooms .................................. 404
L
Labels
Door ................................................. 140
I Electrical ........................................... 224

Room ................................................ 125
Window ............................................. 159
Icons
Arrange ............................................ 342 Landing .............................................. 208
Image Landings
Specification Dialog ........................... 413 Custom Shapes ................................. 209
Height ............................................... 209
Images................................................ 362
Adding to Library ............................... 411 Landscape Designer ......................... 251
Creating ............................................ 411 Landscape Orientation ..................... 435
Displaying ................................. 411 412 Layer
Editing .............................................. 412 Layer Sets ........................................... 54
Place ................................................ 410
Layers
Printing ............................................. 437
Primary and Secondary ........................ 54
Select from library ............................. 279
Turn off to speed up 3D views ............ 365
Import ................................................. 425
Left Mouse Button
3D Data ............................................ 424
Definition ............................................. 22
3D Files ............................................ 425
GPS Data ......................................... 275 Library
Terrain Data ...................................... 273 Adding Folders .................................. 315
Terrain Wizard .................................. 273 Bonus Catalogs ................................. 310
Content ............................................. 310
Interior
Deleting Content ................................ 316
Dimensions ....................................... 371
Export ............................................... 317
Fireplace, wall ................................... 296
Manufacturer Libraries ....................... 311
Room types ....................................... 124
Renaming Libraries ............................ 315
Invisible Walls................................... 100 Restore Position/Size ........................ 309
Search .............................................. 309
Shortcuts .......................................... 316
K Trash ................................................ 316
Library Browser ................................ 306
Keyboard Adding Items ..................................... 313
466
Docking ............................................. 309 Marquee Select ................................... 67
Panes ................................................ 306 Masonry
Library Object Fireplace ........................................... 295
Specification Dialog ........................... 322 Material
Library Objects Defaults ............................................ 333
Editing ............................................... 321 Eyedropper ....................................... 328
Placing .............................................. 318 Material Painter................................. 326
Light Sources .................................... 362 and Walls .......................................... 328
Default Lights .................................... 363 Blending ........................................... 327
Default Sun Light ............................... 363 Modes .............................................. 326
Fixtures ............................................. 363 Using ................................................ 327
Lights Materials
Connect to switch ............................... 223 Add to Library ................................... 314
Fixtures ..................................... 222 , 363 Artwork ..................................... 331 332
Turn On/Off ....................................... 363 Blending ........................................... 330
Line Brightness ........................................ 333
Color ................................................. 395 Calculating amounts .......................... 293
Specification Dialog ........................... 394 Color ................................................ 332
Tab ................................................... 394 Create New Material .......................... 330
Create using Color Chooser ............... 334
Line Style ........................................... 395
Define Material Dialog ....................... 331
Tab ................................................... 395
Editing .............................................. 329
Lites On Soffits .......................................... 293
Craftsman .......................................... 167 Tab ................................................... 328
Diamond ............................................ 167 Textures ........................................... 361
Doors ................................................ 149 Walls ................................................ 105
Normal .............................................. 167
Materials List .................................... 441
Prairie ............................................... 167
Calculate from All Floors .................... 442
Tab ................................................... 166
Calculate from Room ......................... 442
Living Area ......................................... 126 Conditioned Areas ............................. 446
and Room Types ................................ 124 Display Options Dialog ...................... 444
Calculation ........................................ 126 Editing .............................................. 445
Delete label ....................................... 126 Estimating software ........................... 446
Label ................................................. 126 Export ............................................... 446
Restore label ..................................... 126
Menus ................................................... 25
vs. Footprint ...................................... 126
Loan Calculator ................................. 406 Message Boxes
Reset .................................................. 26
message URL http
//www.homedesignersoftware.com/
M useraccess/content.html ................. 312
Main Metafile Size Dialog.......................... 416
Edit Mode ........................................... 62 Metafiles ............................................ 416
Manual Middle Mouse Button ................. 23 , 336
Dimensions ........................................ 370 Minimum
Manufacturer Libraries ..................... 311 Alcove .............................................. 190
467
Model Maker Object ................................................. 26

Floor Plan View Template .................. 439 Plan .................................................... 39
Printing ............................................. 438 Symbol .............................................. 322
Molding View ................................................. 358
in Rooms .......................................... 133 OpenGL .............................................. 344
Moldings Tab Organizing
for Rooms ......................................... 133 your Files ............................................ 34
Monolithic Slab ................................. 180 Orthogonal Views ............................. 433
Mouse Buttons Outlets ................................................ 222
Using .................................................. 22 Above cabinet ................................... 225
Move Automatic .......................................... 223
Folders and Library Objects ............... 316 Dishwasher ....................................... 222
Object Using Dimensions ................... 376 For appliance .................................... 225
Objects ............................................... 86 GFCI ................................................. 222
Restrictions ......................................... 86 Manually placed ................................ 222
to Front of Group ................................. 85 Place ................................................ 223
Walls with Cabinets Attached ............. 241 Sink .................................................. 222
WP ................................................... 222
Mullions
Window ............................................. 166 Oval .................................................... 392
Multiple
Floors, Reverse Plan ........................... 91 Overview .............................................. 19
Select ................................................. 67 Camera tools ..................................... 353
Full ................................................... 347
Muntins
Window ............................................. 166
P
N Page Setup Dialog ............................ 435
Newels Painting
Definition .......................................... 203 Over Materials ................................... 330
No Locate Wall .................................. 114 Pan
Pan Window Tool .............................. 338
the Display ........................................ 337
Using the Keyboard ........................... 337
O Using the Mouse ................................ 338
Using the Scroll Bars ......................... 337
OBJ Files ........................................... 425
Paragraph Options Dialog ............... 383
Object
Partition Tool..................................... 237
Based Design ...................................... 21
Pass-Thru........................................... 155
Object Snaps ....................................... 58
Extension Snaps ................................. 59 Paste..................................................... 61
Hold Position ....................................... 63
One-Click Stairs................................ 202
in Place ............................................... 62
Open Special ................................................ 63
3D Home Architect files ....................... 34
PDF Files............................................ 434
Below ............................................... 124
468
Peninsula Radius Cabinets .............. 243 Specification Dialog ........................... 399
Picture Tab ................................................... 399
Copy Region as ................................. 417 Tool to create rectangular .................. 392
Picture File Box Ponds ................................................. 259
Specification Dialog ........................... 415 Round ............................................... 259
Picture Files Portrait Orientation .......................... 435
Export ............................................... 414 Print.................................................... 429
Import ................................................ 414 3D Views .......................................... 433
Scale ................................................. 415 Across Multiple Pages ....................... 433
Pitch Center Sheet ..................................... 432
Above Wall ........................................ 111 Clear Printer Info ....................... 431 , 456
Color or Black and White ................... 437
Place
Dialog ............................................... 436
Gable Over Window(s) ....................... 156
Directly from a View .......................... 432
Images .............................................. 410
Drivers .............................................. 430
Library Objects .................................. 318
Model ............................................... 438
Outlets ...................................... 124 , 223
Options ............................................. 431
Plan Paper Size ........................................ 430
Drawing .............................................. 28 Perspective Views ............................. 433
Find Wizard ........................................ 41 Plotters ............................................. 430
General Defaults ................................. 47 Preview ............................................ 432
Saving ................................................ 36 Printable Area ................................... 432
View ................................................... 29 Printing Scale .................................... 430
Plan Check ......................................... 405 Scale to Fit ....................................... 433
and room labels ................................. 125 Terminology ...................................... 430
Dialog ................................................ 406 Tiled ................................................. 433
Hold .................................................. 406 to PDF File ........................................ 434
Restart .............................................. 406 To Scale ........................................... 433
Plans Troubleshooting ................................ 454
Create New ........................................ 35 Print Image ........................................ 358
Opening ............................................. 39 Dialog ............................................... 437
Plant Printed Size Input Dialog................. 386
2D Symbols ....................................... 279 Printers .............................................. 430
Chooser Dialog .................................. 281 Select Printer ............................ 435 436
Encyclopedia ..................................... 281
Tools ................................................. 278
Plant Image
Create ............................................... 279 Q
Quoin
Plotters ............................................... 430 Specification Dialog ........................... 231
Polygon Quoins................................................ 231
Shaped Deck ...................................... 98
Polyline
Area .................................................. 399
Definition ........................................... 399
Garden Bed ....................................... 259
469
R House using Dimensions .................... 377

Objects ............................................... 88
Radius Restore
End Cabinets .................................... 243 Library Position/Size .......................... 309
Railing Tab Restrictions
for Railings ....................................... 115 Moving objects .................................... 86
Railings ................................................ 99 Retaining Wall ................................... 261
Balusters .......................................... 116 Reverse
Decks ................................................. 98 Plan .................................................... 91
Exterior Materials .............................. 116 Rich Text
Half Walls ........................................... 97 Defaults ............................................ 380
in a Doorway ..................................... 145 Specification Dialog ........................... 381
Locate with dimensions ..................... 114 Text Color ......................................... 382
No Rail ............................................. 116
Right Button Definition ...................... 22
No Shoe ........................................... 116
Open rail type ................................... 116 Road
Open with middle rail ......................... 116 Specification Dialog ........................... 288
Openings .......................................... 145 Road Objects
Raise Shoe ....................................... 116 Different Types .................................. 286
Solid ................................................. 116 Roads
Stairs ................................................ 212 Displaying ......................................... 287
Type ................................................. 116 Roof .................................................... 187
Raise Extend Slope Downward .................... 115
Shoe ................................................. 116 Full Gable Wall .................................. 114
Raised / Lowered Region Over this room ................................... 133
Specification Dialog ........................... 268 Pitches in Degrees ............................ 199
Rebuild ............................................... 189 Second pitch ..................................... 115
3D .................................................... 357 Styles, Automatic ............................... 189
Roofs ................................................ 189 Tab ................................................... 114
Tools ................................................ 188
Rectangular Polyline ........................ 392
Roof Designer ................................... 188
Redo ..................................................... 92
Roof Hole/Skylight
Reference
Display Options ................................. 178
Grid .................................................... 48 Roof Planes
Delete ............................................... 191
Render
Graphics card ................................... 344 Roofs .......................................... 187 , 189
Light Sources .................................... 362 Auto Rebuild ............................. 189 190
Quality .............................................. 345 Auto Roof Return ............................... 115
Tips .................................................. 361 Build Roof Dialog ............................... 189
Defaults ............................................ 188
Reset
Dormers ............................................ 193
Message Boxes ................................... 26
Hole for skylights ............................... 192
Reshape objects ................................. 89 Knee walls ........................................ 112
Resize Min. Alcove ....................................... 190
Fixtures & Furniture ............................. 47 Overhang .......................................... 191
470
Pitch .................................................. 111 3D Views .......................................... 357
Returns ............................................. 197 and Save As ....................................... 36
Skylights ............................................ 192 Plan .................................................... 36
Story-and-a-half ................................. 112 Scale................................................... 435
Room Picture Files ...................................... 415
Defaults ............................................. 120 Printing to ......................................... 433
Specification Dialog ........................... 130 Terrain Data ...................................... 275
Room Labels ...................................... 125 to Fit ................................................. 433
Display .............................................. 125 Schematics, Wiring .......................... 223
Edit ................................................... 125 Scroll Bars......................................... 337
Interior room area .............................. 125
Seat
Interior room dimensions .................... 125
in Bay Window .................................. 161
Room area ......................................... 125
Standard room area ........................... 125 Section Views
Create .............................................. 348
Rooms
Area .................................................. 125 Select
Attic .................................................. 124 Components of Blocked Units ............ 157
Auto Place Outlets ............................. 124 Library Object Dialog ......................... 319
Below Stairs ...................................... 214 Marquee ............................................. 67
Ceiling over ....................................... 133 Multiple Objects .................................. 67
Editing ............................................... 122 Next Object ......................................... 67
Exterior types .................................... 124 Objects button ..................................... 66
Foundation floor definition .................. 133 Objects in 3D Views .......................... 356
Interior .............................................. 124 Room ................................................ 121
Interior area ....................................... 125 Selected Edge ..................................... 66
Interior dimensions ............................. 125 Shift+Click .......................................... 67
Living Area ........................................ 124 Similar Objects .................................... 66
Name for PlanCheck .......................... 405 Service Data Tab............................... 226
Open Below ....................................... 124 Set Background Color........................ 48
Roof over ........................................... 133
Shelf ................................................... 237
Room Definition ................................. 120
Room Types ...................................... 124 Shelf Tool .......................................... 237
Selecting ........................................... 121 Shelf/Partition
Standard area .................................... 125 Specification Dialog ........................... 249
The Exterior Room ............................. 121 Shift Key
Types ................................................ 123 Marquee selection ............................... 67
Rotate objects .................................... 90 Select multiple objects ......................... 67
Round Shininess ........................................... 333
Garden bed ....................................... 259 Shoe
Pond ................................................. 259 None for railing ................................. 116
Raise for railing ................................. 116
Shortcut Keys ............................... 24 , 52
S Show
Reference Grid .................................... 48
Sash and Frame Tab ......................... 165
Shutters ............................................. 169
Save
471
Sidewalk ............................................ 286 Rich Text .......................................... 381

Polyline ............................................. 286 Road ................................................. 288
Skylights .................................... 189 , 192 Roof Hole/Skylight ............................. 192
Room ................................................ 130
Sliding Doors .................................... 138
Shelf/Partition .................................... 249
Snap Behaviors................................... 58 Soffit ................................................. 294
Angle Snaps ....................................... 59 Stair Landing ..................................... 218
Extension Snaps ................................. 59 Staircase ........................................... 215
Grid Snaps .......................................... 59 Terrain .............................................. 263
Object Snaps ...................................... 58 Terrain Feature ................................. 268
Snap Unit ............................................. 48 Terrain Path ...................................... 272
Soffit Text .................................................. 384
Defaults ............................................ 292 Wall .................................................. 113
Specification Dialog ........................... 294 Wall Hatch ........................................ 118
Window ............................................. 163
Soffits......................................... 237 , 291
Calculating Materials ......................... 293 Speed
Corner .............................................. 292 3D View Generation ........................... 365
Special applications ........................... 292 Split
Special Level Entries ..................................... 176
Shaped Cabinets ............................... 242 Level Floor Plans ............................... 175
Walls ................................................ 102
Specification Dialogs
Arc ................................................... 396 Stacked Windows ............................. 157
Bay/Box Window ............................... 170 Stair
Cabinet ............................................. 244 Landing Specification Dialog .............. 218
CAD Box ........................................... 401 Tools ................................................ 202
CAD Circle ........................................ 398 Stair Designer ................................... 202
CAD Ellipse ...................................... 398
Stair Landing
CAD Oval .......................................... 398
Camera ............................................. 358
Corner Boards ................................... 230 Stair Landings
Default Sun Light ............................... 364 Custom Shapes ................................. 209
Dimension Line ................................. 377 Height ............................................... 209
Door ................................................. 146 Stair Railing
Dormer ............................................. 195 Solid ................................................. 212
Electrical Service .............................. 226 Stair Treads
Elevation Line ................................... 266 Automatic .......................................... 216
Elevation Point .................................. 265 Depth ................................................ 217
Elevation Region ............................... 266 Lock Number ..................................... 216
Fireplace ........................................... 296 Lock Tread Depth .............................. 216
Hill / Valley ....................................... 267 Number ............................................. 217
Image ............................................... 413
Staircase
Library Object ................................... 322
Line .................................................. 394
Plant Image ...................................... 279 Stairs
Polyline ............................................. 399 Align Curved Stairs .............................. 88
Quoins .............................................. 231 Auto Stairwell .................................... 213
Raised/Lowered Region ..................... 268 Change Line/Arc ................................ 207
472
Click .................................................. 202 Switch
Curved ...................................... 202 , 204 Three way ......................................... 223
Deck to ground .................................. 205 Symbol
Direction ............................................ 204 Surface Normals ............................... 425
Down ................................................. 205 vs. Native Objects ............................. 321
Edit Handles ...................................... 206
Editing ............................................... 206
Landings ........................................... 208
Large Stringer Base ........................... 218 T
Make Reach ...................................... 215
Merge Sections .................................. 206 Tab Key ................................................ 67
Railings ............................................. 212 Tape Measure .................................... 371
Reach Next Floor ............................... 215 Technical Support ............................ 453
Rooms Below ..................................... 214 Contact ............................................. 457
Section Width .................................... 217 Error Messages ................................. 456
Stairwell ............................................ 212 Installation Issues ............................. 454
Starter Treads .................................... 210 Online ............................................... 458
Straight ............................................. 202 Online Articles ................................... 458
Stringers ............................................ 217 Telephone ......................................... 458
Subsections ....................................... 215
Terrain
Terminology ....................................... 203
and 3D Draw Time ............................. 262
Tread Depth ...................................... 209
Auto Rebuild ..................................... 262
Treads ............................................... 215
Build ................................................. 262
Walk Line .......................................... 209
Displaying ......................................... 262
Wrapped ............................................ 211
Editing .............................................. 263
Stairwell Elevation Data Tools ......................... 253
Automatic .......................................... 213 Feature Tools .................................... 257
Start House Wizard ........................... 403 Hill .................................................... 257
Startup Options .................................. 20 Holes ................................................ 258
Modifier Tools ................................... 256
Status Bar ........................................... 26
Angle style .......................................... 48
Valley ............................................... 257
Stem Walls ......................................... 180 Wall and Curb Tools .......................... 260
Stepping Stones ................................ 260 Terrain Data
Sticky Mode......................................... 62 Import ............................................... 273
Story-and-a-half................................. 112 Terrain Feature
Straight Specification Dialog ........................... 268
Deck Edge .......................................... 98 Terrain Features
Stairs ................................................ 202 Clip ................................................... 268
Streams .............................................. 259 Height ............................................... 268
Structural Member Reporting .......... 447 Terrain Modeler
3D Views .......................................... 262
Sunlight Toggle ................................. 350
Terrain Path
Swap
Views ................................................ 338
Work-Reference ................................. 178 Terrain Perimeter.............................. 251
Text
473
Arrows ..............................................
Bullet Size ........................................
387
383 V
Bullets .............................................. 383
Valley .................................................. 257
Copy, Cut and Paste ......................... 386
Creating ............................................ 381 Vents .................................................. 157
Displaying ......................................... 381 Video Card
Editing .............................................. 384 Memory ............................................. 344
Layer ................................................ 381 OpenGL ............................................ 344
Line Spacing ..................................... 383 Videos
Move ................................................ 385 View Online Help Videos .................... 450
Numbering ........................................ 383
Views
Paragraph Options ............................ 383
Cascade ........................................... 339
Reshape ........................................... 385
Resize .............................................. 385 Virtual Graph Paper ...................... 47 48
Rotate .............................................. 385 Visual CAD Snaps ............................... 47
Scaling ............................................. 386 Volume
Specification Dialog ........................... 384 Of a Polyline ...................................... 400
Text Style Defaults Dialog ............... 388
Text Styles......................................... 388
Texture
Filename Conflict Dialog .................... 427
W
Textures ............................................. 361 Walk Line ........................................... 209
Tiling Views ....................................... 341 Walkthroughs .................................... 418
Along a path ...................................... 418
Toolbars............................................... 23
Pause Recording ............................... 419
Drop-Down .......................................... 52
Playing .............................................. 419
Edit ..................................................... 24
Recording ......................................... 419
Hide ................................................... 52
Save Frame ...................................... 419
Parent-Child ........................................ 52
Stop Recording .................................. 419
Tool tips .............................................. 23
Wall
Transom Windows ............................ 145
Assemblies ........................................ 112
Transparency .................................... 333 Cabinets ........................................... 236
Defaults .............................................. 96
Elevation ........................................... 346
U Specification Dialog ........................... 113
Tools .................................................. 96
Undo ..................................................... 92 Wall Hatch
Files ................................................... 39 Specification Dialog ........................... 118
Undo Zoom ....................................... 336 Walls
Unrestricted Movement...................... 86 Align between floors .......................... 110
Untitled Plan Align colinear .................................... 109
see New Plan and Material Painter ........................... 328
Attic Walls ......................................... 111
Connecting ........................................ 103
Curved .............................................. 103
Curved, align between floors .............. 110
474
Delete hatching .................................. 101 Windows
Display surfaces only ......................... 104 Bay & bow dimensions ....................... 160
Drawing ............................................. 102 Bay Box & Bow ................................. 160
Editing ............................................... 106 Bench Seat ....................................... 161
Exterior and Interior ............................ 98 Cascade ........................................... 339
Flip layers .......................................... 102 Component ....................................... 160
Foundation ......................................... 99 Corner .............................................. 156
Full Gable Wall .................................. 114 Gables Over ...................................... 197
Grid snapping .................................... 103 Labels .............................................. 159
Half ................................................... 116 Library ..............................................155
Half Walls ........................................... 97 Match roof ........................................ 168
Hatching ............................................ 101 Mulled Units ...................................... 157
Heights .............................................. 108 Mullions ............................................ 166
Interior, fireplace in ............................ 296 Muntins ............................................. 166
Invisible ............................................. 100 Pass-Thru ......................................... 155
Knee Wall .......................................... 115 Shutters ............................................ 169
Length ............................................... 108 Special Shapes ................................. 156
Materials ........................................... 105 Stacked ............................................ 157
No Locate .......................................... 114 Transom ........................................... 145
No Room Def ..................................... 114 Types ............................................... 154
Opening with Railing .......................... 145 Vents ................................................157
Openings in ....................................... 103 Windows Metafiles ........................... 416
Removing Breaks ............................... 104
Wiring Schematics, Creating .......... 223
Resizing Using Dimensions ................ 377
Retaining Wall ................................... 261 Wrapped
Reverse Layers .................................. 102 Openings .......................................... 145
Solid Railings ..................................... 116 Stairs ................................................ 211
Thickness .......................................... 107
Water Features .................................. 259
Water Proof Outlet ............................ 222 Z
Winders
Zoom .................................................. 336
Definition ........................................... 203
Fill Window ....................................... 337
Window Mouse Wheel .............................. 23 , 336
Defaults ............................................. 154 Tools ................................................ 336
Seat .................................................. 161 Undo Zoom ....................................... 336
475
476

Tutorial - Reference Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Tutorial - Reference Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Chief Architect

Home Designer Suite 2012

Chief Architect, Inc.

Created in the United States of America.

Chapter 1: Program Overview

Chapter 2: File Management

Opening a Plan File ................................................................39

Chapter 3: Default Settings

Chapter 4: Toolbars & Hotkeys

Chapter 6: Creating Objects

Chapter 7: Editing Objects

Chapter 8: Walls, Railings & Fencing

Hatch Wall .............................................................................101

Chapter 10: Doors

Chapter 11: Windows

Chapter 12: Multiple Floors

Chapter 13: Foundations

Chapter 14: Roofs

Chapter 15: Stairs & Landings

Chapter 16: Electrical

Chapter 17: Trim Tools

Chapter 18: Cabinets

Chapter 19: Terrain

Chapter 20: Roads, Driveways & Sidewalks

Chapter 21: Other Objects

Chapter 22: Architectural Blocks

Chapter 23: The Library

Chapter 24: Materials

Chapter 26: 3D Views

Chapter 27: 3D Rendering

Chapter 28: Dimensions

Chapter 29: Text

Chapter 31: Project Planning

Chapter 32: Pictures, Images, & Walkthroughs

Chapter 33: Importing & Exporting

Chapter 34: Printing

Chapter 35: Materials Lists

Appendix A: Additional Resources

Appendix B: Technical Support Services

Home Designer Suite is designed to help Chapter Contents

2 Select a File command to open a .plan

The Home Designer Suite Environment

The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen

Reference Pointer Crosshair Status Bar

Using the Mouse

You can also use the right mouse button to

The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate

Click on the arrow to the right of a button to The Edit Toolbar

The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the

The most recently selected tool displays in Hotkeys

Some dialog boxes are resizable. Resizable

Settings with slider bars can be Specification Dialogs

The Status Bar

Press the Tab key proceed from one set-

Defaults Dynamic Defaults

Viewing Your Plan

About Home Designer Suite

Upgrade to Chief Architect

Home Designer Suite saves the complete 3D Chapter Contents

Compatibility with Other Programs

Organizing Your Files

Home Designer Suite Data

Creating a New Plan